JP6937544B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally also referred to as a “pachinko machine”) or a rotating drum type gaming machine (generally also referred to as a “pachislot machine”).

Conventionally, a lottery is performed based on whether or not a game ball wins a prize at the starting port, and the symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the display device so that the symbol is stopped and displayed according to the lottery result. There is known a gaming machine that stops and displays a jackpot symbol on a display device to generate a jackpot gaming state when the result is a jackpot.

As such a gaming machine, there is known one having a dish portion in which a gaming medium for driving into the gaming area is stored below the gaming area in front view. (For example, Patent Document 1)

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2013-158559

However, in a gaming machine provided with such a dish portion, a more suitable structure near the dish portion is required.

Therefore, an object of the present invention is to propose a suitable configuration in the vicinity of the dish portion.

The present invention
A gaming machine with a front door
The upper plate provided on the front door and
A bulging portion that has a decoration that decorates the front of the upper plate and is configured to bulge in front of the front door.
A predetermined effect device arranged in the arrangement area formed in the bulging portion, and provided.
The arrangement region includes a region in which at least a part of the front surface side of the bulge portion is opened.
The bottom surface of the upper plate protrudes inward of the arrangement area.
The upper plate constitutes a part of a member forming the arrangement region regardless of the open / closed state of the front door.
With the effect device removed from the arrangement area, at least a part of the upper plate can be visually recognized from the outside through the arrangement area.
It is characterized by that.

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a suitable configuration in the vicinity of the dish portion.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine which is one Embodiment of this invention. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine. It is a left side view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from the front right. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from the front left. It is a perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from the front in a state where the door frame is opened from the main body frame and the main body frame is opened from the outer frame. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the pachinko machine into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and viewed from behind. It is a front view of the outer frame in a pachinko machine. It is a right side view of the outer frame. It is a perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the outer frame and looked at from the front. (A) is a perspective view of the portion of the outer frame side upper hinge member in the outer frame as viewed from below with the left frame member omitted, and (b) is an exploded perspective view showing (a) in an exploded manner. be. (A) is an enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the main body frame side upper hinge member of the main body frame is removed with respect to the outer frame side upper hinge member of the outer frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the outer upper hinge member. It is an enlarged perspective view which shows the state which the upper hinge member on the main body side is attached to. It is explanatory drawing which shows the action of the lock member in the outer frame. It is a front view of the door frame in a pachinko machine. It is a right side view of a door frame. It is a left side view of a door frame. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is a perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is a perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is a perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. 19 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 19 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line BB in FIG. 19 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line CC in FIG. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame for each main member and looked at from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit for each main member and looked at from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the ball feed unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball feed unit as viewed from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feed unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feed unit after removing the rear case and the fraud prevention member. (A) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit as viewed from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit viewed from the front with the lid member removed, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit viewed from the rear with the lid member removed. It is a front view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed. (A) is a front view of the handle unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the handle unit viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the handle unit viewed from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. (A) is a perspective view of the plate unit of the door frame viewed from the front right, and (b) is a perspective view of the plate unit viewed from the front left. (A) is a perspective view of the dish unit viewed from the upper right rear, and (b) is a perspective view of the dish unit viewed from the lower left rear. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the dish unit for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the dish unit for each main member and looked at from the back. FIG. 8 is an explanatory view showing an enlarged portion of a lower plate with the lower plate cover removed in the cross-sectional view of FIG. 28. (A) is an explanatory diagram schematically showing an example in which the lower plate is provided with a ball guide portion, and (b) is an explanatory diagram schematically showing an example in which the lower plate is provided with a ball guide portion different from (a). Yes, (c) is an explanatory diagram schematically showing an example provided with a further different ball guiding portion. (A) is an explanatory view schematically showing a splittable lower plate, and (b) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the storage area of the lower plate is expanded according to the size of the space behind the effect operation unit. It is a figure, (c) is explanatory drawing which shows the lower plate of (b) in a schematic perspective view. (A) is a front view of the effect operation unit in the door frame, and (b) is a right side view of the effect operation unit. (A) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit viewed from the back. It is explanatory drawing which saw the effect operation unit from the direction which the central axis of the operation button extends. FIG. 8 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line DD in FIG. 48 (a). FIG. 4B is a cross-sectional view taken along the line EE in FIG. 48 (b). (A) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line FF in FIG. 48 (b), and (b) is an enlarged view of part A in (a). It is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled each main member of an effect operation unit and looked at from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button disassembled and viewed from the rear. It is an exploded perspective view of the decorative board unit of the production operation unit disassembled and viewed from the front. (A) is a perspective view of the base unit of the effect operation unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the base unit of the effect operation unit as viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the base unit of the production operation unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the base unit of the production operation unit disassembled and viewed from behind. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state which pressed the operation button in the cross-sectional view of the effect operation unit of FIG. In (a), in the view of the effect operation unit viewed from the extending direction of the central axis of the operation button, a part of the operation button is cut out and the part to be hidden by the first button decoration part of the operation button, the button frame, or the like is shown. It is explanatory drawing which shows, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the part to be concealed by the 1st button decoration part of the operation button, the button frame, etc. in the cross-sectional view of the effect operation unit. (A) is an explanatory view showing the appearance of the effect operation unit as a perspective view seen from the front, and (b) is an explanatory view showing the appearance of the effect operation unit from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. .. (A) is a front view of the second effect operation unit having a different embodiment from the effect operation unit of FIGS. 48 to 63, and (b) is a right side view of the second effect operation unit. (A) is a perspective view of the second effect operation unit viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the second effect operation unit viewed from the back. It is explanatory drawing which looked at the 2nd effect operation unit from the direction which the central axis of the operation button extends. FIG. 6 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line GG in FIG. 64 (a). FIG. 6 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line HH in FIG. 64 (b). (A) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line I-I in FIG. 64 (b), and (b) is an enlarged view of part A in (a). It is an exploded perspective view of the 2nd effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the 2nd effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button of the second effect operation unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button of the second effect operation unit disassembled and viewed from the back. be. It is a perspective view which looked at the 2nd base unit of the 2nd production operation unit from the front. (A) is an explanatory view of the second production operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends with the main screen of the screen unit facing forward, and (b) shows the sub screen of the screen unit. It is explanatory drawing which saw the 2nd effect operation unit from the direction which the central axis of the operation button extends in the state which turned forward. (A) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line JJ in FIG. 74 (a), and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line KK in FIG. 74 (b). (A) attempts to hide the second production operation unit by the first button decoration part of the operation button, the button frame, etc. in the view from the extending direction of the central axis of the operation button with the main screen facing forward. It is explanatory drawing which shows the part which is present, (b) is the explanatory view which shows the part to hide by the 1st button decoration part of the operation button, the button frame, etc. in the cross-sectional view of the 2nd effect operation unit in the state of (a). Is. (A) attempts to hide the second production operation unit by the first button decoration part of the operation button, the button frame, etc. in the view from the extending direction of the central axis of the operation button with the sub screen facing forward. It is explanatory drawing which shows the part which is present, (b) is the explanatory view which shows the part to hide by the 1st button decoration part of the operation button, the button frame, etc. in the cross-sectional view of the 2nd effect operation unit in the state of (a). Is. (A) is a front view of the door frame left side unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit as viewed from the front, and (c) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit as viewed from the back. It is a perspective view. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and viewed from behind. FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line LL in FIG. 78 (a). (A) is a front view of the door frame right side unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit as viewed from the front, and (c) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit as viewed from the back. It is a perspective view. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from behind. FIG. 8 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line MM in FIG. 82 (a). (A) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line NN in FIG. 82 (a), and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line OO in FIG. 82 (a). (A) is a front view of the door frame top unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit as viewed from the front, and (c) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit as viewed from the back. Is. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame top unit and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame top unit and looked at from the back. FIG. 8 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line PP in FIG. 87. It is a perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the main body frame for each main member and looked at from the back. It is a perspective view which looked at the payout unit from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the payout unit from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from behind. (A) is a perspective view of the ball guiding unit of the payout unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball guiding unit as viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the ball guidance unit. (A) is a perspective view of the payout device of the payout unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the payout device as viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the payout device and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the payout device and looked at from the back. (A) is a front view of the payout device, and (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along the QQ line in (a). (A) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the ball pulling passage is closed by the ball pulling movable piece in the payout device, and (b) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the ball pulling passage is opened by the ball pulling movable piece. (A) is a perspective view of the upper full tank path unit in the payout unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the upper full tank path unit as viewed from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the upper full tank path unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the upper full tank path unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. (A) is a perspective view of the lower full-filled ball path unit in the payout unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the lower full-filled ball path unit as viewed from the rear. It is an exploded perspective view of the lower full tank path unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the lower full tank path unit disassembled and viewed from behind. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the taxiway opening / closing door is closed in the lower full tank path unit, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the taxiway opening / closing door is open. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the foul cover unit of a door frame, and the lower full tank path unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball in a payout unit. It is a front view of a game board. It is a figure explaining the distribution member. It is a figure explaining the flow of the game ball in the 1st passage. It is a figure explaining the flow of the game ball in the 2nd passage. It is a figure explaining the flow of the game ball in the 2nd passage. It is explanatory drawing which enlarges and shows the part of the function display unit from the front with the game board attached to the pachinko machine. It is a block diagram of a main control board, a payout control board, and a peripheral control board. It is a block diagram which shows the continuation of FIG. 120. It is a schematic diagram of various detection signals input / output to a game ball rental device connection terminal board which relays an electrical connection between a payout control board which constitutes a main board, a CR unit, and a frequency display board. It is a block diagram which shows the continuation of FIG. 120. It is a block diagram which shows the outline of the peripheral control MPU. It is a block diagram around the sound source built-in VDP in a liquid crystal display and a sound control unit. This is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board. This is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board. It is a table which shows the continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board of FIG. 127 to the peripheral control board. It is a table which shows an example of various commands from a payout control board received by a main control board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of a game. (A) is a flowchart showing the procedure for the main processing executed by the main control MPU, and (b) is a flowchart showing the procedure for the interrupt processing periodically performed by the main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the special symbol process processing executed by the main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st start port passage processing executed by the main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the pre-determination process executed by the main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 2nd start port passage processing executed by the main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol process process executed by the main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol normal processing executed by the main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the hit determination process executed by the main control MPU. (A) is a hit determination table used for lottery processing for hits, (B) is a big hit symbol determination table used for lottery processing for big hit types, and (C) is a small hit type. It is a small hit symbol determination table used for the lottery process of, and (D) is a table which shows the fluctuation time of the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop symbol setting process executed by the main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st variation pattern setting process executed by the main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol variation processing executed by the main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop processing executed by the main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 2nd special symbol stop symbol setting process executed by the main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 2nd variation pattern setting process executed by the main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 2nd special symbol stop processing executed by the main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the jackpot control processing executed by the main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the small hit control process executed by the main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the small hit start processing executed by the main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the small hit middle processing executed by the main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the ordinary symbol process processing executed by the main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the gate part passing process executed by the main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the general drawing pre-determination process executed by the main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the normal symbol normal processing executed by the main control MPU. (A) is a normal figure hit determination table used for the lottery process for the normal figure hit, and (B) is a normal figure hit open pattern table used for the determination process for the open pattern at the time of hitting the normal figure. be. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the ordinary symbol variation pattern determination process executed by the main control MPU. This is a table for determining the fluctuation pattern of ordinary figures. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the ordinary symbol variation processing executed by the main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the normal symbol stop processing executed by the main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the ordinary electric accessory opening process executed by the main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the sub-main processing executed by the peripheral control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 16mS steady-state processing executed by the peripheral control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the effect control processing executed by the peripheral control MPU. It is a time chart showing the flow of the game during the chance mode and the winning right exercise time. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display content of the effect display device in a chance mode. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of production in a chance mode. It is a time chart showing the flow of the game during the chance mode and the winning right exercise time. It is a time chart showing the flow of the game during the chance mode and the winning right exercise time. It is a time chart showing the flow of the game during the chance mode and the winning right exercise time. It is a time chart showing the flow of the game during the chance mode and the winning right exercise time. It is a time chart which shows the flow of a game when a power-off occurs in a chance mode. It is a time chart which shows the flow of a game when a power-off occurs during the time of exercising the winning right. This is an example of an effect display that is executed when a game ball is received at the second starting port during the chance mode by controlling the transition from the normal mode to the chance mode. This is an example of the effect display during the chance mode. This is an example of the production display during the last battle production. This is an example of the production display during the last battle production.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
The pachinko machine 1 according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 10. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a left side view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front right, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front left, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the back. Further, FIG. 8 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front with the door frame opened from the main body frame and the main body frame opened from the outer frame. FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame, and FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine as a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the back by disassembling into.

The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 for opening and closing the front surface of the outer frame 2, and a door frame 3. The main body frame 4 which is supported so as to be openable and closable and is attached to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, and the main body frame 4 which is detachably attached from the front side and can be visually recognized from the player side through the door frame 3. It is provided with a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which a game ball is hit.

As shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 includes an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member 20 which are vertically separated and extend to the left and right, and an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member. The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, which are connected to each other at both ends of the 20 and extend vertically, are provided. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same width in the front and rear. Further, the vertical lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed longer than the left and right lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20.

Further, the outer frame 2 is attached to the curtain plate member 50 which connects the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 and is attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20 and to the left end side of the upper frame member 10 in the front view. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the upper left end side of the curtain plate member 50 and the left frame member 30 are provided. The main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 are attached to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable by the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70.

The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 has a frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 having a through-hole 111 having a front-view outer shape extending vertically and penetrating back and forth, and a through-hole of the door frame base unit 100. A handle unit 300 that is attached to the lower right corner of the front surface below 111 and can be operated by the player to drive the game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and a through hole 111 of the door frame base unit 100. The dish unit 320, which is attached to the lower part of the front surface below the door, and the player, which is attached to the center of the dish unit 320 and is attached to the center of the dish unit 320, according to the game state that changes when the game ball is driven into the game area 5a. A production operation unit 400 capable of presenting a participatory effect, and a door frame left side unit 530 attached to the front left portion on the upper side of the dish unit 320 and on the left side of the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100. And, the door frame right side unit 550 attached to the front right part on the upper side of the dish unit 320 and on the right side of the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100, the door frame left side unit 530, and the door frame right side unit 550. The door frame top unit 570 is attached to the upper part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the door frame base unit 100.

The main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 has a frame-shaped main body frame base 600 and a main body frame base 600 that can be partially inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5. It is attached to both the upper and lower ends on the left side of the front view and is rotatably attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70, respectively, and the door frame side upper hinge member 140 and the door frame of the door frame 3 are attached. The main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 to which the lower side hinge member 150 is rotatably attached, the reinforcing frame 660 attached to the front left side surface of the main body frame base 600, and the main body frame base 600. A ball launcher 680 for driving a game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5 and an outer frame 2 and a main body frame attached to the right side surface of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front. 4. And the locking unit 700 that locks between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and the reverse side that is attached to the rear side along the front view upper side and the left side of the main body frame base 600 and pays out the game ball to the player side. The L-shaped payout unit 800, the board unit 900 attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and the game board 5 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 so as to be openable and closable. It includes a back cover 980 that covers the rear side.

The payout unit 800 of the main body frame 4 is attached to the upper part of the inverted L-shaped payout unit base 801 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 and the payout unit base 801 and extends to the left and right open upward. A box-shaped ball tank 802 for storing game balls supplied from an island facility (not shown) and a game ball attached to the payout unit base 801 under the ball tank 802, and the game balls in the ball tank 802 are viewed to the left in the front view. A tank rail 803 extending to the left and right to guide, a ball guiding unit 820 attached to the rear surface of the upper left side of the front view of the payout unit base 801 and guiding the game ball from the tank rail 803 downward in a serpentine manner, and a ball guiding unit 820. The game balls that are detachably attached from the payout unit base 801 on the lower side and are guided by the ball guide unit 820 are paid out one by one based on the instruction from the payout control board 951 housed in the payout control board box 950. The payout device 830 and the game ball attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 and paid out by the payout device 830 are guided downward, and the game ball is stored according to the storage state of the game ball in the upper plate 321 in the plate unit 320. It was discharged from the upper full tank path unit 850 to be discharged from either the normal discharge port 850d or the full tank discharge port 850e, and the normal discharge port 850d of the upper full tank path unit 850 attached to the lower end of the payout unit base 801. The normal taxiway 861 that guides the game ball forward and guides it from the front end to the through ball passage 273 of the door frame 3 and the game ball released from the full tank discharge port 850e are guided forward and the door frame 3 is full from the front end. It is provided with a lower full tank path unit 860 having a full tank taxiway 862 for guiding to the tank ball receiving port 274.

The board unit 900 of the main body frame 4 is mounted on the rear side of the main body frame base 600 on the left side of the front view of the board unit base 910 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 and the speaker for bass inside. The speaker unit 920 having 921, the power supply board box 930 mounted on the right side of the front view on the rear side of the board unit base 910 and accommodating the power supply board inside, and the power supply board box 930 mounted on the rear side of the speaker unit 920 and inside. The interface control board box 940 in which the interface control board is housed, and the payout control board 951 which is mounted across the power supply board box 930 and the interface control board box 940 and controls the payout of the game ball are housed therein. The payout control board box 950 and the like are provided.

As shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 divides the outer circumference of the game area 5a into which the game ball is hit, and divides the game ball launched from the ball launcher 680 into the upper part of the game area 5a. A front component 1000 having an outer rail 1001 and an inner rail 1002 to guide the player, and a flat plate-shaped game panel 1100 attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and partitioning the rear end of the game area 5a. There is.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the player rotates the handle 302 with the game ball stored in the upper plate 321, the ball launching device 680 causes the game ball to have a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 302. It is driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5. Then, when the game balls driven into the game area 5a are received in the winning opening, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 321 by the payout device 830 according to the received winning opening. Since the player's interest can be enhanced by paying out the game ball, the game ball in the upper plate 321 can be driven into the game area 5a, and the player can enjoy the game.

[2. Overall composition of the outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 to 16. FIG. 11 is a front view of the outer frame of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 12 is a right side view of the outer frame. Further, FIG. 13 is a perspective view of the outer frame viewed from the front, and FIG. 14 is a perspective view of the outer frame viewed from the back. FIG. 15 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame viewed from the front by disassembling the outer frame. FIG. 16A is a perspective view of a portion of the outer frame side upper hinge member in the outer frame as viewed from below with the left frame member omitted, and FIG. 16B is an exploded perspective view showing (a) in an exploded manner. It is a figure. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) in which a pachinko machine 1 is installed, such as a game hall.

As shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 connects the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 which are vertically separated and extend to the left and right, and both ends of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20. A left frame member 30 and a right frame member 40 extending to the left frame member 30 are provided. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same width in the front and rear. Further, the vertical lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed longer than the left and right lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20. Further, the outer frame 2 is assembled so that the left and right end surfaces of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 and the side surfaces of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 facing outward in the left-right direction are flush with each other. Has been done.

Further, the outer frame 2 includes an outer frame side upper hinge member 60 attached to the front left end side of the upper frame member 10, a lock member 66 attached to the lower surface of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, and the like. The curtain plate member 50 includes an upper portion on the left end side of the front view and an outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the left frame member 30. The main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 can be opened and closed by the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2.

Further, the outer frame 2 is attached to the curtain plate member 50 which connects the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 to each other and is attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20, and is attached to the rear side of the curtain plate member 50. A curtain plate reinforcing member 80 whose both ends are attached to the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, respectively, a flat plate-shaped left sliding member 81 attached to a position on the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 to the left from the center of the left and right, and a curtain. A flat plate-shaped right-sliding member 82 attached to a position near the right end on the upper surface of the plate member 50 is provided. The curtain plate reinforcing member 80 is formed of a solid member (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) and is attached to the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40.

Further, the outer frame 2 includes an upper frame member 10 and a left frame member 30, an upper frame member 10 and a right frame member 40, a lower frame member 20 and a left frame member 30, and a lower frame member 20 and a right frame member 40, respectively. It includes a connecting member 85 that is connected. Further, the outer frame 2 is attached to the inside (left side surface side) of the right frame member 40, and the upper hook hook member 90 and the lower hook hook member 91 to which the hook 703 for the outer frame of the locking unit 700, which will be described later, is locked. , Prepared.

[2-1. Upper frame member]
The upper frame member 10 of the outer frame 2 is formed of a solid (solid) material (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) having a predetermined thickness. The upper frame member 10 is provided with an engaging notch 11 that penetrates vertically and is recessed toward the center side in the left-right direction at the center in the front-rear direction at both left and right ends. The upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B of the connecting member 85, which will be described later, are mounted in the engaging notch 11. Further, the upper frame member 10 is provided with mounting steps 12 recessed from the general surface on the upper surface and the front surface of the left end portion in the front view. An outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is attached to the attachment step portion 12.

[2-2. Lower frame member]
The lower frame member 20 of the outer frame 2 is made of a solid (solid) material (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) having a predetermined thickness. The lower frame member 20 is formed so that the left and right lengths and the upper and lower thicknesses are the same as the left and right lengths and the upper and lower thicknesses of the upper frame member 10, and the front and rear widths of the upper frame member 10 are the same. It is formed longer than the width before and after. The lower frame member 20 is provided with an engaging notch 21 that penetrates vertically and is recessed toward the center side in the left-right direction at a position closer to the rear side than the center in the front-rear direction at both left and right ends. The lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D of the connecting member 85, which will be described later, are mounted in the engaging notch 21.

Further, the lower frame member 20 includes front end notches 22 recessed rearward from the front surfaces of both left and right ends. In the lower frame member 20, the width in the front-rear direction from the rear end of the front end notch portion 22 to the rear surface of the lower frame member 20 is formed to have the same dimensions as the width in the front-rear direction of the upper frame member 10. In the state where the lower frame member 20 is assembled to the outer frame 2, a portion between the left and right front end notches 22 is inserted into the curtain plate member 50.

[2-3. Left frame member and right frame member]
The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 extend vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and are formed of an extruded metal material such as an aluminum alloy. The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed in a shape symmetrical to each other in a plan view. When the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are assembled as the outer frame 2, the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are recessed inward from a position rearward to the center in the front-rear direction to the vicinity of the rear end on the outer side surface in the left-right direction. It is provided with recesses 31 and 41 and protrusions 32 and 42 that bulge from the opposite side surfaces of the recesses 31 and 41 and have a hollow inside. The strength and rigidity of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are increased by the protrusions 32 and 42. Further, in the protruding portions 32 and 42, the lower left lateral fixing portion 88 on the rear side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B described later of the connecting member 85 is inserted and attached.

Further, the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed with a plurality of grooves extending vertically on the surface thereof. With these plurality of grooves, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed or transported in an island facility such as a game hall, the pachinko machine 1 can be easily held by a worker and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily held. It is possible to enhance the design of the appearance of the machine 1.

[2-4. Curtain board member]
The curtain plate member 50 of the outer frame 2 is formed in a box shape with the rear side open. The curtain plate member 50 has a rear extending portion 51 extending rearward in a flat plate shape near the left end of the front view on the upper surface, and a U-shape having a size that allows a game ball to pass from the left end of the rear extending portion 51. A left discharge hole 52 that is notched and penetrates vertically, and a right discharge hole 53 that penetrates vertically on the right side of the left discharge hole 52 in the rear extension portion 51 so that the game ball can pass through. A standing wall portion 54 extending upward from the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 including the rear end of the rear extending portion 51 in a flat plate shape, and a standing wall portion 54 protruding forward from the vicinity of the upper end of the standing wall portion 54 so that the front surface is upward. It is provided with a return portion 55, which is inclined toward the rear toward the rear.

The curtain plate member 50 is a lower hinge member 70 on the outer frame side so that the lower hinge member 70 on the outer frame side is placed on the upper surface of the front side of the rear extension portion 51 and the upper surface of the rear extension portion 51. A horizontal portion 71, which will be described later, is attached. Further, the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50 is formed at a position corresponding to the discharge hole 74 described later of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 in a state of being assembled to the outer frame 2. Further, the right discharge hole 53 is formed at a position on the right side of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 in a state of being assembled to the outer frame 2. The right discharge hole 53 is formed larger than the left discharge hole 52.

Further, the curtain plate member 50 is inclined so that the upper surface on the right side of the rear extending portion 51 is lower on the front end side. Further, the curtain plate member 50 has a left mounting portion 56 for mounting the left sliding member 81 on a portion on the right side of the rear extending portion 51 on the upper surface and a right mounting portion for mounting the right sliding member 82 near the right end on the upper surface. A unit 57 and a unit 57 are provided. The lower surface of the main body frame 4 is placed on the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 via the left sliding member 81 and the right sliding member 82.

As shown in the figure, the curtain plate member 50 has a shallow relief-like decoration formed on the front surface. Further, although not shown, the curtain plate member 50 has a box-shaped interior partitioned by a plurality of ribs in a grid pattern to increase the strength and rigidity. Further, the curtain plate member 50 is formed so that the front half of the curtain plate reinforcing member 80 can be accommodated inside.

[2-5. Upper hinge member on the outer frame side]
As shown in the figure, the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 has a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped upper fixing portion 61 having a quadrangular outer shape and a flat plate shape extending forward from the front end of the upper fixing portion 61. A plan view of the front extension portion 62, the bearing groove 63 extending vertically from the right end of the front extension portion 62 to the left and right center of the front extension portion 62 and penetrating vertically, and the upper fixing portion 61. A flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 64 extending downward from the left side and a horizontal fixing portion extending downward from the end side extending from the left end to the front end of the front extending portion 62 to the portion where the bearing groove 63 is opened. A flat plate-shaped hanging portion 65 continuous with the portion 64 is provided (see FIG. 16B and the like).

In the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the upper fixing portion 61 is placed on the upper surface of the mounting step portion 12 of the upper frame member 10 in a state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, and is fixed by screws (not shown). There is. Further, the front extending portion 62 extends forward from the front end of the upper frame member 10. Further, the lateral fixing portion 64 is fixed to the left frame member 30 by screws in a state of being inserted from above into the recess 31 on the outer side surface of the left frame member 30.

The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 cooperates with the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 by inserting the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 into the bearing groove 63 to form the main body frame 4. It can be opened and closed and supported. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

[2-6. Lock member]
As shown in FIG. 16, the lock member 66 of the outer frame 2 has a strip-shaped lock body 66a whose left and right sides extend back and forth with a predetermined width, and an operation unit protruding to the right from the rear end of the lock body 66a. 66b, an elastically deformable rod-shaped elastic portion 66c extending diagonally to the left front after extending to the left from the rear end of the lock main body 66a, and a mounting hole penetrating up and down near the rear end of the lock main body 66a. It is equipped with 66d. The lock member 66 is made of synthetic resin. The lock member 66 is rotatably attached to the lower surface of the front extension portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 by the attachment screw 67.

The lock member 66 is mounted at a position where the rear end of the lock body 66a is rearward from the bearing groove 63 in the front extending portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 through the mounting hole 66d. Further, in a state where the lock member 66 is attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the lock body 66a can block the bearing groove 63 in a plan view, and the right side surface near the front end is the outer frame side upper hinge member. It extends forward so that it can come into contact with a portion of the hanging portion 65 of 60 that extends to the opening of the bearing groove 63 (see FIG. 18).

Further, the tip of the elastic portion 66c extending to the left from the rear end of the lock body 66a is in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the hanging portion 65 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60. The lock member 66 is urged by the urging force of the elastic portion 66c in a direction in which the front end rotates to the left around the mounting hole 66d. Therefore, in a normal state, the right side surface of the lock member 66 near the front end of the lock body 66a is in contact with the hanging portion 65 (see FIG. 18). In this state, a space in the bearing groove 63 on the front side of the lock main body 66a is formed so as to accommodate the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame, which will be described later, of the hinge member 620 on the main body frame side.

By operating the operation portion 66b, the lock member 66 can rotate the lock body 66a against the urging force of the elastic portion 66c. Then, by operating the operation unit 66b, the lock body 66a is rotated in the direction in which the front end thereof moves to the left, so that the lock body 66a can be retracted from the bearing groove 63 in a plan view, and the bearing groove 63 can be retracted. Can be in a state of being fully passed. As a result, the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame can be inserted into the bearing groove 63, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame can be removed from the bearing groove 63.

[2-7. Outer frame side lower hinge member]
As shown in the figure, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 stands upward from a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal portion 71 and a portion on the left side of the horizontal portion 71 that is rearward from the center in the front-rear direction. Only one game ball can pass through the rising flat rising portion 72, the hinge pin 73 under the outer frame protruding upward from the vicinity of the front end of the horizontal portion 71, and the horizontal portion 71 up and down. It is provided with a discharge hole 74 having a size. The outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

The horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed in a trapezoidal shape with the left side as the base in a plan view. The lower hinge pin 73 of the outer frame has a columnar shape, and is formed in a truncated cone shape in which the upper end is narrowed above the center in the vertical direction. The lower hinge pin 73 of the outer frame is attached to a position on the left side near the front end of the horizontal portion 71. The discharge hole 74 is formed in the horizontal portion 71 so as to be in contact with the central portion of the rising portion 72 in the front-rear direction and extend from the left side of the horizontal portion 71 to the right in an inverted U shape. The discharge hole 74 is formed to have substantially the same size as the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50.

In the outer frame side lower hinge member 70, when the outer frame 2 is assembled, the horizontal portion 71 is placed on the upper surface near the left end of the curtain plate member 50 and on the rear extending portion 51, and the horizontal portion 71. Is fixed to the curtain plate reinforcing member 80 by a screw (not shown) penetrating the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50. Further, in the state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the rising portion 72 is attached to a portion of the inner side surface of the left frame member 30 on the inner side surface of the left frame member 30 on the front side of the protruding portion 32 by a screw (not shown). The outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed by inserting the outer frame lower hinge pin 73 into the main body frame lower hinge hole (not shown) in the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 of the main body frame 4. The main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable in cooperation with the hinge member 60.

Further, in the state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge hole 74 coincides with the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50. As a result, the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 can be dropped (discharged) to the rear side of the curtain plate member 50 through the discharge hole 74 and the left discharge hole 52. More specifically, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the game ball that has fallen between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 is closed, and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 are closed. Since the space between the two is gradually narrowed, the ball is rolled to the rear side where the interval is wide, and the ball can be discharged from the discharge hole 74. At this time, since the discharge hole 74 is formed at a position substantially the same as the rear end of the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in the state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1. By discharging the game ball that has fallen between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 from the discharge hole 74, it is possible to easily prevent the game ball from rolling to the rear side of the main body frame 4, and the outer frame side. It is possible to make it difficult for the game ball to stay at the portion of the lower hinge member 70.

[2-8. Connecting member]
The connecting member 85 of the outer frame 2 includes an upper left connecting member 85A that connects the upper frame member 10 and the left frame member 30, an upper right connecting member 85B that connects the upper frame member 10 and the right frame member 40, and a lower frame member. There is a lower left connecting member 85C that connects 20 and the left frame member 30, and a lower right connecting member 85D that connects the lower frame member 20 and the right frame member 40.

The connecting member 85 includes a flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 86 extending horizontally, a flat plate-shaped upper-horizontal fixing portion 87 extending upward from either the left or right side of the horizontal fixing portion 86, and a horizontal fixing portion. The upper horizontal fixing portion 87 in 86 includes a flat plate-shaped lower horizontal fixing portion 88 extending downward from the same side as the extending portion. The connecting member 85 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

In the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B, the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 extends upward from the center of the horizontal fixing portion 86 in the front-rear direction, and the lower horizontal fixing portion 88 extends from both front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87. It extends downward. That is, in the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B, two lower horizontal fixing portions 88 are provided so as to be separated from each other in the front-rear direction. The horizontal fixing portion 86 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is fixed to the upper frame member 10 in a state of being in contact with the lower surface of the upper frame member 10. Further, the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is inserted into the engaging notch 21 of the upper frame member 10 and fixed to the end portion of the upper frame member 10 in the left-right direction. Further, the lower lateral fixing portion 88 on the front side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is fixed to the inner side surfaces on the front side of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, respectively. Further, the lower lateral fixing portion 88 on the rear side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is a screw inserted into the protruding portions 32 and 42 of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 and screwed from the outer side surface. Is fixed to the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, respectively.

In the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D, the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 protrudes rearward from the rear end of the horizontal fixing portion 86 and more than the horizontal fixing portion 86 of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87. The lower lateral fixing portion 88 extends downward from the horizontal fixing portion 86 from the lower end of the portion protruding rearward. Further, the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D further include a bent portion 89 projecting from the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 to the same side as the horizontal fixing portion 86. The horizontal fixing portion 86 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D is fixed in a state of being in contact with the upper surface of the lower frame member 20. Further, the upper and horizontal fixing portions 87 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are fixed to the inner side surfaces of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 on the front side of the protruding portions 32 and 42, respectively. Further, the lower horizontal fixing portion 88 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D is inserted into the engaging notch 21 of the lower frame member 20 and fixed to the end surface of the lower frame member 20 in the left-right direction, respectively. NS.

[2-9. Lock mechanism for upper hinge member on the outer frame side]
Next, in the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, FIGS. 17 and 18 are shown with respect to the locking mechanism of the main body frame 4 with respect to the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 by the lock member 66 in the outer frame side upper hinge member 60. It will be explained with reference to. FIG. 17 (a) is an enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the main body frame side upper hinge member of the main body frame is removed with respect to the outer frame side upper hinge member of the outer frame, and FIG. It is an enlarged perspective view which shows the state in which the upper hinge member on the main body side is attached to the hinge member. FIG. 18 is an explanatory view showing the action of the lock member on the outer frame.

When the lock member 66 in the outer frame 2 is attached to the front extending portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 (normal state), the tip of the elastic portion 66c comes into contact with the inner peripheral surface of the hanging portion 65. The lock body 66a does not block a part of the bearing groove 63 bent in a dogleg shape, and the tip portion of the lock body 66a does not block the deepest part of the bearing groove 63. A space is formed in the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63 into which the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 of the main body frame 4 can be inserted.

In the support mechanism of the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame using the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the lock member 66 in the present embodiment, the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame is inserted into the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63 and the front end of the lock main body 66a. The right side surface of the lock body 66a is in close contact with the right side hanging portion 65 (in this state, there is a slight gap between the right side surface of the front end of the lock body 66a and the right side hanging portion 65, and they are in contact with each other. In the normal shaft support state, the centers of the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame located at the deepest part of the bent bearing groove 63 and the front end surface of the lock main body 66a are obliquely opposed to each other. It is in a state.

In this normal axial support state, the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame that pivotally supports the heavy main body frame 4 is in contact with the front end portion of the bearing groove 63, so that the hinge pin on the main body frame is in contact with the front end portion. Almost no load is applied from 622 to the front end surface of the lock body 66a. That is, no load is applied to the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66. Since the front end surface of the lock body 66a is formed in an arc shape, the lock member 66 rotates smoothly when the operation portion 66b is rotated to rotate the lock member 66. There is. Further, in the figure, the arc center of the front end surface of the lock body 66a is the center of the mounting hole 66d (the center of rotation of the lock member 66).

Therefore, when the acting force F is applied in the direction in which the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame comes out along the inclination of the bearing groove 63 formed in a dogleg shape and comes into contact with the arcuate front end surface of the lock main body 66a, the acting force is applied. F is a component force F1 (in the normal direction of the arc of the front end surface of the lock body 66a) acting on the contact portion between the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame and the arc-shaped front end surface, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame and the bearing groove 63. When divided into a component force F2 that acts on the contact portion with the inner surface on one side, the direction of the component force F1 faces the center of the mounting hole 66d (mounting screw 67) (the center of rotation of the lock member 66). , The front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 does not have a moment to rotate in the direction away from the hanging portion 65 on the right side, and the hinge pin 622 on the body frame is one of the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 and the bearing groove 63. The state of being sandwiched between the side inner surface is maintained.

Therefore, even in a normal bearing state or in a state where the acting force of the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame is applied to the lock member 66, the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66 is not constantly loaded and is integrally formed of synthetic resin. It is possible to prevent the elastic portion 66c from being plastically deformed due to creep, and to prevent the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame from falling off from the bearing groove 63 for a long period of time. Even if an unreasonable force is applied and the front end portion of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 is rotated in the direction of moving to the right, the right side surface of the front end of the lock body 66a abuts on the hanging portion 65 and further. Since it does not rotate, the lock member 66 does not protrude to the outside of the forward extending portion 62.

Even if the shape of the front end surface of the lock body 66a is not arcuate, the position where the rotational moment is not generated by the action of the above-mentioned component force F1 or the front end portion of the lock member 66 faces the outside of the front extending portion 62. By locating the rotation center of the lock member 66 (the shaft fixed by the mounting screw 67) at a position where a rotational moment is generated, no load is always applied to the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66. Even if the lock member 66 rotates, the right side surface of the front end of the lock body 66a only abuts on the hanging portion 65, so that the lock member 66 does not protrude to the outside of the front extending portion 62.

When the bearing groove 63 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 supports the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620, the bearing groove 63 is placed in the bearing groove 63 from the open side on the main body frame. Insert the hinge pin 622. When the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame is inserted into the bearing groove 63, the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame comes into contact with the right side surface of the lock main body 66a of the lock member 66, and the front end of the lock main body 66a resists the urging force of the elastic portion 66c. The lock member 66 rotates about the mounting screw 67 so as to move to the left. As a result, the lock main body 66a that has closed the bearing groove 63 is retracted to open the bearing groove 63, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame can be moved to the deepest portion (front end) of the bearing groove 63.

Then, when the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame is moved to the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63, the contact between the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame and the lock main body 66a of the lock member 66 is released, and the locking main body 66a is released by the urging force of the elastic portion 66c. The lock member 66 rotates so that the front end of the lock member 66 moves to the right, and the lock member 66 returns to the normal state. As a result, the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame is housed in the space on the front side of the lock main body 66a in the bearing groove 63, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame can rotate in the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63. It becomes a held (locked) state in the state.

When removing the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame from the bearing groove 63, the operation portion 66b of the lock member 66 is operated to rotate the lock member 66 so that the front end of the lock main body 66a moves to the left, and the elastic portion The lock body 66a is retracted from the bearing groove 63 against the urging force of 66c. As a result, the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63 and the opening are in communication with each other, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame can be removed from the bearing groove 63.

[2-10. Security mechanism and ball biting prevention mechanism at the lower hinge member on the outer frame side]
Prevention of ball biting to prevent the game ball from being pinched between the security mechanism and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 at the portion of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment. The mechanism will be described.

In the assembled state of the outer frame 2, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is attached to the left end portion in the front view on the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50. The horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is mounted in a state of being placed near the left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 and the upper surface of the rear extending portion 51. The curtain plate member 50 includes a standing wall portion 54 that rises upward from the rear end of the upper surface. As a result, even if an illegal tool such as a piano wire is to be inserted into the rear side of the main body frame 4 (pachinko machine 1) through the gap between the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640. Since the tip of the illegal tool comes into contact with the vertical wall portion 54 extending upward from the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, it is possible to prevent the illegal tool from being further inserted to the rear side. , It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being performed through the portion of the lower hinge member 70 on the outer frame side.

Further, since the return portion 55 extending forward is provided at the upper end of the standing wall portion 54, when an illegal tool in contact with the standing wall portion 54 bends upward, the tip of the illegal tool is provided by the return portion 55. Can be further turned forward, so that it is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the rear side of the main body frame 4, and an illegal act is performed through the portion of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70. Can be reliably prevented.

By the way, when the vertical wall portion 54 extending upward is provided at the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, the game ball is on the outer frame side with the main body frame 4 open with respect to the outer frame 2. When the game ball falls on the lower hinge member 70 (horizontal portion 71), the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 is not discharged rearward from the rear end of the horizontal portion 71 due to the presence of the vertical wall portion 54, so that the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 There is a risk of being caught between. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the rear extending portion 51 of the curtain plate member 50 have a discharge hole 74 and a left discharge hole 52 through which the game ball can pass. And, since the right discharge hole 53 is provided, the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 can be discharged downward from the discharge hole 74 or the like, and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 can be discharged. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the game ball is pinched between the two.

Therefore, when the game ball is sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, the circumference of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is damaged, or the main body frame 4 is not closed in a normal state and is not closed with the outer frame 2. It is possible to prevent a gap from being formed between the main body frame 4 and the main body frame 4 from being used for fraudulent acts.

[3. Overall configuration of door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 to 30. 19 is a front view of the door frame in the pachinko machine, FIG. 20 is a right side view of the door frame, FIG. 21 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 22 is a rear view of the door frame. FIG. 23 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front right, FIG. 24 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front left, and FIG. 25 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the back. 26 is a cross-sectional view cut along the line AA in FIG. 19, FIG. 27 is a cross-sectional view cut along the line BB in FIG. 19, and FIG. 28 is a cross-sectional view cut along the line CC in FIG. It is a figure. FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear.

As shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, the door frame 3 is attached to a square and frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 whose outer shape in front view extends vertically, and to the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100. The handle unit 300, the plate unit 320 attached to the lower part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, the effect operation unit 400 installed in the center of the plate unit 320, and the door frame base unit above the plate unit 320. The door frame left side unit 530 attached to the front left side of the 100, the door frame right side unit 550 attached to the front right part of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the dish unit 320, and the door frame left side. The door frame top unit 570 is attached to the upper part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550.

Although the details of the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described later, the plate-shaped door frame base 110 having a through-hole 111 having a front-view outer shape extending vertically and penetrating in the front-rear direction is a rectangular shape (square). The frame-shaped reinforcing unit 130 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 and the upper and lower ends of the reinforcing unit 130 on the left end side in the front view are attached to the main body frame 4 so as to be hinge rotatable. A door frame side upper hinge member 140, a door frame side lower hinge member 150, a glass unit 190 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 to close the through hole 111, and a security cover 200 covering the lower rear surface of the glass unit 190. Locks between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 which are attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 so as to penetrate the door frame base 110 and project forward so as to be openable and closable. The opening / closing cylinder unit 210 for opening and closing, the ball feed unit 250 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110 to send the game ball to the ball launcher 680, and the ball launcher 680 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110. It is provided with a foul cover unit 270 that receives a game ball that has not reached the game area 5a and is discharged to the lower plate 322.

The handle unit 300 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail later, but when the player rotates the rotatable handle 302, the game ball stored in the upper plate 321 is adjusted according to the rotation angle of the handle 302. It can be driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5 with a strong strength.

Although the details of the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 will be described later, the dish unit 320 is attached to a portion of the door frame base unit 100 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 below the through-hole 111, and the front surface bulges forward. The effect operation unit 400 is attached to the front end at the center in the left-right direction. The plate unit 320 contains an upper plate 321 for storing game balls for driving into the game area 5a, and a game ball arranged below the upper plate 321 and supplied from the upper plate 321 and the foul cover unit 270. Within the range of the lower plate 322 that can be stored, the upper plate ball removal button 327 for pulling out the game ball stored in the upper plate 321 to the lower plate 322, and the balance of cash and prepaid card put into the ball lending machine. A ball lending button 328 for lending a game ball to a player, a return button 329 for returning cash or a prepaid card after deducting the amount of the game ball lent from the ball lending machine, and cash put into the ball lending machine. The ball rental display unit 330 that displays the remaining number of prepaid cards, etc., the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 that can accept the player's operation when presenting the effect, and the lower plate 322. It is provided with a lower plate ball removal button 333 for discharging the game ball below the plate unit 320.

The effect operation unit 400 of the door frame 3 is attached to the front portion of the plate unit 320 in the center in the left-right direction in the front view, and can be pressed by the player and presents the effect image to the player. It is something that can be done. The effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail later, but has a large operation button 410 that can be operated by the player, and a door frame side effect that is visibly arranged in the operation button 410 from the player side and can display an effect image. It includes a display device 460.

The door frame left side unit 530 of the door frame 3 is attached to the front left portion on the upper side of the dish unit 320 and on the left side of the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100, and the through port 111 ( It decorates the left outer side of the game area 5a). The door frame left side unit 530 includes a left unit decorative lens member (not shown) capable of emitting and decorating.

The door frame right side unit 550 of the door frame 3 is attached to the front right portion on the upper side of the dish unit 320 and on the right side of the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100, and the through port 111 ( It decorates the right outer side of the game area 5a). The door frame right side unit 550 projects far forward from the door frame left side unit 530, and is provided with a right unit left decorative member 554 and a right unit right decorative member 557 provided on both the left and right sides, and at the front end. The right unit decorative lens member 561 and the door are provided. The door frame right side unit 550 can illuminate the right unit left decorative member 554, the right unit right decorative member 557, and the right unit decorative lens member 561.

The door frame top unit 570 of the door frame 3 is attached to the upper side of the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550 and above the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100. It decorates the upper part of the frame 3. The details of the door frame top unit 570 will be described later, but the pair of upper speakers 573 separated to the left and right, the top middle decoration member 576 protruding forward at the center of the front surface, and the left and right sides of the top middle decoration member 576 are It includes a top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 that are decorated. The door frame top unit 570 can illuminate the top middle decorative member 576, the top left decorative lens member 579, and the top right decorative lens member 580.

[3-1. Overall configuration of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. 31 (a) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 31 (b) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. be.

The door frame base unit 100 is attached so as to be openable / closable (hinge rotatable) with respect to the main body frame 4 so that the left side side of the front view closes the front surface of the main body frame 4. The door frame base unit 100 has a handle unit 300 in the lower front corner, a dish unit 320 in which the effect operation unit 400 is attached to the lower front surface of the through hole 111, and a door frame left side unit 530 in the left outer front surface of the through port 111. The door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the right outer front surface of the through opening 111, and the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the upper outer front surface of the through opening 111, respectively.

As shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, the door frame base unit 100 includes a plate-shaped door frame base 110 having a rectangular outer shape extending vertically and having a through hole 111 penetrating back and forth. , The frame-shaped reinforcing unit 130 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110, and the main body frame 4 which is attached to the upper and lower ends of the reinforcing unit 130 on the left end side of the front view and protrudes forward from the door frame base 110. The door frame side upper hinge member 140 and the door frame side lower hinge member 150 rotatably attached to the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640, and the front surface of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110. The door frame left side decorative board 160, which is mounted on the left side of the door and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and the glass unit 190, which is rotatably mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 110, are detachably attached. A glass unit mounting member 170 for the door is provided.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 is attached to the lower right corner of the front view on the front surface of the door frame base 110, and is attached to the tubular handle attachment member 180 for attaching the handle unit 300 and the rear surface of the door frame base 110. A glass unit 190 that closes the through hole 111, a security cover 200 that covers the lower part of the rear surface of the glass unit 190, and an opening / closing cylinder unit that is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 so as to penetrate the door frame base 110 and project forward. It includes 210, a ball feed unit 250 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110, and a foul cover unit 270 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110.

Further, although not shown, the door frame base unit 100 includes various decorative substrates provided in the door frame 3, a ball feed solenoid 255, a handle rotation detection sensor 307, a handle touch sensor 310, a single-shot button operation sensor 312, and the like. Ball rental button 328, return button 329, ball rental display unit 330, effect selection left button 331, effect selection right button 332, vibration motor 424, pressure detection sensor 440, door frame side effect display device 460 (liquid crystal display device 461) , Upper speaker 573, etc., and a door main body relay board for relaying the connection between the main body frame 4 and the door frame relay board 911 of the board unit 900.

[3-1a. Door frame base]
The door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame base 110 is formed in a rectangular shape whose outer shape in front view extends vertically. The door frame base 110 penetrates in the front-rear direction, and includes a through-hole 111 formed in a substantially quadrangular shape having an inner peripheral shape extending vertically in a front view. In the through hole 111, the upper side and the left and right sides forming the inner circumference are close to the outer periphery of the door frame base 110, respectively, and the lower side forming the inner circumference is up and down from the lower end of the door frame base 110. It is located at a height of about 1/3 in the direction. Therefore, the door frame base 110 is entirely formed in a frame shape by the through openings 111 penetrating the front and rear. The door frame base 110 is integrally molded with a synthetic resin.

The door frame base 110 is formed in the lower right corner of the front view and is inclined so that the left end side slightly protrudes forward from the right end side, the handle mounting seat surface 112, the handle mounting seat surface 112, and the through hole 111. The opening / closing cylinder unit 210 is recessed from the rear surface to the front near the right end of the front view, and penetrates back and forth between the cylinder mounting portion 113 to which the cylinder mounting plate metal 213 of the opening / closing cylinder unit 210 is mounted and the cylinder mounting portion 113. The cylinder insertion hole 114 into which the cylinder lock 211 of the above is inserted, and the cylinder insertion hole 114 and the handle mounting seat surface 112 penetrate the front and rear on the left side of the front view, and the entry entrance 251a and the ball outlet 251b of the ball feed unit 250 are forward. It is equipped with a ball feed opening 115 for facing the cylinder.

Further, the door frame base 110 is to the left of the center of the door frame base 110 in the left-right direction and penetrates back and forth at substantially the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 112, and faces the ball discharge port 276 of the foul cover unit 270 forward. It penetrates back and forth between the lower plate passage port 116 and the door frame base 110 near the left end of the front view so as to be adjacent to the lower side of the through hole 111, so that the through ball passage 273 of the foul cover unit 270 faces forward. The dish passage port 117, the glass unit mounting portion 118 into which the glass frame 191 of the glass unit 190 is inserted, and the door frame base 110 on both the left and right sides, which are recessed from the rear surface to the front along the inner circumference of the through port 111. It is provided with a speaker insertion port 119 that penetrates back and forth in the corner and through which the rear end of the upper speaker 573 of the door frame top unit 570 is inserted.

[3-1b. Reinforcement unit]
The reinforcing unit 130 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 31 and 33 and the like. The reinforcing unit 130 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 to reinforce the door frame base 110 and increase the strength and rigidity of the door frame base 110 (door frame 3). The reinforcing unit 130 includes a left-right extending upper reinforcing sheet metal 131 attached along the upper side of the rear surface of the door frame base 110 and a left-right extending middle reinforcement attached to the lower side of the through hole 111 on the rear surface of the door frame base 110. The sheet metal 132, the vertically extending left reinforcing sheet metal 133 attached along the left side of the front view on the rear surface of the door frame base 110, and the vertically extending right reinforcement attached along the right side of the front view on the rear surface of the door frame base 110. It includes a sheet metal 134 and a locking locking portion 135 that is attached to the rear surface of the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 and locks the door frame hook 702 of the locking unit 700.

In the reinforcing unit 130, the left and right ends of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131 are connected and fixed to the upper ends of the left reinforcing sheet metal 133 and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 by screws, and the left end of the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 is connected to the left reinforcing sheet metal 133 by screws. It is fixed. The right end of the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 is connected and fixed to the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 via the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 of the opening / closing cylinder unit 210 described later. Therefore, the reinforcing unit 130 is formed in a frame shape by the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, the left reinforcing sheet metal 133, the right reinforcing sheet metal 134, and the like.

The upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, the left reinforcing sheet metal 133, the right reinforcing sheet metal 134, and the locking locking portion 135 of the reinforcing unit 130 are each formed by appropriately bending a metal plate. The middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 has a cutout portion 132a penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the upper plate passage port 117 of the door frame base 110.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the reinforcing unit 130 has a portion bent in the front-rear direction in each of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, the left reinforcing sheet metal 133, and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134. The strength and rigidity are enhanced by the part, and the intrusion of an illegal tool such as a piano wire or a flat-blade screwdriver from the outside is prevented.

[3-1c. Door frame side upper hinge member]
The door frame side upper hinge member 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The door frame side upper hinge member 140 is a pair of protrusions of the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141 having a pair of projecting pieces 141a attached to the door frame base 110 and separated vertically, and the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141. A pair of projecting pieces 141a in the columnar door frame upper hinge pin 142 and the door frame upper hinge pin 142 that penetrate the piece 141a and whose upper end is inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620. A disk-shaped flange member 143 attached at a position between the door frame and a hinge pin 142 on the door frame while being interposed between the flange member 143 and the lower protruding piece 141a of the pair of protruding pieces 141a. Is inserted, and is provided with a lock spring 144 that urges the hinge pin 142 on the door frame upward.

Although not shown, the hinge shaft bracket 141 on the door frame has a flat plate-shaped mounting piece that connects the rear ends of the pair of projecting pieces 141a, and the shape of the side view is open to the front. It is formed in a character shape. In the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141, a mounting piece connecting a pair of projecting pieces 141a to each other is mounted on the rear surface of the door frame base 110 by a screw.

In the door frame upper hinge pin 142, a portion (upper end) protruding upward from the upper protruding piece 141a is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620. Further, although not shown, the hinge pin 142 on the door frame has a portion protruding downward from the lower protruding piece 141a bent in the horizontal direction. The bent portion abuts on the lower surface of the lower protruding piece 141a to restrict the upward movement of the hinge pin 142 on the door frame.

The collar member 143 is an E-ring, and is inserted and held in a groove formed on the outer periphery of the hinge pin 142 on the door frame. The lock spring 144 is a coil spring through which the hinge pin 142 on the door frame can be inserted, and the upper end is in contact with the flange member 143 and the lower end is in contact with the lower protruding piece 141a. The lock spring 144 is interposed between the collar member 143 and the lower protruding piece 141a in a compressed state, and urges the hinge pin 142 on the door frame upward via the collar member 143. ..

The door frame upper hinge member 140 is in a state in which the door frame upper hinge pin 142 is urged upward by the lock spring 144, and the horizontally bent portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 protrudes downward. Further upward movement is restricted by abutting on the lower surface of the piece 141a. In this state, the upper end of the hinge pin 142 on the door frame protrudes above the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 141a by a predetermined amount.

The door frame side upper hinge member 140 has a horizontally bent portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 when the operator holds the portion and pulls the portion downward against the urging force of the lock spring 144. The upper hinge pin 142 can be moved downward as a whole, and the upper end of the hinge pin 142 on the door frame can be immersed below the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 141a. Therefore, in the door frame side upper hinge member 140, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 is inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 from below or pulled out downward. Can be done. As a result, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame side upper hinge member 140 is inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620, so that the upper left end of the door frame 3 in front view can be inserted. , The hinge can be rotatably supported with respect to the main body frame 4.

Further, in the door frame side upper hinge member 140, the portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 supported by the pair of protruding pieces 141a of the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141 is the door frame of the door frame side lower hinge member 150, which will be described later. It is supported coaxially with the lower hinge pin 152. As a result, the door frame side upper hinge member 140 and the door frame side lower hinge member 150 can rotate the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 in a good state.

[3-1d. Door frame side lower hinge member]
The door frame side lower hinge member 150 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32. The door frame side lower hinge member 150 is in the door frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151 having a flat plate-shaped extension piece 151a attached to the door frame base 110 and extending forward, and the door frame lower hinge shaft bracket. A cylindrical door frame lower hinge pin 152 (see FIGS. 21 and 22) projecting downward from the vicinity of the front end portion of the extension piece 151a is provided.

The hinge shaft bracket 151 under the door frame has a flat plate-shaped mounting piece (not shown) extending upward from the rear end of the horizontally extending flat plate-shaped extending piece 151a, and has an overall shape in a side view. Is formed in a substantially L shape. A mounting piece (not shown) is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 by screws in the door frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151.

The lower end of the door frame lower hinge pin 152 is formed in a truncated cone shape in which the lower end thereof narrows toward the bottom. The door frame lower hinge pin 152 is rotatably inserted from above into the door frame hinge hole 644 of the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 in the main body frame 4, which will be described later. The door frame lower hinge pin 152 is arranged coaxially with the door frame upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame side upper hinge member 140.

In the door frame side lower hinge member 150, the door frame 3 can be hinged with respect to the main body frame 4 by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 152 into the door frame hinge hole 644 of the main body frame side lower hinge member 640. Can be supported by.

[3-1e. Door frame left side decorative board]
The door frame left side decorative substrate 160 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32. The door frame left side decorative substrate 160 is attached to the front surface of the door frame base 110 on the left side of the through hole 111 when viewed from the front. The door frame left side decorative substrate 160 is a door extending vertically from a height below the speaker insertion port 119 on the left side of the front view of the door frame base 110 to a height near the center in the vertical direction of the through hole 111. The lower decoration on the left side of the door frame extends vertically from the height of the lower side of the upper decorative board 161 on the left side of the frame and the upper decorative board 161 on the left side of the door frame to approximately the same height as the lower end of the passage port 117 for the upper plate. The board 162 and the like are provided.

The door frame left side upper decorative substrate 161 and the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 162 of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 are each provided with a plurality of LEDs 161a and 162a capable of irradiating light forward on the front surface. These LEDs 161a and 162a are full-color LEDs.

The door frame left side decorative substrate 160 is located behind the door frame left side unit 530, which will be described later, in a state where the door frame 3 is assembled, and has a plurality of (mounted) LEDs 161a and 162a provided on the front surface. The left unit decorative lens member of the door frame left side unit 530 can be light-emitting and decorated by appropriately emitting light.

[3-1f. Glass unit mounting member]
The glass unit mounting member 170 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 31 (b) and the like. The glass unit mounting member 170 is rotatably mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 110, and is for mounting the glass unit 190 detachably. The glass unit mounting member 170 has a disk-shaped base 171 that is rotatably mounted around an axis extending back and forth on the rear side of the door frame base 110, and a rod-shaped protrusion from the base 171 in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. It has a protruding portion 172 and a protruding portion 172.

The glass unit mounting member 170 is rotatably mounted on the rear surface of the door frame base 110 at a portion outside the pair of speaker insertion ports 119 and outside the glass unit mounting portion 118, respectively.

The glass unit mounting member 170 is in a state in which the protruding portion 172 is rotated so as to project upward from the base portion 171 so that the protruding portion 172 is outside the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110 when viewed from the rear. In the positioned state, the glass unit 190 can be inserted into the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110, or the glass unit 190 can be removed from the glass unit mounting portion 118.

When the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated so that the protruding portion 172 protrudes downward from the base 171 in a state where the glass unit 190 is inserted into the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110, the protruding portion 172 becomes glass. The glass unit 190 can be attached to the door frame base 110 in a state where it comes into contact with the rear side of the attachment piece 191a of the unit 190 and the rearward movement of the upper portion of the glass unit 190 is restricted.

Since the protruding portion 172 of the glass unit mounting member 170 protrudes from the disk-shaped base 171 that is rotatably mounted on the door frame base 110, the center of gravity of the glass unit mounting member 170 is located in the protruding portion 172. .. From this, in a state where the glass unit mounting member 170 can rotate freely, the protruding portion 172 is stable in a state of protruding downward from the base portion 171. Then, in the glass unit mounting member 170, when the protruding portion 172 is in the rotational position protruding downward from the base portion 171, the protruding portion 172 regulates the backward movement of the glass unit 190, so that the glass unit is mounted. Even if vibration or the like acts on the member 170, the entire protrusion 172 does not rotate upward from the base 171 and the restriction on the rearward movement of the glass unit 190 is naturally lifted. No.

When removing the glass unit 190 from the door frame base 110, the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated so that the protruding portion 172 projects upward from the base 171 so that the protruding portion 172 is mounted on the glass unit 190 mounting piece 191a. By moving the glass unit 190 to the outside, the upper side of the glass unit 190 can be moved to the rear, and the glass unit 190 can be removed from the door frame base 110.

[3-1 g. Handle mounting member]
The handle mounting member 180 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The handle mounting member 180 is for mounting the handle unit 300 on the front surface of the door frame base 110. As shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, the handle mounting member 180 has a cylindrical tubular portion 181 extending in the front-rear direction and outward in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the tubular portion 181 from the rear end of the tubular portion 181. An annular flange portion 182 that extends, and a plurality of flange portions 182 that project into the tubular portion 181 and extend over the entire axial length of the tubular portion 181 and are arranged at unequal intervals with respect to the circumferential direction of the tubular portion 181. In this example, it is provided with three) ridges 183, and a plurality of reinforcing ribs 184 arranged in the circumferential direction of the cylinder portion 181 by connecting the outer peripheral surface of the cylinder portion 181 and the front surface of the flange portion 182. ..

The handle mounting member 180 is mounted on the handle mounting seat surface 112 with screws in a state where the rear surface of the flange portion 182 is in contact with the front surface of the handle mounting seat surface 112 on the door frame base 110.

The inner diameter of the tubular portion 181 is formed to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the base portion 301a of the handle base 301 in the handle unit 300. One of the three ridges 183 is provided on the upper side in the tubular portion 181 and the other two are provided on the lower side in the tubular portion 181. These three ridges 183 are formed at positions corresponding to the three grooves 301c in the handle base 301. Therefore, the handle mounting member 180 can insert the base portion 301a of the handle base 301 into the tubular portion 181 only when the three ridges 183 and the three groove portions 301c of the handle base 301 are aligned with each other. The rotation position of the handle base 301 (handle unit 300) can be regulated with respect to the door frame base 110.

Since the axis of the cylinder portion 181 extends vertically to the rear surface of the flange portion 182, the handle mounting member 180 can be attached to the inclined handle mounting seat surface 112 of the door frame base 110 to form the cylinder portion. The axis of 181 is tilted so as to extend to the front right, and the handle unit 300 can be attached to the door frame base 110 in the same tilted state.

[3-1h. Glass unit]
The glass unit 190 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The glass unit 190 closes the through-hole 111 of the door frame base 110 so that the rear can be seen from the front. The glass unit 190 has a frame-shaped glass frame 191 that is larger than the inner peripheral shape of the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 and can be attached to the glass unit mounting portion 118, and the glass frame 191 is closed and the outer periphery is a glass frame. It comprises two transparent glass plates 192 attached to 191. The two glass plates 192 are attached to the front end side and the rear end side of the glass frame 191 respectively, and are separated from each other in the front-rear direction so as to form a space between them (see FIG. 26 and the like).

The glass frame 191 includes a pair of mounting pieces 191a extending outward in a flat plate shape from a position below the upper left and right corners in the front view, and a band extending downward from the lower end and extending along the lower side. It has a plate-shaped locking piece 191b and. The mounting piece 191a of the glass frame 191 can be brought into contact with the protruding portion 172 of the glass unit mounting member 170. The locking piece 191b can be inserted into the space between the door frame base 110 and the intermediate reinforcing sheet metal 132 of the reinforcing unit 130 (see FIG. 26).

In the glass unit 190, the locking piece 191b of the glass frame 191 is inserted from above into the gap between the door frame base 110 and the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 of the reinforcing unit 130 from the rear side of the door frame base 110. , The front end of the glass frame 191 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110, the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated, and the protruding portion 172 of the glass unit mounting member 170 is brought into contact with the mounting piece 191a of the glass frame 191. It is attached to the door frame base 110 by being brought into contact with the rear surface.

When the glass unit 190 is removed from the door frame base 110, it can be removed by the reverse procedure of the above. As a result, the glass unit 190 can be attached to and detached from the door frame base 110.

[3-1i. Security cover]
The security cover 200 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The security cover 200 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 so as to cover the lower portion of the rear surface of the glass unit 190, and is made of a transparent synthetic resin. The security cover 200 is arranged so as to be separated from each other to the left and right by a flat plate-shaped main body 201 having an outer periphery formed in a predetermined shape and a flat plate-shaped rear projecting piece 202 protruding rearward along the outer peripheral edge of the main body 201. It is provided with a pair of locking pieces 203 that protrude forward from the main body 201 and are lockable on the rear side of the door frame base 110.

The main body 201 of the security cover 200 is formed so that the lower end thereof protrudes downward from the lower end of the glass unit 190 when attached to the door frame base 110. Further, the upper end of the main body 201 is formed in a shape along the lower end of the game area 5a in the game board 5 in a state where the upper end is assembled to the pachinko machine 1. More specifically, the upper end of the main body 201 is formed in a shape along a part of the inner rail 1002 of the front component 1000 described later, an out guide part 1003, a part of the lower right rail 1004, and the right rail 1005. The rails are formed so as not to protrude into the game area 5a when assembled in the pachinko machine 1.

The rear projecting piece 202 is formed over substantially the entire circumference of the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 201. Therefore, the crime prevention cover 200 is formed in a shallow box shape that is opened rearward by the main body portion 201 and the rear projecting piece 202, and has high strength and rigidity. Further, as shown in FIG. 33, the rear projecting piece 202 projects rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 201, which is different from the outer peripheral edge of the main body 201. The rear projecting piece 202 projecting rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 201 is formed along a part of the outer rail 1001 in the front component 1000 of the game board 5 in a state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1. ing.

The rear projecting piece 202 is not formed at a portion of the game board 5 located between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in a state of being assembled on the pachinko machine 1. As a result, the game ball (the game ball launched by the ball launching device 680) passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 does not come into contact with the rear projecting piece 202 of the security cover 200, and is inside the game area 5a. It does not hinder the driving of the game ball into the ball.

The pair of locking pieces 203 are elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base 110. As a result, the security cover 200 can be easily attached to and detached from the door frame base 110.

When the security cover 200 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the front surface of the main body 201 is in contact with the rear surface of the glass unit 190 (the rear end of the glass frame 191), and the portion protruding rearward from the lower side of the main body 201 is formed. The removed rear projecting piece 202 is in a state of being inserted into the security recess 10008 of the front component 1000, which will be described later. Further, the security cover 200 is in a state in which the rear projecting piece 202 projecting rearward from the lower side of the main body 201 projects rearward from the front surface of the front component 1000 so as to come into contact with the lower surface of the front component 1000. .. As a result, the space between the security cover 200 and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear projecting piece 202 of the security cover 200 and the security recess 1008 of the front component 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is attempted to enter the game area 5a from below the front surface of the board 5 through between the security cover 200 and the front component 1000, it will be blocked by the rear projecting piece 202 and the security recess 1008. , It is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the game area 5a.

[3-1j. Open / close cylinder unit]
The opening / closing cylinder unit 210 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The opening / closing cylinder unit 210 is attached from the rear side to the cylinder mounting portion 113 located between the through hole 111 and the handle mounting seat surface 112 near the right end of the door frame base 110 in the front view, and cooperates with the locking unit 700 described later. It works and is used for opening and closing the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and opening and closing the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4.

The opening / closing cylinder unit 210 has a cylindrical cylinder lock 211 having a key hole 211a on the front surface and extending forward and backward, and a locking unit for rotating a key attached to the rear end of the cylinder lock 211 and inserted into the key hole 211a. It includes a rotation transmission member 212 that transmits to the key cylinder 710 of 700, and a cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 that mounts the cylinder lock 211 to the door frame base 110 (reinforcing unit 130).

The cylinder lock 211 can rotate the key by inserting the corresponding key (not shown) into the key hole 211a, and the corresponding key can be either clockwise or counterclockwise when viewed from the front. It can also be rotated by a predetermined angle in the direction of.

The rotation transmission member 212 is formed in a cylindrical shape with an open rear (specifically, a conical cylinder whose diameter increases toward the rear), and faces forward from the rear end to positions facing each other across the central axis. It has a pair of notched portions 212a that are notched. The rotation transmission member 212 is formed so that the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 in the main body frame 4 is inserted from behind, and the protrusion of the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 is inserted into the pair of notches 212a. As a result, the rotation of the rotation transmission member 212 (the key inserted into the key hole 211a of the cylinder lock 211) can be transmitted to the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 to rotate the key cylinder 710.

The cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 is formed by bending a single metal plate, and is formed in a convex shape in which the shape in a plan view protrudes forward. More specifically, the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 has a rectangular flat plate-shaped front plate portion 213a extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a pair of side plate portions 213b extending rearward from both the left and right sides of the front plate portion 213a. And a pair of mounting plate portions 213c extending in a rectangular shape in a direction away from each other from the rear side of each of the pair of side plate portions 213b. The front plate portion 213a of the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 is penetrated by the cylinder lock 211 from the rear at a position substantially central in the vertical direction, and the rear end of the cylinder lock 211 is attached to the rear surface of the front plate portion 213a. In the pair of mounting plate portions 213c of the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213, the mounting plate portion 213c on the left side in the front view is attached to the right end portion of the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 in the reinforcing unit 130, and the mounting plate portion 213c on the right side in the front view is the reinforcing unit 130. It is attached to the right reinforcing sheet metal 134. As a result, the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 connects the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 of the reinforcing unit 130.

When the opening / closing cylinder unit 210 is assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the front end of the cylinder lock 211 protruding forward from the front plate portion 213a of the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 is a cylinder insertion hole from the rear side of the door frame base 110. It is inserted through 114 and protrudes forward of the door frame base 110, and the front plate portion 213a and the pair of side plate portions 213b of the cylinder mounting plate metal 213 are housed in the box-shaped cylinder mounting portion 113 which is open to the rear. ing.

[3-1k. Ball feed unit]
The ball feed unit 250 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 34 and 35. FIG. 34 (a) is a perspective view of the ball feed unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 34 (b) is a perspective view of the ball feed unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 35 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feed unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 35 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feed unit after removing the rear case and the fraud prevention member. The ball feeding unit 250 can supply the game balls supplied from the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 to the ball launcher 680 one by one, and the game balls stored in the upper plate 321 can be used as the upper plate balls. It can be pulled out to the lower plate by operating the pull-out button 327.

In the ball feed unit 250, the game balls stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 are supplied through the upper plate ball feed port 323d of the plate unit base 323 and the ball feed opening 115 of the door frame base 110 and penetrate in the front-rear direction. A box-shaped front cover 251 having an entrance 251a and a ball outlet 251b that opens below the entrance 251a and whose rear is open, and a box in which the rear end of the front cover 251 is closed and the front is open. A rear cover 252 having a hitting ball supply port 252a for supplying a game ball that has entered from the entrance 251a of the front cover 251 penetrating in the front-rear direction to the ball launcher 680, a rear cover 252, and a front cover. A ball pulling member 253 that is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between 251 and has a partition portion 253a that separates the entrance 251a and the ball pulling port 251b on the rear side of the front cover 251. , The game balls on the partition portion 253a of the ball removing member 253 are sent one by one to the hit ball supply port 252a of the rear cover 252, and can rotate around the axis extending in the vertical direction between the front cover 251 and the rear cover 252. The ball feed member 254 supported by the ball feed member 254 and the ball feed solenoid 255 for rotating the ball feed member 254 are provided.

As shown in the figure, in the ball feed unit 250, the ball feed member 254 is arranged on the right side of the entrance 251a in the front view, and the ball feed member 253 is on the left side of the ball feed member 254 of the ball feed member 254. Ball feed solenoids 255 are arranged on the right side, respectively.

The front cover 251 of the ball feed unit 250 is provided with an arcuate slit 251c formed concentrically with respect to the rotation center of the ball extraction member 253 on the left side of the ball extraction port 251b in front view, and the slit 251c is provided. The working rod 253c of the ball removing member 253, which will be described later, extends forward. Further, the front cover 251 extends upward from the upper edge of the entrance 251a, and when the door frame 3 is assembled, the front cover 251 is upstream of the ball feed taxiway 323e and the ball removal taxiway 323f of the dish unit base 323. It is formed so as to close the portion that is open to the rear of the end side from the rear side.

The ball pulling member 253 has a partition portion 253a whose upper surface is lowered toward the ball feed member 254 and a ball of the partition portion 253a, which is below the entrance 251a and between the entrance 251a and the ball ejection port 251b. It extends downward from the end opposite to the feed member 254, bends in a dogleg shape from the middle of the vertical direction toward the lower center of the ball outlet 251b, and rotates around the axis whose lower end extends in the front-rear direction. From the side surface of the rotating rod portion 253b that is movably supported, the rod-shaped operating rod 253c that protrudes forward from the upper end of the rotating rod portion 253b, and the rotating rod portion 253b below the operating rod 253c. It is provided with a weight portion 253d projecting to the side opposite to the partition portion 253a. The working rod 253c of the ball removing member 253 is formed so as to project forward through the arc-shaped slit 251c formed in the front cover 251 (see FIG. 34 (a)). The actuating rod 253c comes into contact with the upper end of the actuating transmission unit 327a operated by pressing the upper plate ball removing button 327 of the plate unit 320 via the ball feed opening 115 of the door frame base 110.

The ball feed member 254 has a fan-shaped blocking portion 254a centered on a rotation axis extending in the vertical direction toward the partition portion 253a of the entrance 251a and the ball pulling member 253, and the rear end of the blocking portion 254a. It is provided with a ball holding portion 254b recessed in an arc shape toward the center of the rotation axis, and a rod-shaped rod-shaped rod portion 254c extending downward from the rear end of the ball holding portion 254b. The blocking portion 254a and the ball holding portion 254b of the ball feeding member 254 are formed adjacent to each other within an angle range of about 180 ° about the center of rotation axis. Further, the ball holding portion 254b of the ball feeding member 254 has a size capable of holding one game ball. The ball feed member 254 rotates around the rotation shaft core by moving the rod portion 254c arranged at a position eccentric to the rotation shaft core in the left-right direction by driving the ball feed solenoid 255.

The ball feed member 254 has a supply position in which the blocking portion 254a faces the direction of the partition portion 253a and at the same time the ball holding portion 254b faces the direction in which the ball holding portion 254b communicates with the hit ball supply port 252a, and the ball holding portion 254b faces the direction of the partition portion 253a. It is designed to rotate with and from the holding position facing toward. When the ball feed member 254 is in the supply position, the game ball held by the ball holding portion 254b is supplied to the ball launching device 680 from the hit ball supply port 252a, and the game ball enters the partition portion 253a from the entrance 251a. However, the blocking portion 254a blocks the movement of the ball to the ball holding portion 254b (ball hitting port 252a) side, and the ball stays on the partition portion 253a. On the other hand, when the ball feed member 254 rotates to the holding position, the ball holding portion 254b faces the direction of the partition portion 253a, and the end portion of the ball holding portion 254b on the rod portion 254c side closes the ball hitting supply port 252a. , Only one game ball on the partition portion 253a is held in the ball holding portion 254b.

Further, the ball feed unit 250 has a ball feed operating rod 256 whose tip swings in the vertical direction by driving (energizing) the ball feed solenoid 255, and a ball feed operating rod 256 that swings back and forth due to the movement of the tip swinging in the vertical direction. It includes a ball feed crank 257 that rotates around an axis extending in the direction and rotates the ball feed member 254 around an axis extending in the vertical direction. The ball feed crank 257 has an engaging portion 257a extending in the left-right direction so as to be able to engage with the vertically moving tip of the ball feed operating rod 256, and a side of the engaging portion 257a that engages with the ball feed operating rod 256. A shaft portion 257b that is arranged on the opposite side and is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the front cover 251 and the rear cover 252, and a shaft portion 257b that extends upward from the shaft portion 257b and feeds the ball. The member 254 includes a transmission portion 257c that engages with a rod-shaped rod portion 254c (see FIG. 35B) that protrudes downward from a position eccentric with respect to the center of rotation.

The ball feed unit 250 transmits the movement of the ball feed operating rod 256 that swings by the drive of the ball feed solenoid 255 that advances and retreats in the vertical direction by the ball feed operation rod 256 and the ball feed crank 257 to transmit the ball feed member 254. It can be rotated. When the ball feed solenoid 255 is not driven (normal time), the ball feed operating rod 256 is separated from the lower end of the ball feed solenoid 255 and the tip is positioned downward. In this state, the ball feed member 254 is in the supply position. It will be in the state of being located in. Further, when the ball feed solenoid 255 is driven, the ball feed operating rod 256 is attracted to the lower end of the ball feed solenoid 255, the tip is positioned upward, and the ball feed member 254 rotates to the holding position. That is, when the ball feed solenoid 255 is driven (ON state), the ball feed member 254 receives one game ball, and when the drive of the ball feed solenoid 255 is released (OFF state), the ball feed member 254 is released. The game ball received by the solenoid can be sent (supplied) to the ball launcher 680 side. The drive of the ball feed solenoid 255 in the ball feed unit 250 is controlled by the launch control unit (not shown) of the payout control board 951 in synchronization with the drive control of the launch solenoid 682.

Further, the ball pulling member 253 rotatably supported by the ball feed unit 250 is subjected to a moment such that the weight portion 253d rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front, but the ball feeding member 253 projects forward. The operation rod 253c is brought into contact with the upper end of the operation transmission unit 327a operated by the pressing operation of the upper plate ball removal button 327 of the plate unit 320, so that its rotation is restricted. The partition portion 253a of the above partitions between the entrance 251a and the ball outlet 251b, so that the game ball does not invade the ball outlet 251b side.

Then, when the player presses the upper plate ball removal button 327 of the plate unit 320 downward, the upper plate ball removal slider 327b slides downward together with the operation transmission unit 327a and moves downward of the operation transmission unit 327a. Along with this, the operating plate 253c also moves relatively downward. When the operating rod 253c moves downward together with the operation transmitting portion 327a, the ball pulling member 253 rotates in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, and the partition between the entrance 251a and the ball pulling port 251b by the partition portion 253a is released. Will be done. As a result, the game ball that has entered from the entrance 251a is discharged from the ball outlet 251b to the ball extraction guide path 323f of the plate unit 320, and is discharged (supplied) to the lower plate 322 via the lower plate ball supply port 323c. be able to.

The upper plate ball removal slider 327b on which the operation transmission portion 327a with which the operation rod 253c of the ball removal member 253 abuts is formed is urged upward by the upper plate ball removal spring 327c, so that it is on the partition portion 253a. Even if the game ball is vigorously supplied, the impact can be absorbed by the upper plate ball pulling spring 327c via the operating rod 253c, and it is possible to prevent the ball pulling member 253 and the like from being damaged. , It is possible to prevent the game ball from bouncing off at the partition portion 253a.

Further, the ball feed unit 250 is formed with a rectangular mounting recess 252b (see FIG. 35B, etc.) recessed forward in the upper right when viewed from the rear of the ball hitting supply port 252a in the rear cover 252, and the ball feeding unit 250 is formed. The fraud prevention member 260 is mounted in the mounting recess 252b. The fraud prevention member 260 of the ball feed unit 250 is formed of a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is detachably attached to the inside of the attachment recess 252b of the rear cover 252 from the rear side.

The fraud prevention member 260 is formed in a rectangular shape in which the outer shape of the front view extends to the left and right, and the upper piece portion 261 and the upper piece portion 261 which are separated vertically at substantially the center in the vertical direction within a predetermined distance from the right side to the left. The lower piece portion 262 and the inclined portion 263 formed in a C chamfer shape on the tip side (right end side in the front view) of the sides of the upper piece portion 261 and the lower piece portion 262 facing each other are provided. .. The upper piece 261 of the fraud prevention member 260 is bent so that the right end of the front view projects rearward with respect to the general surface of the fraud prevention member 260. The lower piece portion 262 extends on the same surface as the general surface of the fraud prevention member 260. As a result, in a plan view, the upper piece portion 261 and the lower piece portion 262 form a V-shaped groove that expands toward the right.

The fraud prevention member 260 is attached to the mounting recess 252b of the rear cover 252 so that the V-shaped groove formed by the upper piece portion 261 and the lower piece portion 262 communicates with the inside of the ball striking supply port 252a. Become.

According to the fraud prevention member 260, the fraudulent game ball to which the string is attached is driven into the game area 5a by the ball launcher 680 from the upper plate 321 via the ball feed unit 250, and is attached to the fraudulent game ball. When a fraudulent act such as manipulating a string to move an illegal game ball in and out of the first left starting port 2002a or the like is performed, the momentum of the illegal game ball launched (struck) by the ball launcher 680 causes the illegal game ball to be launched. A string attached to an illegal game ball is inserted between the upper piece 261 and the lower piece 262, and then the V-shaped narrowing formed by the upper piece 261 and the lower piece 262. It can be cut depending on the part of the ball, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts using a fraudulent game ball with a string attached.

[3-1l. Foul cover unit]
The foul cover unit 270 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 36 to 38. FIG. 36A is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 36B is a perspective view of the foul cover unit as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 37 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit viewed from the front with the lid member removed, and FIG. 37 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit viewed from the rear with the lid member removed. Further, FIG. 38 is a front view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed.

As shown in the figure, the foul cover unit 270 includes a shallow box-shaped unit main body 271 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 and the front side open, and a flat plate-shaped lid member attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271. 272 and. The foul cover unit 270 penetrates back and forth in the upper left corner of the front view, and a penetrating ball that communicates the normal taxiway 861 of the lower full tank path unit 860 of the main body frame 4 and the upper dish ball supply port 323a of the dish unit 320. The full tank receiver 274 that opens toward the rear on the lower right side of the passage 273 and the through ball passage 273 in the front view and can communicate with the full tank taxiway 862 of the lower full tank path unit 860 of the main body frame 4. And have.

Further, the foul cover unit 270 opens upward on the right side of the front view of the full tank ball receiving port 274, and does not reach the game area 5a even though it is fired by the ball launching device 680 of the main body frame 4. The foul ball socket 275 that receives the game ball (foul ball) and the game ball that is open forward near the lower right corner of the front view and are received by the full tank receiver 274 and the foul ball socket 275 are forward. It is provided with a ball discharge port 276 that discharges to and communicates with the lower plate ball supply port 323c of the dish unit 320.

Further, the foul cover unit 270 is formed between the full tank ball receiving port 274 and the foul ball receiving port 275 and the ball discharging port 276 by the unit main body 271 and the lid member 272, and can store a predetermined amount of game balls. A storage passage 277 having a large size, a flat plate-shaped movable piece 278 that constitutes a part of the inner wall of the storage passage 277 and whose lower end is rotatably attached to the unit main body 271, and a movable piece. It includes a full tank detection sensor 279 that detects rotation of the 278 in the direction away from the storage passage 277, and a spring 280 that urges the movable piece 278 toward the center of the storage passage 277.

When the lower plate 322 of the plate unit 320 is filled with the game balls and the game balls are not discharged from the ball discharge port 276 to the lower plate 322 side, the foul cover unit 270 has a certain number in the storage passage 277. The game ball can be stored. Then, when a certain number of game balls are stored in the storage passage 277, the upper end of the movable piece 278 moves in the direction away from the storage passage 277 against the urging force of the spring 280 due to the weight of the game balls. The movable piece 278 rotates, and the rotation is detected by the full tank detection sensor 279. As a result, it can be determined that the lower plate 322 is full with the game balls. Therefore, when the full tank detection sensor 279 detects that the lower plate 322 is full, the payout of the game balls is stopped and the payout of the game balls is stopped. It is possible to notify the player, the staff of the game hall, and the like to that effect, and urge the player to eliminate the fullness of the lower plate 322.

Further, the foul cover unit 270 is attached to the lower side of the penetrating ball passage 273 on the rear side of the unit main body 271, and is a taxiway opening / closing door of the lower full tank path unit 860 in the payout unit 800 described later in the main body frame 4. The door opening / closing contact portion 281 to which the actuating protrusion 863e of the 863 can come into contact is provided (see FIG. 112). The door opening / closing contact portion 281 is inclined so as to move forward as the rear surface moves downward. The door opening / closing contact portion 281 is formed so that when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the operating protrusion 863e of the taxiway opening / closing door 863 comes into contact with the main body frame 4. When the actuating protrusion 863e of the taxiway opening / closing door 863 comes into contact with the door opening / closing contact portion 281, the taxiway opening / closing door 863 rotates and the downstream ends (front opening) of the normal taxiway 861 and the full taxiway 862. ) Can be released.

[3-2. Handle unit]
The handle unit 300 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 and 40. 39 (a) is a front view of the handle unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the handle unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 39 (b) is a perspective view of the handle unit viewed from the back. Further, FIG. 40A is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 40B is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. The handle unit 300 is attached to the handle mounting member 180 of the door frame base unit 100, and can be operated by the player to drive the game ball in the upper plate 321 into the game area 5a of the game board 5. Is.

The handle unit 300 covers the handle base 301 attached to the tubular portion 181 of the handle mounting member 180 in the door frame base unit 100, the handle 302 rotatably attached to the front end of the handle base 301, and the front end side of the handle 302. It is provided with a handle cover 303 that can be attached to the handle base 301.

Further, the handle unit 300 is rotatably attached to the outer periphery by the inner base 304 attached to the front side of the handle base 301 on the rear side of the handle 302 and the handle 302 attached to the front end and rotatably attached by the inner base 304 and the handle base 301. The handle base 301 and the inner have a shaft member 305 having a drive gear portion 305a, a transmission gear 306 meshing with the drive gear portion 305a of the shaft member 305, and a detection shaft 307a rotating integrally with the transmission gear 306. It includes a handle rotation detection sensor 307 sandwiched between the base and the base.

Further, the handle unit 300 is attached so that one end side is attached to the handle base 301 and the other end side is attached to the handle 302 so that the handle 302 is returned to the initial rotation position (rotation end in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front). The steering wheel return spring 308 and the other end side are attached to the inner base 304 and the other end side are attached to the transmission gear 306. Auxiliary spring 309 urging in the direction, handle touch sensor 310 attached to handle base 301 behind the inner base 304, and the tip side from the left side of the outer peripheral surface of the front end of the handle base 301 from the left side to the outside. The single-shot button 311 that protrudes and the base end side is rotatably attached to the handle base 301 behind the inner base 304 so as to rotate around the axis, and the single-shot button 311 is attached to the handle base 301 by detecting the pressing operation. It is equipped with a single-shot button operation sensor 312.

The handle base 301 of the handle unit 300 is recessed from the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical base 301a extending in the front-rear direction, the disc-shaped front end 301b protruding radially from the front end of the base 301a, and the cylindrical base 301a. It also has three groove portions 301c that extend in the axial direction and are formed at irregular intervals in the circumferential direction. The outer diameter of the base portion 301a of the handle base 301 is formed to be slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the tubular portion 181 of the handle mounting member 180. Further, the three groove portions 301c are formed at positions corresponding to the three ridges 183 of the tubular portion 181 of the handle mounting member 180. Therefore, with the three groove portions 301c aligned with the three ridges 183, the base portion 301a can be inserted into the tubular portion 181 of the handle mounting member 180, and the ridges 183 are formed in the three groove portions 301c, respectively. When inserted, the handle base 301 becomes unable to rotate relative to the handle mounting member 180.

The handle 302 has four first protrusions 302a, a second protrusion 302b, a third protrusion 302c, and a fourth protrusion 302d protruding outward from the outer peripheral surface in the circumferential direction, and a rotation shaft (shaft member 305). Two slits 302e extending in an arc shape as the center and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and protruding rearward from a position inside the rotation center with respect to the slit 302e, the other end side of the handle return spring 308 is locked. The locking protrusion 302f is provided.

The four first protrusions 302a, the second protrusion 302b, the third protrusion 302c, and the fourth protrusion 302d are provided in order in the clockwise direction in the front view. More specifically, the first protrusion 302a has a side surface in the front-view clockwise direction of the portion most protruding from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 302, which bulges outward so as to bulge outward, and is the opposite side around the anti-city decision. The side surface in the direction of is dented (cut) so as to curve inward. In the second protrusion 302b, the most protruding portion from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 302 is separated from the most protruding portion of the first protrusion 302a in the clockwise direction at a rotation angle of about 85 degrees, and the second protrusion 302b is separated from the first protrusion 302a. It protrudes slightly low. The side surface of the second protrusion 302b in the clockwise direction of the front view of the most protruding portion bulges outward, and the side surface in the direction around the anti-city decision on the opposite side curves inward. It is recessed so as to be formed in a shape similar to the first protrusion 302a.

In the third protrusion 302c, the portion most protruding from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 302 is separated from the most protruding portion of the second protrusion 302b in the clockwise direction at a rotation angle of about 70 degrees, and the first protrusion 302a It protrudes at about half the height. The side surfaces of the third protrusion 302c are inclined substantially linearly on both sides, and the side surface in the clockwise direction is inclined more gently than the side surface in the counterclockwise direction on the opposite side. In the fourth protrusion 302d, the most protruding portion from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 302 is separated from the most protruding portion of the third protrusion 302c in the clockwise direction at a rotation angle of about 55 degrees, and the fourth protrusion 302d is separated from the first protrusion 302a. It protrudes slightly higher. The fourth protrusion 302d has side surfaces on both sides that are inclined in a substantially straight line, and is formed in a substantially isosceles triangle.

The handle cover 303 has three mounting bosses 303a whose front center is round and bulges forward and projects rearward. The three mounting bosses 303a penetrate the slit 302e of the handle 302 from the front and are mounted on the front surface of the handle base 301. Since the mounting boss 303a of the handle cover 303 penetrates the slit 302e of the handle 302, the mounting boss 303a comes into contact with the circumferential end of the slit 302e, which regulates the rotation angle of the handle 302. In this example, the handle 302 can be rotated within a rotation angle of about 120 degrees.

The handle unit 300 is attached to the handle mounting seat surface 112 of the door frame base 110 via the handle mounting member 180. The handle mounting seat surface 112 of the door frame base 110 is inclined so that the right end side is located behind the left end side in a plan view and faces the outside (open side). Therefore, the handle mounting member 180 is attached. The handle unit 300 attached via the slingshot unit 300 is also tilted outward in a plan view (in other words, its tip is tilted toward the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line orthogonal to the front surface of the pachinko machine 1). It is attached and fixed to the door frame 3. As a result, the player can easily grip the handle 302 of the handle unit 300 and perform the rotation operation without any discomfort.

The handle rotation detection sensor 307 of the handle unit 300 is a variable resistor, and when the handle 302 is rotated, the detection shaft 307a of the handle rotation detection sensor 307 rotates via the shaft member 305 and the transmission gear 306. The internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 307 changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft 307a, and the driving force of the launch solenoid 682 in the ball launcher 680 described later changes according to the internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 307. , The game ball is driven into the game area 5a with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 302.

The outer peripheral surfaces of the handle 302 and the handle cover 303 are conductively plated, and the handle touch sensor 310 detects the contact when the player comes into contact with the handle 302 or the like. Then, when the handle 302 is rotated while the handle touch sensor 310 is detecting the contact of the player, the detection of the handle rotation detection sensor 307 is received, and the firing solenoid has a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 302. The drive of 682 is controlled, and a game ball can be hit. That is, even if the player tries to drive the game ball into the game area 5a by rotating the handle 302 in some way without touching the handle 302, the launch solenoid 682 is not driven and the game ball can be driven. It is not possible. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from rotating the handle 302 in a manner different from the original one to play the game, and it is possible to reduce the load (burden) on the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. ..

Further, in the handle unit 300, when the player presses the single-shot button 311 while the player is rotating the handle 302, the single-shot button operation sensor 312 detects the operation of the single-shot button 311 and the launch control unit of the payout control board 951 (illustrated). Is omitted) to stop the rotational drive of the firing solenoid 682. As a result, it is possible to temporarily stop the firing of the game ball without returning the rotation operation of the handle 302, and by releasing the pressing operation of the single-shot button 311 the driving before operating the single-shot button 311. The game ball can be hit into the game area 5a again with strength.

Further, the handle unit 300 includes four first protrusions 302a, a second protrusion 302b, a third protrusion 302c, and a fourth protrusion 302d on the handle 302, and rotates the handle 302 most in the clockwise direction in the front view. When the game ball is driven into the game area 5a most strongly (so-called "right-handed"), the fourth protrusion 302d is the position of the first protrusion 302a when the handle 302 is not rotated. By changing the handle 302 with the fourth protrusion 302d as the first protrusion 302a, the player can maintain the handle 302 in the "right-handed" position in a comfortable state. It is possible to reduce the feeling of fatigue of the person and suppress the decline in the interest in the game. However, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, if the pachinko machine 1 is in a normal gaming state, it is difficult to accept the gaming ball at various receptions even though the consumption of the ball is large when the ball is hit to the right. It is disadvantageous for the player compared to the case of hitting.

[3-3. Overall configuration of the dish unit]
The dish unit 320 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 45. FIG. 41 (a) is a perspective view of the plate unit of the door frame viewed from the front right, and FIG. 41 (b) is a perspective view of the plate unit viewed from the front left. Further, FIG. 42A is a perspective view of the dish unit viewed from the upper right rear, and FIG. 42B is a perspective view of the dish unit viewed from the lower left rear. FIG. 43 is an exploded perspective view of the dish unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 44 is an exploded perspective view of the dish unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. FIG. 45 is an explanatory view showing an enlarged portion of the lower plate with the lower plate cover removed in the cross-sectional view of FIG. 28. The dish unit 320 is attached to a portion of the door frame base unit 100 below the through-hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110, and the front surface bulges forward. An effect operation unit 400, which will be described later, is attached to the front surface of the plate unit 320.

The plate unit 320 has an upper plate 321 for storing game balls for driving into the game area 5a, and a game ball arranged under the upper plate 321 and supplied from the upper plate 321 and the foul cover unit 270. It is provided with a lower plate 322 that can be stored.

The plate unit 320 is attached to the flat plate-shaped plate unit base 323 attached to the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 and the upper part of the front surface of the plate unit base 323, and the left side from the center of the left and right bulges forward greatly. The upper plate body 324 forming the upper plate 321 and the lower plate main body 325 which is attached to the left side of the center of the left and right at the lower part of the front surface of the plate unit base 323 and bulges forward greatly to form the lower plate 322. And a plate unit cover 326 attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 323 so as to cover the front side of the upper plate main body 324 and the lower plate main body 325.

Further, the plate unit 320 is a front view of the upper plate ball removal button 327 and the upper plate ball removal button 327 which are attached so that they can be pressed from above on the right side of the front view of the upper plate 321 on the upper surface of the plate unit cover 326. The ball lending button 328 attached to the upper surface of the plate unit cover 326 on the right side, the return button 329 attached to the upper surface of the plate unit cover 326 on the right side when viewed from the front of the ball lending button 328, and the ball lending button 328. And the ball rental display unit 330 attached to the upper surface of the plate unit cover 326 behind the return button 329, and the plate front upper decoration portion 326b on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 in front of the upper plate 321. The effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332, and the lower plate ball removal button 333 that protrudes forward from the front of the plate unit cover 326 in front of the lower plate 322 and is attached so that it can be pressed from the front. I have.

[3-3a. Upper plate]
The upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 and 44 and the like. The upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 is formed by the plate unit base 323 and the upper plate main body 324, and the left side side bulges forward more than the center on the left and right sides of the front view, and is formed in the shape of a container opened upward. Has been done. In the upper plate 321 (upper plate main body 324), a portion of about 1/3 from the left end to the right with respect to the width of the door frame 3 in the left-right direction bulges most forward. The front end of the upper plate 321 recedes backward from the most bulging portion toward the right in the front view, and a guide passage portion 321a having a depth in the front-rear direction slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball is formed. There is. The entire bottom surface of the upper plate 321 including the guide passage portion 321a is inclined so that the right end side is lowered, and the front view right end side of the guide passage portion 321a is the upper surface of the plate unit cover 326 (upper plate ball removal button 327). ) (See FIG. 44).

The upper plate 321 is assembled on the plate unit base 323, and the bottom surface of the upper plate 321 is a game ball from a position lower than the upper plate ball supply port 323a of the plate unit base 323 with respect to the upper end of the upper plate ball feed port 323d. It is inclined so that it becomes slightly lower than the outer diameter of. As a result, the game balls discharged forward from the upper plate ball supply port 323a can be received and stored in the upper plate 321 and the received game balls can be stored in the upper plate 321a from the right end side of the guide passage portion 321a. It can be supplied to the ball feed port 323d.

As described above, the upper plate 321 is formed so that the bottom surface of the guide passage portion 321a whose depth in the front-rear direction becomes narrower becomes lower toward the lower side. That is, a part of the upper plate 321 protrudes from above into the mounting space 326j of the plate unit cover 326 to which the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) described later is attached. Therefore, in the upper plate 321, a sufficient amount of storage of the game ball can be secured. The upper plate 321 (upper plate main body 324) protrudes into the mounting space 326j of the plate unit cover 326 so as not to come into contact with the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A).

The guide passage portion 321a is provided with a metal ground fitting 321b that is electrically grounded in the pachinko machine 1, and when the game ball comes into contact with (rolls), it becomes a game ball. The charged static electricity can be removed.

[3-3b. Lower plate]
The lower plate 322 of the plate unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 45 and the like. The lower plate 322 is arranged below the upper plate 321 and on the left side of the center of the plate unit 320 (door frame 3) in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. The lower plate 322 is formed in a container shape capable of storing game balls, and is attached to a lower plate ball extraction hole 322a that penetrates vertically through the bottom wall portion 325a and allows the game balls to be discharged, and a plate unit cover 326. It is provided with a relief portion 322b for avoiding contact with the effect effect operation unit 400 (second effect effect operation unit 400A). The relief portion 322b of the lower plate 322 is formed so that the right front corner is recessed in an arc shape toward the rear.

The lower plate 322 has a lower plate main body 325 whose upper and rear sides are open, a lower plate cover portion 326k of a plate unit cover 326 that covers the upper side from the left end side of the lower plate main body 325, and an open lower plate main body 325. The dish unit is formed by a dish unit base 323 that closes the rear side, and a lower dish cover 340 that covers the upper side of a portion protruding into the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a in the lower dish body 325. It faces outward from the lower plate opening 326d of the cover 326. As shown in FIGS. 28 and 45, the lower plate 322 is a trapezoid in which the outer peripheral shape in a plan view is a quadrangle extending to the left and right, and the front side of the quadrangle is the base and the upper side shorter than the base is arranged on the front side. It is formed in a shape that looks like a combination of and, and the left and right sides of the trapezoid that extend diagonally are curved so as to be recessed rearward. The lower plate 322 is formed so that the width in the left-right direction increases from the front to the rear in a plan view.

As shown in FIGS. 43 and 44, the lower plate main body 325 is formed in a container shape with the upper and rear sides open. The lower plate main body 325 has a flat bottom wall portion 325a, a main body standing wall portion 325b extending upward from the outer peripheral end excluding the rear end side of the bottom wall portion 325a, and a game ball passing through the bottom wall portion 325a. It is provided with a lower plate ball extraction hole 322a that penetrates up and down in a possible size. The outer peripheral shape of the bottom wall portion 325a is curved so that a quadrangle extending to the left and right and an upper side shorter than the base are arranged on the front side with the front side of the quadrangle as the base and the left and right sides extending diagonally are recessed rearward. It is formed in a shape that looks like a combination of a trapezoid and a trapezoid. The bottom wall portion 325a (upper surface) is inclined so as to be lowered toward the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a. The main body standing wall portion 325b rises upward from the bottom wall portion 325a at a height of 2 to 5 times the diameter of the game ball. The lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is formed at a position to the right of the center of the lower plate main body 325 (bottom wall portion 325a) in the left-right direction. In the lower plate main body 325, the curved portion of the front right corner of the front view on the bottom wall portion 325a and the main body standing wall portion 325b corresponds to the relief portion 322b.

The lower plate cover 340 is formed so as to cover an approximately right half portion above the lower plate main body 325. As shown in FIGS. 43 and 44, the lower plate cover 340 is abbreviated from the cover standing wall portion 340a rising upward from the upper end of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower plate main body 325 and the upper end of the cover standing wall portion 340a. It is provided with a horizontally extending ceiling portion 340b. The cover standing wall portion 340a rises from a portion of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower plate main body 325 from a part on the front side to the rear end on the right side. When the lower plate cover 340 is assembled to the plate unit 320, the rear ends of the cover standing wall portion 340a and the ceiling portion 340b are in contact with the front surface of the plate unit base 323. Further, the front end (left end side in the front side) of the cover standing wall portion 340a is in contact with the right end side of the lower plate opening 326d of the plate unit cover 326. Further, the left end of the ceiling portion 340b is in contact with the right end of the lower plate cover portion 326k of the plate unit cover 326. In this lower plate cover 340, the curved surface-shaped portion of the cover standing wall portion 340a and the portion diagonally extending between the cover standing wall portion 340a and the ceiling portion 340b on the rear side correspond to the relief portion 322b. There is.

The lower plate 322 is covered by the plate unit cover 326 (directing operation unit 400) from the vicinity of the left end of the front end to the right side of the portion extending shortly to the left and right on the front end side, and more than half of the lower plate 322 is the directing operation unit 400 in the front view. It is located behind. That is, the lower plate 322 is formed so that the right half wraps around the rear of the effect operation unit 400. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 45, the lower plate 322 includes the lower plate first region A1 (the crosshatch region in FIG. 45) located behind the lower plate opening 326d of the plate unit cover 326 described later, and the lower plate. Lower plate second region A2 (shaded in FIG. 45) located behind the opening 326d (the effect operation unit 400, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a in the plate unit cover 326, and the front end side of the lower plate cover 340). Area) and. In other words, the lower plate 322 has more than half of the storage area (corresponding to the storage area in a plan view, which is the combination of the lower plate first region A1 and the lower plate second region A2) in which the game balls can be stored. It is located behind the production operation unit 400. In FIG. 45, the area of the dotted line hatch is the remaining space (area) of the mounting space 326j in the dish unit cover 326.

In the lower plate 322, the lower plate ball supply port 323c of the plate unit base 323 forming the rear wall opens to the right side of the center of the rear wall in the left-right direction in the front view. More specifically, the lower plate ball supply port 323c of the lower plate 322 is the effect operation unit 400, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a (right outside of the lower plate opening 326d) in the plate unit cover 326, and the front end of the lower plate cover 340. It is arranged in the lower plate second region A2 which is behind the side, etc. As a result, when the door frame 3 is viewed from the front, the lower plate ball supply port 323c cannot be seen from the player side through the lower plate opening 326d (see FIG. 19 and the like). Therefore, the lower plate 322 is formed so as to be scooped out from the lower plate opening 326d on the left side surface of the plate unit 320 (dish unit cover 326) that bulges forward toward the rear of the effect operation unit 400. The storage volume of the game ball is formed larger than the range that can be seen from the front. In other words, the lower plate 322 is formed larger in the lower plate second region A2 than in the lower plate first region A1. As a result, when the lower plate 322 is viewed from the outside (player side), more game balls can be stored in the lower plate 322 than it looks.

In the lower plate 322, the right half of the lower plate main body 325 in the left-right direction (lower plate second region A2) is, as shown in FIG. 41 (a), the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a (mounting space 326j) of the plate unit cover 326. ), And the lower plate cover 340 covers the upper side of the portion of the lower plate main body 325 that protrudes into the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a. The lower plate cover 340 prevents the fingertips from touching the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) when the player inserts a finger into the lower plate 322 through the lower plate opening 326d. can do.

The lower plate 322 is provided with a lower plate ball extraction hole 322a penetrating vertically in front of the lower plate ball supply port 323c in the lower plate second region A2. The bottom surface of the lower plate 322 is inclined so as to be lowered toward the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a. The lower plate ball removal hole 322a of the lower plate 322 is closed so as to be openable and closable by a lid member 334 operated by pressing the lower plate ball removal button 333. In the lower plate 322, in a normal state, the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is closed by the lid member 334, and the game ball can be stored in the lower plate 322. Then, when the lid member 334 is opened by pressing the lower plate ball removal button 333, the game ball in the lower plate 322 can be discharged from the lower plate ball removal hole 322a to the lower side of the plate unit 320.

The lower plate ball extraction hole 322a of the lower plate 322 is arranged in front (directly in front of) the lower plate ball supply port 323c of the plate unit base 323 forming the rear wall of the lower plate 322. Therefore, in the state of being assembled to the door frame 3, the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is located on the right side of the lower plate opening 326d of the plate unit cover 326 and behind the frame unit 415 in the effect operation unit 400. It is not visible from the player (front) side.

As described above, the lower plate 322 is formed in a shape in which the outer peripheral shape is a combination of a trapezoid with a narrowed front side on the front side of a quadrangle extending to the left and right, and the bottom surface is a lower plate ball extraction hole 322a. It is inclined so that it becomes lower toward. Therefore, in a state where the lid member 334 is opened and the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is opened, the game ball supplied from the lower plate ball supply port 323c into the lower plate 322 is directly in front of the lower plate ball supply port 323c. It is immediately discharged downward from the open lower plate ball extraction hole 322a. Since the left end of the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is located slightly to the left of the left end of the lower plate ball supply port 323c, the lower plate ball supply is provided when the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is open. The game ball supplied from the mouth 323c to the lower plate 322 does not directly flow to the area on the left side of the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a in the lower plate 322, but is discharged from the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a. Become.

On the other hand, since the right end of the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is located to the left of the right end of the lower plate ball supply port 323c, the game supplied to the lower plate 322 from the vicinity of the right end of the lower plate ball supply port 323c. The sphere comes into contact with the portion of the main body standing wall portion 325b that forms the right standing wall of the lower plate 322. Since the standing wall on the right side of the lower plate 322 is curved diagonally with respect to the front-rear direction so as to face the direction of the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a, the game ball supplied from the lower plate ball supply port 323c is the game ball. When it comes into contact with an inclined portion, it reflects in the direction of the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a, and is discharged from the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a without going to the area on the left side of the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a. (See FIG. 45).

As described above, since the lower plate 322 of the present embodiment is formed so as to guide the game ball supplied from the lower plate ball supply port 323c to the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a, the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a In the open state, the game ball supplied from the lower plate ball supply port 323c does not enter the area on the left side of the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a in the lower plate 322, and immediately from the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a. It can be discharged downward (dollar box). As a result, if the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is left open, the player cannot see the game balls circulating on the lower plate 322, so that the lower plate 321 and the payout device 830 are used for paying out. It is possible to give the illusion that the game ball or the like is directly discharged to the dollar box, and by making it difficult for the game ball to feel the annoyance of passing through the lower plate 322, the player can play the game (the operation of driving the game ball). And directing images, etc.) can be devoted to suppressing the decline in interest.

Further, since the lower plate 322 of the present embodiment includes the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower plate main body 325 and the lower plate covers 340 and 340A extending upward from the upper end of the main body standing wall portion 325b, the lower plate 322 Even if the game ball supplied to the inside jumps up in the lower plate 322, it is possible to prevent the game ball from invading the mounting space 326j side from the lower plate 322, and the game ball in the lower plate 322 can be prevented. It is possible to prevent the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) from coming into contact with the rear side. Therefore, the game balls supplied in the lower plate 322 and the game balls stored in the lower plate 322 are prevented from coming into contact with or pressing against the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). It is possible to prevent the game ball from damaging the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A).

Further, since the lower plate 322 is provided with the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a in front of the lower plate ball supply port 323c, it is discharged from the lower plate ball supply port 323c when the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is open. Since the game ball can be directly entered into the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a and discharged downward (dollar box), it is difficult for the game ball to reach the front end side of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower plate main body 325. Can be done. Further, since the bottom wall portion 325a of the lower plate main body 325 near the front end of the lower plate 322 becomes higher toward the front, the game ball toward the front end side of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower plate main body 325 is inclined. By climbing the bottom surface, the moving speed of the game ball can be attenuated. Therefore, the impact when the game ball discharged from the lower plate ball supply port 323c into the lower plate 322 can reduce the impact when it comes into contact with the lower plate covers 340, 340A and the main body standing wall portion 325b, and damages them. It can be difficult.

In the present embodiment, the lid member 334 that closes the lower plate ball removal hole 322a may be interlocked with the upper plate ball removal button 327. As a result, when the upper plate ball removal button 327 is operated, the lid member 334 also moves and the lower plate ball removal hole 322a is opened, so that the game ball discharged from the upper plate 321 to the lower plate 322 is further removed from the lower plate ball. It will be discharged from the hole 322a to the lower dollar box. That is, when the upper plate ball removal button 327 is operated to remove the game ball from the upper plate 321, the game ball of the upper plate 321 is discharged to the dollar box even though the lower plate ball removal button 333 is not operated. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a strong illusion that the game ball of the upper plate 321 is directly discharged to the dollar box, and the above-mentioned action and effect can be further exerted. The upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 may be simultaneously opened by driving a drive source such as a motor or a solenoid, or may be simultaneously opened by a mechanical link mechanism.

Further, in the present embodiment, the lower plate main body 325 and the lower plate cover 340 constituting the lower plate 322 are shown as separate bodies that can be disassembled, but the lower plate main body 325 and the lower plate cover 340 are disassembled. It may be an impossible one. Further, although an example is shown in which the cover standing wall portion 340a of the lower plate cover 340 rises from the upper end of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower plate main body 325, the lower plate cover 340 rises from the bottom wall portion 325a of the lower plate main body 325. The cover standing wall portion 340a may stand up. Further, an example is shown in which the ceiling portion 340b of the lower plate cover 340 extends substantially horizontally from the upper end of the cover standing wall portion 340a, but the ceiling portion 340b of the lower plate cover 340 is the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower plate main body 325. It may extend substantially horizontally from the upper end.

Further, in the present embodiment, an example is shown in which a relief portion 322b for avoiding contact with the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) of the lower plate 322 is provided, but the relief portion 322b is not provided. It may be a lower plate 322.

Further, in the present embodiment, as the lower plate 322 (lower plate main body 325, lower plate cover 340, etc.), a uniform surface without a through hole is shown, but a plurality of penetrations through which the game ball cannot pass are shown. It may have a hole. Specifically, at least a part of the bottom wall portion 325a, the main body standing wall portion 325b, the cover standing wall portion 340a, the ceiling portion 340b, etc. of the lower plate 322 is formed in a fence shape having a gap through which the game ball cannot pass. It may be a thing or a thing formed in a net shape. A light emitting body such as an LED may be arranged in the dish unit cover 326 (mounting space 326j) to illuminate the inside of the lower dish 322 through a fence-like or mesh-like gap of the lower dish 322 (to illuminate the inside of the lower dish 322). ..

In the present embodiment, the lower plate 322 is formed by the lower plate main body 325, the lower plate cover 340, the plate unit base 323, and the plate unit cover 326 (lower plate cover portion 326k), which are separately formed. However, these four members may be integrated to form the lower plate 322 in an appropriate combination. Specifically, the lower plate cover 340 and the lower plate main body 325 are integrated, the lower plate cover 340 and the plate unit cover 326 are integrated, and the lower plate main body 325 and the plate unit cover 326 are integrated. Integrated, lower plate cover 340 and plate unit base 323 integrated, lower plate body 325 and plate unit base 323 integrated, plate unit base 323 and plate unit cover 326 The lower plate body 325, the lower plate cover 340, and the plate unit base 323 are integrated, and the lower plate main body 325, the lower plate cover 340, and the plate unit cover 326 are integrated. , The lower plate cover 340, the plate unit base 323, and the plate unit cover 326 are integrated, the lower plate body 325, the plate unit base 323, and the plate unit cover 326 are integrated, and the lower plate body 325 and The lower plate cover 340, the plate unit base 323, and the plate unit cover 326 may be integrated, or the like.

[3-3b-1. Ball guidance part of the lower plate]
An embodiment of the lower plate 322 of the plate unit 320 including a ball guide portion 322c for guiding a game ball from the lower plate ball supply port 323c to the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a will be described in detail with reference to FIG. .. FIG. 46 (a) is an explanatory view schematically showing an example in which the lower plate is provided with a ball guide portion, and FIG. 46 (b) is an explanatory view schematically showing an example in which the lower plate is provided with a ball guide portion different from that in (a). It is a figure, (c) is explanatory drawing which shows the example which provided the ball guide part further different. In FIG. 46, the same components as described above are designated by the same reference numerals.

In the example of the lower plate 322 in FIG. 46 (a), the diameter of the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is substantially the same as the diameter of the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a at the portion between the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a on the bottom surface of the lower plate 322. It is provided with a pair of ball guiding portions 322c arranged apart from each other on the left and right at a distance. The pair of ball guide portions 322c are formed in a rail shape (protrusion) extending back and forth in a state of protruding from the bottom surface of the lower plate 322. Further, the lower plate 322 is inclined so that the bottom surface thereof becomes lower toward the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a. Therefore, the game ball supplied from the lower plate ball supply port 323c into the lower plate 322 is guided to the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a by the pair of ball guide portions 322c without getting over the ball guide portion 322c, and the lower plate ball It is discharged downward (dollar box) from the punch hole 322a.

Then, in the same manner as described above, the lower plate 322 of this example has the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball behind the lower plate opening 326d of the plate unit cover 326 on the right side (lower plate second region A2). The punch holes 322a are arranged side by side in a straight line in the front-rear direction. Therefore, the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a are located behind the covering wall such as the effect operation unit 400, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a in the plate unit cover 326, and the front end side of the lower plate cover 340. It is not visible from the front.

As described above, since the lower plate 322 of this example includes a pair of ball guide portions 322c, the game ball supplied from the lower plate ball supply port 323c in the state where the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is open. Can be immediately discharged downward (dollar box) from the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a without invading the area on the left side of the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a in the lower plate 322. Since the player cannot see the game balls circulating on the lower plate 322, it is an illusion that the upper plate 321 and the game balls paid out from the payout device 830 are directly discharged to the dollar box. By making it difficult for the game ball to feel the annoyance of passing through the lower plate 322, the player can concentrate on the game (driving operation of the game ball, directing image, etc.) and suppress the decline in interest. Can be done.

In the example of FIG. 46A, a rail-shaped ball guide portion 322c is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the game ball is lowered like a groove extending toward the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a. Anything that can be guided to the countersunk hole 322a may be used.

Next, in the example of the lower plate 322 of FIG. 46 (b), the game ball discharged diagonally forward to the right from the lower plate ball supply port 323c is formed on the right wall portion of the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a in the lower plate 322. The lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is formed in a shape that reflects in the direction of the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a, and a cushioning portion 322d is provided at a portion where the game ball abuts. The buffer portion 322d is made of rubber, foam, or the like.

Similarly to the above, the lower plate 322 of this example also has the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a arranged directly in front of the lower plate ball supply port 323c, and the bottom surface of the lower plate 322 is lowered toward the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a. It is tilted so that it becomes. Therefore. The game ball discharged straight forward from the lower plate ball supply port 323c is discharged downward (dollar box) from the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a as it is. On the other hand, the game ball discharged to the right front from the lower plate ball supply port 323c is reflected in the direction of the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a by the buffer portion 322d, and is discharged downward (dollar box) from the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a. Will be done. At this time, since the game ball abuts on the buffer portion 322d and is reflected, the collision sound at the time of reflection is reduced.

Further, the lower plate 322 of this example is also rearward to the right side of the lower plate opening 326d of the plate unit cover 326 (the effect operation in the effect operation unit 400 and the plate unit cover 326 which is the lower plate second region A2) in the same manner as described above. It is arranged behind the covering wall such as the unit mounting portion 326a and the front end side of the lower plate cover 340) so that it cannot be seen from the front.

As described above, since the lower plate 322 of this example is provided with the cushioning portion 322d on the wall portion that reflects the game ball, even if the game ball is not discharged straight forward from the lower plate ball supply port 323c. The buffer portion 322d can reflect the sound in the direction of the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a and discharge it downward (dollar box) without sound. Therefore, when the game balls and the like paid out from the upper plate 321 and the payout device 830 are discharged to the dollar box, the collision sound of the game balls cannot be heard from the lower plate 322, so that the game balls are directly discharged to the dollar box. By making it difficult for the game ball to feel the annoyance of passing through the lower plate 322, the player can concentrate on the game (driving operation of the game ball, directing image, etc.) and suppress the decline in interest. Can be made to.

Subsequently, in the example of the lower plate 322 of FIG. 46 (c), a portion opposite to the lower plate ball supply port 323c with the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a on the bottom surface (bottom wall portion 325a) of the lower plate 322 in between. It is provided with a return portion 322e that projects upward from the plate and reflects the game ball that has jumped over the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a toward the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a. For the return portion 322e, the same material as the material forming the lower plate 322 may be used, or a cushioning material such as rubber or foam that alleviates the collision sound at the time of reflection may be used. Further, the return portion 322e may not form the side wall of the lower plate 322, or may form a part of the side wall (main body standing wall portion 325b) of the lower plate 322.

In the lower plate 322, the lower plate ball supply port 323c, the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a, and the return portion 322e are arranged in a straight line from the rear to the front, and the lower plate of the plate unit cover 326. Behind the right side of the opening 326d (the effect operation unit 400 which is the second area A2 of the lower plate, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a in the plate unit cover 326, and the rear of the covering wall such as the front end side of the lower plate cover 340). It is arranged so that it cannot be seen from the front. In this lower plate 322, even if the game ball flowing from the lower plate ball supply port 323c to the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a jumps over the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a, the return portion 322e allows the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a side. It can be reflected downward (dollar box) from the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a. Therefore, the same action and effect as described above can be obtained.

In the present embodiment, the ball guiding portion 322c and the buffering portion 322d may be appropriately combined with the lower plate 322. Thereby, the same action and effect as described above can be obtained.

[3-3b-2. Another embodiment of the lower plate]
Another embodiment of the lower plate 322 of the plate unit 320 will be described with reference to FIG. 47. FIG. 47 (a) is an explanatory view schematically showing the lower plate that can be divided, and FIG. 47 (b) is a state in which the storage area of the lower plate is expanded according to the size of the space behind the effect operation unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows, (c) is the explanatory view which shows the lower plate of (b) in a schematic perspective view. In the lower plate 322 shown in FIG. 47, the lower plate main body 325 can be divided with the dividing line PL arranged in the lower plate second region A2 as a boundary. The area indicated by the dotted line hatch in FIG. 47 indicates the remaining space of the mounting space 326j.

First, the lower plate main body 325 (lower plate 322) shown in FIG. 47 (a) constitutes a part of the lower plate first region A1 and the lower plate second region A2, and has a lower plate ball extraction hole 322a. It includes a main body portion 325A and a first extension portion 325B which is attached to the right side of the main body portion 325A and constitutes the remaining area of the lower plate second area A2. The first extension unit 325B is more than the main body unit 325A, and is the remaining space of the mounting space 326j in which the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is accommodated (the effect operation unit 400 and the second effect operation unit 400A). It protrudes into the rear space). As shown in the figure, the first extension portion 325B is formed so that the width in the left-right direction increases from the front to the rear. Further, in the first extension unit 325B, a relief portion 322b for avoiding contact with the second effect operation unit 400A is formed in the right front corner.

Next, in the examples of FIGS. 47 (b) and 47 (c), the rear end of the effect operation unit 400 does not protrude rearward from the front end of the lower plate 322, and is more than the example of FIG. 47 (a). , The space behind the effect operation unit 400 (the remaining space of the mounting space 326j) is widened. The lower plate main body 325 (lower plate 322) is a main body portion 325A that forms a part of the lower plate first region A1 and the lower plate second region A2 and has a lower plate ball extraction hole 322a, and the main body. It is attached to the right side of the part 325A and constitutes the remaining area of the lower plate second area A2, and includes a second extension part 325C which is larger than the first extension part 325B. As shown in the figure, the width of the second extension portion 325C in the left-right direction from the front end to the rear end is formed to be constant, and the storage area of the game ball is formed larger than that of the first extension portion 325B. Further, the lower plate cover 340A having a shape corresponding to the shape of the second extension portion 325C is attached to the lower plate 322 (see FIG. 47 (c)).

In the example shown in FIG. 47, by attaching the first extension unit 325B and the second extension unit 325C to the main body portion 325A, the storage areas of the respective game balls are in a continuous (communication) state, and the storage areas of the game balls are connected. Expands. Further, the boundary between the main body portion 325A and the first extension portion 325B and the second extension portion 325C is a dividing line PL. Further, the first extension unit 325B and the second extension unit 325C in the lower plate main body 325 communicate with a predetermined gap (mounting space 326j) between the effect operation unit 400 and the rear surface of the second effect operation unit 400A. Space) is formed so as to occur.

As described above, in the above example, since the lower plate main body 325 (lower plate 322) has a structure that can be divided and at least one of the divided members can be exchanged, the game ball in the lower plate 322 can be replaced. The storage area can be increased or decreased as needed. Further, since the lower plate main body 325 (lower plate 322) can be divided, the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) attached to the plate unit cover 326 protrudes rearward (inside the mounting space 326j). An extension part (first extension part 325B or second extension part 325C) having a size corresponding to the amount can be attached.

In the above embodiment, the dividing line PL is arranged in the lower plate second region A2 behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), but the dividing line PL is below. It may be arranged on the boundary line between the plate first region A1 and the lower plate second region A2, or may be arranged in the lower plate first region A1.

Further, in the above embodiment, the main body portion 325A of the lower plate main body 325 (lower plate 322) is provided with the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a, but the first extension portion 325B and the second extension portion 325C The lower plate ball extraction hole 322a may be provided.

Further, in the above embodiment, the first extension portion 325B and the second extension portion 325C are attached to the right side of the main body portion 325A of the lower plate main body 325, but the game ball is on the right side of the main body portion 325A. A flat plate-shaped closing member that does not have a storage area may be attached.

Further, in the above embodiment, the lower plate main body 325 in the lower plate 322 has been described, but the lower plate cover 340 can also be divided like the lower plate main body 325, and the first extension portion 325B and the second extension portion can be divided. The shape may be adjusted to the size of 325C.

[3-3c. Dish unit base]
The dish unit base 323 of the dish unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 44 and the like. The dish unit base 323 is attached to the lower side of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100, and has a flat plate shape (rear is opened) extending to the left and right over the entire width of the door frame base 110. It is formed in a shallow box shape).

The plate unit base 323 penetrates back and forth near the upper left corner of the front view and also penetrates back and forth under the upper plate ball supply port 323a and the upper plate ball supply port 323a extending rearward in a tubular shape. A speaker slit 323b composed of a plurality of elongated holes extending vertically and vertically, and a lower plate ball supply port 323c penetrating the front and rear at the lower part on the left side from the center of the left and right in the front view and extending in a tubular shape to the rear. The lower plate ball supply port 323c is provided with an upper plate ball feed port 323d which penetrates back and forth on the upper right side of the front view and extends vertically and whose upper portion is located at the right end of the upper plate main body 324.

Further, the plate unit base 323 includes a ball feed guide path 323e that guides a game ball sent to the rear side of the plate unit base 323 through the upper plate ball feed port 323d to the entrance 251a of the ball feed unit 250, and a ball. After hanging from the lower side of the feed guideway 323e, it extends in a substantially L shape so as to be lowered toward the right side surface of the tubular front view of the lower plate ball supply port 323c, and is extended from the ball outlet 251b of the ball feed unit 250. The ball-extracting taxiway 323f that guides the released game ball to the lower plate ball supply port 323c, the lower end of the ball-feeding taxiway 323e and the upper end of the ball-extracting taxiway 323f on the left side of the front view of the ball-feeding taxiway 323e. With an opening 323g that penetrates back and forth at a height between the two, comes into contact with the operating rod 253c of the ball feeding unit 250, and the operation transmitting portion 327a operated by the upper plate ball removing button 327 protrudes rearward. , Is equipped. The downstream end of the ball-extracting taxiway 323f opens into a cylindrical portion of the lower plate ball supply port 323c.

Further, the dish unit base 323 penetrates back and forth at the lower right corner of the front view, and the handle insertion port 323h through which the cylinder portion 181 of the handle mounting member 180 of the door frame base unit 100 is inserted and the front and rear near the right corner of the front view. 323i is provided with a cylinder insertion port 323i through which the cylinder lock 211 of the opening / closing cylinder unit 210 is inserted.

The upper plate ball supply port 323a of the plate unit base 323 is assembled to the door frame 3, and the front end opens to the rear wall of the upper plate 321 and the tubular rear end is the upper plate passage port of the door frame base 110. It penetrates 117 from the front side and is connected to the front end of the through ball passage 273 of the foul cover unit 270. As a result, the game balls paid out from the payout unit 800 are supplied (paid out) into the upper plate 321 through the upper plate ball supply port 323a.

The lower plate ball supply port 323c, in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3, has a front end opening to the rear wall of the lower plate 322 and a cylindrical rear end penetrating the lower plate passage port 116 of the door frame base 110 from the front side. Then, it is connected to the front end of the ball discharge port 276 of the foul cover unit 270. As a result, the game balls circulating in the storage passage 277 of the foul cover unit 270 are supplied into the lower plate 322 through the lower plate ball supply port 323c. The lower plate ball supply port 323c is arranged behind the effect operation unit 400, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a (right outside of the lower plate opening 326d) in the plate unit cover 326, the front end side of the lower plate cover 340, and the like. When the door frame 3 is viewed from the front, it cannot be seen from the player side through the lower plate opening 326d.

[3-3d. Dish unit cover]
The dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 44 and the like. The plate unit cover 326 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 323 so as to cover the front side of the upper plate main body 324 and the lower plate main body 325. The dish unit cover 326 is provided on both the left and right sides of the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a to which the effect operation unit 400 is mounted and the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a in which the center in the left-right direction bulges forward and the effect operation unit 400 is largely opened forward in the center in the left-right direction. A plate front upper decoration portion 326b formed at substantially the same height as the upper plate 321 and a plate front lower decoration portion 326c formed below each of the left and right plate front upper decoration portions 326b are provided. There is.

The effect operation unit mounting portion 326a is formed so that the left-right direction is about 1/3 of the total width of the dish unit 320 in the left-right direction, and the up-down direction is substantially the same as the height of the dish unit 320 in the up-down direction. It is formed at a height. Further, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a is inclined so that the front end moves rearward as the front end moves upward. Specifically, the front end of the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a is inclined at an angle of 27 degrees with respect to the vertical line.

The front surface of the plate front upper decorative portion 326b moves rearward from the left-right center side of the plate unit cover 326 toward the left and right end sides, and the plate unit cover 326 ends on the left-right center side and the left and right end sides. The middle part is formed in a curved surface shape that slightly bulges forward with respect to the plane connecting the ends of the. Further, the lower end of the plate front upper decorative portion 326b is inclined so as to move upward from the left-right center side of the plate unit cover 326 toward the left and right end sides, and the plate unit cover 326 is inclined to move upward in the left-right direction (center side in the left-right direction). It is formed so as to narrow in the vertical direction from the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a side) toward the left and right end sides. In the plate unit cover 326, an effect selection left button 331 and an effect selection right button 332 are attached to the plate front upper decorative portion 326b on the left side of the front view.

The front surface of the dish front lower decorative portion 326c moves rearward from the left-right center side of the dish unit cover 326 toward the left and right end sides, and the left-right center end and the left-right end side of the dish unit cover 326. It is formed in a curved surface shape such that the middle part is recessed rearward with respect to the plane connecting the ends of the.

A lower plate opening 326d penetrating the front and back is formed in the lower plate front and lower decorative portion 326c on the left side of the front view, and the lower plate 322 faces forward from the lower plate opening 326d. In the lower plate front and lower decorative portion 326c on the left side of the front view, the lower plate ball removal button 333 projects forward from the lower front surface of the lower plate opening 326d. Further, a lower speaker opening 326e made of punching metal is formed on the left side of the lower plate opening 326d in the plate front lower decorative portion 326c on the left side of the front view. The lower speaker port 326e is located in front of the speaker slit 323b of the dish unit base 323 in a state of being assembled in the dish unit 320.

The front lower right decorative portion 326c on the right side of the front view has a handle insertion port 326f that penetrates back and forth at the lower right corner of the front view and into which the cylinder portion 181 of the handle mounting member 180 of the door frame base unit 100 is inserted. A cylinder insertion port 326g, which penetrates back and forth above the handle insertion port 326f near the right corner and into which the cylinder lock 211 of the opening / closing cylinder unit 210 is inserted, is formed.

The plate unit cover 326 has a plate-shaped top plate portion 326h extending from the upper end of the plate front upper decoration portion 326b on the right side of the front view to the front end of the plate unit base 323, and the top plate portion 326h causes the upper plate 321 to have a plate-like top plate portion 326h. It covers the upper right side. An upper plate ball removal button 327, a ball lending button 328, a return button 329, and a ball lending return display unit 330 are attached to the top plate portion 326h.

The dish unit cover 326 includes a flat bottom plate portion 326i extending from the lower end of the dish front lower decorative portion 326c to the front surface of the dish unit base 323. The lower side of the dish unit 320 is closed by the bottom plate portion 326i. The bottom plate portion 326i is formed in a stepped shape so that a portion located below the lower plate 322 is recessed from the lower side to the upper side, and a lower plate ball removing base 335 described later is attached to the portion. Further, in the bottom plate portion 326i, a hole penetrating vertically is formed at a position corresponding to the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a of the lower plate 322.

The dish unit cover 326 is provided with a mounting space 326j that is open forward at the portion of the effect operating unit mounting portion 326a and the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is inserted (accommodated). Further, the plate unit cover 326 extends in a flat plate shape from the left side and the upper side of the lower plate opening 326d to the rear, and includes a lower plate cover portion 326k that covers the lower plate 322 (see FIG. 44). .. The lower plate cover portion 326k is in contact with the upper end of the left side of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower plate main body 325, and the left end of the ceiling portion 340b of the lower plate cover 340 is in contact with the right end. There is.

[3-3e. Upper plate ball removal button]
The upper plate ball removal button 327 of the plate unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 44 and the like. The upper plate ball removal button 327 is attached to the top plate portion 326h of the plate unit cover 326 on the right side of the front view of the upper plate 321. By pressing the upper plate 321, the game ball in the upper plate 321 is moved to the lower plate 322. It can be pulled out. Although detailed illustration of the upper plate ball removal button 327 is omitted, the rear end side is left and right below the top plate portion 326h by the ball removal button holder attached to the lower side of the top plate portion 326h of the plate unit cover 326. It is rotatably mounted around an axis that extends to. The upper end of the ball pulling lever extending vertically is in contact with the lower surface of the front end of the upper plate ball pulling button 327. This ball pulling lever is slidably attached in the vertical direction by a ball pulling base attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 323 below the upper dish ball pulling button 327.

The ball pulling lever whose upper end is in contact with the lower surface of the front end of the upper dish ball pulling button 327 is brought into contact with the upper portion of the upper dish ball pulling slider 327b which is slidably attached up and down by the dish unit base 323 from above. ing. The upper plate ball removing slider 327b includes an operation transmission portion 327a projecting rearward from the rear surface, and in a state where the door frame 3 is assembled, the operation transmission portion 327a is formed from the opening 323g in the plate unit base 323. It projects rearward so as to face it, and abuts from below on the operating rod 253c of the ball removing member 253 in the ball feeding unit 250. The upper plate ball removing slider 327b is urged upward by the upper plate ball removing spring 327c, and by the urging force of the upper plate ball removing spring 327c, the upper plate ball removing slider 327b and the ball removing lever are used. The upper plate ball removal button 327 is located at the rising end.

Therefore, when the upper plate ball removing button 327 is pressed downward against the urging force of the upper plate ball removing spring 327c, the operation transmitting portion 327a of the upper plate ball removing slider 327b moves downward, and the operation transmitting portion 327a of the upper plate ball removing slider 327b moves downward. Since the operating rod 253c of the ball pulling member 253 that is in contact with the upper end side also moves relatively downward, the ball pulling member 253 rotates in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, and the partition portion 253a enters. The partition between the mouth 251a and the ball ejection port 251b is released, and they are in a state of communicating with each other. As a result, the game ball in the upper plate 321 is discharged from the ball outlet 251b of the ball feed unit 250 to the ball extraction guide path 323f of the plate unit 320, and is discharged to the lower plate 322 via the lower plate ball supply port 323c. Can be (supplied).

When the upper plate ball removal button 327 is operated, the lid member 334 closing the lower plate ball removal hole 322a may be moved in conjunction with the operation. As a result, when the upper plate ball removal button 327 is operated, the lid member 334 also moves and the lower plate ball removal hole 322a is opened, so that the game ball discharged from the upper plate 321 to the lower plate 322 is further removed from the lower plate ball. It will be discharged from the hole 322a to the lower dollar box. That is, when the upper plate ball removal button 327 is operated to remove the game ball from the upper plate 321, the game ball of the upper plate 321 is discharged to the dollar box even though the lower plate ball removal button 333 is not operated. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a strong illusion that the game ball of the upper plate 321 is directly discharged to the dollar box, and it is difficult to make the player feel the troublesomeness of the game ball passing through the lower plate 322. It is possible to dedicate the player to the game (driving operation of the game ball, production image, etc.) and suppress the deterioration of the interest. The upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 may be simultaneously opened by driving a drive source such as a motor or a solenoid, or may be simultaneously opened by a mechanical link mechanism.

[3-3f. Ball lending button, return button, and ball lending display section]
The ball lending button 328, the return button 329, and the ball lending return display unit 330 of the plate unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 41. As shown in the figure, the ball lending button 328, the return button 329, and the ball lending return display unit 330 are inside the circular decoration on the right side of the front view of the upper plate ball removing button 327 on the top plate portion 326h of the plate unit cover 326. It is attached to.

The ball lending button 328 inserts cash or a prepaid card into a ball lending machine (not shown) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 and then presses the ball lending button to plate a predetermined number of game balls. It is rented (paid out) into the upper plate 321 of the unit 320. When the return button 329 is pressed while the cash or prepaid card inserted in the ball lending machine is inserted, the cash or prepaid card is returned after deducting the amount of the lent game ball.

Although not shown, the ball lending display unit 330 has a three-digit 7-segment LED arranged under the transparent surface, and the remaining number of cash or prepaid cards inserted into the ball lending machine, or It displays an error code, etc. when the ball lending machine breaks down.

[3-3 g. Production selection left button and production selection right button]
The effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 of the plate unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 41 and the like. As shown in the figure, the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 are attached to the plate unit cover 326 near the right end of the plate front upper decorative portion 326b on the left side of the front view near the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a. The effect selection left button 331 is formed in a triangular shape with one apex facing left. The effect selection right button 332 is formed in a triangular shape with one apex directed to the right on the right side of the effect selection left button 331.

The effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 are used by the player in the game board side effect display device 1600, the door frame side effect display device 460 of the effect operation unit 400, etc., which are arranged in the game area 5a in the front view. On the other hand, when the effect image prompting the selection is displayed, the pressing operation can be accepted, and the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 are operated within a predetermined time to select the desired option. ..

[3-3h. Lower plate ball removal button]
The lower plate ball removal button 333 of the plate unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 44 and the like. The lower plate ball removal button 333 is below the lower plate opening 326d in the plate unit cover 326, which is in front of the lower plate 322, and projects forward from the lower front lower end of the lower plate front lower decoration portion 326c on the left side of the front view. By pressing the lower plate ball removal button 333, the lid member 334 that closes the lower plate ball removal hole 322a of the lower plate 322 can be rotated, and the lid member 334 rotates. The lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is opened, and the game ball stored in the lower plate 322 can be discharged below the plate unit 320.

The lower plate ball removal button 333 can be slid back and forth by the lower plate ball removal base 335 (see FIG. 42 (b)) attached to the bottom plate portion 326i of the plate unit cover 326 under the lower plate body 325. It is attached to. The lower plate ball removal button 333 is arranged to the left of the lower plate ball removal hole 322a of the lower plate 322 (see FIG. 28 and the like).

The lower plate ball removal base 335 has a bottom plate so as to be accommodated in a portion of the bottom plate portion 326i of the plate unit cover 326 that is formed in a stepped shape so as to be recessed from the lower side to the upper side at a position below the lower plate 322. It is attached to the portion 326i. The lower plate ball removing base 335 has a discharge port 335a having the same size as the lower plate ball removing hole 322a and penetrating vertically at a position directly below the lower plate ball removing hole 322a of the lower plate 322. .. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the lid member 334 is arranged between the lower plate main body 325 and the lower plate ball removing base 335. As a result, when the lid member 334 that closes the lower plate ball removal hole 322a of the lower plate 322 is opened, the discharge port 335a of the lower plate ball removal base 335 is also opened, and the lower plate ball removal hole 322a and the discharge port 335a are also opened. And are in a state of communicating with each other.

Although not shown, the lid member 334 is rotatably attached to the lower plate ball removal base 335 about a position to the left of the lower plate ball removal button 333 in a plan view. The lower plate ball removal button 333 is connected to a portion of the lid member 334 that closes the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a and a portion that is rotatably attached by the lower plate ball extraction base 335. As a result, when the lower plate ball removal button 333 is moved in the front-rear direction, the lid member 334 rotates around an axis extending vertically, and the lower plate ball removal hole 322a (discharge port 335a) can be opened and closed.

Although not shown, the lower plate ball removing base 335 has a holding device for holding the lower plate ball removing button 333 when the lower plate ball removing button 333 is pushed backward and moved, and a lower plate ball removing button. A lower plate ball pulling spring that urges the 333 forward is attached. When the lower plate ball removal button 333 protrudes forward and the lower plate ball removal hole 322a is closed by the lid member 334, when the lower plate ball removal button 333 is pressed and moved backward, the lid member 334 rotates. As the lower plate ball removal hole 322a is opened by moving, the lower plate ball removal button 333 is held by the holding device and remains moved to the rear. In this state, even if the lower plate ball removal button 333 is released, the lower plate ball removal button 333 does not move forward, and the lower plate ball removal hole 322a is maintained in an open state, and the lower plate is maintained. The game ball in the 322 can be discharged below the plate unit 320 through the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a and the discharge port 335a.

Then, when the lower plate ball removing button 333 is held by the holding device and the lower plate ball removing hole 322a is opened, pressing the lower plate ball removing button 333 rearward releases the holding by the holding device. In this state, when the pressure of the lower plate ball removing button 333 is released, the lower plate ball removing button 333 moves forward by the urging force of the lower plate ball removing spring, returns to the protruding state, and the lid member 334 rotates. By moving, the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a (discharge port 335a) is closed. As a result, the game ball can be stored in the lower plate 322.

In addition to the pressing operation of the lower plate ball removing button 333, the pressing operation of the upper plate ball removing button 327 also moves the lid member 334 that closes the lower plate ball removing hole 322a (discharge port 335a). The lower plate ball extraction hole 322a may be opened. As a result, when it is desired to discharge the game balls stored in the upper plate 321 to the dollar box arranged below the plate unit 320, simply operating the upper plate ball removal button 327 causes the dollar box via the lower plate 322. It is possible to simplify the labor involved in removing the ball. The upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 may be simultaneously opened by driving a drive source such as a motor or a solenoid, or may be simultaneously opened by a mechanical link mechanism.

[3-4. Overall configuration of the production operation unit]
The overall configuration of the effect operation unit 400 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 48 to 55 and the like. FIG. 48A is a front view of the effect operation unit in the door frame, and FIG. 48B is a right side view of the effect operation unit. Further, FIG. 49A is a perspective view of the effect operation unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 49B is a perspective view of the effect operation unit viewed from the back. FIG. 50 is an explanatory view of the effect operation unit as viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. FIG. 51 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line DD in FIG. 48 (a), and FIG. 52 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line EE in FIG. 48 (b). FIG. 53 (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line FF in FIG. 48 (b), and FIG. 53 (b) is an enlarged view of part A in FIG. 48 (a). FIG. 54 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 55 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. The effect operation unit 400 is attached to the front portion of the plate unit 320 in the center in the left-right direction in the front view, and can be pressed by the player and can present the effect image to the player. Is.

The effect operation unit 400 has a circular outer shape and a transparent central side excluding the outer peripheral edge, and the operation button 410 that can be pressed and operated by the player, and the effect operation unit of the plate unit cover 326 that surrounds the outer periphery of the operation button 410. A frame-shaped frame unit 415 attached to the mounting portion 326a, a decorative substrate unit 420 arranged behind the operation button 410 and capable of emitting and decorating the outer peripheral edge of the operation button 410 and the frame unit 415, and a frame. The base unit 430, which is attached to the rear side of the unit 415 and the operation button 410 and the decorative board unit 420 are attached to the front side, and the base unit 430, which is visible from the player side through the operation button 410, are attached to the effect. It is equipped with a door frame side effect display device 460 capable of displaying an image.

[3-4a. Manual operation button]
The operation buttons 410 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 53 to 56 and the like. FIG. 56A is an exploded perspective view of the operation button disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 56B is an exploded perspective view of the operation button disassembled and viewed from the rear. The operation button 410 is formed in a circular shape having an outer shape slightly smaller than the height of the dish unit 320 in the vertical direction, and the central side excluding the outer peripheral edge is transparently formed. The operation button 410 is formed on a transparent button lens 411 having a circular outer circumference and a curved surface shape (a part of a spherical surface) so that the central side bulges forward, and on the front side of the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. It includes an annular button frame 412 that is attached, and a cylindrical button base 413 that is attached to the rear side of the button frame 412 so as to sandwich the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. The button frame 412 and the button base 413 are formed of members that do not allow light to pass through.

The button lens 411 is formed to have a substantially constant thickness as a whole. Further, the button lens 411 is formed on the surface side in a smooth curved surface shape without unevenness. The button lens 411 extends from the back surface to the center side (inside) with a predetermined length at a position on the inner peripheral side of the button frame 412 in a W-shaped cross section, and is arranged in a row in the circumferential direction. The one-button decorative portion 411a and the first button decorative portion 411a extend along the axis toward the center in a state of being recessed from the back surface in an arc shape at a position on the outer peripheral side, and are lined up within a predetermined angle range in the circumferential direction. It is provided with a plurality of (six) second button decoration portions 411b provided.

As shown in the figure, the first button decorative portion 411a of the button lens 411 extends from the inner circumference of the button frame 412 to the center side when assembled to the operation button 410, and a group on both the left and right sides is a group on both the upper and lower sides. It extends longer to the center than.

The plurality of second button decorative portions 411b of the button lens 411 extend in an arc shape on the same circumference, and are formed three on each of the left and right sides. These second button decoration portions 411b are formed so as to face the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412, and project forward so that the front side thereof is substantially flush with the front surface of the button frame 412.

The button lens 411 exhibits a lens effect in which light is refracted due to irregularities having a W-shaped cross section or an arc-shaped cross section formed on the back surface of the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button decoration portion 411b. Therefore, the rear side is not clearly visible.

The button frame 412 is formed in an annular shape, and includes a plurality (six) frame openings 412a that penetrate in the front-rear direction and extend in an arc shape with a predetermined length in the circumferential direction. The six frame openings 412a are provided on each of the left and right sides, respectively, and correspond to the six second button decorative portions 411b of the button lens 411. The button frame 412 has a plating layer having a metallic luster on its surface.

The button base 413 has a substantially cylindrical main body 413a extending shortly in the front-rear direction, an annular flange 413b protruding outward from the front end of the main body 413a, and a main body 413a from the rear side of the flange 413b. Along the outer circumference of the main body 413a from the rear side of the guide boss portions 413c and the flange portions 413b, which project rearward in a columnar shape along the outer circumference of the flange portion 413b and are arranged in a plurality (four) at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction. The detection pieces 413d, which project rearward in a strip shape and are arranged in a plurality (three) in the circumferential direction, penetrate the flange portion 413b in the front-rear direction on the outside of the main body portion 413a and have a predetermined length along the outer circumference. A plurality (six) base openings 413e extending in the circumferential direction and a cylindrical shape extending forward from the front end of the main body 413a, and the front end side is inside along the inner surface of the button lens 411. It is provided with an inner extension portion 413f that is narrowed to (center side).

The outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411 and the button frame 412 are attached to the outer peripheral surface of the inner extending portion 413f of the button base 413 and the front surface of the flange portion 413b. The four guide boss portions 413c are arranged at portions corresponding to the four corners of the upper, lower, left, and right sides with respect to the circumferential direction of the main body portion 413a. These four guide boss portions 413c are slidably inserted into the holding holes 431b of the unit base 431 in the base unit 430. The three detection pieces 413d are arranged at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction so that two detection pieces 413d are arranged on the upper side and one on the lower side with respect to the circumferential direction of the main body portion 413a. When the operation button 410 is pressed, these three detection pieces 413d are detected by the push detection sensor 440 of the base unit 430.

The six base openings 413e are provided on each of the left and right sides, respectively, and correspond to the second button decoration portion 411b of the button lens 411 and the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412. At the portion of the base opening 413e in the button base 413, a part of the main body portion 413a and the inner extending portion 413f is recessed from the outer peripheral side to the inner side. The inner diameter of the front end of the inner extending portion 413f, which is narrowed inward, substantially coincides with the inner diameter of the button frame 412.

The front surface of the operation button 410 bulges forward in a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical surface) and is transparently formed. The door frame side effect display device 460 is arranged on the rear side. The display screen of is visible from the front. The operation button 410 has four guide boss portions 413c slidably inserted into the holding hole 431b of the unit base 431 in the base unit 430, and the operation button spring 438 inserted into the holding hole 431b of the unit base 431. Is being urged forward by. The operation button 410 is restricted from moving further forward by the urging force of the operation button spring 438 of the base unit 430, which causes the front side of the outer peripheral edge to abut against the frame unit 415, and the urging force of the operation button spring 438. By pressing against the above, the rear end moves rearward until it comes into contact with the front surface of the base unit 430. When the operation button 410 is pressed and moved backward, at least one of the three detection pieces 413d is detected by the pressure detection sensor 440 of the base unit 430. The operation button 410 is operated by the detection of the detection piece 413d by the push detection sensor 440.

Further, the operation button 410 is a first button decoration formed over the entire circumference so as to extend from the inner peripheral end to the central side of the button frame 412 in the transparent button lens 411 in a state where the effect operation unit 400 is assembled. The portion 411a makes it difficult for the player to see the gap between the inner peripheral surface of the button base 413 and the decorative member 432 inside the operation button of the base unit 430.

Further, the operation button 410 closes the front end opening of the cylindrical button base 413 with the button lens 411 and the button frame 412, and the operation button is provided by the button frame 412 attached to the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. With respect to the outer diameter of 410, a transparent portion whose rear is visible is formed so as to be narrowed from the outer circumference to the inside. The presence of the button frame 412 also makes it difficult for the player to see the gap between the inner peripheral surface of the button base 413 and the decorative member 432 inside the operation button of the base unit 430.

Further, when the operation button 410 is assembled to the effect operation unit 400, the rear end of the cylindrical button base 413 (main body portion 413a) passes through the inner peripheral side of the decorative board unit 420 and is closer to the front surface of the decorative board unit 420. It will be in a state of protruding backward. As a result, the light radiated forward from the first LEDs 422a, 423a and the second LEDs 422b, 423b mounted on the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 of the decorative board unit 420, respectively, is a button. It is possible to prevent leakage from the outside to the inside of the base 413, and the operation button left inner decorative board 433, the operation button right inner decorative board 434, the operation button upper inner decorative board 435, and the operation button lower inner of the base unit 430. It is possible to prevent the light emitted forward from the LED mounted on the decorative substrate 436 from leaking from the inside to the outside of the button base 413. Therefore, the first LEDs 422a, 423a and the second LEDs 422b, 423b of the decorative board unit 420, the operation button left inner decorative board 433 of the base unit 430, the operation button right inner decorative board 434, the operation button upper inner decorative board 435, and the operation button It is possible to prevent the LED mounted on the lower inner decorative substrate 436 from being luminescently decorated except for the portion targeted for luminescent decoration, and it is possible to perform luminescent decoration with good appearance.

[3-4b. Frame unit]
The frame unit 415 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 53 to 55 and the like. The frame unit 415 is attached from the front side to the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 so as to surround the outer circumference from the front side of the operation button 410, and decorates the outside of the operation button 410. The outer shape of the frame unit 415 is formed so as to match the front end side of the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a.

The frame unit 415 is a frame-shaped frame main body 416 which is attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320 and has a circular central opening 416a, and the frame main body 416 on both the left and right sides of the central opening 416a. A pair of translucent frame side lenses 417 attached from the rear side, and a translucent frame top lens 418 attached to the frame body 416 above the central opening 416a from the front side. There is.

The frame body 416 has a circular central opening 416a having a diameter smaller than the outer diameter of the operation button 410 and penetrating back and forth, and the center opening 416a penetrating back and forth on both the left and right sides of the center opening 416a. A plurality of (six) outer peripheral openings 416b extending in an arc shape along the peripheral edge of the central opening 416a and notched portions 416c having a predetermined width on the upper front surface of the central opening 416a. , Is equipped. The central opening 416a is formed to have substantially the same size as the diameter on the outer peripheral side of the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412 in the operation button 410. As a result, the front end side of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 can come into contact with the outer peripheral rear side of the frame opening 412a.

The six outer peripheral openings 416b are provided on both the left and right outer sides of the central opening 416a, three each, and are closed by a frame side lens 417 from the rear side. The notch 416c also penetrates in the front-rear direction, and the frame top lens 418 is fitted from the front side.

Further, the frame main body 416 includes a substantially cylindrical inner cylindrical portion 416d extending rearward from a position slightly outside the peripheral edge of the central opening 416a. The inner tubular portion 416d extends rearward from a position between the central opening 416a and the outer peripheral opening 416b, and a portion corresponding to the notch 416c is notched. In the state where the effect operation unit 400 is assembled, the inner cylinder portion 416d has the first LEDs 422a, 423a and the second LEDs 422b, 423b of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 of the decorative board unit 420, respectively. It is located between the first LED 422a and 423a and the second LED 422b and 423b (see FIG. 52).

Further, the frame main body 416 extends outward on each of the upper left and right sides of the outer circumference, and includes a pair of mounting portions 416e to be mounted on the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320. In the frame body 416 (effect operation unit 400), the pair of mounting portions 416e and the left and right side portions of the cutout portion 416c are mounted on the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320.

The frame body 416 is made of metal on substantially the entire surface except for a portion having the same width as the notch 416c on the side opposite to the notch 416c side (the side where the frame top lens 418 is attached) with the central opening 416a in between. A glossy plating layer is formed.

The frame side lens 417 closes the outer peripheral opening 416b formed on each of the left and right sides of the frame body 416 from the rear side. The front surface side of the frame side lens 417 is formed on a smooth surface without unevenness, and a plurality of irregularities along the peripheral edge of the central opening 416a are formed on the rear surface side (see FIGS. 53 and 63). Light is refracted by these plurality of irregularities so that the rear side of the frame side lens 417 cannot be seen.

The frame top lens 418 is formed in a substantially quadrangular outer shape so as to be fitted into the notch 416c of the frame body 416 from the front side. The front side of the frame top lens 418 is smoothly formed. Further, in the frame top lens 418, a plurality of irregularities extending in a zigzag shape along the peripheral edge of the central opening 416a are arranged in a plurality of rows in the radial direction of the central opening 416a on the rear surface side (FIGS. 51 and 63). reference). Light is refracted by these plurality of irregularities so that the rear side of the frame top lens 418 cannot be seen.

In the frame unit 415, with the effect operation unit 400 assembled, the pair of frame side lenses 417 are the second LEDs 422b and 423b of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 of the decorative board unit 420, respectively. The frame top lens 418 is located in front of the frame top lens decorative substrate 437 of the base unit 430, and the second LEDs 422b, 423b, etc. mounted on them enable light emission decoration. ..

[3-4c. Decorative board unit]
The decorative substrate unit 420 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 53 to 57 and the like. FIG. 57 is an exploded perspective view of the decorative substrate unit of the effect operation unit as viewed from the front by disassembling it. The decorative substrate unit 420 is attached to the front surface of the base unit 430 below the frame unit 415, and can illuminate and decorate the second button decorative portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415. Vibration can be applied to the operation unit 400.

The decorative board unit 420 includes a C-shaped board base 421 with an open upper side, an operation button left outer decorative board 422 and an operation button right outer decorative board 423 attached to the front surfaces of the left and right sides of the board base 421, respectively. A vibration motor 424 attached to the lower part of the front surface of the board base 421 and a motor cover 425 attached to the front surface of the board base 421 so as to cover the front side of the vibration motor 424 are provided.

The inner peripheral side of the board base 421 is formed to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the tubular main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410, and the outer peripheral side is larger than the outer diameter of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413. Moreover, it is formed to be smaller than the outer diameter of the frame unit 415.

The left outer decorative substrate 422 of the operation button extends in an arc shape along the front surface of the substrate base 421. The operation button left outer decorative board 422 has a plurality of first LEDs 422a mounted along the inner circumference of the board base 421 on the front side, and a plurality of first LEDs 422a mounted on the inner circumference of the board base 421 radially outside the plurality of first LEDs 422a. It includes a plurality of second LEDs 422b mounted along the line. The right outer decorative substrate 423 of the operation button extends in an arc shape along the front surface of the substrate base 421. The right outer decorative board 423 of the operation button is mounted on the front side along the inner circumference of the board base 421 on the inner circumference of the board base 421 on the outer side in the radial direction from the plurality of first LEDs 423a and the plurality of first LEDs 423a. It includes a plurality of second LEDs 423b mounted along the line. The front and rear sides of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are white.

A weight 424a eccentric to the rotation shaft is attached to the vibration motor 424, and vibration can be generated by rotating the weight 424a.

When the decorative board unit 420 is assembled to the effect operation unit 400, the rear end side of the cylindrical main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 is inserted inside the board base 421. Further, in the decorative substrate unit 420, the first LEDs 422a and 423a of the operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decorative substrate 423 are located behind the second button decorative portion 411b of the operation button 410, respectively. The second LEDs 422b and 423b are located behind the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415. Further, in the state of being assembled to the effect operation unit 400, a frame is placed between the first LEDs 422a and 423a of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 and the second LEDs 422b and 423b, respectively. The inner cylinder portion 416d of the unit 415 is located (see FIG. 52).

Therefore, the decorative board unit 420 emits and decorates only the second button decorative portion 411b of the operation button 410 by the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423, respectively. At the same time, only the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 can be light-emitting and decorated by the light from the second LEDs 422b and 423b, respectively.

Further, the decorative substrate unit 420 can generate vibration by rotating the weight 424a of the vibration motor 424 to vibrate the entire effect operation unit 400.

[3-4d. Base unit]
The base unit 430 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 58 to 60 and the like. FIG. 58 (a) is a perspective view of the base unit of the effect operation unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 58 (b) is a perspective view of the base unit of the effect operation unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 59 is an exploded perspective view of the base unit of the effect operation unit as viewed from the front by disassembling it. Further, FIG. 60 is an exploded perspective view of the base unit of the effect operation unit as viewed from behind by disassembling. The base unit 430 of the effect operation unit 400 is attached to the operation button 410 so as to be able to advance and retreat in the front-rear direction, and is attached to the rear side of the frame unit 415.

The base unit 430 consists of four through holes 431a attached to the rear side of the frame unit 415 and penetrating in a substantially quadrangular shape extending vertically at the center, and four stop holes opened forward on the outside of the through holes 431a. An annular unit base 431 having a holding hole 431b, and an operation button internal decoration member 432 which is attached so as to cover the through hole 431a on the front surface of the unit base 431 and has a short tubular shape in the front-rear direction and has translucency. The operation button left inner decorative board 433, the operation button right inner decorative board 434, and the operation button inner decorative member 432 attached to the left and right sides of the through holes 431a on the front surface of the unit base 431 behind the button inner decorative member 432, respectively. The operation button upper inner decorative board 435 and the operation button lower inner decorative board 436 attached to the upper and lower sides of the through hole 431a on the front surface of the unit base 431 at the rear, and the frame top lens attached to the upper front surface of the unit base 431. It includes a decorative substrate 437.

Further, the base unit 430 includes four operation button springs 438 inserted into the four holding holes 431b of the unit base 431, three sensor holders 439 mounted on the front surface of the unit base 431, and each sensor holder. Three pressure detection sensors 440, which are attached to the 439 respectively to detect the pressing operation of the operation button 410, the effect operation unit relay board 441 attached to the rear side of the unit base 431, and the effect operation unit relay board 441. A relay board cover 442 attached to the rear side of the unit base 431 so as to cover the rear side is provided.

The unit base 431 has a substantially circular outer shape, and is formed to be slightly smaller than the outer shape of the frame unit 415. The unit base 431 penetrates back and forth at the center, and a substantially quadrangular through hole 431a extending vertically is formed. The through hole 431a has a size that fits within the cylindrical main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410, and is formed to a size that allows the display screen of the door frame side effect display device 460 to be inserted. A door frame side effect display device 460 is attached to the rear side of the unit base 431.

The four holding holes 431b of the unit base 431 are formed at four corners on the outer side of the through hole 431a at the upper, lower, left, and right corners corresponding to the four guide boss portions 413c of the button base 413 of the operation button 410. The inner diameter of these holding holes 431b is formed to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the guide boss portion 413c, and the guide boss portion 413c can be slidably inserted.

More specifically, the holding hole 431b on the upper left side of the four holding holes 431b is from the vertically extending center line passing through the center of the unit base 431 (the center of the operation button 410) to the center of the unit base 431. It is formed at a position rotated about 30 degrees in the counterclockwise direction. Further, the holding hole 431b on the upper right side of the four holding holes 431b is clockwise from the center line extending vertically through the center of the unit base 431 (the center of the operation button 410) with respect to the center of the unit base 431. It is formed at a position rotated about 47 degrees in the direction of. On the other hand, the two holding holes 431b arranged on the lower side of the four holding holes 431b are formed at positions opposite to the center of the unit base 431 with respect to the upper two holding holes 431b, respectively. ..

Further, the unit base 431 has a light-shielding wall portion 431c that protrudes forward in a flat plate shape from the portion where the inner decorative substrate 435 on the operation button is attached and the portion where the frame top lens decorative substrate 437 is attached in the upper part of the front surface. It has. With this light-shielding wall portion 431c, the frame top lens 418 can be light-emitting decorated only by the frame top lens decorative substrate 437.

The decorative member 432 inside the operation button is formed in a curved surface shape so that the substantially cylindrical peripheral wall portion 432a extending shortly in the front-rear direction and the front end side of the peripheral wall portion 432a are closed and the center protrudes forward. A front plate portion 432b, a rectangular opening 432c that penetrates the front plate portion 432b in the front-rear direction and extends vertically, a flange portion 432d that extends outward from the rear end of the peripheral wall portion 432a, and a flange portion 432d. It is provided with a plurality of mounting bosses 432e, which project rearward from the surface and are mounted on the unit base 431.

The outer diameter of the peripheral wall portion 432a of the operation button inner decorative member 432 is formed to be substantially the same as the inner diameter of the button frame 412 of the operation button 410. The opening 432c penetrating the front plate portion 432b is formed to have substantially the same size as the display screen of the door frame side effect display device 460.

In the operation button interior decorative member 432, the outer peripheral surface of the peripheral wall portion 432a and the front surface of the front plate portion 432b are formed on a smooth surface without unevenness.

The operation button internal decoration member 432 is formed on the inner peripheral surface of the peripheral wall portion 432a, is recessed in an arc shape and extends in the front-rear direction, and has a plurality of first button internal decoration portions 432f provided in the circumferential direction. , It is formed on the rear surface of the front plate portion 432b, bulges in an arc shape, extends into a variable octagonal shape centered on the center of the front plate portion 432b, and is concentric circles centered on the center of the front plate portion 432b. It is provided with a second button internal decoration portion 432 g (see FIG. 63), which is provided in a plurality of shapes. The second button inner decorative portion 432g is formed so as to have a portion extending parallel to the four inner periphery of the opening 432c.

The decorative member 432 inside the operation button is formed of a transparent member. The rear part of the operation button interior decoration member 432 cannot be clearly seen due to the lens effect of the first button interior decoration portion 432f of the peripheral wall portion 432a and the second button interior decoration portion 432g of the front plate portion 432b. ..

The operation button left inner decorative board 433, the operation button right inner decorative board 434, the operation button upper inner decorative board 435, and the operation button lower inner decorative board 436 each have a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front side, and these LEDs are mounted. By emitting light, the decorative member 432 inside the operation button can be made to emit light. By luminescent decoration of the operation button inner decoration member 432, the inside of the operation button 410 and the outside of the door frame side effect display device 460 can be luminescently decorated.

A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the frame top lens decoration substrate 437, and the frame top lens 418 in the frame unit 415 can be light-emitting and decorated by emitting light from these LEDs.

The LEDs mounted on the operation button left inner decorative board 433, the operation button right inner decorative board 434, the operation button upper inner decorative board 435, the operation button lower inner decorative board 436, and the frame top lens decorative board 437 are full-color LEDs, respectively. It is said that. The front surface of the operation button left inner decorative board 433, the operation button right inner decorative board 434, the operation button upper inner decorative board 435, the operation button lower inner decorative board 436, and the frame top lens decorative board 437 is white. ..

The operation button spring 438 is a coil spring, and is inserted from the front into the four holding holes 431b in the unit base 431. When the operation button spring 438 is assembled to the effect operation unit 400, the rear end is in contact with the bottom surface of the holding hole 431b, and the front end is a guide boss projecting rearward from the main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410. It is in contact with the rear end of the portion 413c. These operation button springs 438 urge the operation button 410 forward.

The three pressure detection sensors 440 are arranged at positions corresponding to the three detection pieces 413d of the button base 413 on the operation button 410. More specifically, in the front surface of the unit base 431, one of the three pressure detection sensors 440 is on the lower left side of the upper left holding hole 431b, the other is on the lower right side of the upper right holding hole 431b, and the other one is on the lower left side. It is attached to the lower right side of the holding hole 431b of the above via the sensor holder 439, respectively. The three pressure detection sensors 440 are mounted at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction around the center of the unit base 431. These three pressure detection sensors 440 can detect the three detection pieces 413d of the operation button 410.

The effect operation unit relay board 441 is attached to the rear side of the unit base 431 on the left side (right side of the front view) of the through hole 431a in the rear view. The effect operation unit relay board 441 includes an operation button left outer decorative board 422, an operation button right outer decorative board 423, a vibration motor 424, an operation button left inner decorative board 433, an operation button right inner decorative board 434, and an operation button upper inner decorative board. 435, decorative board under the operation button 436, frame top lens decorative board 437, pressure detection sensor 440, and door frame side effect display device 460 for relaying the connection between the door frame base unit 100 and the door body relay board. It is a thing.

The relay board cover 442 extends from the lower end of the portion covering the rear side of the effect operation unit relay board 441 to the left in the front view, and includes a leg portion 442a attached to the lower rear surface of the unit base 431. The leg portion 442a of the relay board cover 442 extends substantially horizontally on the lower surface when assembled on the door frame 3, and is between the leg portion 442a and the bottom plate portion 326i forming the bottom surface of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320. A slight gap is formed in (see FIG. 26). As a result, when the operation button 410 or the frame unit 415 is strongly pressed or hit downward, the frame unit 415 is used until the lower surface of the leg portion 442a comes into contact with the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the dish unit cover 326. The impact can be absorbed by bending the mounting portion 416e, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326, and the like downward. After the lower surface of the leg portion 442a comes into contact with the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i, the movement of the effect operating unit 400 is restricted downward, and the effect unit mounting portion of the frame unit 415 mounting portion 416e and the dish unit cover 326 is restricted. It is possible to prevent the 326a and the like from being subjected to an unreasonable force and prevent their damage.

[3-4e. Door frame side production display device]
The door frame side effect display device 460 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 54 and 55. The door frame side effect display device 460 is attached to the rear side of the unit base 431 so that the display screen faces forward from the opening 432c of the operation button interior decorative member 432 in the base unit 430, and the operation button 410 is transparent. The display screen can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the central portion, and the effect image can be displayed on the display screen.

The door frame side effect display device 460 is attached to the rear side of the liquid crystal display device 461 having a square display screen on the front side and the liquid crystal display device 461, and is attached to the rear side of the unit base 431 of the base unit 430. It is provided with a bottomed square tubular mounting bracket 462. The liquid crystal display device 461 is a commercially available color liquid crystal display having an aspect ratio of 16: 9 and a diagonal length of about 4.3 inches. The outer circumference of the mounting bracket 462 is formed to have the same shape as the outer circumference of the liquid crystal display device 461, and the bottom of the bottomed cylinder is attached so as to be in contact with the rear surface of the liquid crystal display device 461.

When the door frame side effect display device 460 is assembled to the effect operation unit 400, the liquid crystal display device 461 penetrates the through hole 431a of the unit base 431 from the rear side, and the inside of the peripheral wall portion 432a of the decorative member 432 inside the operation button. (See FIG. 51). The front surface (display screen) of the liquid crystal display device 461 is located near the front end of the peripheral wall portion 432a of the decorative member 432 inside the operation button, and faces forward from the opening 432c penetrating the front plate portion 432b.

The door frame side effect display device 460 can display a predetermined effect image based on the control signal from the peripheral control board 1510 on the liquid crystal display device 461.

[3-4f. Effect of production operation unit]
The operation and effect of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 61 to 63 and the like. FIG. 61 is an explanatory view showing a state in which the operation button is pressed in the cross-sectional view of the effect operation unit of FIG. 51. FIG. 62A shows a production operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends, and a part of the operation button is cut out to be hidden by a first button decoration part of the operation button, a button frame, or the like. It is explanatory drawing which shows the part, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the part to hide by the 1st button decoration part of the operation button, the button frame, etc. in the cross-sectional view of the effect operation unit. FIG. 63 (a) is an explanatory view showing the appearance of the effect operation unit as a perspective view seen from the front, and FIG. 63 (b) is an explanatory view of the appearance of the effect operation unit seen from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. Is.

The effect operation unit 400 of the present embodiment can show the effect image to the player according to the game state that changes when the game ball is driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and is operated by the player. It is possible to entertain the player by having the player participate in the effect presented to the player by operating the button 410.

The overall height of the effect operation unit 400 is formed to be substantially the same as the height of a portion of the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 below the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110. Further, the total width of the effect operation unit 400 is formed to be slightly larger than 1/3 of the total width of the door frame 3. The effect operation unit 400 is arranged in the center in the left-right direction on the lower side of the game area 5a (the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110) in the front view.

In the effect operation unit 400, the upper portion of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 is attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320. When the effect operation unit 400 is attached to the plate unit 320, a gap is provided between the lower surface of the leg portion 442a of the relay board cover 442, which is the bottom surface, and the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320. Is formed. That is, the effect operation unit 400 is attached only to the upper part of the dish unit 320, and is attached in a suspended state.

Further, in the effect operation unit 400, the front surface of the frame unit 415 (the surface formed by the inner circumference of the front end of the central opening 416a of the frame body 416) is parallel to the inclined surface of the front end opening of the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a. It is installed like this. As a result, in the effect operation unit 400, the central axis CL of the transparent operation button 410 that bulges forward in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface) is at an angle of 63 degrees with respect to the vertical line. It is tilted so that it moves upward as it goes forward. As a result, when the player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1 in order to play a game using the pachinko machine 1, the player's head is arranged above the plate unit 320 (directing operation unit 400). Since it is located in front of the center of the game area 5a on the game board 5, the central axis CL of the operation button 410 passes near the player's head. Therefore, when the player looks down from the game area 5a to the effect operation unit 400 (operation button 410), the operation button 410 is as close as possible to the front view (projected view from a direction parallel to the central axis CL). It can be seen in a state, and the operation button 410, the door frame side effect display device 460 in the operation button 410, and the like can be visually recognized in a good state.

In the effect operation unit 400, the four guide boss portions 413c of the operation button 410 are slidably inserted into the four holding holes 431b of the base unit 430, and are urged forward by the operation button spring 438. In the normal state (when the operation button 410 is not pressed), the effect operation unit 400 causes the front end of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 to be the frame unit 415 due to the urging force of the operation button spring 438. It is in contact with a portion of the rear surface of the frame body 416 near the central opening 416a.

In a normal state, the effect operation unit 400 projects forward from the vicinity of the inner circumference of the button frame 412 of the operation button 410 to the center side (center axis CL side) from the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415. There is. In other words, in the transparent button lens 411 that bulges forward in the shape of a curved surface (a part of a substantially spherical surface) of the operation button 410, the portion that protrudes forward from the inner circumference (inside) of the button frame 412 is , The frame unit 415 projects forward from the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 (see FIG. 51 and the like).

Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the diameter of the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 in the frame unit 415 is about 15 cm, and the button lens 411 (front end) is the frame unit with respect to the central axis CL direction of the operation button 410. It protrudes about 4 cm forward from the front surface of the 415.

In a normal state, when the player presses the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400, the operation button 410 moves backward along the central axis CL against the urging force of the operation button spring 438. Then, when the rear end of the operation button 410 comes into contact with the front surface of the unit base 431 of the base unit 430, the rearward movement is restricted and the rearward movement of the operation button 410 is stopped. When the player presses the operation button 410, he presses the button lens 411 that bulges forward in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface).

Since the outer diameter of the operation button 410 is formed to be much larger than that of the operation button for production provided in the conventional pachinko machine, the vicinity of the peripheral edge away from the central portion of the button lens 411 is pressed. It is likely to be done. More specifically, the operation buttons for effect in the conventional pachinko machine are attached so that the central axis extends substantially parallel to the vertical line, whereas the operation buttons 410 of the effect operation unit 400 of the present embodiment. Since the central axis CL is attached at an angle with respect to the vertical line, when the player presses the operation button 410 from above as in the conventional pachinko machine, as shown by the white arrow in FIG. The portion of the operation button 410 away from the central axis CL is pressed.

By the way, in the operation buttons for directing in the conventional pachinko machine, since the surface to be pressed by the player is formed on a flat surface, when the operation button is enlarged while the part to be pressed is a flat surface. , If you press a part that is off the center of the operation button, the surface to be pressed will tilt so that the pressed part will retract first, and the operation button will not be able to retract straight, so you can press the operation button. There is a risk that the pressing operation will not be possible.

On the other hand, the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 of the present embodiment has a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical surface) in which a portion (button lens 411) to be pressed by the player is bulged forward. Therefore, when a position away from the center of the operation button 410 is pressed, the force is distributed to the entire operation button 410 to make it difficult for the operation button 410 to tilt, and the operation button 410 moves straight backward. Can be done. Therefore, no matter which position on the front side of the operation button 410 is pressed, the operation button 410 can be smoothly retracted without tilting, so that the pressing operation can be reliably detected and the operation button 410 is pressed. You can fully enjoy the production of operation.

Further, in the effect operation unit 400, the vibration motor 424 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the substrate base 421 of the decorative substrate unit 420, and as described above, only the upper part is a plate so that the effect operation unit 400 can be hung. Since it is attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the unit cover 326, when the weight 424a is rotated by the vibration motor 424 to generate vibration, the vibration is generated at the part farthest from the mounted part. , The entire effect operation unit 400 can be vibrated greatly (strongly), and the vibration can be transmitted to the player who is in contact with the effect operation unit 400. Further, since the vibration motor 424 is arranged directly under the position (the position of the white arrow in FIG. 61) where the player is relatively easy to press, the operation button 410 is pressed against the player. It is possible to transmit strong vibrations, which can surprise the player and entertain the production.

Further, the effect operation unit 400 is attached to the dish unit cover 326 in a suspended state, and the lower surface of the leg portion 442a of the relay board cover 442 forming the lower surface and the bottom plate of the dish unit cover 326. Since a gap is formed between the upper surface of the portion 326i and the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i, the frame is formed until the lower surface of the leg portion 442a abuts on the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i when the operation button 410 is strongly pressed or hit. The impact can be absorbed by bending the mounting portion 416e of the unit 415, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326, and the like downward. Further, after the lower surface of the leg portion 442a abuts on the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i, the downward movement of the effect operation unit 400 is restricted, and the effect operation unit attachment of the frame unit 415 attachment portion 416e and the dish unit cover 326 is restricted. It is possible to prevent an unreasonable force from acting on the portion 326a or the like, and it is possible to prevent damage to the effect operation unit 400 or the like. Therefore, even if the operation button 410 is pressed or hit with a strong force when the player is presented with an effect of pressing the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400, the operation button 410 or the effect operation unit Since the 400 etc. are not damaged, it is possible to avoid interruption of the game due to the damage, suppress the deterioration of the player's interest, and increase the burden on the game hall side by making it hard to be damaged. It can be suppressed.

As described above, since the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 that the player presses and operates is formed in a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical surface) protruding forward, it is made into a flat plate shape. The strength and rigidity are higher than in the case, and even if the lens is hit strongly, the impact can be dispersed over the entire button lens 411, and the lens is less likely to be damaged.

Further, as shown in FIG. 63, in the effect operation unit 400, the button lens 411, the frame side lens 417, the frame top lens 418, and the operation button interior decorative member 432 are made of transparent members. The front side (player side) is decorated with irregularities such as the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the first button inner decoration portion 432f, and the second button inner decoration portion 432g formed on the back surface side. ) Can be visually recognized. In addition, in the part where the uneven decoration is formed, the light is refracted in a complicated manner due to the change in the plate thickness, so that it is difficult to see the rear side through the part where the uneven decoration is formed. ..

Since the effect operation unit 400 includes a first button decoration portion 411a extending from the inner circumference of the button frame 412 in the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 toward the center side, the uneven decoration of the first button decoration portion 411a is provided. This makes it difficult to see the rear part of the outer peripheral edge of the part inside the button lens 411. Behind the portion where the first button decoration portion 411a is formed (rear in the central axis CL direction), the inner peripheral surface of the main body portion 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and the peripheral wall portion of the operation button inner decoration member 432. A gap is located between the outer peripheral surface of the 432a, and the first button decorative portion 411a located in front of the gap allows the outer peripheral gap of the decorative member 432 inside the operation button to be opened from the front side (player side). It can be difficult to see. As a result, even if the operation button internal decoration member 432 having a fixed position is provided in the operation button 410 that can be pressed, it is possible to prevent the operation button 410 from deteriorating in appearance, and the operation button 410 is seen. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable, and the decorative member 432 inside the operation button can be arranged without any problem in the transparent operation button 410, so that the appearance of the operation button 410 can be improved.

More specifically, the effect operation unit 400 is formed by the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, and the button frame 412 of the button lens 411 in the operation button 410, thereby forming the outer periphery of the operation button inner decoration member 432 of the base unit 430. The unit base 431, the decorative substrate unit 420, and the like, which are on the outer side and on the rear side (back side), are formed so as not to be seen from the player side through the transparent button lens 411. Specifically, in FIG. 62, the portion of the cross hatch surrounded by the alternate long and short dash line is hidden from the player side. As described above, since the operation button 410 is provided with the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the button frame 412, and the like, the outside and the back side of the operation button interior decoration member 432 are obscured and hidden. This makes it possible to improve the appearance of the operation button 410 and, by extension, the effect operation unit 400 as a whole.

Further, in the effect operation unit 400, the first button decoration portion 411a of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 extends toward the central axis CL of the operation button 410 and is arranged in a row in the circumferential direction. The second button inner decoration portion 432g formed on the front plate portion 432b of the operation button inner decoration member 432 arranged behind the inside of the operation button 410 extends into a variable octagonal shape centered on the central axis CL. As shown in FIG. 63, the uneven line of the first button decorative portion 411a and the concave-convex line of the second button inner decorative portion 432g intersect with each other and are geometrically arranged. The decoration can be shown to the player.

Further, in the effect operation unit 400, since the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button inner decoration portion 432g are separated from each other in the front-rear direction (the direction in which the central axis CL extends), the effect operation unit 400 is separated from the first button decoration portion 411a. With the decoration portion 432g inside the second button, it is possible to show the player a geometric pattern having a three-dimensional feeling with depth, and it is possible to enjoy the decoration including the inside of the operation button 410.

Further, in the effect operation unit 400, since the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button inner decoration portion 432g are separated in the front-rear direction, when the position of the player's eyes moves, the unevenness of the first button decoration portion 411a Since the degree of overlap between the line and the uneven line of the decorative portion 432 g in the second button changes, the moving decoration can be shown to the player, and the player can be entertained.

In this way, the effect operation unit 400 gives the player a moving and three-dimensional decoration by the first button decoration part 411a of the operation button 410 and the second button inner decoration part 432g of the operation button inner decoration member 432. Since it can be shown, it is possible to strongly attract the interest of the player, and it is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 with high appealing power.

Further, the effect operation unit 400 is inside the operation button 410 (inside the button frame 412), and behind the operation button inner decoration member 432, the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, and the operation button. The upper inner decorative board 435 and the lower inner decorative board 436 are arranged, and by making a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of them emit light, the operation button inner decorative member 432 in the operation button 410 emits light. Can be decorated. That is, the inside of the operation button 410 can be light-emitting decorated by the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, and the operation button lower inner decoration board 436. As shown in FIG. 52, the LEDs mounted on the front surfaces of the operation button left inner decorative board 433, the operation button right inner decorative board 434, the operation button upper inner decorative board 435, and the operation button lower inner decorative board 436 are as shown in FIG. When viewed from the extending direction of the central axis CL, since they are arranged inside the cylindrical main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410, the light from them does not leak to the outside of the main body 413a. , Only the inside of the operation button 410 can be luminescent and decorated satisfactorily.

Further, the effect operation unit 400 is located behind the second button decorative portion 411b facing from the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412 located near the outer periphery of the operation button 410, and the operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 of the decorative substrate unit 420. The first LED 422a and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are arranged, and by causing the first LEDs 422a and 423a to emit light, the six second button decoration portions 411b of the operation button 410 are light-emitting and decorated. Can be done. As shown in FIG. 52, the first LED 422a of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are a cylindrical main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and a frame unit. It is located between the cylindrical inner cylinder portion 416d of the frame body 416 of the 415, and the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a does not leak to the inside of the main body portion 413a or the outside of the inner cylinder portion 416d, and the operation is performed. Only the second button decoration portion 411b of the button 410 can be satisfactorily luminescent and decorated.

Further, the effect operation unit 400 has a second LED 422b of the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and an operation button right outer decoration board behind the frame side lens 417 facing from the six outer peripheral openings 416b of the frame body 416 in the frame unit 415. The second LED 423b of the 423 is arranged, and the frame side lens 417 can be light-emitting and decorated by causing the second LEDs 422b and 423b to emit light. The second LED 422b of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the second LED 423b of the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are located between the cylindrical inner tubular portion 416d of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 and the outer periphery of the frame body 416. It is located so that the light from the second LEDs 422b and 423b does not leak to the inside of the inner cylinder portion 416d or the outside of the frame body 416, and only the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 can be luminescently decorated satisfactorily. ..

Further, the effect operation unit 400 has a plurality of frame top lens decorative substrates 437 in the base unit 430 arranged behind the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415 and mounted on the front surface of the frame top lens decorative substrate 437. The frame top lens 418 can be light-emitting and decorated by emitting light from the LED. From the lower side of the portion of the base unit 430 where the frame top lens decorative substrate 437 of the unit base 431 is attached, a flat plate-shaped light-shielding wall portion 431c projects forward to the vicinity of the lower end rear of the frame top lens 418, and the frame. The light from the LED of the top lens decoration substrate 437 does not leak to the operation button 410 or the frame side lens 417 side, and only the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415 can be satisfactorily luminescent and decorated.

[3-4 g. Overall configuration of the second embodiment of the production operation unit]
Next, the second effect operation unit 400A, which is the second embodiment of the effect operation unit 400, will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 64 to 71 and the like. FIG. 64 (a) is a front view of the second effect operation unit having a different embodiment from the effect operation unit of FIGS. 48 to 63, and FIG. 64 (b) is a right side view of the second effect operation unit. FIG. 65 (a) is a perspective view of the second effect operation unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 65 (b) is a perspective view of the second effect operation unit viewed from the back. FIG. 66 is an explanatory view of the second effect operation unit as viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. FIG. 67 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line GG in FIG. 64 (a). FIG. 68 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line HH in FIG. 64 (b). 69 (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line I-I in FIG. 64 (b), and FIG. 69 (b) is an enlarged view of part A in (a). FIG. 70 is an exploded perspective view of the second effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 71 is an exploded perspective view of the second effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from behind. It is a figure.

The second effect operation unit 400A can be attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit 320 in place of the above effect operation unit 400. Similar to the effect operation unit 400, the second effect operation unit 400A can be pressed by the player and can present the effect image to the player. Hereinafter, in the second effect operation unit 400A, the same components as the effect operation unit 400 will be described with the same reference numerals.

The second effect operation unit 400A has a circular outer shape and a transparent central side excluding the outer peripheral edge, and the operation button 410 that can be pressed and operated by the player, and the plate unit cover 326 that surrounds the outer periphery of the operation button 410. A frame-shaped frame unit 415 attached to the operation unit mounting portion 326a, and a decorative board unit 420 arranged behind the operation button 410 and capable of emitting and decorating the outer peripheral edge of the operation button 410 and the frame unit 415. The second base unit 450, which is mounted on the rear side of the frame unit 415 and has the operation button 410 and the decorative board unit 420 mounted on the front side, and the second base unit 450, which is visible from the player side through the operation button 410. The door frame side second effect display device 460A, which is attached to the door frame side second effect display device 460A, and the buffer unit 510 attached to the lower surface of the door frame side second effect display device 460A are provided.

Further, the second effect operation unit 400A covers the surfaces of the second effect operation unit relay board 515 and the second effect operation unit relay board 515 attached to the right side surface of the door frame side second effect display device 460A in the front view. A relay board cover 516 attached to the right side surface of the door frame side second effect display device 460A so as to cover it is provided. The second effect operation unit relay board 515 and the relay board cover 516 are attached to the right side surface of the projector mounting member 505 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A in the front view.

The second production operation unit relay board 515 includes an operation button left outer decorative board 422, an operation button right outer decorative board 423, a vibration motor 424, a pressure detection sensor 454, a frame top lens decorative board 482, a switching drive motor 492, and a projector 500. The purpose is to relay the connection between the rotation detection sensor 507 and the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100.

[3-4g-1. Manual operation button]
The operation button 410 of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 69 to 72 and the like. FIG. 72 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button of the second effect operation unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 72 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button of the second effect operation unit disassembled and viewed from behind. It is a figure. The operation button 410 of the second effect operation unit 400A is formed in a circular shape having an outer shape slightly smaller than the height of the dish unit 320 in the vertical direction, and the central side excluding the outer peripheral edge is transparently formed. The operation button 410 has a transparent button lens 411 formed in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface) so that the outer circumference is circular and the central side bulges forward, and the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. It is provided with an annular button frame 412 attached to the front side and a cylindrical button base 413 attached to the rear side of the button frame 412 so as to sandwich the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. It has substantially the same configuration as the operation button 410 of the operation unit 400.

The specific difference is that the operation button 410 of the second production operation unit 400A and the operation button 410 of the production operation unit 400 have the pattern of the first button decoration portion 411a of the button lens 411 and the guide boss of the button base 413. The shape of the portion 413c is different.

More specifically, as shown in the figure, the first button decorative portion 411a of the operation button 410 in the second effect operation unit 400A has one apex toward the center side of the button lens 411 at a portion in contact with the inner circumference of the button frame 412. A right-angled triangle and a triangle with one apex facing away from the center are arranged in multiple rows alternately over the entire circumference in the circumferential direction, and a button lens 411 in the truss-shaped pattern. A right-angled triangular pattern composed of a base facing the center side of the surface, a side extending from both ends of the base toward the center of the button lens 411, and an oblique side extending from the tip of the side to the center of the base. And the diagonal side of the right-angled triangle pattern, the side extending from the center of the base of the triangle of the truss-like pattern to the center side of the button lens 411 longer than the right-angled triangle pattern, and the right-angled triangle shape from the tip of that side. It is formed by a modified isosceles triangular pattern composed of a side extending to the tip of the diagonal side of the pattern of.

That is, the first button decoration portion 411a is composed of a combination of a plurality of triangles. Although not shown, each triangle constituting the first button decorative portion 411a has its own surface facing in a different direction and is formed in a polyhedral shape. As a result, the front surface side of the button lens 411 is formed in a smooth curved surface shape, whereas the back surface side is formed in a polyhedral shape at the portion of the first button decoration portion 411a, so that the first button decoration portion 411a is formed. The plate thickness of the button lens 411 changes in a complicated manner at this portion, and the light passing through this portion is diffusely refracted. Therefore, at the portion of the first button decoration portion 411a, it is possible to show the player a geometric pattern in which a plurality of triangles are combined, and at the same time, it is possible to make the rear member difficult to see due to diffuse refraction.

The guide boss portion 413c in the button base 413 of the second effect operation unit 400A is formed in a cylindrical shape with the rear side open. The guide boss portion 413c is inserted into the holding hole 451d of the second base unit 450, and the button shaft 452 is held in the holding hole 451d of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 inside the cylindrical shape. Is slidably inserted. In this example, the operation button 410 is attached to the guide boss portion 413c so as to be able to advance and retreat in the front-rear direction by the button shaft 452 of the second base unit 450 inserted from the rear.

[3-4g-2. Frame unit]
The frame unit 415 of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 69 to 71 and the like. The frame unit 415 is attached from the front side to the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 so as to surround the outer circumference from the front side of the operation button 410, and decorates the outside of the operation button 410. The outer shape of the frame unit 415 is formed so as to match the front end side of the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a.

The frame unit 415 of the second effect operation unit 400A has the same configuration as the frame unit 415 of the effect operation unit 400, and is designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

[3-4g-3. Decorative board unit]
The decorative substrate unit 420 of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 57, 69 to 71 and the like. The decorative substrate unit 420 is attached to the front surface of the second base unit 450 below the frame unit 415, and can illuminate the second button decorative portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415. , The second effect operation unit 400A can be made to vibrate.

The decorative board unit 420 includes a C-shaped board base 421 with an open upper side, an operation button left outer decorative board 422 and an operation button right outer decorative board 423 attached to the front surfaces of the left and right sides of the board base 421, respectively. A vibration motor 424 attached to the lower part of the front surface of the board base 421 and a motor cover 425 attached to the front surface of the board base 421 so as to cover the front side of the vibration motor 424 are provided.

The decorative board unit 420 of the second effect operation unit 400A has the same configuration as the decorative board unit 420 of the effect operation unit 400, and is designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

[3-4g-4. Second base unit]
The second base unit 450 of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 73 and the like. FIG. 73 is a perspective view of the second base unit of the second effect operation unit as viewed from the front. The second base unit 450 of the second effect operation unit 400A has an operation button 410 attached so as to be able to advance and retreat in the front-rear direction, and a door frame side second effect display device 460A is attached and attached to the rear side of the frame unit 415. It is something that can be done.

The second base unit 450 protrudes from the front surface of the unit base 451 attached to the rear side of the frame unit 415 and the rear of the four cylindrical guide boss portions 413c in the button base 413 of the operation button 410. An operation button spring through which four cylindrical button shafts 452 and four button shafts 452, which are slidably inserted from each other, are inserted and the rear end of the guide boss portion 413c of the operation button 410 is urged forward. (Not shown), and three pressure detection sensors 454, which are attached to the front surface of the unit base 451 and detect each of the three detection pieces 413d of the button base 413 on the operation button 410.

The unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 has an annular main body 451a, a cover portion 451b that hemispherically protrudes rearward from the inner peripheral edge of the main body 451a, and a direction perpendicular to the front surface of the main body 451a. A through-hole 451c that penetrates the cover portion 451b back and forth in a substantially quadrangular shape that extends vertically when viewed, four holding holes 451d that are recessed from the front surface to the rear of the main body portion 451a in the shape of a blind hole, and the main body portion 451a. The upper bearing portion 451e, which is recessed in a semicircular shape (U-shape) from the front to the rear in the upper part of the main body portion 451a, and the upper bearing portion 451e, which is vertically recessed from the front to the rear in the lower part of the main body portion 451a, are semicircular in coaxial with the upper bearing portion 451e. A pair of rotation restricting portions 451g that are formed on both the left and right sides of the upper bearing portion 451e on the upper front surface of the lower bearing portion 451f and the main body portion 451a that are recessed in a (U shape) shape and regulate the rotation of the screen unit 470. And have.

The annular main body portion 451a of the unit base 451 has an inner circumference and an outer circumference formed in substantially the same size as the substrate base 421 of the decorative substrate unit 420 formed in a C shape. The decorative substrate unit 420 is attached to the front surface of the main body 451a. The cover portion 451b is formed in a size that can be accommodated without contact when the screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A, which is rotatably attached by the upper bearing portion 451e and the lower bearing portion 451f, rotates. There is. The through-hole 451c is formed in a size that allows the projector 500 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A to pass through from behind.

The four holding holes 451d of the unit base 451 are formed at the four corners of the front surface of the main body portion 451a at the upper, lower, left, and right corners at positions corresponding to the four guide boss portions 413c of the button base 413 of the operation button 410. The inner diameter of these holding holes 451d is larger than the outer diameter of the guide boss portion 413c, and the guide boss portion 413c can be inserted. A button shaft 452 is mounted coaxially with the central axis of these four holding holes 451d. The front end of the button shaft 452 attached to the holding hole 451d protrudes forward from the front surface of the main body portion 451a. By inserting the button shaft 452 attached to the holding hole 451d into the cylindrical guide boss portion 413c of the operation button 410, the operation button 410 can be slidably attached in the front-rear direction via the guide boss portion 413c. Can be done.

The upper left holding hole 451d of the four holding holes 451d is counterclockwise with respect to the center of the unit base 451 from the vertically extending center line passing through the center of the unit base 451 (the center of the operation button 410). It is formed at a position rotated about 30 degrees in the direction. Further, the holding hole 451d on the upper right side of the four holding holes 451d is clockwise from the center line extending vertically through the center of the unit base 451 (the center of the operation button 410) with respect to the center of the unit base 451. It is formed at a position rotated about 47 degrees in the direction of. On the other hand, the two holding holes 451d arranged on the lower side of the four holding holes 451d are formed at positions opposite to the center of the unit base 451 with respect to the upper two holding holes 451d. ..

Further, operation button springs (not shown) are inserted into the four holding holes 451d, respectively, and the front ends of these operation button springs come into contact with the rear ends of the guide boss portion 413c, so that the operation buttons are inserted through the guide boss portion 413c. The 410 is being urged forward.

The upper bearing portion 451e and the lower bearing portion 451f of the unit base 451 are formed in a U shape with the front open and extending rearward. In the upper bearing portion 451e and the lower bearing portion 451f, the centers of the portions extending in a semicircular shape are coaxially located. In the upper bearing portion 451e and the lower bearing portion 451f, the upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A are inserted from the front side, and then the upper bearing member 480 and the lower bearing member 485 are inserted from the front side. Is attached to the front surface of the main body portion 451a, so that the screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A can be rotatably supported.

Each of the pair of rotation restricting portions 451g of the unit base 451 passes through the central axis of the semicircular portion of the upper bearing portion 451e in which the extension line (plane) thereof is recessed rearward in a U shape. It is formed so as to be separated from each other in a predetermined angle circumferential direction with the central axis as the center. The pair of rotation restricting portions 451g regulate the rotation range of the screen unit 470 by abutting the stopper 475b of the operating gear member 475 in the screen unit 470 in a state of being assembled to the second effect operation unit 400A. There is. In the present embodiment, the rotation range of the screen unit 470 is restricted to an angle range of 90 degrees by a pair of rotation restricting portions 451g.

Although not shown, magnets are embedded in each pair of rotation restricting portions 451g, and by magnetically adhering to an iron plate attached to the stopper 475b, they come into contact with the rotation restricting portions 451g. The stopper 475b is made difficult to separate from the rotation restricting portion 451g. Therefore, the magnet in the rotation restricting portion 451g and the iron plate of the stopper 475b allow the screen unit 470 to be in the first position with the main screen 471 facing forward, or the second with the sub screen 472 facing forward. The screen unit 470 can be held in any of the positions, and the movement of the screen unit 470 to rotate is suppressed by the pressing operation of the operation button 410 or the vibration by the vibration motor 424 or the like, and the door frame side. The effect image by the second effect display device 460A can be enjoyed in a good state.

The three pressure detection sensors 454 are attached to the front surface of the main body portion 451a of the unit base 451 at positions corresponding to the three detection pieces 413d of the button base 413 on the operation button 410. More specifically, the three pressure detection sensors 454 remain on the front surface of the main body 451a of the unit base 451, one on the lower left side of the upper left holding hole 451d and the other on the lower right side of the upper right holding hole 451d. One of them is attached to the lower right side of the lower left holding hole 451d, respectively. The three pressure detection sensors 454 are mounted at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction around the center of the unit base 451. These three pressure detection sensors 454 can detect the three detection pieces 413d of the operation button 410.

[3-4g-5. Door frame side second production display device]
The door frame side second effect display device 460A of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. The door frame side second effect display device 460A is attached to the second base unit 450 and can show the effect image to the player through the transparent portion of the operation button 410. The door frame side second effect display device 460A includes a screen unit 470 rotatably attached around an axis extending vertically by an upper bearing portion 451e and a lower bearing portion 451f of the second base unit 450, and a second base. The upper bearing member 480, which is mounted on the upper front surface of the unit 450 and rotatably mounts the upper side of the screen unit 470 in cooperation with the second base unit 450, and the lower front surface of the second base unit 450 are mounted. It includes a lower bearing member 485 that rotatably attaches the lower side of the screen unit 470 in cooperation with the second base unit 450.

Further, the second effect display device 460A on the door frame side rotates the screen unit 470 and is installed in the rotation drive unit 490 attached to the upper part of the second base unit 450 and in the cover portion 451b of the second base unit 450. A projector 500 that is arranged and capable of projecting an effect image onto the screen unit 470 from the rear, and a projector 500 are attached, and the rear surface of the unit base 451 is attached so as to cover the cover portion 451b of the second base unit 450 from the rear side. The box-shaped projector mounting member 505, which is open at the front, and the operating gear member 475 of the screen unit 470 are mounted so as to cover from above on the left side of the rotation drive unit 490 in the upper part of the second base unit 450 when viewed from the front. The upper cover 506 is provided, and two rotation detection sensors 507 attached to the upper cover 506 and detecting the rotation position (rotation position) of the screen unit 470 are provided.

[3-4g-5a. Screen unit]
The screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. The screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A is rotatably attached to the second base unit 450 around an axis extending vertically, and the effect image is projected from the projector 500. The effect image can be displayed (projected) so as to be visible to the player.

The screen unit 470 has a semi-cylindrical shape, a milky white and translucent main screen 471, and a disk shape having one end side in the axial direction of the main screen 471 as a part of the outer circumference, and the central portion is an axis. The sub-screen 472, which is curved so as to bulge outward in the direction, is milky white and has translucency, and the main screen 471 protrudes in a columnar shape from the center of both ends in the axial direction to the outward in the direction perpendicular to the axis. Penetrates the upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474, the operating gear member 475 attached to the tip of the upper shaft member 473 and having gear teeth 475a formed over substantially half of the outer circumference, and the sub-screen 472. A sub-screen decorative member 476 (see FIGS. 74 and 75, etc.) formed in a relief shape that is transparent and imitates a predetermined character (skull), and a sub-screen 472 that is attached to the back surface side of the sub-screen 472. The sub-screen decorative substrate 477 (see FIG. 75, etc.) on which a plurality of LEDs 477a are mounted on the surface facing the screen and the end of the main screen 471 opposite to the sub-screen 472 toward the central axis of the main screen 471. It is provided with a semi-arc-shaped peripheral decorative member 478 that extends shortly.

The semi-cylindrical main screen 471 of the screen unit 470 is formed to have a radius smaller than the inner diameter of the annular main body 451a of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450. The length of the main screen 471 in the axial direction is formed to be about 4/3 times the radius of the semi-cylindrical shape. The main screen 471 is decorated so that both ends in the axial direction are bordered by the peripheral decoration portion 472a of the sub screen 472 and the peripheral decoration member 478.

The sub-screen 472 is formed in a circular shape whose outer shape coincides with the radius of the semi-cylindrical main screen 471 when viewed from the direction in which the central axis extends (see FIG. 74 (b)). .. The sub-screen 472 closes the peripheral decorative portion 472a, which is formed in an annular shape with a predetermined width from the outer periphery to the center side and has a plurality of rows of square pyramid-shaped irregularities in the circumferential direction, and the inside of the peripheral decorative portion 472a. It is provided with a curved surface-shaped screen portion 472b. The peripheral decorative portion 472a of the sub screen 472 is formed in a truncated cone shape as a whole so that the inner peripheral side projects in a direction away from the main screen 471. The screen portion 472b bulges in a spherical shape having a radius larger than the radius of the semi-cylindrical main screen 471 in a direction away from the main screen 471. A through hole is formed in the screen portion 472b of the sub screen 472, and a sub screen decorative member 476 is attached so as to close the hole.

The upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474 are respectively inserted from the front into the upper bearing portion 451e and the lower bearing portion 451f of the unit base 451 in the second base unit 450 and are rotatably attached.

The operating gear member 475 protrudes outward from one of the gear teeth 475a formed over substantially half a circumference by meshing with the second transmission gear 495 of the rotary drive unit 490 and the circumferential end of the gear teeth 475a. The stopper 475b is provided with a detection piece 475c that protrudes outward in a flat plate shape from the side opposite to the stopper 475b at the circumferential end of the gear tooth 475a. The stopper 475b of the operating gear member 475 is located in the recess 481a of the upper bearing member 480 which is recessed in an arc shape about the axis of the upper shaft member 473 in the state of being assembled in the second effect operation unit 400A. The rotation range of the screen unit 470 is restricted by contacting the pair of rotation restricting portions 451g of the unit base 451 in the second base unit 450 located at both ends in the recess 481a.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, an iron plate is attached to a portion of the stopper 475b that comes into contact with the rotation restricting portion 451g, and this iron plate can be magnetized with a magnet embedded in the rotation restricting portion 451g. It has become like.

The screen unit 470 can rotate between a first position with the main screen 471 facing forward and a second position with the subscreen 472 facing forward. The detection piece 475c is detected by the rotation detection sensor 507 attached to the upper cover 506.

The sub-screen decorative member 476 is attached to the screen portion 472b of the sub-screen 472. The sub-screen decorative member 476 is formed in a relief shape imitating a skull by a transparent member, and since the plate thickness thereof changes in a complicated manner, the transmitted light is intricately refracted and the rear can be visually recognized. It's getting harder. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the sub-screen decorative member 476 has the characters "PUSH" formed in a relief imitating a skull.

The sub-screen decorative substrate 477 is attached to the back surface side of the sub-screen 472 so as to form a gap between the sub-screen decorative substrate 477 and the sub-screen 472, and a plurality of LEDs 477a are attached to the front surface side (the side facing the sub-screen 472). Is implemented. The sub-screen decorative substrate 477 has an outer shape smaller than that of the sub-screen decorative member 476, and has a white surface. By emitting light from the LED 477a of the sub-screen decorative substrate 477, the sub-screen decorative member 476 and the sub-screen 472 can be light-emitting and decorated. More specifically, the sub-screen decorative substrate 477 can strongly illuminate the "eyes" portion of the skull and the character portion of "PUSH" by emitting light from the LED 477a.

Further, since the sub-screen decorative substrate 477 is arranged relatively close to the sub-screen 472 and does not have a member for diffusing light between the sub-screen decorative substrate 477 and the sub-screen 472, the LED 477a is made to emit light. , The point light source of the LED 477a can be recognized by the player. Further, the subscreen decorative substrate 477 can block the light from the projector 500. Therefore, the projector 500 can project the shadow of the subscreen decorative substrate 477 on the subscreen 472.

The peripheral decoration member 478 is formed in the same shape as a part of the peripheral decoration portion 472a of the sub-screen 472, and similarly to the peripheral decoration portion 472a, a plurality of square pyramid-shaped irregularities are provided in a row in the circumferential direction of the arc. ..

[3-4g-5b. Upper bearing member and lower bearing member]
The upper bearing member 480 and the lower bearing member 485 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. The upper bearing member 480 and the lower bearing member 485 are the main body portions of the unit base 451 so as to close the front side of the upper bearing portion 451e and the lower bearing portion 451f which are open to the front in the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450. It is attached to the front surface of the 451a. Further, in the upper bearing member 480 and the lower bearing member 485, the upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474 of the screen unit 470 are inserted into the upper bearing portion 451e and the lower bearing portion 451f of the unit base 451 from the front, respectively. By attaching to the front surface of the unit base 451 the upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474 can be rotatably attached to the second base unit 450.

The upper bearing member 480 is a bearing member 481 attached to the upper portion of the main body portion 451a of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 so as to close the front side of the upper bearing portion 451e whose front side is open, and the bearing member. It includes a frame top lens decorative substrate 482 attached to the upper front surface of the 481. The bearing member 481 has a recess 481a that is recessed in an arc shape from the rear surface to the front so that the center in the left-right direction is the deepest. The recess 481a of the bearing member 481 in the upper bearing member 480 is recessed in an arc shape centered on the shaft core of the upper shaft member 473 of the screen unit 470 in a state of being assembled in the second effect operation unit 400A, and the screen is internally formed. A stopper 475b of the operating gear member 475 in the unit 470 is inserted and arranged, and a pair of rotation restricting portions 451g of the unit base 451 are located at both ends of the arc of the recess 481a. The arc-shaped recessed 481a allows the stopper 475b of the operating gear member 475 to rotate satisfactorily between the pair of rotation restricting portions 451g.

The frame top lens decorative substrate 482 of the upper bearing member 480 has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface side, and is located behind the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415 in a state of being assembled to the second production operation unit 400A. ing. As a result, the frame top lens 418 can be light-emitting and decorated by emitting the LED of the frame top lens decoration substrate 482.

The lower bearing member 485 is formed in a substantially flat plate shape, and is attached to the front surface of the main body portion 451a of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 so as to close the front of the lower bearing portion 451f. By attaching the lower bearing member 485 to the front surface of the unit base 451 in a state where the lower shaft member 474 of the screen unit 470 is inserted into the lower bearing portion 451f of the unit base 451 in the second base unit 450, the lower shaft member 474 Can be mounted rotatably.

[3-4g-5c. Rotation drive unit]
The rotation drive unit 490 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. The rotation drive unit 490 is attached to the upper surface of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450, and can rotate the screen unit 470. The rotary drive unit 490 includes a unit case 491 that is mounted on the upper surface of the unit base 451 and has a hollow inside, and a switching drive motor 492 that is mounted on the lower surface of the unit case 491 and whose rotary shaft projects into the unit case 491. , A spur gear-shaped drive gear fixed to the rotating shaft of the switching drive motor (not shown) and a spur gear-shaped first spur gear that meshes with the drive gear and is rotatably mounted in the unit case 491. The transmission gear (not shown) meshes with the first transmission gear and is rotatably mounted in the unit case 491 so that it can mesh with the gear teeth 475a of the operating gear member 475 in the screen unit 470. It is provided with a spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 495.

The rotation drive unit 490 is assembled in the second effect operation unit 400A, and the second transmission gear 495 meshes with the gear teeth 475a of the operating gear member 475 in the screen unit 470. The rotary drive unit 490 rotationally drives the switching drive motor 492 to rotate the screen unit 470 around the axis extending back and forth via the drive gear, the first transmission gear, the second transmission gear 495, and the gear teeth 475a. It can be rotated.

[3-4g-5d. projector]
The projector 500 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. The projector 500 is arranged in the hemispherical cover portion 451b of the unit base 451 in the second base unit 450, and is mounted on the rear side of the unit base 451 via the projector mounting member 505. The projector 500 can project and display the effect image on the main screen 471 or the sub screen 472 by irradiating the effect image toward the main screen 471 or the sub screen 472 of the screen unit 470.

The projector 500 includes a cubic projector body 501 that is attached to the projector mounting member 505, and a lens unit 502 that projects forward in a columnar shape from the projector body 501 and irradiates an effect image forward from the front end.

In this projector 500, the rear portion of the projector main body 501 is attached to the projector mounting member 505, and the lens portion 502 and the projector main body 501 are arranged in the cover portion 451b through the through hole 451c of the unit base 451 from the rear side. It is installed like this.

The projector 500 can project an effect image over substantially the front surface of the main screen 471 and the sub screen 472 of the screen unit 470, and can project and display a still image or a moving image as the effect image. The projector 500 is a commercially available liquid crystal projector and has an autofocus function.

[3-4g-5e. Projector mounting member]
The projector mounting member 505 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. The projector mounting member 505 is formed in a box shape with an open front, and the projector 500 is mounted inside and is mounted on the rear side of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450. By mounting the projector mounting member 505 on the rear side of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450, it is possible to cover the cover portion 451b of the unit base 451 and the rear side of the projector 500.

The projector mounting member 505 has a bottom wall extending in the horizontal direction and a rear wall extending in the vertical direction, so that the projector 500 can be mounted in a state of being tilted so as to match the tilt of the operation button 410. .. A plurality of slits 505a penetrating the front and rear are formed on the rear wall of the projector mounting member 505, and the heat released from the projector 500 can be discharged to the outside through the slits 505a.

The second effect operation unit relay board 515 and the relay board cover 516 are mounted on the right side surface of the projector mounting member 505 when viewed from the front.

[3-4g-5f. Top cover and rotation detection sensor]
The upper cover 506 and the rotation detection sensor 507 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. The upper cover 506 is attached to the upper surface of the main body portion 451a of the unit base 451 in the second base unit 450 so as to cover the upper side of the operating gear member 475 of the screen unit 470. The rotation detection sensor 507 is for detecting the rotation position of the screen unit 470, and is attached to the lower surface of the upper cover 506 in a state of being separated from each other.

Although detailed illustrations are omitted, the two rotation detection sensors 507 are mounted at positions separated from each other by a rotation angle of 90 degrees in the circumferential direction with respect to the rotation axis of the screen unit 470, and the operating gear in the screen unit 470. The detection piece 475c of the member 475 can be detected. Specifically, the two rotation detection sensors 507 are the detection piece 475c when the main screen 471 of the screen unit 470 is in the first position facing forward, and the detection piece 475c in the second position where the sub screen 472 is facing forward. The time detection piece 475c and the time detection piece 475c can be detected respectively. The rotation drive of the switching drive motor 492 of the rotation drive unit 490 is controlled based on the detection signals of the detection piece 475c by these two rotation detection sensors 507.

[3-4g-6. Buffer unit]
The buffer unit 510 of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. The buffer unit 510 is attached to the lower surface of the second effect display device 460A on the door frame side, and cushions the impact when the second effect operation unit 400A is hit from above to reduce the impact of the dish unit cover in the dish unit 320. It is transmitted to the bottom plate portion 326i of 326.

The cushioning unit 510 is in contact with the elastically deformable flat cushioning member 511, whose upper surface is in contact with the lower surface of the projector mounting member 505 in the door frame side second effect display device 460A, and the lower surface of the cushioning member 511. It includes a cushioning base 512 that is mounted so as to be relatively accessible to the lower surface of the projector mounting member 505.

The cushioning base 512 of the cushioning unit 510 includes a flat plate-shaped main body 512a that abuts on the lower surface of the cushioning member 511, and leg pieces that project downward from both left and right sides of the main body 512a and extend in the front-rear direction. 512b and. The leg piece portion 512b of the cushioning base 512 is in contact with the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320 in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3.

In this cushioning unit 510, when the operation button 410 or the frame unit 415 is strongly pressed or hit downward, the projector mounting member 505 attached to the base unit 430 compresses the cushioning member 511 in the cushioning unit 510. Move down to. The impact is absorbed by compressing the cushioning member 511. Then, when the projector mounting member 505 moves further downward, the lower surface of the projector mounting member 505 comes into contact with the upper surface side of the main body portion 512a of the cushioning base 512. Since the left and right leg pieces 512b form a gap between the main body 512a and the upper surface of the bottom plate 326i of the dish unit cover 326, the projector mounting member is in contact with the upper surface side of the main body 512a. When the 505 moves further downward, the flat plate-shaped main body portion 512a bends, and the impact can be absorbed by the bending of the main body portion 512a. Further, when the projector mounting member 505 moves downward, the lower surface of the main body portion 512a that is bent downward comes into contact with the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the dish unit cover 326, and further bending of the main body portion 512a is restricted. , The impact will be transmitted to the dish unit cover 326. In this way, when the operation button 410 or the frame unit 415 is strongly hit from above, the impact can be absorbed in multiple stages, and the mounting portion 416e of the frame unit 415 or the effect operating unit mounting portion of the dish unit cover 326 can be absorbed. It is possible to prevent the 326a and the like from being subjected to an unreasonable force and prevent their damage.

[3-4g-7. Action effect of the second production operation unit]
The operation and effect of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 74 to 77 and the like. FIG. 74 (a) is an explanatory view of the second effect operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends with the main screen of the screen unit facing forward, and FIG. 74 (b) is a sub of the screen unit. It is explanatory drawing which saw the 2nd effect operation unit from the direction which the central axis of the operation button extends with the screen facing forward. Further, FIG. 75 (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line JJ in FIG. 74 (a), and FIG. 75 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line KK in FIG. 74 (b). FIG. 76 (a) shows the second effect operation unit hidden by the first button decoration part of the operation button, the button frame, etc. in the view seen from the extending direction of the central axis of the operation button with the main screen facing forward. It is explanatory drawing which shows the part which is trying to show, and (b) shows the part which is going to hide by the 1st button decoration part of the operation button, the button frame, etc. in the cross-sectional view of the 2nd effect operation unit in the state of (a). It is explanatory drawing. In FIG. 77 (a), the second effect operation unit is hidden by the first button decoration part of the operation button, the button frame, etc. in the view seen from the extending direction of the central axis of the operation button with the sub screen facing forward. It is explanatory drawing which shows the part which is trying to show, and (b) shows the part which is going to hide by the 1st button decoration part of the operation button, the button frame, etc. in the cross-sectional view of the 2nd effect operation unit in the state of (a). It is explanatory drawing.

The second effect operation unit 400A of the present embodiment changes the decoration in the operation button 410 or changes the operation button according to the game state that changes when the game ball is driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5. It is possible to entertain the player by displaying an effect image in the 410, and to let the player operate the operation button 410 so that the player can participate in the effect presented to the player. be.

The total height of the second effect operation unit 400A is formed to be substantially the same as the height of the portion below the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3. Further, the total width of the second effect operation unit 400A is formed to be slightly larger than 1/3 of the total width of the door frame 3. The second effect operation unit 400A is arranged in the center in the left-right direction below the game area 5a (the through-hole 111 of the door frame base 110) in the front view.

In the second effect operation unit 400A, the upper portion of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 is attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320. The second effect operation unit 400A is between the lower end of the leg piece portion 512b of the cushioning base 512 of the cushioning unit 510 and the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320 in a state of being attached to the dish unit 320. A gap is formed in. That is, the second effect operation unit 400A is attached only to the upper part of the dish unit 320, and is attached in a suspended state.

Further, in the second effect operation unit 400A, the front surface of the frame unit 415 (the surface formed by the inner circumference of the front end of the central opening 416a of the frame body 416) is parallel to the inclined surface of the front end opening of the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a. It is installed so that it becomes. As a result, in the second effect operation unit 400A, the central axis CL (see FIG. 67) of the transparent operation button 410 that bulges forward in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface) becomes a vertical line. It is tilted at an angle of 63 degrees so that it moves upward as it moves forward. As a result, when the player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1 in order to play a game using the pachinko machine 1, the player's head is arranged above the plate unit 320 (second production operation unit 400A). Since it is located in front of the center of the game area 5a on the game board 5, the central axis CL of the operation button 410 passes near the player's head. Therefore, when the player drops his / her line of sight from the game area 5a to the second effect operation unit 400A (operation button 410), the operation button 410 can be viewed from the front (projected view from a direction parallel to the central axis CL). The operation button 410 and the door frame side second effect display device 460A in the operation button 410 can be visually recognized in a good state.

In the second effect operation unit 400A, the button shaft 452 held in the four holding holes 451d of the unit base 451 in the second base unit 450 is slid on the four cylindrical guide boss portions 413c of the operation button 410, respectively. It is movably inserted and is urged forward by an operation button spring (not shown). In the second effect operation unit 400A, in a normal state (a state in which the operation button 410 is not pressed), the front end of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 is set to the frame unit 415 by the urging force of the operation button spring. It is in contact with a portion near the central opening 416a on the rear surface of the frame body 416 of the above.

In the normal state, the second effect operation unit 400A has the center side (center axis CL side) from the vicinity of the inner circumference of the button frame 412 of the operation button 410 forward from the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415. It is protruding. In other words, in the transparent button lens 411 that bulges forward in the shape of a curved surface (a part of a substantially spherical surface) of the operation button 410, the portion that protrudes forward from the inner circumference (inside) of the button frame 412 is , The frame unit 415 projects forward from the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 (see FIG. 67 and the like).

Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the diameter of the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 in the frame unit 415 is about 15 cm, and the button lens 411 (front end) is the frame unit with respect to the central axis CL direction of the operation button 410. It protrudes about 4 cm forward from the front surface of the 415.

In a normal state, when the player presses the operation button 410 of the second effect operation unit 400A, the operation button 410 moves backward along the central axis CL against the urging force of the operation button spring. Then, when the rear end of the operation button 410 comes into contact with the front surface of the main body portion 451a of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450, the rearward movement is restricted and the rearward movement of the operation button 410 is stopped. When the player presses the operation button 410, he presses the button lens 411 that bulges forward in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface).

Since the outer diameter of the operation button 410 is formed to be much larger than that of the operation button for production provided in the conventional pachinko machine, the vicinity of the peripheral edge away from the central portion of the button lens 411 is pressed. It is likely to be done. More specifically, the operation buttons for effect in the conventional pachinko machine are attached so that the central axis extends substantially parallel to the vertical line, whereas the operation of the second effect operation unit 400A of the present embodiment is performed. Since the central axis CL of the button 410 is attached at an angle with respect to the vertical line, when the player presses the operation button 410 from above as in the conventional pachinko machine, the button 410 is separated from the central axis CL of the operation button 410. The part will be pressed (see FIG. 61).

By the way, in the operation buttons for directing in the conventional pachinko machine, since the surface to be pressed by the player is formed on a flat surface, when the operation button is enlarged while the part to be pressed is a flat surface. , If you press a part that is off the center of the operation button, the surface to be pressed will tilt so that the pressed part will retract first, and the operation button will not be able to retract straight, so you can press the operation button. There is a risk that the pressing operation will not be possible.

On the other hand, the operation button 410 of the second effect operation unit 400A of the present embodiment has a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical surface) in which the portion (button lens 411) to be pressed by the player is bulged forward. Because of the shape), when a position away from the center of the operation button 410 is pressed, the force is distributed to the entire operation button 410, making it difficult for the operation button 410 to tilt, and the operation button 410 moves straight backward. can do. Therefore, no matter which position on the front side of the operation button 410 is pressed, the operation button 410 can be smoothly retracted without tilting, so that the pressing operation can be reliably detected and the operation button 410 is pressed. You can fully enjoy the production of operation.

Further, in the second effect operation unit 400A, the vibration motor 424 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the board base 421 of the decorative substrate unit 420, and as described above, the second effect operation unit 400A is suspended. Since only the upper part is attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326, when the weight 424a is rotated by the vibration motor 424 to generate vibration, the vibration is generated at the part farthest from the mounted part. Since it is generated, the entire second effect operation unit 400A can be vibrated greatly (strongly), and the vibration can be transmitted to the player who is in contact with the second effect operation unit 400A. Further, since the vibration motor 424 is arranged directly under the position (near the upper part of the operation button 410) where the player can relatively easily press the operation button, the player who presses the operation button 410 vibrates strongly. Can be transmitted, and the player can be surprised and entertained.

Further, the second effect operation unit 400A is attached to the dish unit cover 326 in a suspended state, and the projector mounting member 505 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A and the bottom plate of the dish unit cover 326. A buffer unit 510 is arranged between the upper surface of the portion 326i and the upper surface of the portion 326i. The cushioning unit 510 includes a cushioning member 511 that is elastically deformable, and forms a gap between the main body portion 512a in which the cushioning member 511 is in contact with the upper surface and the bottom plate portion 326i of the dish unit cover 326. Therefore, when the operation button 410 or the frame unit 415 is strongly pressed or hit downward, the impact is applied in multiple stages due to elastic deformation (compression) of the cushioning member 511, bending of the main body 512a of the cushioning base 512, and the like. It can be absorbed, and it is possible to prevent an unreasonable force from acting on the mounting portion 416e of the frame unit 415, the effect operating unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326, etc., and the second effect operating unit 400A, etc. is damaged. Can be prevented. Therefore, even if the operation button 410 or the frame unit 415 is pressed or hit with a strong force when the player is presented with an effect of pressing the operation button 410 of the second effect operation unit 400A, the operation is performed. Since the button 410, the second production operation unit 400A, etc. are not damaged, it is possible to avoid interruption of the game due to the damage, suppress the deterioration of the player's interest, and make it difficult to be damaged. It is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side.

Since the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 that the player presses and operates is formed in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface) that protrudes forward, it is compared with the case where it is made into a flat plate shape. The strength and rigidity are high, and even if the lens is hit hard, the impact can be dispersed throughout the button lens 411, making it less likely to be damaged.

Further, in the second effect operation unit 400A, since the button lens 411, the frame side lens 417, and the frame top lens 418 are made of transparent members, the first button decoration portion formed on the back surface side thereof. The decoration due to the unevenness of the 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, and the like can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) (see FIG. 63). In addition, in the part where the uneven decoration is formed, the light is refracted in a complicated manner due to the change in the plate thickness, so that it is difficult to see the rear side through the part where the uneven decoration is formed. ..

Since the second effect operation unit 400A includes a first button decoration portion 411a extending from the inner circumference of the button frame 412 in the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 toward the center side, a plurality of the first button decoration portions 411a are provided. By decorating the unevenness by combining the triangles of the above, it is possible to make it difficult to see the rear part at the outer peripheral edge portion of the portion inside the button lens 411. Behind the portion where the first button decoration portion 411a is formed (rearward in the CL direction of the central axis), the inner peripheral surface of the main body portion 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and the second effect display device on the door frame side. A gap is located between the 460A and the outer periphery of the screen unit 470, but the first button decoration portion 411a located in front of the gap allows the front side (player side) to be seen from the front side (player side) to the outside or rear side of the screen unit 470. It is possible to make the members of the door difficult to see. As a result, even if the door frame side second effect display device 460A is provided in the operation button 410 that can be pressed, it is possible to prevent the appearance of the operation button 410 from deteriorating, and the player who sees the operation button 410 can see the operation button 410. It is possible to prevent discomfort, and the door frame side second effect display device 460A can be arranged without any problem in the transparent operation button 410, so that the appearance of the operation button 410 can be improved.

More specifically, the second effect operation unit 400A is attached to the door frame side second effect display device 460A by the first button decoration part 411a, the second button decoration part 411b, and the button frame 412 of the button lens 411 in the operation button 410. The second base unit 450, the upper shaft member 473, the lower shaft member 474, etc., which are on the rear side (back side) outside the outer periphery of the main screen 471, the sub screen 472, etc., pass through the transparent button lens 411 from the player side. It is formed so that it cannot be seen. Specifically, in the state of the first position with the main screen 471 of the screen unit 470 facing forward, the upper and lower outer sides of the main screen 471, the left outer side of the peripheral decorative portion 472a of the sub screen 472, and the right side of the peripheral decorative member 478. The outer part (the part of the crosshatch surrounded by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 76) is hidden from the player side.

On the other hand, in the state of the second position in which the sub screen 472 of the screen unit 470 is directed forward, the outer portion of the annular peripheral decoration portion 472a of the sub screen 472 (in FIG. 76, the portion of the cross hatch surrounded by the alternate long and short dash line). ) Is hidden from the player's side. As described above, since the operation button 410 is provided with the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the button frame 412, and the like, it is difficult to see the outside and the back side of the main screen 471 and the sub screen 472. It can be hidden, and the appearance of the operation button 410 and, by extension, the second production operation unit 400A as a whole can be improved.

Further, in the state of the first position where the main screen 471 faces forward, the screen portion 472b of the sub screen 472 is formed by the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the button frame 412, etc. of the button lens 411. And the sub-screen decorative member 476, the upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474 are difficult to see (see FIG. 76). This makes it difficult for the player to notice the existence of the sub screen 472 and the fact that the main screen 471 can be rotated. Therefore, when the screen unit 470 is rotated to switch from the main screen 471 to the sub screen 472, the operation is performed. A movement exceeding the player's expectation can be performed in the button 410 to give a strong impact to the player, entertain the player, and suppress a decrease in interest.

Further, in the state of the second position in which the sub screen 472 faces forward, the upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft are formed by the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the button frame 412, and the like of the button lens 411. The member 474 is difficult to see (see FIG. 77). This makes it difficult for the player to notice that the sub-screen 472 (sub-screen decorative member 476) is rotatable, so that the impact when the sub-screen 472 (screen unit 470) is rotated can be increased. It can entertain the player.

Further, the second effect operation unit 400A is a button lens 411 capable of visually recognizing the door frame side second effect display device 460A arranged on the rear side of the operation button 410, from the inner circumference to the center side of the button frame 412. A polyhedral first button decorative portion 411a that combines a plurality of triangular surfaces within a predetermined width is provided, and a door frame side second effect display arranged behind the inside of the operation button 410 is provided. The device 460A is provided with a peripheral decoration portion 472a of a sub-screen 472 in which a plurality of square weights are arranged in a row, and a peripheral decoration member 478. As a result, the triangular decoration (first button decoration portion 411a) arranged on the front side and the quadrangular decoration (peripheral decoration portion 472a and peripheral decoration member 478) arranged on the rear side overlap each other so as to intersect with each other. It is possible to show the complicated geometric pattern to the player, improve the appearance, and suppress the deterioration of the player's interest.

Further, as described above, since the first button decoration portion 411a mainly composed of a triangle, the peripheral decoration portion 472a mainly composed of a quadrangle, and the peripheral decoration member 478 are separated in the front-rear direction, the player's eyes As the position moves, the degree of overlap between them changes, so the geometric patterns that appear to overlap change, making it possible to show the player a moving decoration, and at the same time, the player can create a deep, three-dimensional decoration. It can be shown to the player and can entertain the player.

Further, in the door frame side second effect display device 460A arranged behind the inside of the operation button 410, the screen unit 470 is rotated by the driving of the switching drive motor 492 to turn the main screen 471 forward, or the sub screen. The 472 can be turned forward, and the decoration consisting of a plurality of squares can be changed. More specifically, when the main screen 471 is directed forward, as shown in FIG. 74 (a), the peripheral decorative portion 472a and the peripheral decorative member 478 are separated from each other to the left and right and extend vertically, and are vertically extended. A geometric pattern decoration in which the decoration consisting of a plurality of square pyramids arranged in a row traverses the decoration consisting of a plurality of triangles arranged in an annular shape of the first button decoration portion 411a in the button lens 411. It can be shown to the player. On the other hand, when the sub-screen 472 is directed forward, as shown in FIG. 74 (b), the peripheral decorative portion 472a is in a state in which the peripheral decorative portion 472a is elongated in an annular shape, and the decoration is composed of a plurality of square pyramids arranged in a circular shape. However, it is possible to show the player the decoration of the geometric pattern that overlaps with the decoration consisting of a plurality of triangles arranged in an annular shape of the first button decoration portion 411a of the button lens 411. Therefore, by rotating the screen unit 470, the decoration (physical decoration) of the operation button 410 can be changed, so that the player's interest can be attracted to the operation button 410 by the change of the decoration, or the decoration can be changed. The change can make the player suggest the arrival of an opportunity, etc., and can entertain the player and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, the second effect operation unit 400A is a screen having different screens (main screen 471 and sub screen 472) that can be switched to the door frame side second effect display device 460A provided in the operation button 410. Since the unit 470 and the projector 500 for projecting and displaying the effect image on the screen unit 470 are provided, it is possible to display an effect image completely different from the display of the effect image by the liquid crystal display device, which has a strong impact on the player. Can be given and entertained. More specifically, in the screen unit 470, the semi-cylindrical main screen 471 and the sub-screen 472 having the disk-shaped and relief-shaped sub-screen decorative member 476 in the center are the centers of the upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474. It is provided so as to be separated from the axis by a rotation angle of 90 degrees in the circumferential direction.

Then, in the door frame side second effect display device 460A, in the state of the first position where the main screen 471 of the screen unit 470 is directed forward, the semi-cylindrical central axis is positioned so as to extend in the left-right direction. When viewed from the front, it looks like a quadrangle (rectangle) extending vertically (see FIG. 74 (a)). When the effect image is projected forward from the projector 500 arranged behind the main screen 471, the effect image is projected on the rear surface of the main screen 471 (see FIG. 75 (a)), and is milky white having translucency. Through the main screen 471 of the above, the effect image projected from the front side can be visually recognized. Since the surface of the main screen 471 is formed in a semi-cylindrical shape with a smooth surface, the display screen of the effect image is also curved in a semi-cylindrical shape. As a result, while the display screen of a general liquid crystal display device is flat, the display screen of the main screen 471 is curved in a semi-cylindrical shape, so that the player can see the conventional display screen at first glance. It is possible to recognize that it is different from the above, to surprise the player, and to draw the player's attention to the main screen 471, and to entertain the effect image projected on the main screen 471. be able to.

On the other hand, in the state of the second position with the sub-screen 472 of the screen unit 470 facing forward, the disk-shaped central axis substantially coincides with the central axis of the operation button 410, and the circular operation button 410 is viewed from the front. A sub-screen decorative member 476 that imitates a skull appears to be located in the center (see FIG. 74 (b)). When the effect image is projected forward from the projector 500 arranged at the rear in this state, the effect image is projected on the rear surface of the sub screen 472. By the way, since the flat and translucent sub-screen decorative substrate 477 is attached to the rear side of the sub-screen 472, the effect image (light) emitted from the projector 500 at the portion of the sub-screen decorative substrate 477. Is blocked, and the shadow of the sub-screen decorative substrate 477 is projected on the central portion of the rear surface of the sub-screen 472 (see FIG. 75 (b)). Therefore, on the sub-screen 472, the effect image from the projector 500 is projected and displayed on the outer peripheral portion excluding the central portion where the shadow of the sub-screen decorative substrate 477 is projected. At this time, when the LED 477a mounted on the front surface of the sub-screen decorative substrate 477 is made to emit light, the central portion of the sub-screen 472 can be light-emitting and decorated by the light, and the sub provided in the center of the sub-screen 472 is provided. The screen decoration member 476 can be light-emitting decorated. Further, by emitting the LED 477a of the sub-screen decorative substrate 477, the shadow of the sub-screen decorative substrate 477 projected on the rear surface of the sub-screen 472 by the light from the projector 500 can be made difficult to see, and the front surface of the sub-screen 472 can be made difficult to see. The entire side can be brightly decorated with light emission.

The second effect display device 460A on the door frame side emits LED 477a of the sub screen decorative substrate 477 with the sub screen 472 of the screen unit 470 facing forward, and displays the effect image (moving image) forward from the projector 500. When irradiated, the effect image is displayed on the part of the subscreen 472 where the shadow of the subscreen decorative substrate 477 is not projected, that is, the part outside the subscreen decoration member 476 made of decoration imitating a skull. The sub-screen decorative member 476, which is inside the sub-screen decorative member 476, is luminescently decorated by the LED 477a of the sub-screen decorative substrate 477. In this state, the outside of the light emitting decoration of the fixed sub-screen decorative member 476 is decorated with the effect image (moving image), and the decorative effect is completely different from the light emitting decoration of the decorative member in the conventional pachinko machine. It can be shown to the player, can give a strong impact to the player, and can strongly draw the player's attention to the sub-screen 472. Further, in this state, the light of the LED 477a shines brighter (with higher brightness) than the brightness of the production image inside the production image, so that the production image is partially bright, which cannot be achieved by the conventional liquid crystal display device. Can be displayed, the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and a production image that makes the player more entertaining can be displayed.

As described above, the second effect operation unit 400A includes the decoration of the screen unit 470 in the first button decoration portion 411a of the operation button 410 and the door frame side second effect display device 460A (peripheral decoration portion 472a and peripheral decoration member 478). As a result, it is possible to show the player a moving and three-dimensional decoration, so that the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal can be obtained.

Further, the second effect operation unit 400A can irradiate the sub-screen decorative substrate 477 on which the LED 477a is mounted on the front surface and the light such as the effect image to the front behind the operation button 410 (inside the button frame 412). The door frame side second effect display device 460A is provided with the projector 500, and the inside of the operation button 410 can be satisfactorily light-emitting and decorated by the door frame side second effect display device 460A.

Further, behind the second button decorative portion 411b facing from the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412 located near the outer periphery of the second effect operation unit 400A and the operation button 410, the operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 of the decorative substrate unit 420 The first LED 422a and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are arranged, and by causing the first LEDs 422a and 423a to emit light, the six second button decoration portions 411b of the operation button 410 are light-emitting and decorated. be able to. As shown in FIG. 68, the first LED 422a of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are a cylindrical main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and a frame unit. It is located between the cylindrical inner cylinder portion 416d of the frame body 416 of the 415, and the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a does not leak to the inside of the main body portion 413a or the outside of the inner cylinder portion 416d, and the operation is performed. Only the second button decoration portion 411b of the button 410 can be satisfactorily luminescent and decorated.

Further, the second effect operation unit 400A is behind the frame side lens 417 facing from the six outer peripheral openings 416b of the frame body 416 in the frame unit 415, the second LED 422b of the operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 and the operation button right outside. The second LED 423b of the decorative substrate 423 is arranged, and the frame side lens 417 can be light-emitting and decorated by emitting light of the second LEDs 422b and 423b. The second LED 422b of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the second LED 423b of the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are located between the cylindrical inner tubular portion 416d of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 and the outer periphery of the frame body 416. It is located so that the light from the second LEDs 422b and 423b does not leak to the inside of the inner cylinder portion 416d or the outside of the frame body 416, and only the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 can be luminescently decorated satisfactorily. ..

Further, in the second effect operation unit 400A, the frame top lens decorative substrate 482 of the upper bearing member 480 in the door frame side second effect display device 460A is arranged behind the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415, and the frame. By emitting light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the top lens decoration substrate 482, the frame top lens 418 can be satisfactorily luminescent and decorated.

Further, the second effect operation unit 400A has display screens having different forms from each other by rotating the screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A arranged behind the inside of the operation button 410. The effect image can be displayed by switching to the main screen 471 or the sub screen 472, and the player can be presented with an effect that the shape of the display screen changes (switches), which is not possible with a conventional pachinko machine. , Can give a strong impact to the player and entertain.

[3-5. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 530 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 78 to 81. FIG. 78A is a front view of the door frame left side unit in the door frame, FIG. 78B is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 78C is a rear view of the door frame left side unit. It is a perspective view seen from. FIG. 79 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 80 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 81 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line LL in FIG. 78 (a). The door frame left side unit 530 is a door frame base unit that covers the front side of the door frame left side upper decorative board 161 and the door frame left side lower decorative board 162 (door frame left side decorative board 160) on the upper side of the dish unit 320. It is attached to the front left portion on the left side of the through hole 111 in 100. The door frame left side unit 530 is for decorating the front left side of the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110.

The door frame left side unit 530 is a strip-shaped left unit base 531 extending vertically and attached to the front surface of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100 on the left side of the front view of the through hole 111, and the left unit base 531. It has a transparent strip-shaped left unit diffuser lens member 532 attached to the front surface and a translucent one that is arranged in front of the left unit diffuser lens member 532 and has a polyhedron-like decoration at the front end. On the left unit decorative lens member (not shown) and on the left unit which is attached to the upper front surface of the left unit base 531 from the front side of the left unit decorative lens member and protrudes forward in a tubular frame shape and extends vertically. The decorative base 534, the left unit lower decorative base 535, which is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the left unit base 531 from the front side of the left unit decorative lens member, and is shorter than the left unit upper decorative base 534 and protrudes forward in a frame shape. A transparent left unit decorative cover 536 attached to the front side of the left unit base 531 so as to cover the front end side of the left unit decorative lens member from the front side of the left unit upper decorative base 534 and the left unit lower decorative base 535, and the left unit. It includes a plurality of decorative members 537 attached to the front side of the decorative cover 536.

The left unit base 531 of the door frame left side unit 530 is formed in a shallow box shape with the rear side open, and has a plurality of openings 531a penetrating the front and rear in the front surface. As shown in the figure, the plurality of openings 531a have a circular hole and a quadrangular hole extending vertically. In the left unit base 531, the LEDs 161a and 162a mounted on the front surface of the door frame left side decorative board 160 (door frame left side upper decorative board 161 and door frame left side lower decorative board 162) are formed from a plurality of openings 531a. It is attached to the front left side of the door frame base 110 so as to face forward. Each opening 531a of the left unit base 531 is formed so that the LEDs 161a and 162a of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 are located substantially in the center in the vertical direction when assembled into the door frame 3. The left unit base 531 is formed of a translucent member.

The left unit diffusing lens member 532 is formed of a transparent member, and is vertically divided into an upper diffusing lens member 532A and a lower diffusing lens member 532B. The left unit diffuser lens member 532 has a circular lens portion 532a with a circular front view corresponding to the circular opening 531a in the left unit base 531 and a square front view quadrangle corresponding to the rectangular opening 531a. It includes a lens unit 532b. When the door frame left side unit 530 is assembled to the door frame 3, the LEDs 161a and 162a of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 are located immediately after the center of the circular lens portion 532a and the square lens portion 532b. It is formed.

The circular lens portion 532a of the left unit diffusion lens member 532 is formed in a convex lens shape with smooth front and rear surfaces. The circular lens portion 532a can irradiate the light from the LEDs 161a and 162a arranged at the rear to the front in the form of dots. The circular decorative portion of the left unit decorative lens member can be luminescently decorated by the light radiated forward from the circular lens portion 532a.

The square lens portion 532b of the left unit diffuser lens member 532 includes a central diffuser reflection portion 532c that is recessed rearward in a conical shape at the center of the front surface, and a front diffuser lens portion 532d formed outside the central diffuser reflection portion 532c on the front surface. , The input lens portion 532e that bulges rearward in a curved surface shape at the center of the rear surface (immediately after the central diffusion reflection portion 532c), and the input lens portion 532e on the rear surface as a whole, moving forward as it moves away from the input lens portion 532e. It is provided with a front reflecting portion 532f that is inclined so as to move.

The front diffusion lens portion 532d of the square lens portion 532b is formed by a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves divided in the circumferential direction by radially extending lines centered on the central diffusion reflection portion 532c. More specifically, in the front diffusion lens portion 532d, the groove portion is recessed rearward in an arc shape in the cross-sectional shape when cut along the radial direction, and the mountain portion between the grooves is forward. It bulges in an arc shape, and the front surface is formed in a smooth wavy shape. Further, the front diffusion lens portion 532d is formed so that the groove portion and the mountain portion are alternately positioned in the circumferential direction with the line extending radially extending in the circumferential direction as a boundary.

The front reflecting portion 532f of the square lens portion 532b is formed by a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves divided in the circumferential direction by a line extending radially around the input lens portion 532e. These plurality of grooves are recessed in a V shape from the rear to the front, and the deepest portion is formed in an arc shape. The front reflecting portion 532f has a cross-sectional shape when cut along the radial direction, in which the mountain portion between the grooves is formed in a triangular shape with a pointed rearward portion, and is formed in a saw shape. The front reflecting portion 532f is formed so that the groove and the mountain portion move forward as the distance from the center increases. Further, the front reflecting portion 532f is formed so that the groove portion and the mountain portion are alternately positioned in the circumferential direction with the line extending radially extending in the circumferential direction as a boundary. The line extending radially extending in the circumferential direction coincides with the dividing line extending radially in the front diffusion lens portion 532d.

The square lens portion 532b is assembled on the door frame 3, and the corresponding LEDs 161a and 162a of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 are located immediately after the input lens portion 532e.

In the square lens unit 532b, the light radiated forward from the LEDs 161a and 162a is input from the input lens unit 532e into the square lens unit 532b. Since the input lens unit 532e bulges rearward in a curved surface shape (convex lens shape), the light spreading forward from the LEDs 161a and 162a is refracted so as to travel parallel to the front, and the input light is transmitted. Almost everything can be guided to the conical central diffuse reflector 532c. Then, the light guided to the central diffuse reflector 532c is perpendicular to the axis extending in the front-rear direction (parallel to the front surface of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160) due to the inclined conical surface of the central diffuse reflector 532c. It is reflected so as to be diffused in the above direction), and travels in the square lens portion 532b from the center side to the outside along the front surface thereof. Further, the light reflected by the central diffuse reflection unit 532c travels from the central side to the outside (direction away from the center line of the central diffuse reflection unit 532c) over the entire thickness of the square lens unit 532b in the front-rear direction.

When the light reflected from the center side to the outside in the square lens portion 532b substantially parallel to the front surface of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 reaches the saw-shaped front reflecting portion 532f, it is forward by the surface of the front reflecting portion 532f. It reflects to the side. At this time, since the rear surface of the front reflecting portion 532f is inclined so as to move forward as the distance from the central diffuse reflection portion 532c increases, the thickness of the square lens portion 532b in the front-rear direction becomes thinner as the distance from the center increases. (See FIG. 81). As a result, the light reflected outward by the central diffuse reflection unit 532c over the entire thickness of the square lens unit 532b in the front-rear direction is sequentially forwarded by the front reflection unit 532f from the center side to the outside. Can be reflected.

Then, the light reflected forward by the front reflecting portion 532f is emitted forward from the square lens portion 532b through the front diffusion lens portion 532d. At this time, since the front diffusing lens portion 532d has a wavy cross section, the light reflected forward by the front reflecting portion 532f can be diffused in various directions, and the square lens portion 532b It is possible to irradiate the front surface (the rear surface of the left unit decorative lens member) substantially uniformly from the front surface of the lens.

In the front diffuser lens portion 532d and the front reflection portion 532f, the square lens portion 532b is formed by dividing a plurality of concentric grooves by a plurality of radially extending lines, and then dividing a plurality of concentric arcuate grooves with the dividing line as a boundary. Is arranged in the radial direction so that the concentric arcuate grooves are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction. Therefore, the light emitted from the front surface to the front of the square lens portion 532b has a concentric striped pattern. It is possible to prevent the light from becoming light, and it is possible to irradiate the light with a more uniform shade forward. As a result, the multi-faceted decorative portion in front of the square lens portion 532b in the left unit decorative lens member can be luminescent and decorated substantially uniformly.

The left unit decorative lens member (not shown) is formed along the front surface of the left unit decorative cover 536. The left unit decorative lens member is located in front of the circular decorative portion formed in the front position of the circular lens portion 532a of the left unit diffuser lens member 532 and the square lens portion 532b of the left unit diffuser lens member 532. It is equipped with a multi-faceted decorative part formed on the part. The circular decorative portion is formed in a shape in which a plurality of triangular ribs are provided in the circumferential direction on the outer periphery of a columnar portion whose front surface is recessed and extends shortly in the front-rear direction. In the polyhedral decoration part, a plurality of square pyramid-shaped parts are arranged in the vertical direction on the front surface of the rectangular parallelepiped extending vertically, and a polyhedron consisting of a plurality of triangles is arranged in the vertical direction on both the left and right sides of the rectangular parallelepiped part. It is formed in a shape like that. The circular decorative portion and the multifaceted decorative portion are formed in the same shape as the circular decorative portion 561a and the multifaceted decorative portion 561b of the right unit decorative lens member 561 in the door frame right side unit 550.

The left unit decorative lens member can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the transparent left unit decorative cover 536. Further, in the left unit decorative lens member, the multifaceted decorative portion is forward from the square lens portion 532b of the left unit diffuser lens member 532 by the light radiated forward from the circular lens portion 532a of the left unit diffuser lens member 532. Each lens is decorated with light emitted from the lens.

The decorative base 534 on the left unit is a quadrangle whose front view shape extends vertically, and is formed in a square cylinder shape extending back and forth. The upper decorative base 534 of the left unit is inclined so that a portion forming the lower surface on the outer periphery protrudes downward from the front end side to the rear end side, and the lower portion of the portion penetrates back and forth. The decorative base 534 on the left unit is formed of a translucent member.

The front view of the decorative base 535 under the left unit is formed in a U shape that is open upward. The lower decorative base 535 of the left unit is inclined from substantially the center in the vertical direction at the front end to the rear end so that the upper side moves rearward as it goes upward. The decorative base 535 under the left unit is formed of a translucent member.

The left unit decorative cover 536 extends up and down over the entire height of the door frame left side unit 530. The left unit decorative cover 536 is bent so that the middle portion in the vertical direction is recessed rearward, and the lower portion is bent rearward along the front end of the upper decorative base 534 of the left unit, and the left It connects the dogleg-shaped part whose upper part is bent backward along the front end of the lower decorative base 535 of the unit, and the lower end of the upper doglegged part and the upper end of the lower doglegged part. It is composed of a linear part.

The upper and lower ends of the left unit decorative cover 536 are attached to the front surface of the left unit upper decorative base 534 and the front surface of the left unit lower decorative base 535, respectively. The left unit decorative cover 536 is formed of a transparent member, and the left unit decorative lens member arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized from the front side.

The decorative member 537 extends vertically and shortly, and is attached to the front surface of the left unit decorative cover 536 at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. The decorative member 537 is formed of a translucent member.

[3-6. Door frame right side unit]
The door frame right side unit 550 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 82 to 86 and the like. FIG. 82A is a front view of the door frame right side unit in the door frame, FIG. 82B is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 82C is a rear view of the door frame right side unit. It is a perspective view seen from. FIG. 83 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 84 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 85 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line MM in FIG. 82 (a). FIG. 86 (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line NN in FIG. 82 (a), and FIG. 86 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line OO in FIG. 82 (a). The door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the upper side of the dish unit 320 and to the right side of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100.

The door frame right side unit 550 includes a vertically extending box-shaped right unit base 551 attached to the front surface of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100 and attached to the right side of the front view of the through hole 111, and the front surface of the right unit base 551. The door frame right side decorative board 552 and the door frame right side decorative board 552 are attached to the left side from the center of the front view on the front side of the right unit base 551 and extend in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction. A transparent flat plate-shaped right unit left diffusing lens member 553, a sheet-shaped right unit left decorative member 554 attached to the left side surface of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 and decorated, and a right unit left decorative member. It includes a transparent flat plate-shaped right unit left cover 555 attached to the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 so as to cover the left side of the 554.

Further, the door frame right side unit 550 is located on the front side of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 and on the right side of the front view of the right unit left diffuser lens member 553. It is attached to the member 553 and is attached to the right side surface of the transparent flat plate-shaped right unit right diffusion lens member 556 extending in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 and is decorated. It is provided with a sheet-shaped right unit right decorative member 557 and a transparent flat plate-shaped right unit right cover and 558 attached to the right unit right diffuser lens member 556 so as to cover the right side of the right unit right decorative member 557. There is.

Further, the door frame right side unit 550 is arranged between the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556, and is shallow extending in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction in which the front and right sides are open. A box-shaped, opaque right unit left light-shielding member 559 and a right-hand unit right diffuser lens member 556 left side of the right unit left light-shielding member 559 are attached so as to close the open right side. It is provided with a flat plate-shaped right unit right light-shielding member 560.

Further, the door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the front end of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556, and has a translucent right having a polyhedron-like decoration at the front end. It is attached to the front surface of the right unit base 551 so as to cover the left and right sides of the unit decorative lens member 561, the right unit decorative lens member 561, the right unit left diffuser lens member 553, and the front end side of the right unit right diffuser lens member 556. A frame-shaped right unit decorative base 562 that penetrates back and forth, a transparent right unit cover 563 that is attached to the front side of the right unit decorative base 562 so as to close the front end opening of the right unit decorative base 562, and a right unit cover. It includes a plurality of decorative members 564 attached to the front side of the 563. Although not shown, the door frame right side unit 550 is attached so as to penetrate the right unit base 551 vertically, and the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100 and the door frame of the door frame top unit 570. A connection cable for connecting to the top unit relay board 589 is provided.

The right unit base 551 of the door frame right side unit 550 is a quadrangle whose front view is elongated vertically, is short in the front-rear direction and extends in a square cylinder shape, and is formed in a box shape in which the vicinity of the center in the front-rear direction is closed. Has been done. The right unit base 551 is formed of a translucent member.

The decorative substrate 552 on the right side of the door frame is formed in the shape of a strip extending vertically. The door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is mounted on a plurality of left LEDs 552a mounted on the left side of the center in the left-right direction on the front surface, a right LED 552b mounted on the right side of the center in the left-right direction on the front surface, and a center in the left-right direction on the front surface. It is provided with a plurality of medium LEDs 552c and the like. The left LED 552a of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is for causing the right unit left decorative member 554 to emit light and decorate via the right unit left diffusion lens member 553. Further, the right LED 552b is for illuminating and decorating the right unit right decorative member 557 via the right unit right diffusing lens member 556. The middle LED 552c is for illuminating and decorating the right unit decorative lens member 561.

The front and rear sides of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 are formed in white. The door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is vertically divided into an upper door frame right side upper decorative substrate 552A and a lower door frame right side lower decorative substrate 552B. Although not shown, the door frame right side lower decorative board 552B is connected to the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100, and the door frame right side upper decorative board 552A is the door frame right side lower decorative board 552B. It is connected to the.

The right unit left diffusion lens member 553 includes a flat plate-shaped main body portion 553a extending in the vertical and front-rear directions, and a rear wall portion 553b protruding shortly from the rear side of the main body portion 553a to the right in the front view. The rear wall portion 553b is cut out in a quadrangular shape from the right end side in the front view to the left, and a plurality of cutout portions 553c are formed in the vertical direction at predetermined intervals, and the right unit left decorative member on the left surface side in the front view of the main body portion 553a. A housing recess 553d that is shallowly recessed to accommodate 554, an input lens portion 553e that protrudes rearward from the rear end surface of the main body 553a and is provided in a plurality of vertical directions, and a front view right side of the main body 553a, respectively. A plurality of side reflecting portions 553f arranged in the vertical direction so that the input lens portion 553e is centered in the vertical direction are provided.

The main body portion 553a of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 has a side view shape in which the upper corner on the front end side of a quadrangle extending vertically is notched diagonally in a C chamfer shape, and the lower side is upward as it goes forward. It is formed in a shape that is inclined so as to move to. Further, as shown in FIG. 86, the main body portion 553a is entirely moved to the right in the front view from the rear end side to the front with respect to the vertical line on the front surface of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552. It is slightly tilted. The front end of the main body portion 553a protrudes forward more than the front end of the door frame left side unit 530 in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3.

The rear wall portion 553b is assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, and its right end extends to substantially the center in the left-right direction of the right unit base 551. The left end of the rear wall portion 556b of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 abuts on the right end of the rear wall portion 553b.

A plurality of the plurality of cutout portions 553c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and a part thereof corresponds to the LED 552c in the decorative substrate 552 on the right side of the door frame. In the state of being assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 faces forward from the plurality of notches 553c, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 is satisfactorily emitted by the plurality of middle LEDs 552c. Can be decorated.

The bottom surface of the accommodating recess 553d is formed on a flat surface, and the outer peripheral shape substantially matches the outer shape of the right unit left decorative member 554. Thereby, the right unit left decorative member 554 can be accommodated.

The plurality of input lens portions 553e project rearward at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction from the rear end surface of the main body portion 553a. Specifically, when the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 is divided into six equal parts in the vertical direction, they are formed substantially in the center of each vertical direction. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the input lens portion 553e is recessed forward so as to be curved in a spherical shape from a rectangular parallelepiped portion in which a vertically extending quadrangle protrudes rearward and the rear surface of the rectangular parallelepiped portion. Has a site and. These input lens portions 553e are respectively located immediately before the left LED 552a of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 in a state of being assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. As a result, the light from the left LED 552a can be input so as to be widely diffused in the main body portion 553a.

A plurality (six) of side reflecting portions 553f are provided in the vertical direction. Each side reflection portion 553f is formed by a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves divided in the circumferential direction by a line extending radially around the input lens portion 553e. In each of these concentric arcuate grooves, the surface on the side closer to the input lens portion 553e is inclined with respect to the surface on the main body portion 553a, and the surface on the side far from the input lens portion 553e is the main body portion. It extends perpendicular to the surface of 553a, and the deepest part is formed in an arc shape. The side reflecting portion 553f has a cross-sectional shape formed into a sharp triangular shape such that the mountain portion between the grooves faces the center side when cut in the radial direction about the input lens portion 553e. , The whole is formed in a saw shape. Further, the side reflecting portion 553f is formed so that the groove portion and the mountain portion are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction with the radial line dividing the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves in the circumferential direction as a boundary. ing.

In the right unit left diffusion lens member 553, the light radiated forward from the left LED 552a of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 flows from the rear surface of the input lens portion 553e into the main body portion 553a of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553. Being incident. Since the rear end of the input lens portion 553e is recessed in a curved shape toward the front, the curved surface refracts the light from the left LED 552a so as to spread, and in the main body portion 553a, each input lens portion 553e It will diffuse radially forward around the center.

Since the main body portion 553a is slightly inclined with respect to the line extending vertically from the front surface of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 so that the whole body moves to the right in the front view toward the front, the door frame The light emitted from the left LED 552a mounted on the front surface of the right side decorative substrate 552 and incident from the input lens portion 553e into the main body portion 553a hits the flat left surface in the main body portion 553a. However, the direct light from the left LED 552a is not radiated from the left surface of the main body 553a to the outside due to the angle of incidence with respect to the left surface of the main body 553a, but is reflected to the side reflecting portion 553f side on the inner surface of the left surface. It becomes.

Then, the light incident forward from the input lens portion 553e into the main body portion 553a is reflected to the left in the front view by hitting the saw-shaped side reflecting portion 553f, and is reflected outward from the left surface of the main body portion 553a. It will be irradiated. Light is also emitted from the right surface (side reflection portion 553f) of the main body portion 553a to the outside (right side when viewed from the front), but the right unit left light shielding member 559 arranged on the right side of the main body portion 553a is white. Since it is a member, the left surface of the right unit left light-shielding member 559 is brightly illuminated, and the indirect light reflected by the right unit left light-shielding member 559 is emitted to the left side through the main body portion 553a. .. Therefore, from the left surface of the main body portion 553a, the light reflected to the left by the side reflecting portion 553f in the main body portion 553a and the light reflected to the right from the side reflecting portion 553f are emitted to the right and left on the left surface of the right unit left shading member 559. Since the light that reflects toward the main body and passes through the main body 553a is emitted to the left, the right unit left decorative member 554 attached to the left side of the main body 553a can be light-emitting and decorated with good brightness. can.

Further, in the side reflecting portion 553f, a plurality of concentric grooves are divided by a plurality of radially extending lines, and then the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves are shifted in the radial direction with the dividing line as a boundary to form a concentric arc-shaped groove. Are arranged alternately in the circumferential direction, so that the light radiated from the left surface of the main body 553a to the outside (left side) is prevented from becoming light having concentric striped shades. It is possible to irradiate more uniform light to the left. As a result, the left decorative member 554 of the right unit housed in the storage recess 553d on the left side of the main body 553a can be lightly decorated substantially uniformly.

Since the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 is formed of a transparent member, side reflections formed on the opposite side from the front left side (the side where the accommodating recess 553d is formed) of the main body portion 553a. A pattern composed of a plurality of concentric arcuate grooves and radially extending lines of the portion 553f can be visually recognized. Therefore, when a transparent portion is formed in the right unit left decorative member 554, the pattern of the side reflecting portion 553f of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 can be visually recognized through the transparent portion, and the transparent portion in the right unit left decorative member 554 becomes transparent. Can be decorated by the side reflecting portion 553f.

The right unit left decorative member 554 is formed in the shape of a thin sheet, and decorations such as the maker logo of the pachinko machine 1 and the logo in line with the production concept presented to the player on the game board 5 are translucent. It is given to have. The right unit left cover 555 protects the outer surface of the right unit left decorative member 554 in a state of being assembled to the door frame right side unit 550.

The right unit right diffusion lens member 556 is formed substantially symmetrically with the right unit left diffusion lens member 553, and has a similar configuration. More specifically, the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 includes a flat plate-shaped main body portion 556a extending in the vertical and front-rear directions, and a rear wall protruding shortly from the rear side of the main body portion 556a to the left in the front view. The portion 556b and the rear wall portion 556b are notched in a quadrangular shape from the left end side in the front view to the right, and a plurality of cutout portions 556c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and the right side of the main body portion 556a in the front view. Front view of the housing recess 556d, which is shallowly recessed to accommodate the unit right decorative member 557, the input lens portion 556e, which protrudes rearward from the rear end surface of the main body portion 556a and is provided in the vertical direction, and the main body portion 556a. On the left side, each input lens unit 556e is provided with a plurality of side reflection units 556f arranged in the vertical direction so as to be centered in the vertical direction.

Right unit The main body of the right diffusion lens member 556a has a side view shape in which the upper corner of the front end side of a quadrangle extending vertically is notched diagonally in a C chamfer shape, and the lower side is upward as it goes forward. It is formed in a shape that is inclined so as to move to, and has substantially the same outer shape as the main body portion 553a of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553. Further, as shown in FIG. 86, the main body portion 556a is entirely moved to the left in the front view from the rear end side to the front with respect to the vertical line on the front surface of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552. It is slightly tilted. The front end of the main body portion 556a protrudes forward more than the front end of the door frame left side unit 530 in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3.

The rear wall portion 556b is assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, and its left end extends to substantially the center in the left-right direction of the right unit base 551. The right end of the rear wall portion 553b of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 comes into contact with the left end of the rear wall portion 556b.

A plurality of the plurality of notches 556c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and a part thereof corresponds to the LED 552c in the decorative substrate 552 on the right side of the door frame. These plurality of notch portions 556c are formed at positions corresponding to the plurality of notch portions 553c of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553. Therefore, in the state of being assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the cutout portion 553c of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the notch portion 556c of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 have a square opening penetrating back and forth. Is formed, the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 faces forward from the opening, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 can be satisfactorily luminescent and decorated by the plurality of middle LEDs 552c.

The bottom surface of the accommodating recess 556d is formed on a flat surface, and the shape of the outer periphery substantially matches the outer shape of the right decorative member 557 of the right unit. As a result, the right unit right decorative member 557 can be accommodated.

The plurality of input lens portions 556e project rearward at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction from the rear end surface of the main body portion 556a. Specifically, the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 is formed substantially in the center of each of the vertical directions when the right diffusion lens member 556 is divided into six equal parts in the vertical direction. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the input lens portion 556e is recessed forward so as to be curved in a spherical shape from a rectangular parallelepiped portion in which a vertically extending quadrangle protrudes rearward and the rear surface of the rectangular parallelepiped portion. Has a site and. These input lens portions 556e are respectively located immediately before the right LED 552b of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 in a state of being assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. As a result, the light from the right LED 552b can be input so as to be widely diffused in the main body portion 556a.

A plurality (six) of side reflecting portions 556f are provided in the vertical direction. Each side reflection portion 556f is formed by a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves divided in the circumferential direction by a line extending radially around the input lens portion 556e. In each of these concentric arcuate grooves, the surface on the side closer to the input lens portion 556e is inclined with respect to the surface on the main body portion 556a, and the surface on the side far from the input lens portion 556e is the main body portion. It extends perpendicular to the surface of 556a, and the deepest part is formed in an arc shape. The side reflecting portion 556f has a cross-sectional shape formed into a sharp triangular shape such that the mountain portion between the grooves faces the center side when cut in the radial direction about the input lens portion 556e. , The whole is formed in a saw shape. Further, the side reflecting portion 556f is formed so that the groove portion and the mountain portion are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction with the radial line dividing the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves in the circumferential direction as a boundary. ing.

In the right unit right diffusion lens member 556, the light radiated forward from the right LED 552b of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 flows from the rear surface of the input lens portion 556e into the main body portion 556a of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. Being incident. Since the rear end of the input lens portion 556e is recessed in a curved shape toward the front, the curved surface refracts the light from the right LED 552b so as to spread, and in the main body portion 556a, each input lens portion 556e It will diffuse radially forward around the center.

Since the main body portion 556a is slightly inclined with respect to the line extending vertically from the front surface of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 so that the whole body moves to the left in the front view as the whole moves forward, the door frame The light emitted from the right LED 552b mounted on the front surface of the right side decorative substrate 552 and incident from the input lens portion 556e into the main body portion 556a hits the flat right surface in the main body portion 556a. However, the direct light from the right LED 552b is not radiated from the left surface of the main body 556a to the outside due to the angle of incidence with respect to the right surface of the main body 556a, but is reflected to the side reflecting portion 556f side on the inner surface of the right surface. It becomes.

Then, the light incident forward from the input lens portion 556e into the main body portion 556a is reflected to the right in the front view by hitting the saw-shaped side reflecting portion 556f, and is reflected outward from the right surface of the main body portion 556a. It will be irradiated. Light is also emitted from the right surface (side reflection portion 556f) of the main body portion 556a to the outside (left side when viewed from the front), but the right unit right shading member 560 arranged on the left side of the main body portion 556a is white. Since it is a member, the right surface of the right light-shielding member 560 of the right unit is brightly illuminated, and the indirect light reflected by the right light-shielding member 560 of the right unit is emitted to the right side through the main body portion 556a. .. Therefore, from the right side of the main body portion 556a, the light reflected to the right by the side reflecting portion 556f in the main body portion 556a and the light emitted to the left from the side reflecting portion 556f are emitted to the left on the right side of the right light shielding member 560 of the right unit. Since the light that reflects toward the body and passes through the main body 556a is emitted to the right, the right unit right decorative member 557 attached to the right side of the main body 556a can be light-emitting and decorated with good brightness. can.

Further, in the side reflecting portion 556f, a plurality of concentric grooves are divided by a plurality of radially extending lines, and then the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves are shifted in the radial direction with the dividing line as a boundary to form a concentric arc-shaped groove. Are arranged alternately in the circumferential direction, so that the light radiated from the right surface of the main body portion 556a to the outside (right side) is prevented from becoming light having concentric striped shades. It is possible to irradiate more uniform light to the right. As a result, the right unit right decorative member 557 housed in the storage recess 556d on the right side of the main body 556a can be lightly and uniformly decorated.

Since the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 is formed of a transparent member, the side reflection formed on the opposite side from the front view right side (the side where the accommodating recess 556d is formed) of the main body portion 556a. A pattern composed of a plurality of concentric arcuate grooves and radially extending lines of the portion 556f can be visually recognized. Therefore, when a transparent portion is formed in the right decorative member 557 of the right unit, the pattern of the side reflecting portion 556f of the right diffuser lens member 556 of the right unit can be visually recognized through the transparent portion, and the transparent portion of the right decorative member 557 of the right unit is transparent. Can be decorated by the side reflecting portion 556f.

The right unit right decorative member 557 is formed in the shape of a thin sheet, and decorations such as the maker logo of the pachinko machine 1 and the logo in line with the production concept presented to the player on the game board 5 are translucent. It is given to have. The right unit right cover 558 protects the outer surface of the right unit right decorative member 557 in a state of being assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. The right unit right decorative member 557 and the right unit right cover 558 are formed substantially symmetrically with the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit left cover 555. Further, the decorations applied to the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit right decorative member 557 may be the same decoration or different decorations.

The right unit left light-shielding member 559 is formed so that the side view shape is substantially the same as the side view shape of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit left light-shielding member 559 is formed in a shallow box shape with the front and right sides open. The right unit left light-shielding member 559 includes a flat plate-shaped main body portion 559a extending in the vertical and front-rear directions, a rear wall portion 559b protruding from the rear side of the main body portion 559a to the right in the front view in a short flat plate shape, and rear. The wall portion 559b is cut out in a square shape from the right end side to the left in the front view, and a plurality of cutout portions 559c are formed in the vertical direction at predetermined intervals, and the main body portion 559a extends from the right side to the right and is rearward. It includes a plurality of flat plate-shaped reinforcing portions 559d extending from the wall portion 559b to the front end of the main body portion 559a.

The main body 559a of the right unit left light-shielding member 559 has a side view shape in which the upper corner on the front end side of a quadrangle extending vertically is notched diagonally in a C chamfer shape, and the lower side is upward as it goes forward. It is formed in a shape that is inclined so as to move, and has substantially the same outer shape as the main bodies 553a and 556a of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556.

The rear wall portion 559b is assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, and its left end extends to the right side of the right unit base 551 substantially in the left-right direction. The left surface of the right unit right shading member 560 abuts on the right end of the rear wall portion 559b.

A plurality of notches 559c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and a part thereof corresponds to the LED 552c in the decorative substrate 552 on the right side of the door frame. These plurality of notched portions 559c are formed at positions corresponding to the plurality of notched portions 553c and 556c of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. Therefore, in the state of being assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 faces forward from the plurality of notches 559c, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 is satisfactorily emitted by the plurality of middle LEDs 552c. Can be decorated.

The plurality of reinforcing portions 559d are provided as a set of a pair of reinforcing portions 559d separated in the vertical direction at substantially the same height as the left and right widths, and three sets separated in the vertical direction by a predetermined distance. The reinforcing portion 559d of each set is formed at a position behind the decorative member 564 attached to the right unit cover 563, respectively. These plurality of reinforcing portions 559d enhance the overall strength and rigidity of the door frame right side unit 550.

The right light-shielding member 560 has a side view shape such that the upper corner on the front end side of a quadrangle extending vertically is notched diagonally in a C-chamfer shape, and the lower side moves upward as it moves forward. It is formed in an inclined shape, and is formed in substantially the same shape as the main body portion 559a in the right unit left light shielding member 559. The right unit right light-shielding member 560 closes the right opening opened to the right of the right unit left light-shielding member 559 formed in a shallow box shape in a state of being assembled to the door frame right side unit 550.

The right unit left light-shielding member 559 and the right unit right light-shielding member 560 are each formed of white members. As shown in FIG. 86, the right unit left light-shielding member 559 and the right unit right light-shielding member 560 are assembled into the door frame right side unit 550, and the main body 559a and the right unit right light-shielding member 560 are the right units. The left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 are arranged so as to be close to the main bodies 553a and 556a. As a result, the main body portion 559a of the right unit left shading member 559 and the right unit right shading member 560 are separated from each other in the left-right direction, forming a space extending in the up-down direction and the front-back direction with a predetermined width in the left-right direction. .. The light radiated forward from the LED 552c in the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 through the space formed between the main body portion 559a of the right unit left shading member 559 and the right unit right shading member 560 is used to decorate the right unit. The rear side of the lens member 561 is irradiated.

Further, the right unit left light-shielding member 559 and the right unit right light-shielding member 560 are formed of a translucent member, and illuminate forward from the left LED 552a, the middle LED 552c, and the right LED 552b on the door frame right side decorative substrate 552, respectively. The left LED 552a, the right LED 552b, and the right LED 552b corresponding to the right unit left decorative member 554, the right unit right decorative member 557, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 are prevented from interfering with each other. The light emitting decoration can be made only by the medium LED 552c.

Further, the right unit left light-shielding member 559 and the right unit right light-shielding member 560 are arranged behind each of the divided spaces because the internal space is divided into four in the vertical direction by three sets of reinforcing portions 559d. The LED 552c in the right side decorative substrate 552 of the door frame can prevent light from interfering with each other, and the portion of the right unit decorative lens member 561 located in front of each space can be prevented. , Each can be independently luminescent and decorated. That is, on the front end side of the door frame right side unit 550, it is possible to divide the door frame into a plurality of (four) regions in the vertical direction and independently illuminate each region.

The right unit decorative lens member 561 is formed in a shape that follows the front end shape of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit decorative lens member 561 includes a circular decorative portion 561a formed in a circular shape in a front view, and a polyhedral decorative portion 561b extending vertically and forming a plurality of polyhedra. The circular decorative portion 561a is formed in a shape in which a plurality of triangular ribs are provided in the circumferential direction on the outer periphery of a columnar portion whose front surface is recessed and extends shortly in the front-rear direction. In the polyhedron decorative portion 561b, a plurality of square pyramid-shaped parts are arranged in a vertical direction on the front surface of a rectangular parallelepiped extending vertically, and a plurality of rows of polyhedrons composed of a plurality of triangles are vertically arranged on both left and right sides of the rectangular parallelepiped part. It is formed in a shape as if it were installed.

More specifically, in the right unit decorative lens member 561, a plurality of circular decorative portions 561a and multifaceted decorative portions 561b are divided into four by three sets of reinforcing portions 559d in the right unit left light shielding member 559. Among the parts located in the front, one multi-faceted decorative portion 561b is arranged on each of the upper and lower sides of the circular decorative portion 561a arranged in the center in the vertical direction in the three parts from the top, and one multi-faceted decorative portion 561b is arranged in the lowermost part. It is formed so that only the portion 561b is arranged.

The right unit decorative lens member 561 is attached to the front end of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit decorative lens member 561 can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the transparent right unit cover 563. The right unit decorative lens member 561 is light-emitting decorated by the LED 552c in the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 arranged at the rear.

The right unit decorative base 562 is formed in a tubular frame shape penetrating in the front-rear direction. The right unit decorative base 562 is formed in a shape that follows the shapes of the front end and the upper end of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit decorative base 562 is formed so as to cover both the left and right outer sides of the right unit left diffuser lens member 553 and the right unit right diffuser lens member 556 near the front end and the left and right sides of the right unit decorative lens member 561. In the state of being assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the front end of the right unit decorative lens member 561 protrudes slightly forward from the front end of the right unit decorative base 562. The right unit decorative base 562 is formed of a translucent member.

The right unit cover 563 is formed so that the front end opening of the right unit decorative base 562 can be closed. The right unit cover 563 is formed of a transparent member, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized from the front side.

The decorative member 564 extends shortly in the vertical direction and is attached to the front surface of the right unit cover 563 at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. The decorative member 564 is formed of a translucent member. The three decorative members 564 divide the right unit cover 563 (right unit decorative lens member 561) into four in the vertical direction.

The door frame right side unit 550 protrudes forward from the door frame left side unit 530 in a plate shape in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3, and protrudes slightly forward from the upper plate 321 front end of the plate unit 320. There is. The door frame right side unit 550 is independent of the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit right decorative member 557 provided on both the left and right protruding sides, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 provided at the front end. It can be luminescent and decorated.

Since the door frame right side unit 550 is plate-shaped and protrudes greatly forward, when this pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island equipment of the game hall, the door frame right side unit 550 is adjacent to the pachinko machine on the right side. It can exert an action effect like a partition between them. As a result, the player playing with this pachinko machine 1 can be made to have the illusion of playing in a private room, and other players around him can play the game in a relaxed atmosphere without hesitation. Can be done.

Further, since the door frame right side unit 550 protrudes greatly forward, in the game hall where the pachinko machines 1 are installed side by side, even if the pachinko machines 1 are not located in front of the pachinko machines 1, the island equipment It can be visually recognized even from the lateral direction along the line, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made to stand out in the game hall where a large number of pachinko machines are lined up. Therefore, if the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit right decorative member 557 on both the left and right sides of the door frame right side unit 550 are light-emitting decorated, the book can be viewed from a distance even if it is not located near the front of the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to notify the existence of the pachinko machine 1 and to make the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing to the player.

Further, in the door frame right side unit 550, when a problem such as a ball jam or an error occurs in the pachinko machine 1, the right unit left decorative member 554, the right unit right decorative member 557, and the right unit decorative lens on both the left and right sides are used. By illuminating and decorating the member 561 and the like in a peculiar manner, it is possible to immediately notify the staff of the game hall of the occurrence of the defect and recognize the occurrence of the defect, and it becomes possible to quickly respond to the defect. Therefore, the interruption of the game of the player can be resolved at an early stage, and the player can be frustrated and suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

[3-7. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 570 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 87 to 90 and the like. FIG. 87A is a front view of the door frame top unit in the door frame, FIG. 87B is a perspective view of the door frame top unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 87C is a perspective view of the door frame top unit as viewed from the back. It is a perspective view. FIG. 88 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 89 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 90 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line PP in FIG. 87. The door frame top unit 570 is attached to the upper side of the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550 and above the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100.

The door frame top unit 570 is attached to the central base 571 which is attached to the center in the left-right direction on the upper side of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100, and is attached to both the left and right sides of the central base 571. A pair of side bases 572 attached to the front surface of the door frame base 110 and a pair of upper speakers 573 attached to the front surfaces of the pair of side bases 572, respectively, extending left and right and the center in the left-right direction protruding forward. From the position closer to the center in the left-right direction to the vicinity of the center than the pair of openings 574a and the pair of openings 574a, which are box-shaped with the rear part open and penetrate the front and rear of the pair of upper speakers 573. It has a plurality of slits 574b (three on each side) that extend and penetrate each other in the front-rear direction and are separated from each other in the vertical direction, and are attached to the front side of the central base 571 and the pair of side bases 572. It includes a unit body 271 and a speaker cover 575 made of punching metal, which is arranged on the front side of the pair of upper speakers 573 and attached to the rear side of the unit body 271 so as to close the pair of openings 574a. ing.

Further, the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the front surface of the center of the unit body 271 in the left-right direction and has translucency, and is attached to the rear side of the top middle decoration member 576 and the top middle decoration member 576. The door frame top middle decoration board 577 on which multiple LEDs are mounted on the front of the cage, and the left and right ends of the top middle decoration member 576, which are attached to the front of the unit body 271 and close the plurality of slits 574b respectively. A plurality of transparent flat plate-shaped light guide members (three on each side) extending from the vicinity to the vicinity of both left and right ends of the unit body 271 straddling the opening 574a, and a top middle decoration member 576 on the front surface of the unit body 271. Top left decorative lens member 579 and top right decorative lens member 580, top left decorative lens member 579 and top right decoration, which are attached to both the left and right sides and cover the front surfaces of a plurality (three) light guide members 578, respectively. The top middle left decorative member 581 and the top middle left decorative member 581, which are attached to the front surface of the unit body 271 from the front side of each of the lens members 580 and extend from the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576 to the vicinity of the central side end of the opening 574a, respectively. It is provided with a top middle right decorative member 582.

Further, the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the inside of each of the left and right side surfaces of the unit body 271, and LEDs are mounted on the portions of the plurality (three) light guide members 578 facing the outer ends in the left and right directions. The door frame top left decorative board 583 and the door frame top right decorative board 584, and a plurality (three) slits 574b formed on the left and right sides of the center in the left-right direction on the rear side of the unit body 271 penetrate through each other. A pair of board bases 585 that are attached to each part, and a door that is attached to the front of the pair of board bases 585 and has a plurality of LEDs 586a and 587a mounted at positions behind the slit 574b of the unit main body 271. The frame top middle left decorative board 586 and the door frame top middle right decorative board 587, and the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 and the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 are attached to the rear side of the unit body 271 on the front side, respectively. It includes a pair of light-shielding members 588.

Further, the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the door frame top unit relay board 589 mounted on the front surface of the central base 571 in the unit main body 271 and the central base 571 so as to cover the front surface of the door frame top unit relay board 589. The unit so as to close the attached relay board cover 590, the upper cover 591 attached to the unit main body 271 so as to close the upper opening 574c of the unit main body 271, and the lower opening 574d of the unit main body 271. It includes a lower cover 592 attached to the main body 271.

The central base 571 of the door frame top unit 570 is formed in a quadrangle whose front view shape extends to the left and right. The central base 571 is formed in a box shape that is open to the rear, and has a plurality of irregularities on the front surface. The pair of side bases 572 are attached to the left and right ends of the central base 571, respectively. The pair of upper speakers 573 are attached to the front surface of each side base 572, respectively. The pair of upper speakers 573 are attached obliquely so that the front surfaces of the door frame top unit 570 move rearward on the side closer to the center in the left-right direction in the state of being assembled to the door frame top unit 570. The pair of upper speakers 573 are full-range cone-type speakers capable of outputting sound in a wide frequency band.

The unit main body 271 is formed so that the shape of the front view is such that the lower portion of the quadrangle extending to the left and right near both left and right ends bulges downward. In other words, the unit main body 271 is formed in a shape such that a quadrangle extending to the left and right is cut out in a trapezoidal shape narrowed upward from the lower end side. The unit body 271 has a quadrangle whose shape in a plan view extends to the left and right, and a portion having about 1/2 of the total width (length in the left and right direction) centered on the center in the left and right direction on the front end side of the quadrangle as the base. It is formed in a shape that combines a trapezoid that protrudes forward and a quadrangle that protrudes forward shortly with the front end side of the trapezoid as the long side. Therefore, in the unit main body 271, both sides of the portion protruding forward in the center in the left-right direction on the front surface connect the left-right end portion of the unit main body 271 and the left-right end portion of the front end of the portion protruding forward. It is located behind (recessed).

The unit main body 271 is formed with openings 574a penetrating back and forth, respectively, at a portion on the front surface from both ends in the left-right direction to a position outside the portion protruding forward. Further, the unit main body 271 has a plurality of slits extending in the vertical direction at a predetermined height to the left and right and penetrating in the front-rear direction in a portion extending diagonally in a portion protruding forward in a trapezoidal shape on the front surface. 574b is formed. The plurality of slits 574b extend left and right from the vicinity of the front end of the portion of the front surface of the unit main body 271 that extends diagonally forward to the vicinity of the opening 574a. Further, the plurality of slits 574b are formed on both sides of the center of the unit main body 271 in the left-right direction, three each vertically separated from each other.

Further, the unit main body 271 has an upper opening 574c notched from the rear end to the front in the center in the left-right direction on the upper surface, and a lower opening 574d notched from the rear end to the front in the left-right direction on the lower surface. , Is equipped. The upper opening 574c of the unit body 271 is closed by the upper cover 591. Further, the lower opening 574d is closed by the lower cover 592.

Further, the unit main body 271 includes a top left decorative portion 574e and a top right decorative portion 574f extending vertically at both left and right ends. The front surface of the top left decorative portion 574e is formed at a position substantially the same in the front-rear direction as the front surface of the portion where the opening 574a is formed. The top right decorative portion 574f is formed so that the front surface thereof is located in front of the front surface of the portion where the opening 574a is formed. The unit body 271 is formed of a translucent member.

The top middle decorative member 576 is attached to the front end of a portion of the front surface of the unit body 271 that projects forward in the center in the left-right direction. The top middle decorative member 576 has a modified pentagon whose front view shape is bent so that the central portion in the left-right direction of the lower side of the substantially square is located downward, and the modified pentagon extends outward in the left-right direction from the upper ends of the left and right sides of the modified pentagon. It is formed in a shape that looks like a combination of a substantially right triangle connecting the tip of the side and the lower ends of the left and right sides of the pentagon. The top middle decorative member 576 is inclined so that the variable pentagonal portion on the front surface moves backward as it goes downward. The top middle decorative member 576 is formed in a three-dimensional shape as a whole, and has translucency.

The front surface of the door frame top interior decorative substrate 577 is tilted so as to move backward as it goes downward so as to be along the front surface of the modified pentagonal portion of the top interior decorative member 576. Attached to the side. A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the door frame top middle decoration substrate 577, and by making these LEDs emit light, the top middle decoration member 576 can be light-emittingly decorated.

The light guide member 578 is formed of a transparent member. The light guide member 578 is formed in a shape that follows the shape on both the left and right sides of the front end of the portion of the front surface of the unit main body 271 that protrudes forward. Explaining that the side of the unit body 271 close to both ends in the left-right direction is the end side and the side close to the center is the center side, the light guide member 578 is a straight portion extending straight to the left and right from the end side toward the center side. It is composed of 578a and an arc portion 578b extending in an arc shape having a large radius so as to move forward from the end side on the center side of the straight portion 578a toward the center side. The light guide member 578 is formed so that the depth in the front-rear direction is smaller than the height in the vertical direction in the straight portion 578a, and the depth in the front-rear direction is formed to be larger than the height in the vertical direction in the arc portion 578b. Further, the light guide member 578 is formed so that the height in the vertical direction is constant in the straight portion 578a and the height in the vertical direction becomes smaller in the arc portion 578b toward the center side. In the state where the light guide member 578 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the straight portion 578a is located immediately before the opening 574a of the unit main body 271, and the arc portion 578b closes the slit 574b of the unit main body 271 from the front. There is.

The light guide member 578 includes a diffuse reflection portion 578c formed on the rear surface of the straight portion 578a and a diffusion input portion 578d composed of a plurality of irregularities formed on the rear surface side of the arc portion 578b. It has.

When the light guide member 578 is assembled on the door frame top unit 570, both outer ends in the left-right direction face the LEDs 583a and 584a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 or the door frame top right decorative substrate 584. At the same time, the diffusion input unit 578d faces the LEDs 586a and 587a of the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 or the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587. When light from the LEDs 583a and 584a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 or the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 is incident on the light guide member 578 from both outer ends in the left-right direction, the light is emitted from the straight portion 578a. As it advances toward the center side, it is sequentially reflected forward from the end side by the diffuse reflection portion 578c formed on the rear surface of the straight portion 578a, and light is emitted forward from the entire front surface of the straight portion 578a. A top left decorative lens member 579 or a top right decorative lens member 580 is arranged in front of the light guide member 578, and a portion of them in front of the straight portion 578a is light-emitting decorated.

Further, the light guide member 578 receives light from the LEDs 586a and 587a of the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 or the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 from the diffusion input portion 578d formed on the rear surface of the arc portion 578b. Then, the light is widely diffused into the arc portion 578b due to the unevenness of the diffusion input portion 578d, and the light is radiated forward from the entire front surface of the arc portion 578b. As a result, the portion of the top left decorative lens member 579 or the top right decorative lens member 580 located in front of the arc portion 578b can be light-emitting decorated.

As described above, the light guide member 578 is the LED 583a, 586a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 and the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586, or the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 and the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587. Light from the LEDs 584a and 587a can be guided to illuminate and decorate the entire top left decorative lens member 579 or top right decorative lens member 580 arranged in front in a good (uniform) state.

The top left decorative lens member 579 is attached to the front surface of the unit body 271 so as to cover the front of the three light guide members 578 arranged on the left side of the center in the left-right direction on the front surface of the unit body 271. The top left decorative lens member 579 has three decorative lens portions 579a that independently accommodate the three light guide members 578 from the front. The decorative lens portion 579a of the top left decorative lens member 579 is formed in a shape that resembles the light guide member 578, and covers the front surface and both the upper and lower surfaces of the light guide member 578. On the front surface of each decorative lens portion 579a, the irregularities of the square pyramid protruding forward are arranged in rows on the left and right.

The top left decorative lens member 579 extends from the left end of the top middle decorative member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 to the right end of the top left decorative portion 574e of the unit body 271. That is, the top left decorative lens member 579 decorates substantially the entire left side of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570. The top left decorative lens member 579 is light-emittingly decorated by the LEDs 583a and 586a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 and the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 via three light guide members 578.

The top right decorative lens member 580 is attached to the front surface of the unit body 271 so as to cover the front of the three light guide members 578 arranged on the right side of the center in the left-right direction on the front surface of the unit body 271. The top right decorative lens member 580 has three decorative lens portions 580a that independently accommodate the three light guide members 578 from the front. The decorative lens portion 580a of the top right decorative lens member 580 is formed in a shape that resembles the light guide member 578, and covers the front surface and both the upper and lower surfaces of the light guide member 578. On the front surface of each decorative lens portion 580a, irregularities of a square weight stand protruding forward are arranged in rows on the left and right.

The top right decorative lens member 580 extends from the right end of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570 to the left end of the top right decorative portion 574f of the unit main body 271. That is, the top right decorative lens member 580 decorates substantially the entire right side of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570. The top right decorative lens member 580 is light-emittingly decorated by the LEDs 584a and 587 of the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 and the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 via three light guide members 578.

The top middle left decorative member 581 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271 from the front of the top left decorative lens member 579 between the left opening 574a on the front surface of the unit main body 271 and the top middle decorative member 576. The top middle left decorative member 581 is attached so as to fill the space between the three decorative lens portions 579a of the top left decorative lens member 579 in a state of being assembled to the door frame top unit 570, and the front center side is the top left. It protrudes forward from the front surface of the decorative lens member 579. The top middle left decorative member 581 is formed of a translucent member.

The top middle right decorative member 582 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271 from the front of the top right decorative lens member 580 between the right opening 574a on the front surface of the unit main body 271 and the top middle right decorative member 576. The top middle right decorative member 582 is attached so as to fill the space between the three decorative lens portions 580a of the top right decorative lens member 580 in a state of being assembled to the door frame top unit 570, and the front center side is the top right. It protrudes forward from the front surface of the decorative lens member 580. The top middle right decorative member 582 is formed of a translucent member.

The door frame top left decorative substrate 583 is attached to the inside of the left side surface (top left decorative portion 574e) in the unit main body 271 with the surface on which the LED 583a is mounted facing to the right. In the door frame top left decorative substrate 583, the LED 583a is mounted at a position facing the left end surface of the three light guide members 578 attached to the front surface on the left side from the center in the left-right direction of the unit body 271 (see FIG. 90). ). Each of the three LEDs 583a can emit light independently. The LED 583a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 allows a portion of the top left decorative lens member 579 located in front of the left opening 574a of the unit body 271 via the straight portion 578a of the three light guide members 578. It can be luminescent and decorated.

The door frame top right decorative substrate 584 is attached to the inside of the right side surface (top right decorative portion 574f) in the unit main body 271 with the surface on which the LED 584a is mounted facing left. In the door frame top right decorative substrate 584, the LED 584a is mounted at a position facing the right end surface of the three light guide members 578 attached to the front surface on the right side of the center in the left-right direction of the unit body 271 (see FIG. 90). ). Each of the three LEDs 584a can emit light independently. The LED 584a of the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 allows a portion of the top right decorative lens member 580 located in front of the right opening 574a of the unit body 271 via the straight portion 578a of the three light guide members 578. It can be luminescent and decorated.

The pair of substrate bases 585 are attached to the rear side of the portion where the plurality of slits 574b are formed in the unit main body 271. The pair of substrate bases 585 are formed substantially symmetrically with each other. The substrate base 585 is formed from a side wall having a substantially square side view having sides extending vertically and front and back, a rear wall of a front view square extending outward at right angles from the rear side of the side wall, and the front end of the upper side of the side wall. An abbreviation that connects the upper wall of a right triangle that connects the side wall and the upper side of the rear wall with the line connecting the upper side of the side wall as a hypotenuse, and the lower side of the side wall and the rear wall on the opposite side of the upper wall. It is formed in the shape of a triangular columnar box with a right-angled lower wall and an open space between the upper and lower hypotenuses. The substrate base 585 is attached to the unit body 271 so that the open portion is closed by the unit body 271. The door frame top middle left decorative board 586 or the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 is attached to the board base 585 so that the open portion is closed.

The door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 is attached to the substrate base 585 attached to the rear side on the left side from the left and right center of the unit main body 271 so as to close the box-shaped open portion from the front. Be done. The door frame top middle left decorative board 586 is attached to the front surface of the board base 585 so that the front surface moves forward toward the center side in the left-right direction of the unit body 271 with respect to the surface extending to the left and right. It will be in a tilted state. As a result, the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 is assembled on the door frame top unit 570, and the front surface thereof is the surface of the portion where the three slits 574b on the left side of the center of the unit body 271 in the left-right direction are formed. It becomes a state almost parallel to.

A plurality of LEDs 586a are mounted on the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 at positions corresponding to the three slits 574b of the unit main body 271. As a result, the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 is in a state in which a plurality of LEDs 586a face forward from the three slits 574b on the left side of the center of the unit main body 271 in a state of being assembled to the door frame top unit 570. The door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 emits light from a plurality of LEDs 586a to illuminate and decorate a portion of the top left decorative lens member 579 near the top middle decorative member 576 via the arc portion 578b of the light guide member 578. be able to.

The door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 is attached to the substrate base 585 attached to the rear side on the right side of the center of the left and right in the unit main body 271 so as to close the box-shaped open portion from the front. Be done. The door frame top middle right decorative board 587 is attached to the front surface of the board base 585 so that the front surface moves forward toward the center side in the left-right direction of the unit body 271 with respect to the surface extending to the left and right. It will be in a tilted state. As a result, the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 is assembled on the door frame top unit 570, and the front surface thereof is the surface of the portion where the three slits 574b on the right side of the center of the unit body 271 in the left-right direction are formed. It becomes a state almost parallel to.

A plurality of LEDs 587a are mounted on the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 at positions corresponding to the three slits 574b of the unit main body 271. As a result, the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 is in a state in which a plurality of LEDs 587a face forward from the three slits 574b on the right side of the center of the unit main body 271 in a state of being assembled to the door frame top unit 570. The door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 emits light from a plurality of LEDs 587a to illuminate and decorate a portion of the top right decorative lens member 580 close to the top middle decorative member 576 via the arc portion 578b of the light guide member 578. be able to.

The pair of light-shielding members 588 are attached to the front rear side of the unit main body 271 at a position between the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 and the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 and the unit main body 271. The pair of light-shielding members 588 are formed substantially symmetrically with each other by a translucent member. The light-shielding member 588 is placed between the upper and lower sides of the plurality of LEDs 586a and 587a of the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 and the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 arranged in a row corresponding to the three slits 574b in the unit main body 271. It is partitioning. With this light-shielding member 588, light can be guided forward by the light guide member 578 only by the LEDs 586a and 587 located immediately after each light guide member 578, and the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decoration The decorative lens portions 579a and 580a of the lens member 580 can be satisfactorily luminescent and decorated in an independent state.

The door frame top unit relay board 589 is attached to the front surface of the central base 571. The door frame top unit relay board 589 includes a pair of upper speakers 573, a door frame top middle decorative board 577, a door frame top left decorative board 583, a door frame top right decorative board 584, a door frame top middle left decorative board 586, and a door. The connection between the right decorative board 587 on the top of the frame and the relay board on the door body of the door frame base unit 100 is relayed. The door frame top unit relay board 589 is connected to the door body relay board via a connection cable (not shown) provided on the door frame right side unit 550. The front side of the door frame top unit relay board 589 is covered with a relay board cover 590.

The door frame top unit 570 includes a top middle decoration member 576 that protrudes forward in the center in the left-right direction, and is curved so that the front surfaces of the top middle decoration member 576 on both the left and right sides are hollowed out rearward. Therefore, the player can be illusioned that only the decorative member 576 in the top protrudes greatly forward, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the pachinko machine 1.

Further, the door frame top unit 570 includes a top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 that decorate the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576 arranged in the center, and left and right of the top middle decorative member 576. It is formed so as to extend from both sides to the top left decorative portion 574e and the top right decorative portion 574f formed on the left and right ends of the unit main body 271. Thereby, the upper part of the front surface of the door frame 3 can be totally decorated by the door frame top unit 570.

At this time, in the door frame top unit 570, the front surface is protected by a speaker cover 575 made of punching metal behind each of the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 near both ends in the left-right direction. Since the upper speaker 573 is provided and the speaker cover 575 faces forward from between the three decorative lens portions 579a and 580a that are separated from each other above and below the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580. The sound output from the left and right upper speakers 573 can be heard by the player in good condition, and a high-quality stereo sound can be enjoyed.

Further, the door frame top unit 570 includes a door frame top left decorative substrate 583 and a door frame top right decoration by a plurality of light guide members 578 provided on the rear side of the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580. Light from the substrate 584, the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586, and the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 can be guided to the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580, and the top left decorative lens member. The entire front surface of the 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 can be luminescently decorated satisfactorily. Therefore, the door frame top unit 570 can illuminate and decorate the entire front surface of the upper part of the door frame 3 including the front of the left and right upper speakers 573.

[3-8. Door frame action effect]
The operation and effect of the door frame 3 will be described. In the door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the through holes 111 penetrating the front and rear of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 are made larger in the vertical and horizontal directions than those of the conventional pachinko machine. The height of the dish unit 320 and the door frame top unit 570 in the vertical direction is reduced in accordance with the expansion of the through hole 111, and the width of the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550 in the horizontal direction. Is made smaller. As a result, the front surface of the game board 5 (game area 5a) attached to the main body frame 4 can be seen as widely as possible from the player (front) through the through hole 111 (glass unit 190). , It corresponds to the game board 5 having a wide game area 5a.

The door frame 3 is an effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) having a large hemispherical operation button 410 in the center in the left-right direction of the dish unit 320 that bulges forward under the through-hole 111. The front surface (front surface of the front and lower decorative portion 326c of the plate) of the lower half (the part below the upper plate 321) on both the left and right sides of the effect operation unit 400 is recessed so as to be recessed rearward (dish unit). It is formed in a concavely curved shape so that the front surfaces of the left and right sides of the effect operation unit 400 are located rearward from the straight line connecting the front ends of the left and right ends of the 320 and the front ends of the left and right ends of the effect operation unit 400). ing. As a result, the effect operation unit 400 attached to the front surface of the dish unit 320 in the center in the left-right direction appears to protrude greatly forward, so that the player is made to stand out and emphasize the effect operation unit 400. It is possible to draw a strong attention to the effect operation unit 400.

The door frame 3 tilts the effect operation unit 400 arranged in front of the dish unit 320 below the through hole 111 so that the large hemispherical transparent operation button 410 faces diagonally upward and forward. Since it is installed in the state, when the player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1, the operation button 410 is in a state of facing the player's head (face), and the player drops his / her line of sight to operate the production operation unit 400. When you look at it, you can see the operation button 410 in a state close to the front, and you can see the large and round operation button 410 intensely, and you can raise the expectation for the production using the operation button 410. At the same time, the effect image displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460 arranged in the transparent operation button 410 can be visually recognized in a good state, and the effect image can be fully enjoyed.

Further, since the door frame 3 is provided with an operation button 410 having a diameter substantially the same as the total height of the plate unit 320 and bulging forward in a round shape, when operating the operation button 410, a short distance of hand movement is required. Any part of the operation button 410 can be touched, and the "quick press" of the operation button 410 can be performed relatively easily. In addition, since the operation button 410, which has a large diameter and bulges forward in a round shape, is attached in an inclined state, it can be pressed from above like the operation buttons of a conventional pachinko machine, and it can be pressed to the left or right. It can be operated satisfactorily from the front or the front, and the operation button 410 having good operability makes it possible to further enjoy the production using the operation button 410.

Further, since the door frame 3 is attached with the effect operation unit 400 suspended by the plate unit 320 and is provided with a vibration motor 424 that generates vibration at the lower part of the effect operation unit 400, the game is played. When the vibration motor 424 is rotated according to the state to generate vibration, strong vibration can be transmitted to the player's hand touching the upper part of the operation button 410, which surprises the player and operates the operation button. The production using 410 can be further enjoyed.

Further, since the door frame 3 is provided with a large operation button 410 (directing operation unit 400) over the entire height of the plate unit 320 in the center of the front surface of the plate unit 320, the upper plate 321 is compared with the conventional pachinko machine. Since the lower plate 322 underneath is less noticeable, it is possible to make it easier for a player who is accustomed to seeing a conventional pachinko machine to recognize that it is clearly different, and an appeal that strongly attracts the player's attention. It can be a powerful pachinko machine 1.

Further, the door frame 3 is formed so that the lower plate 322 wraps around to the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 with respect to the lower plate opening 326d which is opened on the left side of the effect operation unit 400 on the front surface of the plate unit 320. Therefore, the volume of the lower plate 322 can be increased with respect to the size of the lower plate opening 326d, and a sufficient number of game balls stored in the lower plate 322 can be secured. Further, since the rear part of the lower plate 322 wraps around to the rear side of the effect operation unit 400, when the player puts his left hand in the lower plate 322 or puts his left hand finger on the lower plate opening 326d. Since it is difficult for the fingertips to touch the wall behind the lower plate 322, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game, and the size of the lower plate opening 326d is large. It is possible to recognize by touch that the volume of the lower plate 322 is larger than that of the lower plate 322.

Further, the door frame 3 is a lower portion for pulling out the lower plate ball supply port 323c at which the game balls from the upper plate 321 are discharged to the lower plate 322 and the game balls of the lower plate 322 into a dollar box or the like below the plate unit 320. The countersunk ball extraction holes 322a are arranged in a straight line in the front-rear direction, and are arranged on the right outer side of the lower plate opening 326d (on the right side of the left end of the frame unit 415 of the effect operation unit 400) in the front view. That is, the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a are provided with the effect operation unit 400, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a (right outside of the lower plate opening 326d) in the plate unit cover 326, and the front end of the lower plate cover 340. Since it is arranged behind the side, etc., the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a cannot be seen from the player side, and the appearance of the plate unit 320 (pachinko machine 1) can be refreshed. The appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

Further, since the door frame 3 has the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a arranged below the front (direct front) of the lower plate ball supply port 323c in the lower plate 322, the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is opened. Then, the game ball discharged from the upper plate 321 or the like to the lower plate 322 is immediately discharged from the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a to the lower dollar box or the like as soon as it enters the lower plate 322. At this time, since the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a cannot be seen from the player side, the flow of the game ball discharged from the upper plate 321 or the like through the lower plate 322 to the dollar box also I can't see it. As a result, it is possible to give the player the illusion that the game ball of the upper plate 321 and the game ball paid out from the payout device 830 in a state where the upper plate 321 is full are directly discharged to the dollar box. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the game ball to feel the annoyance of passing through the lower plate 322, and it is possible to concentrate the player on the game (driving operation of the game ball, directing image, etc.) and suppress the deterioration of the interest. can.

Further, in the lower plate 3, the lower plate 322 has the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a arranged at a position on the front left side of the lower plate ball supply port 323c, and the lower plate 322 stands on the right side of the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a. Since the raised wall portion is curved diagonally so as to face the direction of the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a, the game ball supplied from the lower plate ball supply port 323c to the lower plate 322 can be directly fed to the lower plate ball. It can be guided to the punching hole 322a, or can be reflected on the right wall portion and indirectly guided to the lower plate ball punching hole 322a. As a result, in the state where the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a remains open, the game ball supplied to the lower plate 322 from the lower plate ball supply port 323c is in the area on the left side of the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a in the lower plate 322. Since it can be discharged downward from the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a without invading (lower plate first region A1), the lower plate 322 does not show the game balls circulating in the lower plate 322 to the player. The game ball can be discharged downward (dollar box), and the same effect as described above can be obtained.

Further, the door frame 3 is provided with a lower plate opening 326d of the plate unit cover 326 with the lower plate 322 facing forward between the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a (effect operation unit 400) and the lower speaker port 326e. Therefore, even if the player puts his / her hand on the lower plate opening 326d or puts his / her hand on the lower plate 322, the front of the lower speaker opening 326e is not blocked by the player's hand. The sound from the speaker 921 in the board unit 900 can be satisfactorily output forward, and the sound produced by the pachinko machine 1 can be enjoyed. Further, when the player puts his or her hand on or approaches the lower plate 322, the player can feel the vibration due to the deep bass from the speaker 921 output forward from the lower speaker port 326e, and the game can be played. It is possible to entertain people and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, since the door frame 3 is provided with a door frame right side unit 550 which is plate-shaped and greatly protrudes forward from the right side of the through hole 111, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island facility of the game hall, the door is opened. Since the right side unit 550 of the frame can exert an action effect like a partition between the pachinko machine adjacent to the right side, the player playing with the pachinko machine 1 can play in a private room. You can make the player feel as if you are there, and you can let other players around you play the game in a relaxed atmosphere without hesitation.

Further, since the door frame 3 can be light-emittingly decorated on the front end and both left and right sides of the door frame right side unit 550, which is plate-shaped and protrudes greatly forward, a game hall in which the pachinko machines 1 are installed side by side. Even if the pachinko machine 1 is not located in front of the pachinko machine 1, the presence of the pachinko machine 1 can be notified even from a distance such as from the lateral direction along the island facility, and the pachinko machine has a high appeal to the player. It can be machine 1.

Further, the door frame 3 includes a top middle decoration member 576 projecting forward in the center in the left-right direction in the door frame top unit 570 on the upper side of the through opening 111, and fronts on both left and right sides of the top middle decoration member 576. The shape is recessed so as to be hollowed out to the rear (the top middle decoration member of the door frame top unit 570 is more than the straight line connecting the front ends of the left and right ends of the door frame top unit 570 and the front ends of the left and right ends of the top middle decoration member 576. The front surface of both the left and right sides of the 576 is formed in a concavely curved shape so as to be located rearward. As a result, only the top middle decoration member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 seems to protrude greatly forward, so that the top middle decoration member 576 can be highlighted and emphasized to the player. The interior decorative member 576 can be strongly noticed.

By the way, in the upper part of the door frame in the conventional pachinko machine, a pair of upper speakers separated to the left and right are provided, and the two upper speakers are conspicuous. On the other hand, the door frame 3 of the present embodiment is a pair of upper parts of the door frame top unit 570 attached to the upper side of the through hole 111, whose front surfaces are protected by speaker covers 575 made of punching metal on both left and right ends. A top with a speaker 573, a top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 extending from both left and right sides of the central top middle decorative member 576 to both ends in the left-right direction through the front of the speaker cover 575, and a top. The entire front surface of the left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 can be luminescently decorated. As a result, the upper part of the front surface of the door frame 3 can be decorated as a whole, so that the pair of upper speakers 573 becomes inconspicuous at the upper part of the door frame 3, and the decoration is clearly different from that of the conventional pachinko machine. At first glance, the player can be made aware of the fact that the pachinko machine 1 has a high appeal to the player, and the pair of upper speakers 573 can entertain the player with a high-quality stereo sound. can.

As described above, in the door frame 3 of the present embodiment, the effect operation unit 400 attached to the dish unit 320 and the top interior decorative member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 are formed below and above the through hole 111. Since each of them protrudes greatly forward in the center of the left-right direction, it is possible to show the player a unified decoration at the top and bottom where the virtual line passing through the center of the left-right direction stands out, and the decoration with a sophisticated feel. The pachinko machine 1 can be made more prominent than other pachinko machines and has high appeal.

Further, in the door frame 3, since the top middle decoration member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 and the effect operation unit 400, which are arranged vertically in the center in the left-right direction, are projected forward, the top middle decoration member 576. And when the effect operation unit 400 is light-emittingly decorated, it is possible to show the player a light-emitting line extending vertically at the center of the front surface of the door frame 3 in the left-right direction, and the line of sight of the player is arranged in the center of the left-right direction. It can be guided to the operation button 410 or the like of the effect operation unit 400.

[4. Overall configuration of the main body frame]
The main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 to 94. FIG. 91 is a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from the front, and FIG. 92 is a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from the back. Further, FIG. 93 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 94 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. As shown in the figure, the main body frame 4 of the present embodiment is formed in a box shape with an open front, and the game board 5 is detachably housed inside. The main body frame 4 is vertically attached to the frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island equipment of the game hall above and below the front end on the left side of the front side, and the door frame 3 is closed so that the opened front side is closed. It can be installed so that it can be opened and closed.

The main body frame 4 of the present embodiment has a frame-shaped main body frame base 600 and a main body frame base 600 that can be partially inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5. It is attached to both the upper and lower ends on the left side of the front view and is rotatably attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70, respectively, and the door frame side upper hinge member 140 and the door frame of the door frame 3 are attached. It includes a main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and a main body frame side lower hinge member 640 to which the lower side hinge member 150 is rotatably attached, and a reinforcing frame 660 attached to the front left side surface of the main body frame base 600. ..

Further, the main body frame 4 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the main body frame base 600, and is a ball launching device 680 for driving a game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and a front view right side surface of the main body frame base 600. The locking unit 700 that locks between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and the main body frame base 600 are attached to the rear side along the upper side and the left side of the main body frame base 600. An inverted L-shaped payout unit 800 that pays out the game ball to the player side, a board unit 900 that is attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and an openable and closable attachment to the rear side of the main body frame base 600. It includes a back cover 980 that covers the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 600.

[4-1. Body frame base]
As shown in FIGS. 91 to 94, the main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment is formed in a rectangular shape in which the front view shape extends vertically. The main body frame base 600 penetrates back and forth within a height range of about 3/4 of the total height from a position slightly below the upper end, and the game board insertion port 601 into which the game board 5 is inserted from the front side and a game. The game board mounting portion 602, which forms the lower side of the board insertion slot 601 and on which the game board 5 is mounted, and the game board mounting portion 602 project upward from the center in the left-right direction and are left and right of the lower end of the game board 5. And a game board regulation unit 603 that regulates the movement to the rear.

Further, the main body frame base 600 is provided on the right side of the front view of the launcher mounting portion 604 for mounting the ball launcher 680 formed on the lower right side of the game board mounting portion 602 and the launch device mounting portion 604. The cylinder insertion port 605 through which the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 is inserted, and the door of the board unit 900 which penetrates back and forth from the center of the front view of the game board mounting portion 602 to the left and below. A circular shape that penetrates back and forth between the connection opening 606 that allows the frame relay board 911 to face forward and the lower left side of the front view of the game board mounting part 602 so that the speaker unit 920 in the board unit 900 faces forward. The speaker opening 607 and the like are provided.

Further, the main body frame base 600 extends from the right side of the game board insertion port 601 to the rear in a plate shape, the locking unit 700 is attached to the right side surface, and the back cover 980 can be rotated at the rear end. It includes a rear extension 608 that can be attached. Further, the main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 4 is formed near the upper and lower ends of the left end of the front view on the rear surface, and the upper hinge member 620 for attaching the upper hinge member 620 on the main body frame side and the upper hinge member 640 for attaching the lower hinge member 640 on the main body frame side are attached. A portion 609 and a lower hinge mounting portion 610 are provided.

Further, the main body frame base 600 is rotatably attached to an opening cover 615 that closes the connection opening 606 so as to be openable and closable, and a position slightly lower on the left side of the front left and right center of the game board mounting portion 602. A game board lock member 616 capable of restricting the forward movement of the game board 5 inserted through the game board insertion port 601 is provided.

[4-2. Main body frame side upper hinge member and main body frame side lower hinge member]
The main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 to 94. The main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 are attached to the upper hinge mounting portion 609 and the lower hinge mounting portion 610 of the main body frame base 600.

The upper hinge member 620 on the main body frame side has an upper hinge main body 621 in which the rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate material is bent downward in an L shape, and the upper hinge main body 621 protrudes upward in a columnar shape from the front end. The hinge pin 622 on the main body frame, which is pivotally supported by the upper hinge member 60 on the outer frame side, and the upper hinge main body 621, which penetrates the upper hinge main body 621 on the left side of the front view of the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame, pivotally support the upper hinge member 140 on the door frame side. It is provided with an upper hinge hole 623 for the door frame for the purpose. The downwardly bent portion of the upper hinge main body 621 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 is attached to the upper hinge mounting portion 609 of the main body frame base 600.

The lower hinge member 640 on the main body frame side penetrates vertically through the lower hinge first main body 641 in which the rear portion of the horizontally extending flat plate material is bent upward in an L shape and the front end of the lower hinge first main body 641. A lower hinge hole for the outer frame (not shown) that is pivotally supported by the lower hinge member 70 on the outer frame side of the outer frame 2, and a flat plate that is arranged above the lower hinge first main body 641 and extends horizontally. The lower hinge second main body 643 in which the rear portion of the shaped plate material is bent upward in an L shape, and the lower hinge member 150 on the door frame side of the door frame 3 which penetrates vertically at the front end of the lower hinge second main body 643. The door frame hinge hole 644 for axially supporting the door frame and the door frame 3 extending upward from the left end behind the door frame hinge hole 644 in the horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge second main body 643. It is provided with a regulation piece 645 for restricting the rotation range of the door.

In the lower hinge second main body 643, the horizontally extended portion is above the horizontally extended portion of the lower hinge first main body 641 with a certain interval, and the portion bent upward is the lower hinge first body. It is in contact with the front surface of the upwardly bent portion of the main body 641. In the main body frame side lower hinge member 640, the portions of the lower hinge first main body 641 and the lower hinge second main body 643 that are bent upward are attached to the lower hinge mounting portion 610 of the main body frame base 600.

[4-3. Reinforcement frame]
The reinforcing frame 660 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 to 94. The reinforcing frame 660 is attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 600. The reinforcing frame 660 has a cross-sectional shape in a plan view formed in a U-shape with the right side open, and extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape. Further, the reinforcing frame 660 restricts the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion port 601 of the main body frame base 600 from moving forward and up and down on the rear side of the portion extending to the right from the front end. A set of left positioning members 661 are attached vertically separated from each other.

The hinge side (left side when viewed from the front) of the main body frame base 600 can be reinforced by this reinforcing frame 660, and the inside of the main body frame 4 (game board 5) from the left side passing between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 can be reinforced. It is possible to prevent unauthorized insertion of tools.

[4-4. Ball launcher]
The ball launcher 680 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 91, 93 and 94. The ball launching device 680 is a device for driving a game ball stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 into the game area 5a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4. In this ball launching device 680, the driving strength of the game ball changes according to the rotation angle of the handle 302 of the handle unit 300 in the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3.

The ball launcher 680 is attached to a flat plate-shaped launch base 681 attached to the launcher attachment portion 604 of the main body frame base 600 and a rear surface of the right portion of the launch base 681 when viewed from the front, and the rotation shaft is attached to the launch base 681. A launch solenoid 682 consisting of a rotary solenoid that penetrates and extends forward, a ball hammer 683 whose base end is attached to the rotation axis of the launch solenoid 682, and a ball hammer 683 that extends diagonally upward to the left from the vicinity of the tip. It is equipped with a launch rail 684, which is attached to the front surface of the launch base 681 so that the game ball can roll.

In this ball launching device 680, a game ball is supplied from the ball feed unit 250 of the door frame 3 to the upper right end of the launch rail 684, and the game ball is supplied to the upper right end of the launch rail 684. Then, when the handle 302 is rotated, the firing solenoid 682 is driven with a strength corresponding to the rotation operation angle, and the game ball is hit by the hitting mallet 683. Then, the game ball struck by the ball hammer 683 is guided through the launch rail 684 by the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 and is driven into the game area 5a.

If the hit game ball does not reach the game area 5a due to the driving strength of the game ball, etc., between the launch rail 684 and the game board 5 (outer rail 1001 and inner rail 1002). Then, it falls into the foul ball receiving port 275 of the lower foul cover unit 270, passes through the inside of the foul cover unit 270, and is discharged to the lower plate 322.

[4-5. Locking unit]
The locking unit 700 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 to 94. The locking unit 700 of the present embodiment is attached to the main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 4, and can lock between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3, and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2. The locking unit 700 includes a unit base 701 that is attached to the right side surface of the rear extension portion 608 of the main body frame base 600 and extends vertically, and a plurality of lock units 701 that project forward from the unit base 701 and can be locked to the door frame 3. The door frame hook 702, a plurality of outer frame hooks 703 protruding rearward from the unit base 701 and lockable to the outer frame 2, and a columnar projecting forward from the lower part of the unit base 701. A protrusion protrudes from the front end in a direction perpendicular to the axis, and the rotation of the cylinder lock 211 is transmitted by engaging with the rotation transmission member 212 of the opening / closing cylinder unit 210 of the door frame 3, and the door is transmitted according to the rotation direction of the key. It includes a key cylinder 710 that unlocks either the frame hook 702 or the outer frame hook 703.

[4-6. Payout unit]
The payout unit 800 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 95 to 113. FIG. 95 is a perspective view of the payout unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 96 is a perspective view of the payout unit as viewed from the back. Further, FIG. 97 is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 98 is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 99A is a perspective view of the ball guiding unit of the payout unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 99B is a perspective view of the ball guiding unit as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 100 is an exploded perspective view of the ball guidance unit. Further, FIG. 101A is a perspective view of the payout device of the payout unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 101B is a perspective view of the payout device as viewed from the back. Further, FIG. 102 is an exploded perspective view of the payout device disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 103 is an exploded perspective view of the payout device disassembled and viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 104 (a) is a front view of the payout device, and FIG. 104 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line QQ in (a). Further, FIG. 105 (a) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the ball pulling passage is closed by the ball pulling movable piece in the payout device, and FIG. 105 (b) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the ball pulling passage is opened by the ball pulling movable piece. Is.

Further, FIG. 106 (a) is a perspective view of the upper full tank path unit in the payout unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 106 (b) is a perspective view of the upper full tank path unit as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 107 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the upper full tank path unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 107 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the upper full tank path unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. be. Further, FIG. 108 (a) is a perspective view of the lower full-filled ball path unit in the payout unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 108 (b) is a perspective view of the lower full-filled ball path unit as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 109 is an exploded perspective view of the lower full tank path unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 110 is an exploded perspective view of the lower full tank path unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 111A is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the taxiway opening / closing door is closed in the lower full tank path unit, and FIG. 111B is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the taxiway opening / closing door is open. .. Further, FIG. 112 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the foul cover unit of the door frame and the lower full tank path unit. FIG. 113 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of the game ball in the payout unit.

As shown in FIGS. 95 and 96, the payout unit 800 of the present embodiment is attached to the inverted L-shaped payout unit base 801 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 and the upper part of the payout unit base 801. It is attached to the ball tank 802 that stores the game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall (not shown) and the payout unit base 801 under the ball tank 802. It is equipped with a tank rail 803 extending to the left and right to guide the game ball in the cage ball tank 802 to the left in the front view. In the tank rail 803, while guiding the game ball to the left, the ball leveling member 804 (see FIG. 113) that hangs swingably from above aligns the game balls in two rows in the front-rear direction.

Further, the payout unit 800 is attached to the rear surface of the upper left side of the front view of the payout unit base 801 and guides the game ball from the tank rail 803 downward in a meandering manner. A payout device 830 that is detachably attached from the payout unit base 801 and pays out game balls guided by the ball guidance unit 820 one by one based on an instruction from the payout control board 951 housed in the payout control board box 950. And have. Game balls are distributed in two rows from the tank rail 803 to the payout device 830, and the game balls are paid out one by one from the payout device 830.

Further, the payout unit 800 guides the game balls paid out by the payout device 830 attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 downward, and also guides the game balls downward according to the storage state of the game balls in the upper plate 321 in the plate unit 320. Is discharged from either the normal discharge port 850d or the full tank discharge port 850e, and the normal discharge port 850d of the upper full tank path unit 850 attached to the lower end of the payout unit base 801. The normal taxiway 861 that guides the game ball forward and guides it from the front end to the through ball passage 273 of the door frame 3, and guides the game ball released from the full tank discharge port 850e forward and guides the game ball forward from the front end of the door frame 3. A taxiway opening / closing door 863 that opens and closes the front end openings of the full taxiway 862 that guides to the full taxiway receiving port 274, and the normal taxiway 861 and the full taxiway 862 according to the opening and closing of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4. The lower full tank path unit 860 and the like are provided.

[4-6a. Ball guidance unit]
The ball guidance unit 820 of the payout unit 800 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 99 and 100. The ball guidance unit 820 has a box-shaped front case 821 that extends vertically and has an open rear side, a box-shaped rear case 822 that is attached to the rear side of the front case 821 and has an open front side, and a front case. A flat partition plate 823 that is attached between the 821 and the rear case 822 and separates the front case 821 and the rear case 822, and the front and rear ends are connected to the front case 821 and the rear case 822 through the partition plate 823. A pair of movable piece members front 825 and rear movable piece members that are rotatably attached by the attached rod-shaped shaft member 824 and are arranged in the front case 821 and the rear case 822, respectively. It includes an 826 and a ball breakage detection sensor 827 that is mounted in the front case 821 and can detect the rotational positions of a pair of movable piece member front 825 and movable piece member rear 826.

The front case 821 has a ball guidance inlet 821a that is open so that the game ball can pass in the upper part of the right side surface, and a ball guidance outlet that is open so that the game ball can pass through at a position to the right of the center in the left-right direction of the bottom surface. The 821b is provided with a guide passage 821c that communicates the ball guide inlet 821a and the ball guide outlet 821b and allows the game ball to circulate. The guide passage 821c has an introduction portion 821d extending diagonally from the ball guidance inlet 821a to the vicinity of the left end at a small angle with respect to the horizontal, and a center of height along the left side of the front case 821 from the introduction portion 821d. It is composed of a detection unit 821e that extends straight downward to the vicinity and a meandering unit 821f that extends from the detection unit 821e in a meandering manner with the left and right widths of the front case 821. Further, the front case 821 is provided with a notch 821g on the wall on the right side of the front view of the detection unit 821e in the guidance passage 821c.

The rear case 822 has a ball guidance inlet 822a that is open so that the game ball can pass in the upper part of the right side surface, and a ball guidance outlet that is open so that the game ball can pass through at a position to the right of the center in the left-right direction of the bottom surface. It is provided with a guide passage 822c that communicates the 822b, the ball guidance inlet 822a, and the ball guidance outlet 822b, and allows the game ball to circulate. The guide passage 822c has an introduction portion 822d extending diagonally from the ball guidance inlet 822a to the vicinity of the left end at a small angle with respect to the horizontal, and a center of height along the left side of the rear case 822 from the introduction portion 822d. It is composed of a detection unit 822e that extends straight downward to the vicinity and a meandering unit 822f that extends from the detection unit 822e in a meandering manner with the left and right widths of the rear case 822. Further, the rear case 822 is provided with a notch 822g on the wall on the right side of the front view of the detection unit 822e in the guidance passage 822c.

After this, the rear case 822 is formed substantially symmetrically to the left and right with respect to the front case 821, and in a state of being assembled to the ball guidance unit 820, the guidance passage 821c and the guidance passage 822c are formed so as to coincide with each other in the front-rear direction. There is.

The shaft member 824 has front and rear ends attached below the upper ends of the notches 821g and 822g in the front case 821 and the rear case 822 and outside the guide passages 821c and 822c.

The movable piece member front 825 has a flat plate-shaped movable piece 825a extending vertically, a shaft hole 825b that penetrates back and forth at the upper end of the right-angled surface of the movable piece 825a and through which the shaft member 824 is inserted, and the movable piece 825a. The extension portion 825c extending to the right at right angles to the right surface of the movable piece 825a from the upper end of the The connecting portion 825d, the weight mounting portion 825e having a through hole that protrudes outward from the vicinity of the center of the upper portion of the extending portion 825c and the outer periphery of the connecting portion 825d and penetrates back and forth, and the extending portion 825c. The detection piece 825f, which extends outward from the tip on the right side and can be detected by the ball breakage detection sensor 827, and the movable piece 825a on the outer circumference of the connecting portion 825d extend outward in a flat plate shape. It is provided with a stopper piece of 825 g.

When the shaft member 824 is passed through the shaft hole 825b, the movable piece member front 825 rotates so that the weight mounting portion 825e protruding from the outer circumference of the connecting portion 825d is located directly below the shaft hole 825b due to its own weight. Then, the movable piece 825a is in a state of extending diagonally downward from the portion of the shaft hole 825b. Therefore, in the state where the ball guidance unit 820 is assembled, the connecting portion 825d is inserted into the notch portion 821g of the front case 821, the lower end of the movable piece 825a protrudes into the guidance passage 821c, and the stopper piece 825g is provided. It is in a state of being in contact with the outer wall of the guide passage 821c (detection unit 821e). When the stopper piece 825g comes into contact with the outer wall of the guide passage 821c, the lower end of the movable piece 825a is restricted from further rotating in the direction of projecting into the guidance passage 821c (to the left in the front view). Further, when the lower end of the movable piece 825a is rotated in the direction (to the right in the front view) of the movable piece member front 825 so as to approach the wall of the guide passage 821c, the left surface of the movable piece 825a becomes the guide passage 821c. Match the inner surface. In this state, the detection piece 825f in front of the movable piece member 825 is in a non-detection state with respect to the ball breakage detection sensor 827. That is, when there is a game ball in the guidance passage 821c, the ball breakage detection sensor 827 does not detect it.

The movable piece member rear 826 has a flat plate-shaped movable piece 826a extending vertically, a shaft hole 826b penetrating back and forth at the upper end of the right-angled surface of the movable piece 826a through which the shaft member 824 is inserted, and the movable piece 826a. 826c extending to the right at right angles to the right surface of the movable piece 826a from the upper end of the The connecting portion 826d, the weight mounting portion 826e having a through hole that protrudes outward from the vicinity of the center of the upper portion of the extending portion 826c and the outer periphery of the connecting portion 826d and penetrates back and forth, and the extending portion 826c. The detection piece 826f, which extends outward from the tip on the right side and can be detected by the ball breakage detection sensor 827, and the movable piece 826a on the outer circumference of the connecting portion 826d extend outward in a flat plate shape. It is provided with a stopper piece of 826 g.

When the shaft member 824 is passed through the shaft hole 826b, the movable piece member rear 826 rotates so that the weight mounting portion 826e protruding from the outer circumference of the connecting portion 826d is located directly below the shaft hole 826b due to its own weight. Then, the movable piece 826a is in a state of extending diagonally downward from the portion of the shaft hole 826b. Therefore, in the state where the ball guidance unit 820 is assembled, the connecting portion 826d is inserted into the notch portion 822g of the rear case 822, the lower end of the movable piece 826a protrudes into the guidance passage 822c, and the stopper piece 826g It is in a state of being in contact with the outer wall of the guidance passage 822c (detection unit 822e). When the stopper piece 826g comes into contact with the outer wall of the guidance passage 822c, the lower end of the movable piece 826a is restricted from further rotating in the direction of projecting into the guidance passage 822c (leftward in front view). Further, when the lower end of the movable piece 826a is rotated in the direction (to the right in the front view) of the movable piece member 826 so as to approach the wall of the guide passage 822c, the left surface of the movable piece 826a becomes the guide passage 822c. Match the inner surface. In this state, the detection piece 826f of the movable piece member 826 is in a non-detection state with respect to the ball breakage detection sensor 827. That is, when there is a game ball in the guidance passage 822c, the ball out detection sensor 827 is not detected.

The ball guidance unit 820 of the present embodiment is supplied with a plurality of game balls arranged in a row in the front-rear direction by a tank rail 803, and the front case 821 and the rear case are in a state in which the plurality of game balls are arranged in a row. The 822 can guide the lower payout device 830 in two rows back and forth (see FIG. 113). At this time, since the front case 821 and the rear case 822 are separated by a partition plate 823, the game balls circulating in the respective guide passages 821c and 822c do not interfere with each other and are satisfactorily distributed. Can be done.

Further, when the game ball circulates in the guide passages 821c and 822c of the ball guidance unit 820, the game ball comes into contact with the movable pieces 825a and 826a of the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826, and the movable pieces 825a and 826a come into contact with each other. The front 825 of the movable piece member and the rear 826 of the movable piece member rotate in the direction corresponding to the wall surfaces of the guide passages 821c and 822c. As a result, the detection pieces 825f and 826f of the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826 are not detected by the ball breakage detection sensor 827, and it can be seen that the game balls are in the guide passages 821c and 822c.

Then, when the game ball is paid out by the payout device 830 on the downstream side of the ball guidance unit 820, the game ball in the guidance passages 821c and 822c flows downstream. When the game ball flows through the guide passages 821c and 822c, the momentum of the game ball flowing through the introduction portions 821d and 822d becomes stronger, and the game ball flowing through the introduction portions 821d and 822d becomes a movable piece at the upper part of the detection units 821e and 822e. It bounces toward the 825a and 826a sides and comes into contact with the movable pieces 825a and 826a. Since the movable pieces 825a and 826a vibrate due to the contact of the game balls, the movable pieces 825a and 826a are sandwiched or intruded between the movable pieces 825a and 826a and the notches 821g and 822g of the guide passages 821c and 822c. It is possible to remove dust and dirt, and the movable pieces 825a and 826a can be satisfactorily rotated by their own weight or the like.

Further, the ball guidance unit 820 detects the game balls circulating in the guide passages 821c and 822c by the separate movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826, and also detects the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826. Since each of the detection pieces 825f and 826f of the movable piece member 826 is detected by one ball breakage detection sensor 827, when the game balls in any of the guide passages 821c and 822c are exhausted, the movable piece member is in front. The movable pieces 825a and 826a of the 825 or the movable piece member 826 rotate so as to protrude into the guide passages 821c and 822c, and the detection pieces 825f and 826f on the side where the game ball has disappeared are detected by the ball breakage detection sensor 827. NS. Therefore, since the out-of-ball of the game ball can be detected at an early stage, the game ball can be replenished promptly, and the time during which the game is interrupted can be shortened as much as possible, thereby reducing the interest of the player. It can be suppressed.

Further, by screwing a metal screw as a weight into the weight mounting portions 825e and 826e of the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826, the weight of the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826 and the weight of the weight Therefore, the lower end side of the movable pieces 825a and 826a can be easily rotated in the direction of projecting into the guide passages 821c and 822c. Further, since the upper ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a are rotatably attached to the outside of the guide passages 821c and 822c so that the lower end side protrudes into the guide passages 821c and 822c, dust in the guide passages 821c and 822c is formed. And dust do not adhere to the upper and lower ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a. Therefore, even if the movable pieces 825a and 826a rotate toward the wall side of the guide passages 821c and 822c, dust and dirt do not get caught between the lower ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a and the wall. It is possible to rotate the movable pieces 825a and 826a satisfactorily, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a problem that the movable pieces 825a and 826a do not rotate.

As described above, in the ball guidance unit 820 of the present embodiment, in the movable pieces 825a and 826a of the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826 whose lower end side projects into the guide passages 821c and 822c through which the game ball flows due to its own weight. By attaching a weight made of metal screws to the weight mounting portions 825e and 826e on the opposite side of the surface that comes into contact with the game ball, the movable piece depends on the weight of the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826 and the weight of the weight. The lower end side of the 825a and 826a can be easily rotated (protruded) into the guide passages 821c and 822c. Further, since the upper ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a are rotatably attached to the outside of the guide passages 821c and 822c so that the lower end side protrudes into the guide passages 821c and 822c, dust in the guide passages 821c and 822c is formed. And dust do not adhere to the upper and lower ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a. Therefore, even if the movable pieces 825a and 826a rotate toward the wall side of the guide passages 821c and 822c, dust and dirt do not get caught between the lower ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a and the wall. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a problem that the movable pieces 825a and 826a (825 in front of the movable piece member and 826 after the movable piece member) do not rotate.

Further, since the metal screw as the weight is screwed into the weight mounting portions 825e and 826e which are the through holes, the weight is attached even if the front 825 of the movable piece member and the rear 826 of the movable piece member rotate frequently. The front 825 of the movable piece member and the rear 826 of the movable piece member (weight mounting portions 825e, 826e) do not come off, and the front 825 of the movable piece member and the rear 826 of the movable piece member can be maintained in good condition for a long period of time. .. Further, the weight can be easily attached to the front 825 of the movable piece member and the rear 826 of the movable piece member simply by screwing the metal screws into the weight attachment portions 825e and 826e, so that the time and effort for attaching the weight can be simplified. This makes it possible to reduce the cost associated with assembling the pachinko machine 1.

Further, since the introduction portions 821d and 822d for guiding the game ball toward the movable pieces 825a and 826a are provided on the upstream side of the portion where the movable pieces 825a and 826a project inward in the guide passages 821c and 822c. As the game ball flows in the guide passages 821c and 822c, the game ball comes into contact with the movable pieces 825a and 826a, so that the movable pieces 825a and 826a can be vibrated by the contact of the game ball. Therefore, due to the vibration of the movable pieces 825a and 826a, dust and dirt that are sandwiched or invaded between the movable pieces 825a and 826a and the walls of the guide passages 821c and 822c can be removed, and the movable pieces can be moved by their own weight or the like. The front 825 of the single member and the 826 after the movable single member can be made to rotate satisfactorily.

Therefore, since the front 825 of the movable piece member and the rear 826 of the movable piece member can be satisfactorily rotated, the state (presence or absence) of the game ball in the guide passages 821c and 822c can be reliably detected, and the game ball can be reliably detected. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of defects due to false positives and the like. Further, even if the game ball supplied to the payout device 830 disappears from the guide passages 821c and 822c, the presence or absence in the guide passages 821c and 822c can be reliably detected via the movable pieces 825a and 826a, so that the presence or absence of the game balls can be quickly detected. By replenishing the game balls and shortening the time during which the game is interrupted as much as possible, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player.

[4-6b. Payout device]
The payout device 830 of the payout unit 800 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 101 to 105. The payout device 830 has a box shape with the rear side open, and has a payout entrance 831a that is open so that the game ball can pass through in the center of the upper surface in the left-right direction, and a game ball is open so that the game ball can pass near the left end of the front view on the bottom surface. The payout outlet 831b, the ball outlet 831c which is open so that the game ball can pass near the right end of the front view on the bottom surface, and the payout port 831a and the payout outlet 831b which communicate with each other and allow the game ball to circulate. , And a front box 831 having a ball removal passage 831e, which branches from the middle of the payout passage 831d and communicates with the ball removal outlet 831c and allows game balls to circulate, and is attached to the rear side of the front box 831. A box-shaped box with an open front side, and a payout entrance 832a that opens in the center of the upper surface in the left-right direction so that the game ball can pass through. The exit 832b, the ball ejection outlet 832c that is open so that the game ball can pass near the right end of the front view on the bottom surface, the payout entrance 832a and the payout outlet 832b that communicate with each other, and the payout passage 832d that allows the game ball to circulate, and the payout. It is provided with a rear box 832 having a ball-extracting passage 832e, which branches from the middle of the passage 832d and communicates with the ball-extracting outlet 832c so that game balls can be distributed.

Further, the payout device 830 has a shallow box-shaped front cover 833 that is attached to the front side of the front box 831 and the rear side is open, and a rotating shaft that is attached to the front box 831 and penetrates the front box 831. The payout motor 834 extending into the front cover 833, the drive gear 835 attached to the rotating shaft of the payout motor 834, and the drive gear 835 mesh with each other and can rotate with the front box 831 and the front cover 833. The spur gear-shaped intermediate gear 836 attached to, the driven gear 837 that meshes with the intermediate gear 836, and the driven gear 837 rotatably penetrate, and the front end is attached to the front cover 833 and the rear A shaft member 838 whose end penetrates the front box 831 and is attached to the rear box 832, and a shaft member 838 that is rotatably attached through the shaft member 838 and the payout passages 831d and 832d of the front box 831 and the rear box 832. It is equipped with a payout blade 839 that is arranged inside and rotates integrally with the driven gear 837, and a blade rotation detection sensor 840 that is attached between the front box 831 and the rear box 832 and detects the rotation of the payout blade 839. ing.

Further, the payout device 830 is attached between the front box 831 and the rear box 832, and has a flat plate-shaped partition plate 841 that separates the payout passage 831d of the front box 831 and the payout passage 832d of the rear box 832, and the front box 831. The payout detection sensor 842, which is attached between the box and the rear box 832 and detects the game ball that is paid out by the rotation of the payout blade 839 and is discharged from the payout outlets 831b and 832b, and the payout passages 831d, 832d and the ball removal passage. A movable ball removal piece 843 that is rotatably attached by the front box 831 and the rear box 832 at the portion where the 831e and 832e are branched and can close the ball removal passages 831e and 832e, and the front box 831 and the rear. The box 832 is provided with a ball pulling lever 844 that is slidably attached up and down on the upper right side of the front view and makes the ball pulling movable piece 843 rotatable or non-rotatable.

The payout passage 831d of the front box 831 extends diagonally to the lower right of the front view from the payout entrance 831a toward the ball ejection port 831c, and is downward at a height of about 1/3 from the upper surface with respect to the total height of the front box 831. It bends so that it extends vertically to, and after bending so that it extends almost horizontally to the left near the center of the total height, it extends vertically again downward about 1/3 from the left end with respect to the left and right width of the front box 831. It is bent in a crank shape so as to be located directly above the payout outlet 831b at a height of about 1/4 from the bottom surface with respect to the total height of the front box 831 and extends vertically to the payout outlet 831b. The payout blade 839 is arranged at a portion of the payout passage 831d that is bent like a crank.

On the other hand, the ball removing passage 831e is a form in which the portion of the payout passage 831d extending diagonally from the payout entrance 831a to the lower right is further extended, and is about 1/3 of the total height of the front box 831 from the upper surface. It branches up to the height near the center.

Further, the front box 831 is formed on a guide shelf 831f that protrudes rearward as it goes downward at a portion of the payout passage 831d that extends vertically toward the payout outlet 831b, and on the upper part of the right side surface in the front view. It is provided with a lever mounting portion 831 g for mounting the ball pulling lever 844 so as to be slidable up and down.

The payout passage 832d of the rear box 832 extends diagonally to the lower right of the front view from the payout entrance 832a toward the ball ejection port 832c, and is downward at a height of about 1/3 from the upper surface with respect to the total height of the rear box 832. It bends so that it extends vertically to, and after bending so that it extends almost horizontally to the left near the center of the total height, it extends vertically again downward about 1/3 from the left end with respect to the left and right width of the rear box 832. It is bent in a crank shape so as to be located directly above the payout outlet 832b at a height of about 1/4 from the bottom surface with respect to the total height of the rear box 832, and extends vertically to the payout outlet 832b. The payout blade 839 is arranged at a portion of the payout passage 832d that is bent like a crank.

On the other hand, the ball removing passage 832e is a form in which the portion of the payout passage 832d extending diagonally from the payout entrance 832a to the lower right is further extended, and the height is about 1/3 from the upper surface with respect to the total height of the rear box 832. It branches up to the height near the center.

Further, the rear box 832 is formed on a guide shelf 832f that protrudes forward as it goes downward at a portion of the payout passage 832d that extends vertically toward the payout outlet 832b, and on the upper part of the right side surface in the front view. It is provided with a lever mounting portion 832 g for mounting the ball pulling lever 844 so as to be slidable up and down.

The payout passages 831d, 832d and the ball removal passages 831e, 832e of the front box 831 and the rear box 832 are formed in the same shape. The payout passages 831d and 832d are partitioned by a partition plate 841 up to the upstream of the portion where the payout blade 839 is arranged. Further, a payout detection sensor 842 is attached between the guide shelves 831f, 832f and the payout outlets 831b, 832b. That is, the game ball that circulates through the payout passage 831d of the front box 831 and the game ball that circulates through the payout passage 832d of the rear box 832 are before and after the front box 831 and the rear box 832 by the guide shelves 831f and 832f, respectively. It is brought close to the boundary and detected by one payout detection sensor 842.

The driven gear 837 protrudes radially from the rear surface of the spur gear-shaped gear portion 837a that meshes with the intermediate gear 836 and the rear surface of the gear portion 837a at an interval of 60 degrees in the circumferential direction, and can be detected by the blade rotation detection sensor 840. It includes a plurality of detection pieces 837b, and a connecting portion 837c that projects rearward from the center of the gear portion 837a in a cylindrical shape and has irregularities formed on the peripheral surface of the rear end so that it can be connected to the payout blade 839. ..

The payout blades 839 extend in a cylindrical shape in the front-rear direction and project from the front end of the base cylinder portion 839a through which the shaft member 838 is inserted and the base cylinder portion 839a in the direction perpendicular to the axis at regular intervals in the circumferential direction. The plurality (three) front blades 839b and the plurality of (three) front blades 839b project from the rear end of the base cylinder 839a in the direction perpendicular to the axis of the base cylinder 839a at regular intervals in the circumferential direction so as to be staggered. 3) The rear blade 839c and the connected portion that protrudes forward from the front end of the base tubular portion 839a in a cylindrical shape and has irregularities that can be connected to the connecting portion 837c of the driven gear 837 on the peripheral surface of the front end. It is equipped with 839d.

The front blades 839b and the rear blades 839c of the payout blades 839 are provided with three each at an interval of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction. It is offset in the direction at an angle of 60 degrees and extends outward. In the payout blade 839 of the present embodiment, the three front blades 839b (rear blades 839c) are connected by an arc recessed toward the center, and the diameter of the arc is the same as or slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, a ball accommodating portion 839e capable of accommodating only one game ball is formed between the front blades 839b (rear blades 839c).

Further, the diameter D1 of the outer circumferences of the three front blades 839b and the rear blades 839c centered on the axis of the base cylinder portion 839a is formed to be 1 to 1.4 times the outer diameter of the game ball. Further, the diameter D2 centered on the axis of the base cylinder portion 839a up to the portion closest to the axis of the base cylinder portion 839a in the arc portion (ball accommodating portion 839e) between the front blades 839b (rear blades 839c). Is formed to be about 0.3 to 0.4 times the outer diameter of the game ball. That is, the depth [(diameter D1-diameter D2) / 2] from the outer circumferences of the front blades 839b and the rear blades 839c to the most recessed portion of the ball accommodating portion 839e is 0.1 to 0. It is said to be four times.

Therefore, the arc portion (ball accommodating portion 839e) between the front blades 839b (rear blades 839c) can hold about 3/10 (between 1/4 and 1/3) of the outer circumference of the game ball. can. In other words, it can accommodate a depth of about 1/5 (1/7 to 1/4) of the outer diameter of the game ball. As a result, the game balls in the payout passages 831d and 832d can be quickly accommodated between the front blades 839b (rear blades 839c) (ball accommodating portion 839e).

In the payout blade 839 of the present embodiment, the front blade 839b is located in the payout passage 831d of the front box 831 and the rear blade 839c is located in the payout passage 832d of the rear box 832 in a state where the payout device 830 is assembled. The game balls in the payout passages 831d and 832d can be paid out, respectively. Further, the payout blades 839 are arranged in the payout passages 831d and 832d at locations where the front box 831 and the rear box 832 are bent in a crank shape below the center of the total height. Specifically, in the payout passages 831d and 832d, the rotation center of the payout blade 839 is located directly below the portion extending vertically downward from the vicinity of the center of the total height of the front box 831 and the rear box 832. Then, at the crank-shaped bent portions of the payout passages 831d and 832d, the wall (inner wall) on the side far from the payout blade 839 is centered on the rotation center of the payout blade 839, and from the outer periphery of the front blade 839b and the rear blade 839c. It is formed in an arc shape separated by a distance S smaller than the outer diameter of the game ball. In the present embodiment, the distance S is 0.7 to 0.9 times the outer diameter of the game ball. In other words, the distance from the most recessed portion of the ball accommodating portion 839e to the arc-shaped portions of the payout passages 831d and 832d is 1.03 to 1.1 times the outer diameter of the game ball. ..

As a result, when the game ball flowing down on the payout blade 839 comes into contact with the outer circumferences of the front blade 839b and the rear blade 839c, the payout device 830 passes through the crank-shaped bent portions of the payout passages 831d and 832d. It cannot be discharged from the outlets 831b and 832b downward. On the other hand, when the game ball is accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 839e, it moves with the rotation of the payout blade 839 and can pass through the crank-shaped bent portions of the payout passages 831d and 832d from the payout outlets 831b and 832b. It is released downward.

Further, in the payout device 830, the diameter D1 of the front blade 839b and the rear blade 839c is set to about 1.2 to 1.4 times the outer diameter of the game ball, and the ball accommodating portion 839e makes the diameter D1 1 of the outer diameter of the game ball. Since the depth of / 7 to 1/4 is accommodated, the time required for accommodating the game ball can be shortened while the outer diameter of the payout blade 839 is made as small as possible. As a result, even if the payout blade 839 is rotated at high speed, the game ball can be accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 839e and sent to the payout outlets 831b and 832b. Therefore, the number of game balls to be paid out per unit time can be increased as compared with the conventional case, and the time required to pay out the game balls can be shortened.

The ball-pulling movable piece 843 has a main body portion 843a that extends vertically and back and forth in a plate shape and has a bent lower portion formed in a front view shape, and a main body portion 843a that extends in a tubular shape in the front and rear at the upper end of the main body portion 843a. A barrel portion 843b whose both ends are rotatably attached to the front box 831 and the rear box 832, a protruding portion 843c protruding from the upper part of the outer surface of the main body portion 843a which is bent in a dogleg shape, and a main body portion 843a. It is provided with a weight mounting portion 843d (see FIG. 105) formed of through holes penetrating back and forth at the lower portion bent in a dogleg shape.

In the state where the payout device 830 is assembled, the ball pulling movable piece 843 is oriented so that the lower part of the main body part 843a extends diagonally to the lower left in the front view, and the upper end shaft tube part 843b pays out the front box 831 and the rear box 832. In the passages 831d and 832d, the rotation is possible at a portion extending diagonally to the lower right of the front view from the outlets 831a and 832a and at a position outside the wall on the right side of the front view slightly above the portion that bends downward. It is attached to.

In the normal state, the payout device 830 of the present embodiment has the ball pulling lever 844 slid downward, and the lower portion of the ball pulling lever 844 hits the protruding portion 843c of the ball pulling movable piece 843 from the right side when viewed from the front. I'm in contact. As a result, the ball-extracting movable piece 843 is restricted from rotating counterclockwise when viewed from the front (see FIG. 105 (a)).

In this normal state, in the main body portion 843a that is bent in a dogleg shape of the ball-extracting movable piece 843, the upper side extends vertically from the bent portion, and the lower side of the bent portion is diagonally lower left in front view. Extends to. The lower end of the main body portion 843a is located near the portion where the payout passages 831d and 832d and the ball removal passages 831e and 832e are branched. Therefore, the ball pulling passages 831e and 832e are closed by the ball pulling movable piece 843 (main body portion 843a), and the surface of the main body portion 843a facing the left side forms a part of the wall of the payout passages 831d and 832d. doing.

The ball pulling movable piece 843 of the present embodiment is formed so that the center of gravity of the ball pulling movable piece 843 is located on the left side of the front view of the vertical line passing through the center of the barrel portion 843b under a normal state, and its own weight. A force is acting to rotate the ball counterclockwise when viewed from the front, but the ball pulling lever 844 regulates the rotation counterclockwise, so that the normal state is maintained.

When the ball pulling lever 844 is slid upward from the normal state, the lower part of the ball pulling lever 844 separates from the protruding portion 843c of the ball pulling movable piece 843, and the ball pulling movable piece 843 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front. The regulation of movement is lifted. Therefore, the ball-extracting movable piece 843 rotates counterclockwise due to its own weight so that the center of gravity is located directly below the barrel portion 843b. The ball-extracting movable piece 843 rotates counterclockwise until the lower right side surface of the main body portion 843a abuts on the left surface of the member forming the right side surface of the front box 831 and the rear box 832. (See FIG. 105 (b)). As a result, the ball pulling passages 831e and 832e are opened, and the game balls entering from the payout entrances 831a and 832a come into contact with the main body portion 843a of the ball pulling movable piece 843 in the middle of the payout passages 831d and 832d. The ball removal movable piece 843 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front to open the ball removal passages 831e and 832e, and the ball removal passages 831e and 832e are circulated and discharged downward from the ball removal outlets 831c and 832c. The Rukoto.

In the present embodiment, since the ball pulling movable piece 843 is provided with a weight mounting portion 843d, the ball pulling lever 844 is slid upward by screwing and mounting a weight made of a metal screw into the weight mounting portion 843d. When the restriction on the counterclockwise rotation in the front view is lifted, the lower end of the ball-extracting movable piece 843 protrudes into the ball-extracting passages 831e and 832e due to the weight of the ball-extracting movable piece 843 and the weight of the weight. It can be easily rotated in the direction (counterclockwise when viewed from the front).

Further, in a normal state in which the ball pulling lever 844 is slid downward to close the ball pulling passages 831e and 832e, the game ball entering from the payout ports 831a and 832a enters the main body portion 843a of the ball pulling movable piece 843. Since the contact is made, the ball-pulling movable piece 843 can be vibrated by the contact of the game ball. Therefore, dust, dust, etc. that are sandwiched or invaded between the lower end of the ball-extracting movable piece 843 and the inner surfaces of the ball-extracting passages 831e and 832e can be removed by the vibration of the ball-extracting movable piece 843, and the dust can be removed. It is possible to prevent the ball-extracting movable piece 843 from being unable to rotate due to biting dust or the like.

Further, since the metal screw as the weight can be screwed into the weight mounting portion 843d which is a through hole and mounted, even if the ball pulling movable piece 843 rotates frequently, the weight can be pulled out and the ball pulling movable piece 843. The ball-extracting movable piece 843 can be maintained in a good state for a long period of time without coming off from the (weight mounting portion 843d). Further, since the weight can be easily attached to the ball-extracting movable piece 843 simply by screwing the metal screw into the weight attachment portion 843d, the time and effort for attaching the weight can be simplified, and the pachinko machine 1 can be assembled. It is possible to reduce the cost related to.

By the way, when the ball pulling passages 831e and 832e are closed for a long period of time by the ball pulling movable piece 843, fine dust adheres to the rotating shaft of the ball pulling movable piece 843 or the rotating shaft rusts, resulting in a ball. The pull-out movable piece 843 may be difficult to rotate. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the game ball entering from the payout entrances 831a and 832a is brought into contact with the main body portion 843a of the ball pulling movable piece 843, the ball pulling passage 831e is provided by the ball pulling movable piece 843. , 832e is closed, and when the ball pulling lever 844 to release the closing is slid upward to unlock, the game ball comes into contact with the ball pulling movable piece 843, and the impact of the contact causes the ball to come into contact with the movable piece 843. The ball pulling movable piece 843 can be rotated, and the ball pulling passages 831e and 832e can be reliably opened.

Therefore, when the ball pulling lever 844 is operated to open the ball pulling passages 831e and 832e, the ball pulling movable piece 843 can rotate satisfactorily, so that the game ball can be pulled out reliably. , Workability at the time of maintenance etc. can be improved.

[4-6c. Upper full tank path unit]
The upper full tank path unit 850 of the payout unit 800 in the present embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 106 and 107. The upper full tank path unit 850 is attached to the payout unit base 801 at a position below the payout device 830. The upper full tank path unit 850 is attached to the payout unit base 801 and has a box-shaped upper full tank base 851 with the rear side open, and the upper full tank base 851 is attached to the rear side and the front side is open. It includes a box-shaped upper full tank cover 852 and a payout device pressing member 853 that is rotatably attached to the rear side of the upper full tank cover 852 and can press the payout device 830 upward.

Further, the upper full tank path unit 850 has an upper payout ball receiving port 850a which is open upward so that a game ball can pass through a portion on the left side from the center on the left and right in the front view on the upper surface, and a right side from the center on the left and right in the front view on the upper surface. It is formed between the upper full tank base 851 and the upper full tank cover 852, and is received by the upper payout ball receiving port 850a. An upper ball storage passage 850c having a predetermined size through which game balls circulate, a normal discharge port 850d that opens downward at a portion directly below the upper payout ball receiving port 850a at the lower end of the upper ball storage passage 850c, and an upper ball storage. The full tank discharge port 850e, which is open downward at the lower end of the passage 850c except for the normal discharge port 850d, and the upper ball storage passage which protrudes upward from between the normal discharge port 850d and the full tank discharge port 850e. It is provided with a partition section 850f that partitions the lower part of the 850c to the left and right.

Further, the upper full ball path unit 850 has an upper ball removing passage 850 g that guides the game ball that has entered from the upper ball removing entrance 850b downward, and an upper portion that opens downward at the lower end of the upper ball removing passage 850 g. It is equipped with a ball removal outlet 850h. The upper full tank path unit 850 is opened downward with the normal discharge port 850d, the full tank discharge port 850e, and the upper ball extraction outlet 850h arranged in this order from the left side when viewed from the front. Further, the upper full tank path unit 850 is provided with a back cover mounting portion 854 for mounting the back cover 980 at the right end of the upper full tank base 851.

In the upper full tank path unit 850, the upper payout ball receiving port 850a is located directly under the payout outlets 831b and 832b of the payout device 830 in a state of being assembled to the payout unit 800, and the upper ball ejection port 850b. Is located directly below the ball ejection ports 831c and 832c of the payout device 830. Further, in a state where the upper full tank path unit 850 is assembled to the payout unit 800, the normal discharge port 850d, the full tank discharge port 850e, and the upper ball ejection port 850h are the normal taxiways of the lower full tank path unit 860. The 861, the full tank taxiway 862, and the lower ball-extracting taxiway 865 each have an opening directly above the rear end opening (see FIG. 113).

In the upper full tank path unit 850, the game balls discharged downward from the payout outlets 831b and 832b, which are paid out by the payout device 830, enter the upper ball storage passage 850c from the upper payout ball receiving port 850a. When the normal discharge port 850d at the lower end of the upper ball storage passage 850c is not closed, the game ball that has entered the upper ball storage passage 850c from the upper payout ball receiving port 850a opens directly under the upper payout ball receiving port 850a. It is discharged from the normal discharge port 850d.

When the upper plate 321 of the door frame 3 is filled with the game balls and the game balls cannot be stored, and the normal taxiway 861 of the lower full tank path unit 860 is filled with the game balls, the door frame 3 is normally released. The exit 850d is closed. When a game ball enters the upper ball storage passage 850c in this state, it is normally stored above the discharge port 850d. Then, when the amount of the game balls stored above the normal discharge port 850d becomes higher than the partition 850f, the game balls newly entering the upper ball storage passage 850c get over the partition 850f and become full. It will be discharged downward from the tongue discharge port 850e, and will be sent to the lower plate 322 through the full tank taxiway 862 of the lower full tank ball path unit 860.

In this way, the upper full tank path unit 850 automatically lowers the game balls paid out from the payout device 830 from the upper plate 321 according to the amount of the game balls stored in the upper plate 321 in the door frame 3. It can be distributed to the plate 322.

[4-6d. Lower full tank path unit]
The lower full tank path unit 860 of the payout unit 800 in the present embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 108 to 112. The lower full tank path unit 860 is attached to the lower side of the upper full tank path unit 850 in the payout unit base 801. The lower full taxiway unit 860 guides the game ball released from the normal discharge port 850d of the upper full taxiway unit 850 forward and guides it from the front end to the through ball passage 273 of the door frame 3 normal taxiway 861. A full taxiway 862 that guides the game ball released from the full tank discharge port 850e of the upper full tank path unit 850 forward and guides the game ball from the front end to the full tank reception port 274 of the door frame 3 and the normal taxiway 862. The taxiway opening and closing door 863 that opens and closes the front end opening of the taxiway 861 and the full taxiway 862 according to the opening and closing of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, and the taxiway opening and closing door 863 are the normal taxiway 861 and the full taxiway 862. It is provided with a closing spring 864, which is urged to close the front end opening of the door.

Further, the lower full ball path unit 860 guides the game ball discharged from the upper ball extraction outlet 850h of the upper full ball path unit 850 forward, and is above the board unit base 910 of the board unit 900 from the central right end in the front-rear direction. It is provided with a lower ball-extracting taxiway 865 that discharges to.

In the lower full tank taxiway unit 860, the normal taxiway 861, the full taxiway 862, and the lower taxiway 865 are arranged in order from the left side to the right side in the front view. The rear ends of the normal taxiway 861, the full tank taxiway 862, and the lower taxiway 865 are open upward. Further, the normal taxiway 861 and the full taxiway 862 have a width in which a plurality of game balls are lined up on the left and right, and extend forward to the vicinity of the front end of the main body frame 4 so that the front end side is lowered. Further, the full taxiway 862 extends forward at a position lower than the normal taxiway 861. The normal taxiway 861, the full tank taxiway 862, and the lower taxiway 865 are formed by an upper case 866 and a lower case 867 that can be divided into upper and lower parts as shown in the figure.

The taxiway opening / closing door 863 is rotatably attached to a portion between the normal taxiway 861 and the full taxiway 862 at the front end of the lower case 867, and is rotatably attached in the front-view clockwise direction by the closing spring 864. Being urged. More specifically, at the front end of the lower full taxiway unit 860, the full taxiway 862, which is open to the right of the front end opening of the normal taxiway 861 in front view, is one game with respect to the normal taxiway 861. It is placed at a position lower than the height of the sphere. The taxiway opening / closing door 863 is normally attached below the taxiway 861 and at a position on the left side of the full taxiway 862 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending back and forth.

The taxiway opening / closing door 863 includes a disk-shaped base portion 863a that is rotatably attached, and a first door plate portion 863b that extends diagonally to the upper left from the base portion 863a in a flat plate shape and can normally close the front end opening of the taxiway 861. A second door plate portion 863c that extends from the base portion 863a to the right in a flat plate shape and can close the front end opening of the full taxiway 862, and an extension portion 863d that extends diagonally from the base portion 863a to the lower left side in a flat plate shape. The extension portion 863d is provided with an actuating protrusion 863e that protrudes forward from the front surface of the tip portion and is capable of contacting the door opening / closing contact portion 281 of the foul cover unit 270 in the door frame 3.

Here, closing the front end openings of the normal taxiway 861 and the full taxiway 862 means that it is not necessary to seal the openings and it is sufficient that the game ball cannot pass through. The actuating protrusion 863e is formed in a short arc shape centered on the base portion 863a in a front view, and is inclined so that the front end surface protrudes forward as it approaches the end side in the counterclockwise direction. doing.

The taxiway opening / closing door 863 is urged in the clockwise direction in the front view by the closing spring 864, and the second door plate portion 863c is from the lower side of the front end opening of the full taxiway 862 at the front end of the lower case 867. By abutting on the boss portion 867a protruding forward, rotation in the clockwise direction is restricted.

The lower full tank path unit 860 of the present embodiment has the pachinko machine 1 assembled, and the front end thereof is the through ball passage 273, the full tank socket 274, and the door opening / closing contact in the foul cover unit 270 of the door frame 3. It is mounted at a position facing the contact portion 281 (see FIG. 112). When the door frame 3 is open with respect to the main body frame 4, the taxiway opening / closing door 863 does not come into contact with the operating protrusion 863e. Therefore, the taxiway opening / closing door 863 has an urging force of the closing spring 864. The second door plate portion 863c is rotated in the clockwise direction in the front view, and stops in a state where the second door plate portion 863c is in contact with the boss portion 867a of the lower case 867. In this state, the first door plate portion 863b and the second door plate portion 863c are located in front of the front end openings of the normal taxiway 861 and the full taxiway 862, and close the front end openings (FIG. 111). (A). Therefore, in this state, the game balls in the normal taxiway 861 and the full taxiway 862 cannot move forward from the front end opening, and even if the door frame 3 is opened, the normal taxiway 861 and the full taxiway 861 and the full taxiway are guided. No game ball spills from Road 862.

Then, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the door opening / closing contact portion 281 of the foul cover unit 270 in the door frame 3 comes into contact with the front end surface of the operating protrusion 863e of the taxiway opening / closing door 863 and operates. Due to the inclination of the front end surface of the protrusion 863e, a force that tends to rotate the taxiway opening / closing door 863 in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front acts against the urging force of the closing spring 864. As a result, the first door plate portion 863b and the second door plate portion 863c that closed the front end openings of the normal taxiway 861 and the full taxiway 862 rotate in a direction away from the front end opening, and the normal taxiway 861 And the front end opening of the full taxiway 862 is opened (see FIG. 111 (b)). In this state, as shown, the first door plate portion 863b is located below the front end opening of the normal taxiway 861, and the second door plate portion 863c is located above the front end opening of the full taxiway 862. ..

In the state where the front end opening of the normal taxiway 861 and the full taxiway 862 is opened, the door frame 3 is completely closed with respect to the main body frame 4, and the normal taxiway 861 and the full taxiway 861 and the full taxiway 861 are filled. The through ball passage 273 and the full tank ball receiving port 274 of the foul cover unit 270 in the door frame 3 are located on the front side of the front end opening of the taxiway 862, and penetrate from the normal taxiway 861 and the full taxiway 862 side. The game ball can be delivered to the ball passage 273 and the full tank receiving port 274 side.

In this way, the front end openings of the normal taxiway 861 and the full taxiway 862 are different in the vertical direction, and the front end openings of the normal taxiway 861 and the full taxiway 862 are opened by rotating the taxiway opening / closing door 863. Since the taxiway is opened and closed, the operating range of the taxiway opening / closing door 863 can be narrowed as much as possible, and the opening / closing mechanism of the normal taxiway 861 and the full taxiway 862 can be miniaturized. Therefore, the space for other members can be relatively widened, and the internal space of the pachinko machine 1 can be used more effectively.

In the payout unit 800 of the present embodiment, more game balls are released from the payout device 830 in a state where the upper plate 321 of the door frame 3 is filled with the game balls and the game balls cannot be discharged to the upper plate 321. Is paid out, the game balls can be stored until the inside of the normal taxiway 861 of the lower full tank path unit 860 is filled with the game balls. Then, when the game ball is further discharged from the payout device 830 in a state where the normal taxiway 861 is full of game balls, the game ball is normally released in the upper ball storage passage 850c of the upper full tank ball path unit 850. If it stays above the outlet 850d and exceeds the section 850f, it will flow to the full tank discharge port 850e side, and from the full tank discharge port 850e, the full tank taxiway 862 of the lower full tank path unit 860, The payout of the game ball is automatically switched to the lower plate 322 through the foul cover unit 270. After that, when the game balls are further paid out from the payout device 830 and the lower plate 322 is filled with the game balls in addition to the upper plate 321 and the game balls cannot be supplied to the lower plate 322, the foul cover unit 270 The game ball is stored in the storage passage 277 of the above. Then, when the movable piece 278 rotates due to the game ball being stored in the storage passage 277 and is detected by the full tank detection sensor 279, the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 are full with the game ball. Is notified, and the payout of the game ball by the payout device 830 is temporarily stopped until the detection of the movable piece 278 by the full tank detection sensor 279 is canceled.

It should be noted that the payout device 830 stops paying out the game ball in response to the detection of the movable piece 278 by the full tank detection sensor 279, for example, the game ball is stored until the movable piece 278 is detected in the storage passage 277 of the foul cover unit 270. The number of storage passages 277 on the upstream side, the full taxiway 862 of the lower full tank path unit 860, and the upper ball storage passage 850c of the upper full ball path unit 850 can be filled in this state. When the game ball is paid out, the payout of the game ball by the payout device 830 may be stopped. As a result, more game balls can be stored than in the conventional pachinko machine. Therefore, in a game state where many game balls are paid out, such as during a big hit game state, the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 are paid out by paying out the game balls. It is possible to reduce the need to worry about the player being full of game balls, and to entertain the player by devoting himself to the jackpot game state.

[4-7. Board unit]
The substrate unit 900 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 to 94. The board unit 900 of the main body frame 4 is mounted on the rear side of the main body frame base 600 on the left side of the front view of the board unit base 910 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 and the speaker for bass inside. The speaker unit 920 having 921, the power supply board box 930 mounted on the right side of the front view on the rear side of the board unit base 910 and accommodating the power supply board inside, and the power supply board box 930 mounted on the rear side of the speaker unit 920 and inside. The interface control board box 940 in which the interface control board is housed, and the payout control board 951 which is mounted across the power supply board box 930 and the interface control board box 940 and controls the payout of the game ball are housed therein. The payout control board box 950 and the like are provided.

The board unit 900 includes a door frame relay board 911 attached to the front surface of the board unit base 910 so as to face forward from the connection opening 606 of the main body frame base 600. The door frame relay board 911 relays the connection between the payout control board 951, the main control board 1310, and the peripheral control board 1510 and the door body relay board attached to the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3. Is for. The payout device 830 is controlled by the payout control board 951 housed in the payout control board box 950.

[5. Overall configuration of the game board]
Next, the overall configuration of the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 114 to 119 and the like. FIG. 114 is a front view of the game board 5. FIG. 115 is a diagram illustrating a passage through which game balls are distributed by the distribution member 2011. FIG. 116 is a diagram illustrating the flow of the game ball distributed to the side of the first passage 2012 by the distribution member 2011, and FIGS. 117 and 118 are distributed to the side of the second passage 2014 by the distribution member 2011. It is a figure explaining the flow of the game ball that was made. FIG. 119 is an explanatory view showing a portion of the function display unit enlarged from the front in a state where the game board is attached to the pachinko machine.

The game board 5 has a game area 5a in which a game ball is hit by a player operating the handle 302 of the handle unit 300. Further, the game board 5 is attached to the front component 1000, which divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially square outer shape in front view, and the rear end of the game area 5a, which is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000. A plate-shaped game panel 1100 to be partitioned, a board holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100, and a game ball attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200 by driving the game ball into the game area 5a. It includes a main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 for controlling the game content. A plurality of obstacle nails that come into contact with the game ball are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion of the front surface of the game panel 1100 that is within the game area 5a (not shown).

Further, the game board 5 displays a game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and has a function display unit 1400 and a game panel visibly attached to the player side in the lower left corner of the front component 1000. A peripheral control unit mounted on the rear side of the 1100 and a game board side effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a in front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image are further provided. ing. Further, a game board side effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the game board 5, and a peripheral control unit is attached to the rear surface of the game board side effect display device 1600.

The game panel 1100 has a transparent flat plate-shaped panel plate 1110 having an outer circumference slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front component 1000, and holds the outer periphery of the panel plate 1110. It is provided with a frame-shaped panel holder that can be attached to the rear side and the back unit can be attached to the rear surface. The back unit is a box-shaped back box that is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder and has an open front, and has a square opening on the rear wall. It is configured to include a lock mechanism or the like for detachably attaching the display device 1600.

As shown in FIG. 114, a game board side effect display device 1600 having a liquid crystal display type display area is arranged substantially in the center of the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1. In the game board side effect display device 1600, a variable game is performed in which a plurality of types of decorative symbols included in a plurality of symbol rows (three rows in the present embodiment) are displayed in a variable manner, and is executed in connection with the variable game. Various display effects are displayed as images.

As will be described later, the function display unit 1400 provided at the lower left of the game board 5 includes a first special symbol display 1403 composed of eight LEDs, a second special symbol display 1405 composed of eight LEDs, and the like. Has been done. In the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405, the symbol variation for displaying the special symbol is performed. The special symbol is a symbol for notification indicating the result of determination of whether or not it is a big hit or a small hit (big hit determination). Then, in the present embodiment, the variation game using the decorative symbol is stopped after the symbol variation of changing and displaying the special symbol on the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 is started. It is supposed to be executed as one game until the end. Hereinafter, the symbol variation performed by the first special symbol display 1403 may be referred to as "first side symbol variation", and the symbol variation performed by the second special symbol display 1405 may be referred to as "second side symbol variation". Sometimes.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the symbol variation is started, a jackpot determination using any of a plurality of types of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed. Is now selected. Then, when a jackpot determination using the special symbol on the selected side is performed, control is performed to start symbol variation on the symbol display corresponding to the special symbol on the selected side based on the result of the jackpot determination. This is done (main control board 1310). In the symbol variation started in this way, after maintaining the fluctuation state for the fluctuation time selected based on the result of the jackpot determination, the jackpot symbol (big hit display result), which is a stop mode of the special symbol capable of recognizing the jackpot, and the small hit symbol. Either the small hit symbol (small hit display result), which is a stop mode of the special symbol that can recognize the hit, or the missed symbol (miss display result), which is the stop mode of the special symbol that can recognize the miss, appears. By being stopped, the player can recognize whether the player has won the big hit, won the small hit, or lost the game. If the game is stopped in the form of a big hit symbol, a big hit game in which a prize ball can be obtained by the player is given. In addition, when the small hit symbol is stopped in the form of appearing, a small hit game in which a prize ball can be obtained by the player is given.

On the other hand, the game board side effect display device 1600 is composed of a display area larger than each symbol display 1403, 1405, and in the display area, each of a plurality of symbol rows (three rows in the present embodiment) is formed. The included multiple types of decorative symbols (multiple types of numbers) are displayed larger than the special symbols.

Then, the game board side effect display device 1600 displays the display result corresponding to the display result of each symbol display 1403, 1405. More specifically, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405, the game board side effect display device 1600 also has a special symbol combination (all rows). When a fixed stop display is displayed (such as a combination of symbols with the same symbol) and the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405, the game board side effect display device. Even in 1600, a special symbol combination different from that at the time of big hit (such as a symbol combination in which all the symbols are the same symbol) is fixedly stopped and displayed, and it is shifted to the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405. When the symbols are stopped and displayed, the game board side effect display device 1600 also displays the symbol combinations at the time of loss (such as the symbol combinations in which the symbols in all rows are not the same). As a result, the player can more easily recognize whether the player has won the big hit, won the small hit, or lost the game by checking the variable game played on the game board side effect display device 1600. Will be able to.

Further, in the game board side effect display device 1600, the variable display of the decorative symbol is stopped in the order of left column → right column → middle column when viewed from the player side, and specific two rows (in this embodiment). When the same decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed in the two rows on the left and right), a reach state is formed. In the present embodiment, the left column is the first stop column, the right column is the second stop column, the middle column is the third stop column, and the left column and the right column are the reach formation columns forming the reach state among the plurality of symbol columns. It becomes.

Here, the "temporary stop display" can appear on the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 during the period in which the special symbol maintains the fluctuating state, and is on the game board side. This is a state in which a specific decorative symbol is displayed in a fluctuating state within the display area of the effect display device 1600. On the other hand, the "fixed stop display" can appear when the special symbol is stopped on the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405, or after that, and is on the game board side. This is a state in which all the decorative symbols are stopped without shaking in the display area of the effect display device 1600.

As will be described later, the function display unit 1400 is further composed of two LEDs for displaying the number of holdings related to the acceptance of the game ball into the first left starting port 2002a and the first right starting port 2002b. By passing the special hold number indicator 1404, the second special hold number indicator 1406 consisting of two LEDs indicating the number of holds related to the acceptance of the game ball to the second start port 2004, and the game ball to the gate unit 2003. A normal symbol display 1402 consisting of four LEDs for displaying the judgment result of the normal judgment and a normal holding display 1408 consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of holdings related to the passage of the game ball to the gate portion 2003 are provided. ing.

Here, the first special hold number indicator 1404 notifies the player of the number of stored jackpot determinations on the first special symbol side (hereinafter, also referred to as the first reserved stored number) that is held in the unexecuted state. Is what you do. The first reserved memory number is added by "1" when the game ball wins the first left starting port 2002a and the first right starting port 2002b arranged on the game board 5, while the first side symbol fluctuation is caused. By starting, "1" is subtracted. Therefore, if the game ball is accepted at the first starting port 2002 within the period in which the first side symbol change is performed, the first reserved storage number is further added and the predetermined upper limit number (first upper limit number, In this embodiment, up to "4") is accumulated.

Further, the second special hold number indicator 1406 notifies the player of the number of stored jackpot determinations on the second special symbol side (hereinafter, also referred to as the second reserved stored number) that is held in the unexecuted state. It is a thing. The second reserved memory number is added by "1" when the game ball wins a prize in the second starting port 2004 arranged on the game board 5, while it is "1" when the second side symbol change is started. It is subtracted. Therefore, if the game ball is accepted at the second starting port 2004 within the period in which the second side symbol is changed, the second reserved storage number is further added and the predetermined upper limit number (second upper limit number, In this embodiment, up to "4") is accumulated.

Further, in the normal symbol display 1402, when the determination of whether or not it is a normal hit (normal determination) is performed, the normal symbol variation that changes a plurality of types of ordinary symbols is performed based on the result of the normal determination. This normal symbol variation is the normal hit symbol (normal hit display result), which is a stop mode of the normal symbol that can recognize the normal hit after maintaining the fluctuation state for the fluctuation time selected based on the result of the normal judgment. By stopping in the form of one of the normal symbol (missing display result), which is a stop mode of the normal symbol that can recognize the normal loss, the player wins or loses the normal symbol (normal loss). You will be able to recognize what you have done. When the game is stopped in the form of a normal hit symbol, the normal electric winning opening 2011, which will be described later, is opened.

In addition, the normal hold indicator 1408 notifies the player of the number of normal determination memories (hereinafter, also referred to as the number of normal figure hold storages) held in the unexecuted state. The normal number of reserved symbols is added by "1" when the game ball is accepted by the gate portion 2003 arranged on the game board 5, while it is subtracted by "1" when the normal symbol change is started. Therefore, when the game ball is accepted by the gate portion 2003 within the period in which the normal symbol is changed, the number of reserved symbols is further added, and the predetermined upper limit (the upper limit of the symbols, in the present embodiment) is added. Accumulate up to "4").

Further, in the present embodiment, the first side symbol variation and the second side symbol variation are configured not to be executed at the same time, and the symbol variation using the special symbol (first side symbol variation or second side symbol variation). When both the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number are "1" or more when the above is completed, the second-side symbol variation based on the second reserved storage number is preferentially executed. Further, in the present embodiment, the symbol variation using the special symbol (first side symbol variation or second side symbol variation) and the normal symbol variation can be executed at the same time.

[5-1. Game board configuration]
Hereinafter, the board surface configuration of the game board will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 114 to 116.
As shown in FIG. 114, a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 is provided in a substantially central portion of the game area 5a in the game board 5. Further, in the area below the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a, a first left starting port 2002a in which a game ball driven into the left side of the center accessory 2500 can be accepted, and the lowermost end of the game area 5a. An out port 1003 is provided, which collects the game balls that have flowed down to the above and discharges them from the game area 5a.

Here, the first left starting port 2002a has an opening at the upper side, and is capable of constantly accepting a game ball driven into the left side of the center accessory 2500. The first left starting port 2002a is located substantially in the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction, directly below the central portion of the stage 2530 in the center accessory 2500, and the gaming ball released from the central portion of the stage 2530. Can be accepted with high probability. The first left starting port 2002a is provided with a first left starting port sensor 4002a that detects an accepted game ball.

Further, in the area on the right side of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a, a distribution member 2011 that alternately distributes the game ball driven on the right side of the center accessory 2500 into the first passage 2012 and the second passage 2014, and The first right starting port 2002b and the second starting port 2004, which allow the game ball driven to the right side of the center accessory 2500, and the game ball driven to the right side of the center accessory 2500 can pass through. A gate portion 2003 is provided. Further, in the area on the lower right side of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a, the general winning opening 2001, the first major winning opening 2005, and the first large winning opening 2005 in which the game ball driven on the right side of the center accessory 2500 can pass through. Two major winning openings 2005b are provided.

Although the details will be described later, the distribution member 2011 is a member that alternately distributes the game ball driven to the right side of the center accessory 2500 into the first passage 2012 and the second passage 2014, and is the first right starting port. The 2002b is capable of accepting game balls distributed to the side of the first passage 2012 by the distribution member 2011. Similarly, the gate portion 2003 is allowed to pass the game balls distributed to the side of the first passage 2012 by the distribution member 2022. On the other hand, the second starting port 2004 is capable of accepting game balls distributed to the side of the second passage 2014 by the distribution member 2011. Then, the general winning opening 2001, the first large winning opening 2005, and the second large winning opening 2005b can accept game balls distributed to either side of the first passage 2012 or the second passage 2014 by the distribution member 2011. It is said that.

Further, a plurality of obstacle nails in contact with the game ball are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a predetermined portion within the game area 5a on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (not shown), but at least the center role. Obstacles around the first passage 2012 and the second passage 2014 provided in the area on the right side of the object 2500, that is, the gate portion 2003, the first right starting port 2002b, the second starting port 2004, and the second winning opening 20052005b. No nails have been planted.

[5-1-1. About distribution member]
Next, a distribution member 2011 that alternately distributes the game ball driven to the right side of the center accessory 2500 into the first passage 2012 and the second passage 2014 will be described with reference to FIG. 115.
As shown in FIG. 115, each of the distribution members 2011 has two recesses capable of holding the game ball, and the position where the game ball is distributed to the first passage 2012 (FIG. 115 (A)). The position shown in FIG. 115) and the position where the game ball is distributed to the second passage 2014 (the position shown in FIG. 115 (C)) are rotatably provided.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 115 (A), when the concave portion on the left side of the distribution member 2011 is directed upward, the game ball driven into the right side of the center accessory 2500 fits into the concave portion. Get stuck. Then, as shown in FIG. 115 (B), in the game ball fitted in the recess on the left side of the distribution member 2011, the distribution member 2011 rotates to the left due to the weight of the game ball, and the first passage 2012 Will be released to the side of. At this time, the concave portion on the right side of the distribution member 2011 is directed upward.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 115 (C), when the concave portion on the right side of the distribution member 2011 is directed upward, the game ball driven into the right side of the center accessory 2500 fits into the concave portion. Include. Then, as shown in FIG. 115 (D), in the game ball fitted in the concave portion on the right side of the distribution member 2011, the distribution member 2011 rotates to the right due to the weight of the game ball, and the second passage entrance. It will be released to the side of 2013 (second passage 2014). At this time, the concave portion on the left side of the distribution member 2011 is directed upward.

In this way, after the game ball driven to the right side of the center accessory 2500 is distributed to the side of the first passage 2012, the next game ball is distributed to the side of the second passage 2014 so that the center accessory is distributed. After the game ball driven to the left side of 2500 is distributed to the side of the second passage 2014, the next game ball is distributed to the side of the first passage 2012. That is, when the game ball is driven into the right side of the center accessory 2500, the ball is always distributed alternately to the first passage 2012 and the second passage 2014, and one of the first passage 2012 and the second passage 2014. It is designed so that multiple game balls are not continuously distributed to the side.

[5-1-2. About the flow of game balls in the first passage and the second passage]
Next, the flow of the game balls distributed by the distribution member 2011 will be described with reference to FIGS. 116 to 118. FIG. 116 is a diagram illustrating the flow of the game ball distributed to the side of the first passage 2012 by the distribution member 2011, and FIGS. 117 and 118 are distributed to the side of the second passage 2014 by the distribution member 2011. It is a figure explaining the flow of the game ball that was made.

First, the game ball driven to the right side of the center accessory 2500 passes through the right region approach sensor 4006 before reaching the distribution member 2011. In this way, by providing the right region entry sensor 4006 as a sensor for detecting that the game ball has entered the region on the right side of the center accessory 2500, the first right start port 2002b, the gate portion 2003, and the second start A game ball is driven into the right side of the center accessory 2500 at a preferable time (for example, a big hit game state, a small hit game state, a time saving state) to aim at the mouth 2004, the first big prize opening 2005, and the second big prize opening 2005b. It is possible to grasp whether or not it is.

As shown in FIG. 116, the game balls distributed to the side of the first passage 2012 by the distribution member 2011 pass through the funnel-shaped crune 2017. In this way, by providing the crune 2017 before the game ball reaches the constant drive door 2021, the game ball is distributed to the side of the first passage 2012 by the distribution member 2011, and then the constant drive door 2021 is used. Although the distance to reach is constant, the time to reach the constantly driven door 2021 is set to be different each time. That is, it is possible to prevent the timing at which the constant drive door 2021 is in the retracted state from being targeted, and to prevent the timing at which the ball can enter the first right starting port 2002b from being targeted.

Next, the game ball that has passed through the crune 2017 flows down the upper side of the constant drive door 2021, but when the constant drive door 2021 is in the retracted state, it enters the side of the first right start port 2002b. On the other hand, when the constant drive door 2021 is in the protruding state, the game ball does not enter the side of the first right starting port 2002b (the ball does not enter the first right starting port 2002b). It will flow down by bypassing the right side of the first right starting port 2002b. That is, when the game ball flows down above the constantly driven door 2021, attention is paid to whether or not the constantly driven door 2021 is in the retracted state, that is, whether or not the ball can enter the first right starting port 2002b. be able to.

Then, the game ball that has entered the side of the first right start port 2002b from the constant drive door 2021 has a high probability of starting the first right because the first right start port 2002b is arranged directly under the constant drive door 2021. Accepted by mouth 2002b. On the other hand, the game ball that is not accepted by the first right start port 2002b flows down either the left or right side of the first right start port 2002b, and is to the right of the first right start port 2002b when the constant drive door 2021 is in the protruding state. It will rejoin and flow down with the game ball that has flowed down by bypassing the direction.

The first right start port 2002b described above is arranged on the side of the first passage 2012, and among the game balls distributed to the side of the first passage 2012 by the distribution member 2011, when the constant drive door 2021 is in the retracted state. It is possible to accept the game ball that has entered the inside. The first right starting port 2002b is provided with a first right starting port sensor 4002b that detects an accepted game ball.

Further, the constant drive door 2021 changes into a protruding state in which the constant drive solenoid 2107 protrudes in the forward direction and a retracted state in which the constant drive door 2021 retracts in the rear direction. The evacuation state of 04 seconds is always repeated. In this way, by making the time for the constantly driven door 2021 to be in the retracted state extremely shorter than the time for being in the protruding state, among the game balls distributed to the side of the first passage 2012 by the distribution member 2011. About 2/100 will enter the inside of the constant drive door 2021 and will be accepted by the first right start port 2002b. Details will be described later, but during the big hit game state, a large amount of game balls are driven into the right side of the center accessory 2500 so that the game balls enter the first big winning opening 2005, so about 2/100 as described above. Even if it is, the ball can be entered into the first right starting port 2002b during the jackpot game state.

Next, the game ball that has joined the first right starting port 2002b without being accepted passes through the gate portion 2003 with a high probability because the gate portion 2003 is arranged directly below the merging portion. In this way, after the unaccepted game balls join the first right start port 2002b, the game balls head toward the gate portion 2003, so that the gate portion 2003 can efficiently pass the game balls. On the other hand, the game ball that has not passed through the gate portion 2003 flows down either the left or right side of the gate portion 2003, and rejoins the game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2003 and flows down.

Here, the gate portion 2003 is arranged on the side of the first aisle 2012, and allows the game balls distributed to the side of the first aisle 2012 by the distribution section seat 2011 to pass through. This gate portion 2003 is arranged on the downstream side of the first passage 2012 from the first right starting port 2002b, and the first right starting port 2003 regardless of whether or not the game ball has entered the inside of the constant drive door 2021. The first passage 2012 is formed so that the game ball not accepted in 2002b passes with a high probability. The gate unit 2003 is provided with a gate sensor 4003 that detects a passing game ball.

Next, the game balls that have joined regardless of whether or not they have passed through the gate portion 2003 will be guided to the upper side of the second starting port 2004, but the passage at that portion is in the lower left direction (opposite to the reception entrance 2016). Since it is inclined in the direction), it does not enter the receiving port 2016 (it is not possible to enter the second starting port 2004), and it flows down by bypassing the left side of the second starting port 2004. It will be.

Then, the game ball that has flowed down by bypassing the left side of the second starting port 2004, that is, the game ball that has flowed down the first passage 2012 but has not entered the first right starting port 2002b, is the second major winning opening 2005b. When the opening / closing member of the second large winning opening 2005 is in the retracted state, it is accepted by the second large winning opening 2005b. On the other hand, when the opening / closing member of the second big winning opening 2005b is in a protruding state, the game ball is not accepted by the second big winning opening 2005b, and the opening / closing member of the second big winning opening 2005b is tilted in the lower left direction. Along with this, a game ball will be released to the side of the first prize opening 2005.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 117, the game balls distributed to the side of the second aisle entrance 2013 (second aisle 2014) by the distribution member 2011 enter from the second aisle entrance 2013 to the back and enter the first aisle. It flows down the second passage 2014 (hatched portion) provided on the back side of 2012, and is discharged forward from the second passage exit 2015. As shown in FIG. 118, the second passage 2014 is provided with a serrated step, and by providing such a serrated step, the distribution member 2011 provides the second passage entrance 2013 (the first). The time from when the game ball is distributed to the side of the two passages 2014) until it reaches the second starting door 2022 is set to be different each time. That is, it is possible to prevent the timing at which the second starting port door 2022 is in the protruding state from being targeted, and to prevent the timing at which the ball can enter the second starting port 2004 from being targeted.

Next, the game ball released forward from the second passage exit 2015 enters the reception 2016 with a high probability because the reception entrance 2016 is arranged directly below the second passage exit 2015. On the other hand, when the game ball does not enter the receiving port 2016, the game ball does not enter the side of the second starting port 2004 (the ball does not enter the second starting port 2004). It will flow down by bypassing the right side of the entrance 2016.

At this time, the game ball that has entered the receiving port 2016 is guided to the side of the second starting port 2004 when the second starting port door 2022 is in the protruding state, and is accepted by the second starting port 2004. On the other hand, when the second start opening door 2022 is in the retracted state, the game ball is not guided to the side of the second start opening 2004 (the ball cannot enter the second start opening 2004). , It will pass in front of the second start door 2022, which is in the retracted state, and flow down. That is, when the game ball enters from the reception port 2016, it is possible to pay attention to whether or not the second start port door 2022 is in a protruding state, that is, whether or not the ball can enter the second start port 2004. can. Then, such a game ball will rejoin and flow down with the game ball that has flowed down by bypassing the right side of the reception entrance 2016.

Here, the second starting port 2004 enters the game ball, that is, the second passage entrance 203, which is arranged on the side of the second passage 2103 and is distributed to the side of the second passage 2014 by the distribution member 2011, and is the second. Among the game balls released from the passage exit 2015, the game ball enters the reception port 2016, and it is possible to receive the guided game ball when the second start opening door 2022 is in the protruding state. The second start port 2004 is provided with a second start port sensor 4004 that detects the accepted game ball.

Further, the second starting port door 2022 changes into a protruding state in which the second starting port solenoid 2108 protrudes in the forward direction and a retracted state in which the second starting port door 2022 retracts in the rear direction, and is normally in the retracted state. On the other hand, according to the result of the normal judgment drawn by detecting the passage of the game ball by the gate sensor 4003, that is, when the result of the normal judgment is "normal figure hit", the evacuation state is changed to the protruding state. It is changing. The second starting port door 2022 is arranged directly below the second passage exit 2015 and the receiving port 2016, and when the second starting port door 2022 is in the protruding state, it is discharged from the second passage exit 2015 and received. While receiving the game ball that has entered 2016, the game ball can be guided toward the second start port 2004 located on the left side of the second start door 2022. On the other hand, when the second starting door 2022 is in the retracted state, the game ball released from the second passage exit 2015 and entering the receiving entrance 2016 is not received and passes through the front side of the second starting door 2022 as it is. It is designed to fall downward.

Next, the game ball that has flowed down the second passage 2014 but has not entered the second starting port 2004 is released directly above the second winning opening 2005b, and the opening / closing member of the second winning opening 2005 is in a retracted state. When it is in, it is accepted by the second prize opening 2005b. On the other hand, when the opening / closing member of the second big winning opening 2005b is in a protruding state, the game ball is not accepted by the second big winning opening 2005b, and the opening / closing member of the second big winning opening 2005b is tilted in the lower left direction. Along with this, a game ball will be released to the side of the first prize opening 2005.

As described above, when the game ball is distributed to the side of the first passage 2012 by the distribution member 2011, the ball can enter the first right start port 2002b and the game ball to the gate portion 2003. It is possible to pass through. On the other hand, when the game ball is distributed to the side of the second passage entrance 2013 (second passage 2014) by the distribution member 2011, the ball can enter the second starting port 2004. Further, the game ball distributed to the side of the first passage 2012 by the distribution member 2011 and the game ball distributed to the side of the second passage entrance 2013 (second passage 2014) are the second large winning opening 2005b. It is designed so that it does not merge directly above. Therefore, when the game ball is distributed to the side of the first passage 2012 by the distribution member 2011, the ball cannot enter the second starting port 2004, and the distribution member 2011 does not allow the ball to enter the second passage. When the game ball is distributed to the side of the entrance 2013 (second passage 2014), it is not possible to enter the ball into the first right starting port 2002b or pass the game ball through the gate portion 2003.

Further, since the distribution member 2011 alternately distributes the game ball driven to the right side of the center accessory 2500 into the first passage 2012 and the second passage 2014, the first distribution member 2011 is provided on the side of the first passage 2012. The chance of entering the right starting port 2002b and the chance of entering the second starting port 2004 provided on the side of the second passage 2014 will occur alternately. Although the details will be described later, the hit judgment based on the ball entering the second starting port 2004 is more advantageous for the player than the hit judgment based on the ball entering the first right starting port 2002b (second). In the hit determination based on the entry into the starting port 2004, a "small hit" is performed in most cases), so that a plurality of game balls can enter the second starting opening 2004 in succession. When a state occurs, only the hit determination that is advantageous to the player is performed, which may give a disadvantage to the game manager (hall side). On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the game ball is driven into the right side of the center accessory 2500, the distribution member 2011 alternately distributes the game ball to the first passage 2012 and the second passage 2014, and the center accessory Every time a game ball is hit on the right side of 2500, a chance to enter the first right starting port 2002b and a chance to enter the second starting port 2004 are equally given. As a result, the hit determination that is advantageous to the player is not performed, and the game manager (hall side) is prevented from suffering a one-sided disadvantage.

Further, when the game ball is distributed to the side of the first passage 2012 by the distribution member 2011, a chance to enter the first right start port 2002b can be obtained, but the constant drive door 2021 must be in the retracted state. For example, the game ball does not enter the side of the first right starting port 2002b, and the ball cannot enter the first right starting port 2002b. On the other hand, when the game ball is distributed to the side of the second passage 2014 by the distribution member 2011, there is a chance to enter the second starting port 2004, but if the second starting port door 2022 is in the protruding state. Otherwise, the game ball will not be guided to the side of the second starting port 2004, and the ball will not be able to enter the second starting port 2004. That is, if the game ball is simply distributed to either side of the first passage 2012 or the second passage 2014 by the distribution member 2011, the game ball enters the first right start port 2002b or the second start port 2004. This is not always the case, and attention can be expected with expectation until it can be determined whether or not the game ball enters the first right starting port 2002b or the second starting port 2004.

Further, since the distribution member 2011 alternately distributes the game ball driven to the right side of the center accessory 2500 into the first passage 2012 and the second passage 2014, the gate portion provided on the side of the first passage 2012. The chance of the game ball passing through 2003 and the chance of entering the second starting port 2004 provided on the side of the second passage 2014 will occur alternately. Here, the second start port 2004 makes a normal determination based on the passing of the game ball through the gate portion 2003, and the second start door 2022 protrudes when the result of the normal determination is "normal drawing hit". It is possible to enter the ball by changing to the state. That is, unless the game ball is passed through the gate portion 2003, the ball cannot enter the second starting port 2004. In this regard, even if the game balls are directed to the gate portion 2003 and the second starting port 2004 alternately, the game balls may be directed to only one of the gate portion 2003 and the second starting port 2004, for example. , Even if the game ball passes only through the gate portion 2003, a hit judgment based on the entry into the second starting port 2004 cannot be obtained, and even if the game ball heads only toward the second starting port 2004, the second The starting port 2004 cannot enter the ball without being able to enter the ball, and the game in the time-saving state cannot be smoothly performed.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the game ball is driven into the right side of the center accessory 2500, the distribution member 2011 alternately distributes the game ball to the first passage 2012 and the second passage 2014, and the center accessory Each time a game ball is driven into the right side of 2500, the roles of the first passage 2012 where the gate portion 2003 is arranged and the side of the second passage 2014 where the second starting port 2004 is arranged are changed. ing. That is, when the game ball is driven into the right side of the center accessory 2500, the game ball is distributed to the side of the first passage 2012 by the distribution member 2011, so that the game ball is passed through the gate portion 2003 and then shaken. By distributing the game ball to the side of the second passage 2014 by the dividing member 2011, a chance to enter the second starting port 2004 is obtained, and the game ball driven to the right side of the center accessory 2500 is started second. The ball can be efficiently entered into the mouth 2004. Therefore, even when the game ball is distributed to either side of the first passage 2012 or the second passage 2014 by the distribution member 2011, it plays a useful role in advancing the game. Then, since the game ball does not head toward only one of the gate portion 2003 and the second starting port 2004, the game can be smoothly performed in a time-saving state.

In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the second starting port 2004, a prize ball is paid out to the player, and the number of the prize balls is set to "1 ball". On the other hand, in order to make a hit determination on the second special symbol side based on the entry of the ball into the second starting port 2004, the ball is distributed to the side of the first passage 2012 by the distribution member 2011 and passes through the gate portion 2003. At least "two balls" of the game ball to be played and the game ball to be distributed to the side of the second passage 2014 by the distribution member 2011 and to enter the second starting port 2004 are required. In addition, even if the game ball is distributed to the side of the second passage 2014 by the distribution member 2011, the game ball does not enter the reception port 2016, or the second start door 2022 is in the retracted state. The game ball does not enter the second starting port 2004. In this way, the number of prize balls to be paid out when entering the second starting port 2004 is set to at least "2 balls" required for the hit determination on the second special symbol side. , Even if the game ball is continuously driven to the right side of the center accessory 2500, the number of game balls owned by the player is prevented from increasing.

As shown in FIG. 114, the game ball driven into the right side of the center accessory 2500 is distributed to either the first passage 2012 or the second passage entrance 2013 (second passage 2014) by the distribution member 2011. However, the game ball that has flowed down on either side of the first passage 2012 and the second passage entrance 2013 (second passage 2014) will be released directly above the second grand prize opening 2005b. The second major winning opening 2005b is provided in the lower right area of the center accessory 2500, and in the lower right area thereof, in addition to the second major winning opening 2005b, the general winning opening 2001 and the first prize opening are available. A big winning opening 2005 is provided.

Here, the general winning opening 2001 is distributed to either side of the first passage 2012 or the second passage 2013 by the distribution member 2011, which has an opening at the upper side and is driven into the right side of the center accessory 2500. It may be a game ball) at all times. The general winning opening 2001 is arranged on the lower left side of the second major winning opening 2005b, and can accept the game ball released from the side of the second major winning opening 2005b. The general winning opening 2001 is provided with a general winning opening sensor 4020 that detects the accepted game ball.

Further, the first prize opening 2005 has an opening / closing member, and when the opening / closing member is in the retracted state, a game ball driven into the right side of the center accessory 2500 (first passage 2012 and the first passage 2012 by the distribution member 2011). It is possible to accept a game ball distributed to either side of the two passages 2013). The first big winning opening 2005 is arranged on the lower left side of the second big winning opening 2005b, and when the opening / closing member of the first big winning opening 2005 is in the retracted state, from the side of the second big winning opening 2005b. The released game ball can be accepted with a high probability. That is, as in the case of the second prize opening 2005b, which will be described later, a game ball distributed to either side of the first passage 2012 or the second passage 2013 by the distribution member 2011 can be accepted, so that the first prize is accepted. When the opening / closing member of the opening 2005 is in the retracted state, the ball can be efficiently entered into the first major winning opening 2005 simply by hitting the game ball on the right side of the center accessory 2500. The first prize opening 2005 is provided with a first count sensor 4005a for detecting an accepted game ball.

The opening / closing member of the first prize opening 2005 described above changes into a protruding state in which the first attacker solenoid 2109 protrudes in the forward direction and a retracted state in which the opening / closing member retracts in the rear direction. On the other hand, depending on the result of the winning determination, which is drawn by detecting the entry of the game ball by the first left start port sensor 4002a, the first right start port sensor 4002b, and the second start port sensor 4004. That is, when the result of the hit determination is "big hit", the state changes from the protruding state to the retracted state.

Further, the second large winning opening 2005b has an opening / closing member, and when the opening / closing member is in the retracted state, it is possible to receive a game ball driven into the right side of the center accessory 2500. The second prize opening 2005b is arranged near the confluence of the game ball that has flowed down the first passage 2012 and the game ball that has flowed down the second passage 2013, and the opening / closing member of the second prize opening 2005b is retracted. When in the state, the game ball distributed to either side of the first passage 2012 and the second passage 2013 by the distribution member 2011 can be accepted with high probability. That is, when the opening / closing member of the second large winning opening 2005b is in the retracted state, the ball can be efficiently entered into the second large winning opening 2005b simply by hitting the game ball on the right side of the center accessory 2500. The second grand prize opening 2005b is provided with a second count sensor 4005b that detects the accepted game ball.

The opening / closing member of the second large winning opening 2005b described above changes into a protruding state in which the second attacker solenoid 2110 protrudes in the forward direction and a retracted state in which the opening / closing member retracts in the rear direction. On the other hand, according to the special lottery result drawn by detecting the entry of the game ball by the second start port sensor 4004, that is, when the special lottery result is a "small hit", from the protruding state. It is designed to change to the retracted state.

Further, inside the second major winning opening 2005b, a V winning device 2400 that distributes the game ball accepted by the second major winning opening 2005b to either one of the V winning opening 2411 and the discharging port 2412 is provided. There is. The V winning device 2400 includes a rotating body 2410 capable of holding the first game ball accepted by the second winning opening 2005b when the opening / closing member of the second winning opening 2005b is retracted. A V winning opening 2411 that can accept the game ball when the rotating body 2410 rotates clockwise while one game ball is held by the rotating body 2410, and one game ball is held by the rotating body 2410. The second major winning opening 2005b is provided with a discharge port 2412 capable of discharging the second and subsequent game balls when the game balls are received.

That is, when the first game ball is accepted by the second prize opening 2005b after the opening / closing member of the second prize opening 2005b is retracted, the first game ball is moved by the rotating body 2410. On the other hand, when the second and subsequent game balls are accepted, the second and subsequent game balls are discharged from the discharge port 2412 without being held by the rotating body 2410. Then, when the opening / closing member of the second large winning opening 2005b is returned to the protruding state, the rotating body 2410 is rotated clockwise by the V winning opening solenoid 2111, and one game ball held by the rotating body 2410 is the V winning opening. It will be distributed to 2411. After the rotating body 2410 is rotated clockwise by the V winning opening solenoid 2111, the rotating body 2410 is rotated counterclockwise to return to a position where the game ball accepted by the second major winning opening 2005b can be held. ing.

From the above, according to the special lottery result drawn by detecting the entry of the game ball by the second starting port sensor 4004, that is, when the special lottery result is a "small hit", from the protruding state. It changes to the evacuation state, and it becomes possible to accept the game ball in the second big winning opening 2005b, but during the period of this evacuation state (during the small hit game state), even one game ball can be used as the second big winning opening. If the ball can be entered in 2005b, the game ball will be distributed to the V winning opening 2411 by the rotating body 2410. Then, the game ball is distributed to the V winning opening 2411, and the entry of the game ball is detected by the first V winning opening sensor 4007a and the second V winning opening sensor 4007b, so that it becomes a "big hit (feature jackpot)". As in the case where the special lottery result is "big hit", the opening / closing member of the first big winning opening 2005 changes from the protruding state to the retracted state.

The V winning opening 2411 is provided with a first V winning opening sensor 4007a and a second V winning opening sensor 4007b as sensors for detecting the passing game ball. Further, the discharge port 2412 is provided with a discharge port sensor 4008 that detects a passing game ball. According to this, the game ball distributed to the V winning opening 2411 by the rotating body 2410 should be detected by both the first V winning opening sensor 4007a and the second V winning opening sensor 4007b. When only one of the sensors is detected, it is determined that the game ball has not entered the V winning opening 2411 to prevent fraudulent acts. Further, the total of the number of game balls detected by the first V winning opening sensor 4007a and the second V winning opening sensor 4007b and the number of game balls detected by the discharge port sensor 4008 is the second count sensor 4005b. It should match the number of game balls detected by, and if these do not match, it is judged that the game ball has not entered the V winning opening 2411, and cheating is prevented. doing.

As described above, the second prize opening 2005b and the first prize opening 2005 arranged on the lower left side of the second prize opening 2005b are distributed to the side of the first passage 2012 by the distribution member 2011. The game ball and the game ball distributed to the side of the second passage entrance 2013 (second passage 2014) are arranged in the flow path after merging. That is, both the game ball distributed to the side of the first passage 2012 by the distribution member 2011 and the game ball distributed to the side of the second passage entrance 2013 (second passage 2014) are the first major. It is possible to enter the winning opening 2005 or the second major winning opening 2005b. Therefore, although the game ball is distributed to either side of the first passage 2012 and the second passage entrance 2013 (second passage 2014) by the distribution member 2011, the distribution member 2011 distributes the game balls. Similar to the configuration of a normal gaming machine (a gaming machine that allows a ball to enter the first major winning opening 2005 or the second major winning opening 2005b by hitting a game ball), the second major is opened in the jackpot game state. The entry into the winning opening 2005b or the first large winning opening 2005, which is open in the small hit game state, is not hindered. In other words, by preventing the player from unilaterally suffering the disadvantage that it is difficult to enter the ball in the first big winning opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2005b, in the big hit game state or the small hit game state. The game can be played smoothly.

[5-2. Front component]
Next, the front component 1000 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 114 and the like. The front component 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and has a substantially circular inner shape penetrating in the front-rear direction, and the outer circumference of the game area 5a is divided by the inner circumference of the inner shape. The front component 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 that extends in an arc shape from the lower end to the left from the center in the left-right direction in the front view in an arc shape along the circumferential direction in the clockwise direction, passes through the upper end in the center in the left-right direction in the front view, and extends diagonally to the upper right. The game is played on the inner rail 1002, which is arranged inside the front component 1000 substantially along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc shape from the lower center in the left-right direction in the front view to the diagonally upper left side in the front view, and the right side in the front view of the lower end of the inner rail 1002. It includes an out-guide portion 1003, which is formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and is inclined so as to be lowered toward the rear.

Further, the front component 1000 has a lower right rail 1004 and a lower right rail 1004 that are linearly inclined so that the right end side is slightly higher from the right end of the out guide portion 1003 in the front view to the vicinity of the right side of the front component 1000. Right rail 1005 extending from the right end of the front component 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001 along the right side of the front component 1000, and the upper end curved inward of the front component 1000, and the upper end and outer rail of the right rail 1005. It is provided with an abutting portion 1006 that is connected to the upper end of the 1001 and is in contact with a game ball that has rolled along the outer rail 1001.

Further, the front component 1000 is rotatably supported by the upper end of the inner rail 1002, and extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close between the front constituent member 1000 and the front view clock. A backflow prevention member urged by a spring (not shown) so that it can rotate only with the open position that rotates in the circumferential direction and opens between the outer rail 1001 and returns to the closed position side. It is equipped with 1007.

Further, the front component 1000 is formed on the outside of the portion of the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 that extends substantially vertically from the lower end, the lower side of the out guide portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and the outer side of the right rail 1005. Each portion is provided with a security recess 1008 recessed from the front end to the rear. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the security recess 1008 has a rear projecting piece 202 protruding rearward of the security cover 200 in the door frame 3. It will be in the inserted state. As a result, the space between the security cover 200 and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear projecting piece 202 of the security cover 200 and the security recess 1008 of the front component 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is attempted to enter the game area 5a from below the front surface of the board 5 through between the security cover 200 and the front component 1000, it will be blocked by the rear projecting piece 202 and the security recess 1008. , It is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the game area 5a.

[5-3. Game panel]
Next, the game panel 1100 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 114 and the like. The game panel 1100 holds a flat plate-shaped panel plate 1110 whose outer circumference is slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front component 1000 and is made of a transparent synthetic resin, and the outer circumference of the panel plate 1110. It is provided with a frame-shaped panel holder that is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and to which the back unit is attached to the rear surface.

The panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed of a synthetic resin plate such as an acrylic resin, a polycarbonate resin, a polyarylate resin, or a methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as glass or metal. The plate thickness of this panel plate 1110 is thinner than the panel holder (game panel 1100), and is the minimum necessary thickness that can be sufficiently held even if an obstacle nail is planted on the front surface or the front unit 2000 is attached. 8 to 10 mm). In this example, the panel plate 1110 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

The panel holder of the game panel 1100 has a size including the panel plate 1110 and has a substantially quadrangular outer shape, and is formed to be thicker than the panel plate 1110 (about 20 mm in this example). The panel holder is made of a synthetic resin (for example, a thermoplastic synthetic resin).

Further, the panel holder is provided with an out port 1126 that penetrates back and forth at the lowest position in the game area 5a. In the panel holder, the lower side of the rear surface of the out port 1126 is recessed forward to the lower end with the same width as the out port 1126.

When the game panel 1100 is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000, the out port 1126 of the panel holder is opened on the rear side of the out guide portion 1003 of the front component 1000. As a result, the game ball that has flowed down to the lower end of the game area 5a is guided to the rear out port 1126 by the out guidance unit 1003, and is discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1126.

[5-4. Board holder]
Next, the substrate holder 1200 will be described. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with the upper side and the front side open, and the bottom surface is inclined so as to be lowered toward the center in the left-right direction. The board holder 1200 can cover the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from the lower side in a state of being assembled on the game board 5. As a result, all the game balls discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1126 and the game balls discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit can be received and formed on the bottom surface. It can be discharged downward from the discharge unit 1201.

[5-5. Main control board unit]
Next, the main control unit 1300 will be described. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 includes a main control board 1310 that controls game contents, payout of game balls, and the like, and a main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200. ..

The main control board box 1320 is provided with a plurality of sealing mechanisms, and when the main control board box 1320 is closed by using one sealing mechanism, the sealing mechanism is destroyed in order to open the main control board box 1320. It is necessary to leave a trace of opening and closing of the main control board box 1320. Therefore, by looking at the traces of opening and closing, it is possible to detect unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, and the deterrent force against illegal acts on the main control board 1310 is enhanced.

The various board boxes 930, 950, 1320, 1520, and 3042 including the main control board box 1320 are all provided as transparent members so that they can be visually confirmed from the outside. There is. That is, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the surface of the payout control board 951 in the payout control board box 950 and the main control board 1310 in the main control board box 1320 is inferior in fraud suppression performance. Since a mounting area is provided, it is important to ensure such transparency in order to obtain various effects related to fraud countermeasures described later.

[5-6. Function display unit]
Next, the function display unit 1400 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 119 and the like. As shown in the figure, the function display unit 1400 is attached to the lower left corner of the front component 1000 on the outside of the game area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be visually recognized from the front (player side) through the through hole 111 of the door frame 3 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1. The function display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs based on control signals from the main control board 1310 to display a game state (game status), a normal lottery result, a special lottery result, and the like.

As shown in FIG. 119, the function display unit 1400 includes a status indicator 1401 composed of one LED for displaying the game status, and four LEDs for displaying the normal lottery result drawn by the passage of the game ball to the gate portion 2003. A lottery is made by accepting a normal symbol display 1402 consisting of a normal symbol display 1402, a normal hold display 1408 consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of holdings related to the passage of the game ball to the gate portion 2003, and the first starting port 2002. The first special symbol display 1403 consisting of eight LEDs displaying the result of the first special lottery, and the first special holding consisting of two LEDs displaying the number of holdings related to the acceptance of game balls to the first starting port 2002. To the number display 1404, the second special symbol display 1405 consisting of eight LEDs displaying the result of the second special lottery drawn by accepting the game ball to the second starting port 2004, and the second starting port 2004. A second special hold number indicator 1406 consisting of two LEDs that display the number of holds related to the acceptance of game balls, and a first big prize opening when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is a "big hit" etc. It mainly includes a round display 1407 composed of three LEDs for displaying the number of repetitions (number of rounds) of the opening / closing pattern of 2005 and the second prize opening 2005b.

In this function display unit 1400, the number of holds, symbols, and the like can be displayed by appropriately turning on, turning off, blinking, and the like the LEDs provided.

[5-7. Peripheral control unit]
Next, the peripheral control unit will be described. The peripheral control unit is attached to the rear side of the game board side effect display device 1600, which is attached to the rear surface of the back box of the back unit. The peripheral control unit includes a peripheral control board 1510 that controls an effect presented to the player based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board box 1520 that houses the peripheral control board 1510. There is. Although not shown, the peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit for controlling light emission effect, sound effect, movable effect, etc., and an effect display control unit for controlling an effect image. ..

[5-8. Game board side production display device]
Next, the game board side effect display device 1600 will be described with reference to FIG. 114. The game board side effect display device 1600 is arranged in the center of the game area 5a in the front view, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the back box of the back unit. More specifically, the game board side effect display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface at the substantially center of the rear wall of the back box. The game board side effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled. The game board side effect display device 1600 is a full-color liquid crystal display device backed by a white LED, and can display a still image or a moving image.

[6. Main control board, payout control board and peripheral control board]
Next, the control board that performs various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 120 to 123. FIG. 120 is a block diagram of a main control board, a payout control board, and a peripheral control board, FIG. 121 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 120, and FIG. 122 is a payout control board, a CR unit, and a frequency constituting the main board. FIG. 123 is a schematic diagram of various detection signals input to / from the game ball rental device connection terminal plate that relays the electrical connection with the display board, FIG. 123 is a block diagram showing the continuation of FIG. 120, and FIG. 124 is a block diagram. It is a block diagram which shows the outline of a peripheral control MPU, and FIG. 125 is a block diagram around a VDP with a built-in sound source in a liquid crystal display control unit.

As its control configuration, the pachinko machine 1 includes a first control unit MCG that controls the game including the payout of prize balls in addition to the generation process of the control power supply (for example, + 5V) as shown in FIG. A second control unit SCG that produces an effect related to the game being advanced by the first control unit MCG is provided.

More specifically, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment employs a structure in which various controls are shared by preparing a plurality of substrates, and the main control substrate 1310 is used as the first control unit MCG. , The payout control board 951 and the power supply board 931 are provided, and the peripheral control board 1510 is provided as the second control unit SCG. Hereinafter, in explaining the control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, the first control unit MCG will be described in the order of the main control board 1310, the payout control board 951, and the power supply board 931. 2 The control unit SCG (peripheral control board 1510) will be described.

[6-1. Main control board]
Among the first control unit MCGs, the main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game controls the power-on processing executed at the time of power-on and a predetermined time elapses from the time of power-on, as shown in FIG. Main control MPU1310a, which is a microprocessor with built-in various control programs such as the main control program that is executed after the game is executed and controls the game operation, a ROM that stores various commands, and a RAM that temporarily stores data, and various types. A main control input circuit 1310b for inputting a detection signal from a detection switch, a main control output circuit 1310c for outputting various signals to an external board, and a main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d for driving various solenoids. The program mainly includes a power failure monitoring circuit 1310e for monitoring signs of a power failure or momentary power failure of a predetermined voltage.

In addition to the built-in RAM (hereinafter, referred to as "main control built-in RAM") and the built-in ROM (hereinafter, referred to as "main control built-in ROM") of the main control MPU 1310a. It also has a built-in watchdog timer 1310af (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in WDT 1310af") for monitoring its operation (system) and a function for preventing fraud.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a has a built-in non-volatile RAM. In this non-volatile RAM, a unique ID code with a unique code (a code that exists only once in the world) for identifying an individual by the manufacturer of the main control MPU 1310a is stored in advance. Since the ID code once attached is stored in the non-volatile RAM, it cannot be rewritten even by using an external device. The main control MPU 1310a can take out an ID code from the non-volatile RAM and refer to it.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a is a hard random number circuit 1310an (hereinafter, "main control built-in") that updates a big hit determination random number to be used for determining whether or not to generate a big hit game state among various random numbers related to the game by hardware. It is described as "hard random number circuit 1310an"). The main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an generates a random number within a predetermined numerical range (in the present embodiment, a numerical range of a value 0 to a maximum value of 32767 is preset as a minimum value). The circuit is configured so that a predetermined value is not fixed as an initial value (that is, the initial value is not fixed), and a different value is set each time the main control MPU 1310a is reset. Specifically, when the main control MPU 1310a is reset, the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an first sets a clock signal (1 value within a predetermined numerical range) as an initial value and is input to the main control MPU 1310a. Based on the clock signal output from the main control crystal oscillator, which will be described later, other values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another at high speed without duplication, and all the values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted. When this is completed, one value within the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and the other values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a without duplication. Extract one after another. The main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an repeatedly performs such a high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU 1310a hits the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an at the time of acquiring the value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an. It is designed to be set as a random number for judgment.

The main control input circuit 1310b is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the information in which the detection signals from the various detection switches are input to the various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the main control input circuit 1310b is configured as a circuit in which the system reset signal from the main control system reset described later is not input. That is, in the main control input circuit 1310b, the information based on the detection signals from the various detection switches input to the various input terminals is not reset by the main control system reset described later, so that the various signals based on the information are various. It is configured as a circuit that is output from the output terminal.

The main control output circuit 1310c is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to ground (GND), and various signals for outputting various signals to an external board or the like are input to the various input terminals. The main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function having a reset function provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the input information, and the main control output circuit 1310cc without a reset function having no reset function without a reset terminal. It is composed of and. The main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from the main control system reset described later is input. That is, the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function is reset by the main control system reset described later, so that the information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external board or the like is reset. It is configured as a circuit in which signals based on the above are not output at all from the various output terminals. On the other hand, the main control output circuit 1310cc without a reset function is configured as a circuit in which a system reset signal from a main control system reset, which will be described later, is not input. That is, the main control output circuit 1310cc without a reset function is converted to the information because the information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external board or the like is not reset by the main control system reset described later. It is configured as a circuit in which the based signal is output from its various output terminals.

The first left start port sensor 4002a for detecting the game ball entering the first left start port 2002a and the first right start port sensor 4002a for detecting the game ball entering the first right start port 2002b shown in FIG. 114. 4002b, second start port sensor 4004 that detects a game ball that has entered the second start port 2004, magnetic detection sensor 4024 that is attached to the back unit 3000 shown in FIG. 9 and detects fraudulent activity using a magnet, A first count sensor 4005a that detects a game ball that has entered the first major winning opening 2005, a second count sensor 4005b that detects a game ball that has entered the second major winning opening 2005b, and a game that has entered the general winning opening 2001. General winning opening sensor 4020 for detecting balls, gate sensor 4003 for detecting game balls that have passed through the gate unit 2003, right area entry sensor 4006 for detecting game balls that have entered the area on the right side of the center accessory 2500, second It was distributed to the V winning opening sensor 4007a and the V winning opening sensor 4007b for detecting the game ball distributed to the V winning opening 2411 in the large winning opening 2005b, and the discharge port 2412 in the second large winning opening 2005b (V winning opening). The detection signal from the outlet sensor 4008 that detects the game ball (which was not distributed to 2411) is a predetermined input of the main control MPU 1310a via the panel relay board 4161 attached to the game board 5 and the main control input circuit 1310b. It is input to the input terminal of the port. The signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b.

The main control MPU 1310a is a main control output circuit with a reset function by outputting a drive signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function based on the detection signals from each of these switches. A control signal is output from 1310ca to the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d, and the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d always drives the solenoid 2107, the second start port solenoid 2108, the first attacker solenoid 2109, and the second attacker via the panel relay board 4161. By outputting a drive signal to the solenoid 2110 or outputting a drive signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function, the panel relay board 4161, from the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function, Then, via the function display unit 1400, the first special symbol display 1403, the second special symbol display 1405, the first special hold number display 1404, the second special hold number display 1406, the normal symbol display 1402, and the status display A drive signal is output to the device 1401 and the round display 1407.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a outputs various information (game information) related to the game from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function, thereby controlling the payout from the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function. By outputting various information (game information) related to the game to the board 951 and outputting a signal (power failure clear signal) to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function from the output terminal of the predetermined output port, the main with a reset function. A signal (power failure clear signal) is output from the control output circuit 1310ca to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e.

In the present embodiment, the first left start port sensor 4002a, the first right start port sensor 4002b, the second start port sensor 4004, the first count sensor 4005a, the second count sensor 4005b, the gate sensor 4003, and the right region portion are entered. The sensor 4006, the first V winning opening sensor 4007a, the second V winning opening sensor 4007b, and the outlet sensor 4008 use a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch, whereas the general winning opening sensor 4020 Uses a contact type ON / OFF operation type mechanical switch. This is because the game ball frequently enters the first left start port 2002a, the first right start port 2002b, and the second start port 2004, and frequently passes through the gate portion 2003 and the right region portion approach sensor 4006. The detection of the game ball by the first left start port sensor 4002a, the first right start port sensor 4002b, the second start port sensor 4004, the gate sensor 4003, and the right region approach sensor 4006 also frequently occurs. Therefore, a proximity switch having a long life is used for the first left start port sensor 4002a, the first right start port sensor 4002b, the second start port sensor 4004, the gate sensor 4003, and the right region approach sensor 4006. In addition, when a big hit game state or a small hit game state that is advantageous for the player occurs, the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2005b are opened, and the game ball frequently enters the second big winning ball. Since the game ball is frequently distributed to the V winning opening 2411 and the discharging port 2412 in the winning opening 2005b, the first count sensor 4005a, the second count sensor 4005b, the first V winning opening sensor 4007a, and the second V winning opening sensor 4007b , The detection of the game ball by the outlet sensor 4008 also frequently occurs. Therefore, the detection of the game ball by the first count sensor 4005a, the second count sensor 4005b, the first V winning opening sensor 4007a, the second V winning opening sensor 4007b, and the discharge port sensor 4008 also frequently occurs. Therefore, the count sensor 4005 also uses a proximity switch having a long life. On the other hand, in the general winning opening 2001 where the game ball does not enter frequently, the detection by the general winning opening sensor 4020 does not occur frequently. Therefore, the general winning opening sensor 4020 uses a mechanical switch having a shorter life than the proximity switch.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a sends various commands related to payout as serial data from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit 1310 cab without a reset function, thereby controlling the payout from the main control output circuit 1310 cc without a reset function. Various commands are transmitted as serial data to the board 951. When the payout control board 951 normally completes receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, the payout control board 951 outputs a signal (payer ACK signal) to that effect to the main control board 1310. This signal (payer ACK signal) is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 951 as serial data in the main control input circuit 1310b, so that the main control input circuit 1310b inputs the predetermined serial input port. Receive various commands as serial data at the terminal. When the main control MPU 1310a normally receives various commands from the payout control board 951 as serial data, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a signal (main payment ACK signal) to that effect from the output terminal of the predetermined output port with a reset function. It is output to the circuit 1310ca, and a signal (main payment ACK signal) is output from the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function to the payout control board 951.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands related to the control of the game effect and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 as serial data from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit 1310 bc without the reset function. , No reset function Various commands are transmitted as serial data from the main control output circuit 1310cc to the peripheral control board 1510.

The power supply board 931 that supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter, simply "capacitor") as a backup power source for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is cut off. BC0 (see FIG. 132) is provided. The capacitor BC0 allows the main control MPU 1310a to store various information in the main control built-in RAM in the power off processing even when the power is cut off. Various information stored in the main control built-in RAM is an operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch 954 when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 described later is operated within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on. Is output from the payout control board 951 and is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b. It is supposed to be (cleared).

[6-2. Payout control board]
Among the first control unit MCG, the payout control board 951 that controls the payout of the game ball is, as shown in FIG. 121, the payout control unit 952 that performs various controls related to the payout and the operation switch 954 that also has various functions. And an error LED display 860b that displays the status of the pachinko machine 1. Further, the operation switch 954 having a function as a RAM clear switch is described as a RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a (hereinafter, referred to as "main control built-in RAM") based on a detection signal output by the operation. .) Outputs a RAM clear signal for completely erasing the information stored in.

[6-2-1. Payout control unit]
As shown in FIG. 121, the payout control unit 952, which performs various controls related to payout, controls the power-on processing executed when the power is turned on, and pays out the game medium executed after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the power is turned on. Detection from the payout control MPU952a, which is a microprocessor with built-in various control programs including a payout control program that controls operation, a ROM that stores various commands, and a RAM that temporarily stores data, and various detection switches related to payout. To output a drive signal to a payout control input circuit 952b into which signals are input, a payout control output circuit 952c for outputting various signals to an external board or the like, and a payout motor 834 of the payout device 830 shown in FIG. 103. The payout motor drive circuit 952d and the CR unit input / output circuit 952e for exchanging various signals with the CR unit 6 are provided. The payout control MPU952a includes a built-in RAM (hereinafter, referred to as "payout control built-in RAM"), a built-in ROM thereof (hereinafter, referred to as "payout control built-in ROM"), and the like. It also has a built-in watchdog timer that monitors its operation (system) and a function to prevent fraud.

Under the control of the payout control MPU952a, the payout control program serializes various information (game information) related to the game from the main control board 1310 and various commands related to the payout as main payout serial data reception signals via the payout control input circuit 952b. Receive serial data with. Further, the payout control program generates a frame state 1 command (corresponding to the first error occurrence command) when an error occurs in the payout operation of the game ball, or operates the operation switch 954 as an error canceling unit. A 16-bit (2-byte) error release navigation command (corresponding to the first error release command) is created based on the signal (detection signal), and these error occurrence commands and error release navigation commands are transmitted to the payer serial data, respectively. As a signal, serial data is output to the receiving port of the main control board 1310 via the payout control I / O port 952b (command transmission means). Further, this payout control program pays out after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the power is turned on, that is, after the payout control unit main process is executed or the payout control unit timer interrupt process is executed and the payout control is started. When an error occurs in operation, the error is canceled based on the detection signal generated by the operation of the operation switch 954, and the output of warning information corresponding to the error is stopped (error cancellation control means).

Further, this payout control program outputs a door frame opening command (first door opening command) when a detection signal (door frame opening detection signal) accompanying the opening operation is input from the door frame opening switch 618. When the detection signal (main body frame opening detection signal) accompanying the opening operation is input from the main body frame opening switch 619, the main body frame opening command (first main body frame opening command) is output. On the other hand, this payout control program also issues a door frame closing command (first door frame closing command) when a detection signal (door frame closing detection signal) accompanying the closing operation is input from the door frame opening switch 618. At the same time, when the detection signal (main body frame closing detection signal) accompanying the closing operation is input from the main body frame opening switch 619, the main body frame closing command (first main body frame closing command) is output.

The payout control input circuit 952b is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the information in which the detection signals from the various detection switches are input to the various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the payout control input circuit 952b is configured as a circuit in which the system reset signal from the payout control system reset described later is not input. That is, in the payout control input circuit 952b, the information based on the detection signals from the various detection switches input to the various input terminals is not reset by the payout control system reset described later, so that the various signals based on the information are various. It is configured as a circuit that is output from the output terminal.

The payout control output circuit 952c is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to ground (GND), and various signals for outputting various signals to an external board or the like are input to the various input terminals. A payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function having a reset function provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the input information, and a payout control output circuit 952cc without a reset function having no reset function without a reset terminal. It is composed of and. The payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from the payout control system reset described later is input. That is, the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function is reset by the payout control system reset described later, so that the information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external board or the like is reset. It is configured as a circuit in which signals based on the above are not output at all from the various output terminals. On the other hand, the payout control output circuit 952 kb without the reset function is configured as a circuit in which the system reset signal from the payout control system reset described later is not input. That is, the payout control output circuit 952 kb without the reset function is converted to the information because the information for outputting the various signals input to the various input terminals to the external board or the like is not reset by the payout control system reset described later. It is configured as a circuit in which the based signal is output from its various output terminals.

The ball-out detection sensor 827 that detects the ball-out of the game ball in the supply passage of the ball guidance unit 820 of the payout unit 800, and the payout detection sensor 842 that detects the game ball discharged from the payout ports 831b and 832b of the payout device 830. The detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 840 that detects the rotation of the payout blade 839 is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a via the payout control input circuit 952b. In the description described later, the blade rotation detection sensor 840 will be simply referred to as a rotation detection sensor 840 in this specification.

Further, the detection signals from the door frame opening switch 618 for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and the main body frame opening switch 619 for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are the payout control input circuit 952b. It is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a via the payout control MPU952a.

Further, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 that detects whether or not the game ball in which the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 270 shown in FIG. 1 is full is full is first the handle relay terminal plate 315 and the power supply. It is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a via the board 931 and the payout control input circuit 952b.

The payout control MPU952a receives various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 via the payout control input circuit 952b at the input terminal of the serial input port in a serial data manner, or receives an operation signal (detection) of the operation switch 954. The signal) is output to the main control board 1310 via the payout control input circuit 952b. When the payout control MPU952a normally receives various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, the payout control MPU952a outputs a signal (payer ACK signal) to that effect from the output terminal of the predetermined output port with a reset function. By outputting to the circuit 952ca, a signal (payer ACK signal) is output from the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function to the main control board 1310.

Further, the payout control MPU952a transmits various commands for indicating the state of the pachinko machine 1 as serial data from the output terminal of the serial output port to the payout control output circuit 952 kb without the reset function, thereby performing payout control without the reset function. Various commands are transmitted as serial data from the output circuit 952cc to the main control board 1310. When the main control board 1310 normally completes receiving various commands from the payout control board 951 as serial data, the main control board 1310 outputs a signal (main payout ACK signal) to that effect to the payout control board 951. This signal (main payment ACK signal) is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a via the payout control input circuit 952b.

Further, the payout control MPU952a outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 834 from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, whereby the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function is output. Outputs the drive signal from the payout motor drive circuit 952d to the payout motor drive circuit 952d, outputs the drive signal from the payout motor drive circuit 952d to the payout motor 834, and outputs the status of the pachinko machine 1 to the payout motor 834 from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. By outputting the drive signal to be displayed on the 860b to the payout control output circuit 952ca with the reset function, the drive signal is output from the payout control output circuit 952ca with the reset function to the error LED display 860b.

The error LED display 860b is a segment display, and displays alphanumeric characters, figures, and the like to display the status of the pachinko machine 1. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED display 860b are as follows. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it is notified that it is "normal", and when the number "0" is displayed, it means that it is "connection abnormality" (specifically, with the main control board 1310). Notifies that there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the payout control board 951 and the board, and when the number "1" is displayed, it means that the ball is out (specifically, the ball is out). Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 827, it notifies that there is no game ball in the supply passage of the payout device 830), and when the number "2" is displayed, it means that it is a "ball" (specifically). In When the number "3" is displayed, it means that there is a "payout detection sensor error" (specifically, there is a problem with the payout detection sensor 842 based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 842). Is occurring), and when the number "5" is displayed, it means that there is a "retry error" (specifically, the number of retries for the payout operation has reached a preset upper limit). When the number "6" is displayed, it means that the tank is "full" (specifically, the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 270 is stored based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279. Notifies that the game ball is full), and when the number "7" is displayed, it means that "CR is not connected" (electrical connection in any of the payout control board 951 to CR unit 6). Is disconnected), and when the number "9" is displayed, it means "in stock (there is a prize ball stock (unpaid))" (specifically, a game ball that has not been paid out yet). The number of balls has reached a predetermined number).

Further, the payout control MPU952a outputs the number of balls of the game ball actually paid out from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, whereby the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function is output. The number of game balls actually paid out is output to the external terminal plate 784 via a resistor (not shown).

Further, the payout control board 951 outputs various information (game information) related to the game from the main control board 1310 to the external terminal board 784 via a resistor (not shown). The external terminal plate 784 is provided with a plurality of photocouplers (which are configured by incorporating an infrared LED and a photo IC) (not shown), and the playground (hall) is provided through the plurality of photocouplers. ), The number of game balls and various other information (game information, error details related to the payout operation of the game balls, or the fact that there was an error) are transmitted to the hall computer installed in).
The external terminal plate 784 and the hall computer are electrically insulated by a plurality of photocouplers, and an abnormal voltage is applied to the hall computer via the external terminal plate 784 of the pachinko machine 1 to perform a hall. The computer does not malfunction or break down, and the main control board 1310 that advances the game from the hall computer via the external terminal plate 784 of the pachinko machine 1 and the payout control board 951 that controls the payout, etc. An abnormal voltage is applied to prevent malfunction or failure. The hall computer monitors the player's game by grasping the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko machine 1.

The ball lending request signal for the game ball from the ball lending button 328 and the return request signal for the prepaid card from the return button 329 are, first, the frequency display board 365, the main door relay terminal board 880, and the game ball lending device connection terminal board. It is designed to be input to the CR unit 6 via 869. The CR unit 6 serially transmits a signal specifying the number of game balls to be rented according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 951 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, and this signal is the CR unit. It is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a via the input / output circuit 952e. Further, the CR unit 6 updates the remaining amount of the prepaid card inserted according to the number of balls of the rented game ball, and sends a signal for displaying the remaining amount on the ball lending display unit 330. It is output to the equal rental device connection terminal board 869, the main door relay terminal board 880, and the frequency display board 365, and this signal is input to the ball rental device return display unit 330. Further, in the CR unit lamp 365d adjacent to the ball rental display unit 330, the supply voltage from the CR unit 6 is input via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880. ing.

The power supply board 931 that supplies various voltages to the payout control board 951 includes a capacitor BC1 (see FIG. 132) as a backup power source for supplying power to the payout control board 951 for a predetermined time even when the power supply is cut off. There is. With the capacitor BC1, the payout control MPU952a can store various information in the payout control built-in RAM (payout storage unit) in the power off processing even when the power is cut off. When the operation switch 954 is operated within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on, the various information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is sent to the predetermined payout control MPU952a via the payout control input circuit 952b. The payout control MPU952a, which is input to the input terminal of the input port, determines as a RAM clear signal for completely erasing the information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, and with this as an opportunity, the payout control MPU952a uses the payout control built-in RAM. It is designed to be completely erased (cleared). This operation signal (RAM clear signal) is also output to the payout control output circuit 952 kb without the reset function, and is also output to the main control board 1310 from the payout control output circuit 952 cc without the reset function.

[6--2-2. Exchange of various signals with the terminal board for renting game balls, etc.]
Here, the exchange of various signals between the payout control unit 952 and the CR unit 6 and the exchange of various signals between the CR unit 6 and the frequency display board 365 will be described with reference to FIG. 122. As shown in FIG. 122, the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 relays the electrical connection between the CR unit 6 and the payout control board 951 as well as the CR unit 6 and the frequency display board 365. (To be exact, the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 is electrically connected to the frequency display board 365 via the main door relay terminal board 880. , The CR unit 6 and the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 are electrically connected, the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880 are electrically connected, and the main door relay. The terminal board 880 and the frequency display board 365 are electrically connected). Between the boards of the CR unit 6 and the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869, between the boards of the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 and the payout control board 951, the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 and the main door relay The boards of the terminal board 880 and the boards of the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 and the frequency display board 365 are electrically connected by each wiring (harness). Further, AC24V, which will be described later, from the power supply board 931 is supplied to the CR unit 6 via a game ball or the like rental device connection terminal plate 869. The CR unit 6 creates a predetermined voltage VL (in this embodiment, DC + 12V (hereinafter referred to as “+ 12V”)) from the supplied AC24V by a built-in voltage creation circuit (not shown) together with the ground LG. , The game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 is supplied to the payout control board 951, while the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 and the main door relay terminal board 880 are supplied to the frequency display board 365. ..

The frequency display board 365 has a push button switch 328 mounted on the component surface at a position corresponding to the ball lending button 328, and a push button switch at a position corresponding to the return button 329 of the ball lending unit 360. The return button 329 is mounted, and the ball lending display unit 330, which is a segment display, is mounted at a position corresponding to the lending balance display unit 363 of the ball lending unit 360.

In the ball rental button 328 and the return button 329, the ground LG from the CR unit 6 is electrically connected via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880. When the ball lending button 328 is pressed, the ball lending button 328 is switched on (ON), and the ball lending operation signal TDS from the ball lending button 328 is the main door relay terminal board 880 and the game. It is designed to be input to the CR unit 6 via the ball rental device connection terminal plate 869. When the return button 329 is pressed, the return button 329 is switched on (ON), and the return operation signal RES from the return button 329 is connected to the main door relay terminal board 880 and the game ball rental device. It is designed to be input to the CR unit 6 via the terminal plate 869.

The ball rental display unit 330 has three segment indicators arranged side by side in a row, and one of these three-digit segment indicators is sequentially driven by one digit segment indicator, which is a so-called dynamic lighting method. The digit segment indicator is controlled to light up. By such lighting control, the ball lending / returning display unit 330 displays the remaining amount of the prepaid card inserted in the CR unit 6 or displays the error of the CR unit 6. The ball return display unit 330 includes digit signals DG0 to DG2 (three signals in total) for designating a one-digit segment display among the three-digit segment display, and the designated one-digit segment display. The segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G (7 signals in total) for designating the contents to be displayed by turning on are the CR unit 6 to the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal. When input is made via the plate 880, the 1-digit segment display is sequentially emitted according to the input digit signals DG0 to DG2 and the segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G, and these 3-digit segment display is displayed. The contents of the light emitted from the vessel can be visually recognized through the rental balance display unit 363.

A CR unit lamp 365d is mounted on the frequency display board 365 adjacent to the ball return display unit 330. In this CR unit lamp 365d, a predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is input via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880. The predetermined voltage VL is input to the CR unit 6 as a ball lending signal TDL through a current limiting resistor mounted on the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 via the CR unit lamp 365d. The CR unit 6 creates a predetermined voltage VL from AC24V supplied from the power supply board 931 by the built-in voltage creation circuit, and the ball lending button 328 and the return button 329 are in a valid ball lending state. Controls the logic of the ball lending signal TDL to make the CR unit lamp 365d emit light, and this light emission can be visually recognized through the loan remaining display unit 363. Further, the segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G are input to the ball rental display unit 330 through the current limiting resistor mounted on the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869.

In the CR unit 6, the ball lending button 328 is pressed and the ball lending operation signal TDS from the ball lending button 328 is transmitted from the frequency display board 365 via the main door relay terminal board 880 and the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869. When input, BRDY, which is a ball lending request signal, is output to the payout control board 951 (payout control MPU952a) via the game ball or the like lending device connection terminal board 869. Then, the CR unit 6 is a one-time payout operation start request signal for paying out a predetermined number of loaned balls (in this embodiment, 25 balls, which corresponds to an amount of 100 yen) in one payout operation. The BRQ is output to the payout control board 951 (payout control MPU952a) via the game ball or the like rental device connection terminal board 869. The payout control board 951 (payout control MPU952a) into which BRDY and BRQ are input sends an EXS, which is a signal for notifying that one payout operation has started or ended, to a game ball or the like rental device connection terminal board 869. PRDY, which is a signal for outputting to the CR unit 6 or for notifying that the payout operation for paying out the ball rental is possible or impossible, is transmitted to the game ball rental device connection terminal board. It is output to the CR unit 6 via 869. For example, if the hall clerk or the like presets the CR unit 6 so that 200 yen worth of game balls are paid out when the ball lending button 328 is pressed, one payout operation is performed. Is to be performed twice in a row, and if 25 balls for 100 yen are paid out, 25 balls for 100 yen will be paid out in succession, and 50 balls for a total of 200 yen will be paid out. Become.

In the CR unit 6, the return button 329 is pressed and the return operation signal RES from the return button 329 is input from the frequency display board 365 via the main door relay terminal board 880 and the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869. The prepaid card is ejected from an insertion slot (not shown) and returned. The returned prepaid card stores the remaining amount obtained by subtracting the amount corresponding to the number of balls of the game ball paid out as a result of pressing the ball lending button 328.

[6-3. Power supply board 931]
Next, among the first control unit MCG, the power supply board 931 will be briefly described. The power supply board 931 includes a power supply switch 934 supplied from the pachinko island equipment and capable of electrically connecting or electrically shutting off AC 24 volts (AC24V), and a power supply control unit 935 that generates various power sources. A launch control unit 953 that controls launch by the launch solenoid 682 of the ball launching device 650 shown in FIG. 5 and ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 255 of the ball feed unit 250 shown in FIG. 1 is provided.

[6-3-1. Power control unit]
The power supply control unit 935 improves the power factor of the power factor rectified by the synchronous rectifier circuit 935a and the synchronous rectifier circuit 935a in which the power switch 934 is operated to rectify the AC 24 volt (AC24V) supplied from the Pachinko Island facility. The power factor improvement circuit 935b, the smoothing circuit 935c for smoothing the power with the power factor improved by the power factor improvement circuit 935b, and various direct currents for supplying the power smoothed by the smoothing circuit 935c to various substrates. It includes a power supply creation circuit 935d for creating a power source.

[6--3-2. Launch control unit]
The launch control unit 953 that performs launch control by the launch solenoid 682 and ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 255 mainly includes a launch control circuit 953a. The launch control circuit 953a includes an operation signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 307 that electrically adjusts the strength (launch intensity) of launching the game ball toward the game area 5a according to the rotation position of the handle 302, and a palm on the handle 302. A detection signal from the handle touch sensor 310 that detects whether or not the player is touching or a finger, and a single-shot button operation sensor 312 that detects whether or not the launch (launch) of the game ball is forcibly stopped by the player's will. Is input via the handle relay terminal plate 315. Further, in the launch control circuit 953a, when the CR unit 6 and the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 are electrically connected, a CR connection signal to that effect is input via the payout control board 951. ..

The launch control circuit 953a adjusts the drive current for launching (launching) the game ball toward the game area 5a based on the operation signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 307, and controls the output to the launch solenoid 682. On the other hand, by outputting a constant current to the ball feed solenoid 255 via the handle relay terminal plate 315, the ball feed member of the ball feed unit 250 receives one game ball stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320. The game ball received by the ball feeding member is controlled to be sent to the hitting ball launching device 650 side.

[6-4. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 123, the peripheral control board 1510 of the second control unit SCG performs effect control on the first control unit MCG based on various commands from the main control board 1310, and is shown in FIG. Peripheral control unit 1511 that exchanges control commands and various information (various data) with the effect display drive board 4450 that draws the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460 shown in 19, the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door. The liquid crystal display control unit 1512 that controls the drawing of the frame-side effect display device 460 while controlling the sound such as music and sound effects flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, and the calendar information and the hour, minute, and second that specify the date. The real-time clock (hereinafter referred to as "RTC") control unit 4165 that holds the time information that specifies the above, and the knob unit is operated to rotate the volume of music, sound effects, etc. flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. It is provided with a volume adjusting volume 1510a, which is adjusted by the above.

[6-4-1. Peripheral control unit]
As shown in FIG. 123, the peripheral control unit 1511 that performs the effect control controls the peripheral control MPU 1511a as a microprocessor and the power-on processing executed at the time of power-on, and after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time of power-on. Peripheral control ROM 1511b that stores various control programs such as sub-control programs that are executed and controls the production operation, various data, various control data, and various schedule data, and V from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 described later. Various information (for example, schedule data defining a screen to be drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600, various LEDs, and other light emitting modes) that are continued across the peripheral control unit steady processing that is executed each time a blank signal is input. Peripheral control RAM 1511c that stores information for managing schedule data, etc., and various information that continues over days (for example, information for managing the history of jackpot game states, and special information). Peripheral control SRAM 1511d that stores information for managing production flags, and peripheral control external watch dock timer 1511e (hereinafter, "peripheral control external WDT1511e") for monitoring whether peripheral control MPU1511a is operating normally. ”) And.

The peripheral control RAM 1511c can hold the stored contents only for a time when a momentary power failure occurs and the power is immediately restored, and the power is cut off for a long time (when a long-time power interruption occurs). ), The peripheral control SRAM 1511d is supplied with backup power by a large-capacity electrolytic capacitor (hereinafter, referred to as "electrolytic capacitor for SRAM") provided on the power supply board 931. As a result, the stored contents can be retained for about 50 hours. Since the power supply board 931 is provided with the electrolytic capacitor for SRAM, when the game board 5 is removed from the pachinko machine 1, backup power is not supplied to the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. Therefore, the peripheral control SRAM 1511d stores the stored contents. You can no longer hold it and lose its contents.

The peripheral control external WDT1511e is a timer for monitoring whether the system of the peripheral control MPU1511a is out of control, and when the timer is up, it is reset by hardware. That is, when the peripheral control MPU1511a does not output a clear signal for clearing the timer of the peripheral control external WDT1511e to the peripheral control external WDT1511e within a certain period of time (until the timer starts up), the peripheral control MPU1511a is reset. When the peripheral control MPU1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT1511e within a certain period of time, the timer count of the peripheral control external WDT1511e can be restarted, so that the peripheral control MPU1511a is not reset.

The peripheral control MPU1511a has a plurality of parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, etc. built-in, and when various commands from the main control board 1310 are received, each decorative board of the game board 5 is based on these various commands. The game board side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs provided in the lamp is transmitted from a serial I / O port for a lamp drive board via a peripheral control output circuit (not shown). The game board side motor drive data for transmitting to the drive board 4170 and outputting drive signals to electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids for operating various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 is serialized for the motor drive board. Door-side motor drive for transmitting from the I / O port to the motor drive board 4180 via the peripheral control output circuit, or for outputting a drive signal to an electrical drive source such as a dial drive motor 414 provided on the door frame 3. Data can be transmitted from the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the peripheral control output circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, or the door frame. Peripheral control output of light emission data on the door side for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs provided on each decorative board of 3 from the serial I / O port for frame decoration drive amplifier board LED. It is transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882.

Various commands from the main control board 1310 are input to the main control board serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown). Further, from the detection signal from the rotation detection switch for detecting the rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation unit 401 and the press detection switch for detecting the operation of the press operation unit 405 provided in the effect operation unit 400. The detection signal is serialized by a door-side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, and the serialized effect operation unit detection data is transmitted from the door-side serial transmission circuit to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. , The frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and the peripheral control MPU 1511a are input to the serial I / O port for detecting the effect operation unit via the peripheral control input circuit.

Detection signals from various detection switches (for example, a photo sensor) for detecting the original position, movable position, etc. of various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 are on the game board side (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180. It is serialized by the serial transmission circuit, and this serialized movable body detection data is input from the game board side serial transmission circuit to the serial I / O port for the motor drive board of the peripheral control MPU1511a via the peripheral control input circuit. There is. The peripheral control MPU 1511a exchanges various data between the peripheral control board 1510 and the motor drive board 4180 by switching the input / output of the serial I / O port for the motor drive board.

The peripheral control MPU1511a has a built-in watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as "peripheral control built-in WDT"), and its own system runs out of control by using the peripheral control built-in WDT and the peripheral control external WDT1511e together. It is diagnosing whether or not it is.

[6-4-1a. Peripheral control MPU]
Next, the peripheral control MPU1511a, which is a microcomputer, will be described. As shown in FIG. 124, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is centered on the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa, and has a peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab, a peripheral control DMA (abbreviation of Direct Memory Access) controller 1511ac, a peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and various peripheral control serial I. It is composed of a / O port 1511ae, a WDT1511af with built-in peripheral control, various parallel I / O ports for peripheral control 1511ag, a peripheral control analog / digital converter (hereinafter referred to as a peripheral control A / D converter) 1511ak, and the like.

Peripheral control CPU core 1511aa reads and writes various data to peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab and peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac via the internal bus 1511ah, while peripheral control various serial I / O ports 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT1511af, Peripheral control Various data are read and written to the various parallel I / O ports 1511ag and the peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak via the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai.

Further, the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa reads various data to the peripheral control ROM 1511b via the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the external bus 1511h, while reading the peripheral control RAM 1511c and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. Then, various data are read and written via the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the external bus 1511h.

The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac includes storage devices such as peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab, peripheral control ROM 1511b, peripheral control RAM 1511c, and peripheral control SRAM 1511d, peripheral control various serial I / O ports 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT1511af, and peripheral control parallel I. It is a dedicated controller that independently transfers data between the / O port 1511ag and the input / output devices such as the peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak without going through the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa, and is DMA0. It has four channels, ~ DMA3.

Specifically, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac includes a storage device of the peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab built in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, various peripheral control serial I / O ports 1511ae built in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, and a peripheral control built-in WDT1511af. , Peripheral control Various parallel I / O ports 1511ag, and input / output devices such as peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak, to perform data transfer independently without going through the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa. In addition, while reading and writing to the storage device of the RAM 1511ab with built-in peripheral control via the internal bus 1511ah, various serial I / O ports 1511ae with peripheral control, WDT1511af with built-in peripheral control, parallel I / O ports 1511ag with peripheral control, and Reads and outputs to / from an input / output device such as a peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak via the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad and the peripheral bus 1511ai.

Further, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac includes a storage device such as a peripheral control ROM 1511b, a peripheral control RAM 1511c, and a peripheral control SRAM 1511d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a, and various peripheral control serial I / Os built in the peripheral control MPU 1511a. Between the O port 1511ae, the WDT1511af with built-in peripheral control, the various parallel I / O ports 1511ag for peripheral control, and the input / output devices such as the peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak, without going through the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa. In order to perform data transfer independently, while reading and outputting to storage devices such as the peripheral control ROM 1511b, the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d via the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad and the external bus 1511h, various peripheral controls are performed. For input / output devices such as serial I / O port 1511ae, WDT1511af with built-in peripheral control, various parallel I / O ports 1511ag for peripheral control, and peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak, via peripheral control bus controller 1511ad and peripheral bus 1511ai. Read and write.

The peripheral control bus controller 1511ad controls the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral bus 1511ai, and the external bus 1511h to control the central processing device of the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa, the peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab, the peripheral control ROM 1511b, the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the peripheral control. Various devices such as a storage device such as SRAM 1511d, various peripheral control serial I / O ports 1511ae, WDT1511af with built-in peripheral control, various parallel I / O ports 1511ag for peripheral control, and input / output devices such as peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak. It is a dedicated controller that exchanges various data between them.

Peripheral control Various serial I / O ports 1511ae are a serial I / O port for a lamp drive board, a serial I / O port for a motor drive board, a serial I / O port for a frame decoration drive amplifier board motor, and a frame decoration drive amplifier board LED. It has a serial I / O port for, a serial I / O port for a frame decoration drive amplifier board motor, a serial I / O port for a main control board, and a serial I / O port for acquiring information on an effect operation unit.

The peripheral control built-in watchdog timer (WDT with built-in peripheral control) 1511af is a timer for monitoring whether the system of the peripheral control MPU 1511a is out of control. It has become. That is, when the watchdog timer is started, the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa resets when the clear signal for clearing the timer is not output to the peripheral control built-in WDT1511af within a certain period (until the timer is up). Will be required. When the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa starts the watchdog timer and outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT1511af within a certain period of time, the timer count can be restarted, so that the reset is not applied.

Peripheral control Various parallel I / O ports 1511ag output various latch signals such as game board side motor drive latch signal and door side motor drive light emission latch signal, as well as output clear signal to peripheral control external WDT1511e, and play games. Detection signals from various detection switches for detecting the original position, movable position, etc. of various movable bodies provided on the board 5 are serialized by a game board side serial transmission circuit provided on the motor drive board 4180, and this serialization is performed. A movable body information acquisition latch signal for receiving the converted movable body detection data from the game board side serial transmission circuit at the serial I / O port for the motor drive board of the peripheral control MPU1511a is output. This LED is a high-brightness white LED, and is a confirmation lamp for notifying that the occurrence of the big hit game state is confirmed. In the present embodiment, the path between the LED and the peripheral control parallel I / O ports 1511ag is shortened by adopting a configuration in which the LED and the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511ag are directly connected electrically. It is possible to take noise countermeasures for LED lighting control, which has a heavy meaning in terms of games. The LED lighting control is executed in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, and other LEDs and the like other than this LED are executed in the peripheral control unit steady process described later. It has become.

The peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak is electrically connected to the volume adjustment volume 1510a, and the resistance value is changed by rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a, and the resistance at the rotation position of the knob portion is changed. The voltage divided by the value is converted from an analog value to a digital value and converted into a value in 1024 steps from a value to a value of 1023. In the present embodiment, the value of 1024 steps is divided into seven and managed as the substrate volumes 0 to 6. The board volume 0 is set to mute, the board volume 6 is set to the maximum volume, and the volume is set so as to increase from the board volume 0 to the board volume 6. The liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (VDP1512a with a built-in sound source, which will be described later) is controlled so that the volume is set to the board volumes 0 to 6, and music and sound effects are played from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. In this way, music and sound effects are played from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by adjusting the volume based on the rotation operation of the knob portion.

In the present embodiment, in addition to music and sound effects, notification sounds for notifying the clerk of the hall of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or fraudulent acts against the pachinko machine 1 and contents related to the game production are announced. (For example, the screen unfolded on the game board side effect display device 1600 is produced as more powerful, or it is announced that there is a high possibility that the game state will be favorable to the player). The notification sound also flows from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, but the notification sound and the notification sound flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the rotation operation of the knob part, from mute to the maximum volume. The volume can be adjusted by controlling the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (VDP1512a with a built-in sound source, which will be described later) by a program. The volume adjusted by this program is different from the above-mentioned seven-stage board volume, and can smoothly change from mute to maximum volume. As a result, for example, even when a hall clerk or the like rotates the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a to set the volume low, the production sound such as music or sound effect flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 is produced. However, when a problem occurs in the pachinko machine 1 or when the player is cheating, a notification sound set to a loud volume (maximum volume in the present embodiment) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the hall clerk and the like from becoming less likely to notice the occurrence of a problem or the cheating of the player due to the notification sound. In addition, based on the current board volume set by adjusting the volume based on the rotation operation of the knob, the volume at which the advertisement sound is played is reduced so as not to interfere with the music and sound effects, while the advertisement sound is played. In addition to music and sound effects, there is a possibility that the screen unfolded by the game board side effect display device 1600 will be produced as more powerful, or the game will shift to a game state that is advantageous to the player. You can also announce that it is expensive.

[6-4-1b. Peripheral control ROM]
The peripheral control ROM 1511b stores in advance various control programs, various data, various control data, and various schedule data for controlling the peripheral control unit 1511, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, the RTC control unit 4165, and the like. The various schedule data include screen generation schedule data for generating screens to be drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600 and door frame side effect display device 460, light emission mode generation schedule data for generating light emission modes of various LEDs, and music. There are sound generation schedule data for generating sound effects and sound effects, and electrical drive source schedule data for generating drive modes of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids. The screen generation schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that defines the screen configuration in chronological order, and defines the order of screens to be drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. Has been done. The light emission mode generation schedule data is configured by arranging light emission data defining the light emission modes of various LEDs in a time series. The sound generation schedule data is composed of sound command data arranged in chronological order, and the order in which music and sound effects are played is defined. The sound command data includes an output channel number for instructing which output channel to use among a plurality of output channels in the built-in sound source of the sound source built-in VDP1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, which will be described later, and the sound source built-in VDP1512a. Of the plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source, a track number for instructing which track to incorporate sound data such as music and sound effects is specified. The electric drive source schedule data is composed of drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in chronological order, and the operation of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids is specified.

Some of the control programs stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b are directly read from the peripheral control ROM 1511b and executed, and some are copied to the various control program copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, which will be described later, when the power is turned on. Some of them are read out and executed. Further, various data, various control data, and various schedule data stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b may be directly read from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, or when the power is turned on in the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 1511c described later. In some cases, the copy is read out.

Further, the peripheral control ROM 1511b is used as one of various control programs for controlling the RTC control unit 4165 to correct the brightness of the game board side effect display device 1600 according to the usage time of the game board side effect display device 1600. A brightness correction program is included. This brightness correction program corrects the decrease in brightness due to aging of the game board side effect display device 1600 when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is equipped with an LED type. , The date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on, the current date and time, the brightness setting information, etc. are acquired from the built-in RAM of the RTC control unit 4165, which will be described later, and the acquired brightness setting information is based on the correction information. To correct. This correction information is stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 1511b. As will be described later, the brightness setting information includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, in 5% increments, and presently. The brightness of the LED that is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 that has been set is included. For example, the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first turned on and the current date and time. Therefore, if six months have already passed since the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on, the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1511b and the brightness is increased. When the brightness of the LED included in the setting information is 75% and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on, the brightness is 80%, which is an additional 5% of the correction information acquired for this 75%. The brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted and turned on based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information, and the power is turned on from the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first turned on. If December has already passed, the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, and the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75%, which is the effect display device on the game board side. When the 1600 backlight is turned on, the game board is based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness is 85%, which is an additional 10% of the correction information acquired for this 75%. The brightness of the backlight of the side effect display device 1600 is adjusted and turned on.

[6-4-1c. Peripheral control RAM]
As shown in FIG. 124, the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a is a backup that exclusively stores various information that is updated by executing various control programs and is to be backed up. It is stored in the management target work area 1511ca, the backup first area 1511cc and the backup second area 1511cc, and the peripheral control ROM 1511b, which exclusively store a copy of various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511ca. Various control program copy areas 1511cd that exclusively store copies of various control programs, and various data, various control data, various schedule data, etc. stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b are copied. Various control data copy areas 1511ce that are exclusively stored, and backup unmanaged work area 1511cf that exclusively stores information that is not backed up among various information that is updated when various control programs are executed. Is provided.

When the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (including when the power is restored due to a momentary power failure or power failure), a value of 0 is forcibly written to the backup unmanaged work area 1511cf and cleared to zero, while backup is performed. For the work area 1511ca to be managed, the first backup area 1511cc, and the second backup area 1511cc, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the power-on state command (see FIG. 146) from the main control board 1310 starts the RAM clear effect. (For example, it instructs the start of the effect when the operation switch 954 shown in FIG. 127 is operated within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on). Sometimes it is cleared to zero.

The backup management target work area 1511ca is a production information (1fr) which is various information updated in the peripheral control unit steady processing executed every time a V blank signal is input from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, which will be described later. ) Is backed up as Bank0 (1fr), which is exclusively stored as a backup target, and production information (1ms), which is various information updated in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing that is executed every time a 1ms timer interrupt, which will be described later, occurs. It is composed of Bank0 (1 ms), which is exclusively stored as an object. Here, to briefly explain the names of Bank0 (1fr) and Bank0 (1ms), "Bank" is a minimum management unit representing the size of a storage area for storing various information, and is referred to as "Bank". The following "0" means that it is a normally used storage area for storing various information updated by executing various control programs. That is, "Bank 0" means that the size of the storage area normally used is set as the minimum management unit. The "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank3", and "Bank4" provided in the area extending from the backup first area 1511cc to the backup second area 1511cc, which will be described later, are the same storage areas as the "Bank0". It means that it has a size. As will be described later, when the sound source built-in VDP1512a outputs the drawing data for one screen (one frame) to the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, the peripheral control MPU1511a Since the V-blank signal indicating that the screen data from the above can be accepted is output to the peripheral control MPU1511a, in other words, one frame (1 frame) each time the V-blank signal is input. Since the peripheral control unit routine processing is executed for each, it is added to "Bank0", "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank3", and "Bank4", respectively (effect information (1fr) and effects described later). The backup information (1fr) is also used with the same meaning). As described later, "(1ms)" is defined as "Bank0", "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank3", since the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed every time a 1ms timer interrupt is generated. And "Bank 4", respectively (the effect information (1 ms) and the effect backup information (1 ms) described later are also used with the same meaning).

Bank0 (1fr) includes a lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, a frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab, a reception command storage area 1511cac, an RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad, and a schedule data storage area 1511cae. Etc. are provided. In the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs provided on each decorative board of the game board 5. Is a storage area in which is set, and in the transmission data storage area 1511cab for the LED on the frame decoration drive amplifier board side, a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting for a plurality of LEDs provided on each decoration board of the door frame 3 is lit. It is a storage area in which the door-side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting a signal is set, and in the reception command storage area 1511cc, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 are received and the received various commands are stored. It is a storage area to be set, and the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad is a storage area in which various information acquired from the RTC control unit 4165 (RTC built-in RAM4165aa of RTC4165a described later) is set, and is stored in the schedule data storage area 1511cae. Is a storage area in which various schedule data corresponding to the received command is set based on the command received from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a). In the schedule data storage area 1511cae, various schedule data copied from the peripheral control ROM 1511b to the various control data copy areas 1511ce are read and set, and various schedule data are directly read from the peripheral control ROM 1511b. Some are set.

Bank0 (1 ms) includes a frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511 caf, a motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 cag, a movable body information acquisition storage area 1511 cah, and an effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511 cai, and A drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511 cap and the like are provided. In the transmission data storage area 1511 caf for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as the dial drive motor 414 provided in the door frame 3 is provided. It is a storage area to be set, and is for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid for operating various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 in the transmission data storage area 1511bag on the motor drive board side. It is a storage area in which the motor drive data SM-DAT on the game board side is set, and the movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah is provided in the game board 5 based on the detection signals from various detection switches provided in the game board 5. It is a storage area in which various information acquired such as the original position and the movable position of various movable bodies is set. In the effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511 kai, detection signals from various detection switches provided in the effect operation unit 400 are set. Dial created based on various information acquired based on the rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation unit 401, the operation of the pressing operation unit 405, etc. (for example, detection signals from various detection switches provided in the effect operation unit 400). A storage area in which rotation (rotation direction) history information of the operation unit 401, operation history information of the pressing operation unit 405, etc.) is set. When drawing data from the sound source built-in VDP1512a of the control board 1510 is received and it is determined that the received drawing data is abnormal data, the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral control board 1510 are output based on the LOCKN signal to be output to convey that fact. This is a storage area in which various information obtained by acquiring the frequency of defects and the state of occurrence of defects during connection with the effect display drive board 4450 is set.

The lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511ca of Bank0 (1fr), the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab, and the Bank0 (1ms) frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf. The transmission data storage area 1511bag on the motor drive board side is divided into two areas, a first area and a second area, respectively.

In the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, when the peripheral control unit steady processing described later is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the first area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa. When the next peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, and the peripheral control unit steady processing. Each time the process is executed, the game board side light emitting data SL-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa. Peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. For example, when the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa in the current peripheral control unit steady processing, the previous peripheral area is executed. When the control unit steady-state processing is executed, the processing proceeds based on the game board side light emission data SL-DAT set in the first area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa.

When the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab is stored in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab. When -DAT is set and the next peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, the door side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the transmission data storage area 1511cab for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED. The door side emission data STL-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab every time the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. NS. Peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, for example, when the door side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab in the peripheral control unit steady processing this time. When the previous peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, the processing proceeds based on the door side emission data STL-DAT set in the first area of the transmission data storage area 1511cab for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED. It has become.

The frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf is opened to the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf when the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process described later is executed. When the side motor drive data STM-DAT is set and the next peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the door side motor drive data STM is stored in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511 caf. -DAT is set, and each time the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed, the door side is in the first and second areas of the transmission data storage area 1511caf for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor. Motor drive data STM-DAT are set alternately. Peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed. For example, in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing this time, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT is stored in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511 caf. When set, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT set in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511 caf when the previous peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process was executed. The process is to proceed based on this.

When the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 cag sets the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 cag. Then, when the next peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 cag. Every time the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 cag. Peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed. For example, in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing this time, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 cag. Occasionally, when the previous peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the process proceeds based on the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT set in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 cag. It has become like.

Next, the backup first area 1511cc and the backup second area 1511cc, which exclusively store the copy of the effect information which is various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511ca, will be described. In the backup first area 1511cc and the backup second area 1511cc, two pairs with two banks as one pair are managed as one page. The effect information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a normally used storage area, is used as the effect backup information (1fr) every time the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for each frame (1frame). The effect information (1 ms) is copied to the backup first area 1511 cc and the backup second area 1511 cc by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac at high speed and is stored in the normally used storage area Bank0 (1 ms). Is used as the effect backup information (1 ms) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac in the backup first area 1511 cc and the backup second area 1511 cc each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt is generated. It is copied at high speed. Consistency of one page is determined by whether or not the contents of the two banks constituting the page match.

Specifically, in the backup first area 1511cc, Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) are set as one pair, and Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) are set as one pair, for a total of two pairs managed as one page. ing. The content stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a normally used storage area, is stored in Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) every time the peripheral control unit routine processing is executed every frame (1frame). The memory that is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac and stored in Bank0 (1ms), which is a normally used storage area, is stored every time a 1ms timer interrupt is generated and every time the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed. It is copied to Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) match. This is performed depending on whether or not the contents of Bank 1 (1 ms) and Bank 2 (1 ms) match.

Further, in the backup second area 1511cc, Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) are set as one pair, and Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) are set as one pair, so that a total of two pairs are managed as one page. The content stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a normally used storage area, is stored in Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) every time the peripheral control unit routine processing is executed every frame (1frame). The memory that is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac and stored in Bank0 (1ms), which is a normally used storage area, is stored every time a 1ms timer interrupt is generated and every time the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed. It is copied to Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) match. This is performed depending on whether or not the contents of Bank 3 (1 ms) and Bank 4 (1 ms) match.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the backup first area 1511cc has Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) as one pair, and Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) as one pair, for a total of two pairs. This is an area for managing as a page, and the backup second area 1511cc has a total of two pairs, with Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) as one pair, and Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) as one pair. This is an area for managing as one page. Different ID coats are stored at the beginning and end of each page, that is, at the beginning and end of the backup first area 1511cc and the backup second area 1511cc.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect information (1fr), which is the content stored in the normally used storage area Bank0 (1fr), is used as the effect backup information (1fr) in the peripheral control unit for each frame (1frame). Every time the steady processing is executed, the contents are copied to the backup first area 1511cc and the backup second area 1511cc at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and are stored in Bank0 (1ms), which is a normally used storage area. The effect information (1 ms) is the effect backup information (1 ms), and each time a 1 ms timer interrupt is generated and each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the backup first area 1511 cc and the backup second area 1511 cc The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac makes a high-speed copy, but the programs that execute the high-speed copy by these peripheral control DMA controllers 1511ac are standardized. That is, in the present embodiment, the effect information (1fr) and the effect information (1 ms) are managed by a common management method (execution of a common program).

[6-4-1d. Peripheral control SRAM]
The peripheral control SRAM 1511d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a includes a backup management target work area 1511da that exclusively stores the information to be backed up among various information updated by executing various control programs. A backup first area 1511db and a backup second area 1511dc are provided for exclusively storing a copy of various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511da. The contents stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d are commanded when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (including when the power is restored due to a momentary power failure or a power failure) when the power is turned on from the main control board 1310 (see FIG. 146). Indicates the start of the RAM clear effect and the game state (for example, the start of the effect when the operation switch 954 shown in FIG. 120 is operated within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on. Even at that time, it is not cleared to zero. This point is completely different from the above-mentioned point that the backup management target work area 1511ca, the backup first area 1511cc, and the backup second area 1511cc of the peripheral control RAM 1511c are cleared to zero. Further, when the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. It is supposed to be done. By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 according to the screen of this setting mode, the history of occurrence of the jackpot game state for each content (item) stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d (for example, the history of the occurrence of the jackpot game state). Etc.) On the other hand, the contents (items) stored in the peripheral control RAM 1511c are not displayed at all and cannot be cleared in the setting mode. This point is also completely different between the peripheral control RAM 1511c and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d.

The backup management target work area 1511da is used to manage various information such as effect information (SRAM) (for example, information for managing the history of occurrence of a jackpot game state and a special effect flag), which is various information that is continued over days. It is composed of Bank0 (SRAM) that exclusively stores information) as a backup target. Here, briefly explaining the name of Bank0 (SRAM), as described above, "Bank" is a minimum management unit representing the size of a storage area for storing various information, and is referred to as "Bank". The following "0" means that it is a normally used storage area for storing various information updated by executing various control programs. That is, "Bank 0" means that the size of the storage area normally used is set as the minimum management unit. The "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank3", and "Bank4" provided in the area extending from the backup first area 1511db to the backup second area 1511dc, which will be described later, are the same storage areas as the "Bank0". It means that it has a size. Since various information stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d externally attached to the peripheral control SRAM 1511a is backed up in "(RAM)", "Bank0", "Bank1", "Bank2", and "Bank3" , And "Bank 4", respectively (the effect information (SRAM) and the effect backup information (SRAM) described later are also used with the same meaning).

Next, the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc, which exclusively store the copy of the effect information (SRAM) which is various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511da, will be described. The backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc have two banks as one pair, and this one pair is managed as one page. The effect information (SRAM), which is the content stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a normally used storage area, is used as the effect backup information (SRAM) every time the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for each frame (1 frame). In addition, it is copied to the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac. Consistency of one page is determined by whether or not the contents of the two banks constituting the page match.

Specifically, the backup first area 1511db has Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) as one pair, and this one pair is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a normally used storage area, are stored in Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) every time the peripheral control unit routine processing is executed for each frame (1 frame). It is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) match.

Further, in the backup second area 1511dc, Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) are set as one pair, and this one pair is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a normally used storage area, are stored in Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) every time the peripheral control unit routine processing is executed for each frame (1 frame). It is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) match.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the backup first area 1511db is an area for managing Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) as one pair, and managing this one pair as one page, and the backup second area. 1511dc is an area for managing Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) as one pair, and managing this one pair as one page. Different ID coats are stored at the beginning and end of each page, that is, at the beginning and end of the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc.

[6-4-2. Liquid crystal display control unit]
As shown in FIG. 123, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 that controls the drawing of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 and controls the sounds such as music and sound effects flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 is shown in FIG. 123. In addition, a sound source for controlling sounds such as music and sound effects is built-in (hereinafter, referred to as "built-in sound source"), and drawing control of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. VDP (abbreviation of Video Display Processor) 1512a with built-in sound source, various sound such as music and sound effects in addition to various character data of the screen displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. Serial to the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b for storing data, the audio data transmission IC 1512c for transmitting serialized music, sound effects, etc. as audio data toward the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, and the door frame side effect display device 460. The converted drawing data is arranged near the lower side of the door frame side effect display device 460 attached to the right side of the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 toward the effect display drive board 4450 stored in the plate unit 320. A speaker IC 1512d for directing the door frame side to transmit, and a differential circuit 1512e that differentiates the LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511, into a positive signal and a negative signal. In addition to the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, the signal from the differential circuit 1512e is input, and when the signal from the differential circuit 1512e is input, this signal is transmitted. On the other hand, when the signal from the differential circuit 1512e is not input, the forced switching circuit 1512f is connected so as to transmit the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. I have. In the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b, as sprite data used for displaying a screen or an image described later, for example, ring-shaped image data used for displaying a ring-shaped display object (annular display object), and an operation menu background image described later can be displayed. Operation menu background image data to be used, selected display image data used to display at least one selected display object described later, tone adjustment background image data used to display a volume adjustment screen including a volume scale described later, volume adjustment icon described later. Volume setting icon used for display In addition to image data, etc., the position of each part on the back of the main body frame 4 can be visually recognized from the player's point of view. The service mode screen image data used for the above, the break timer setting screen image data used for displaying the break timer setting screen, and the break screen image data used for displaying the break screen are stored. The liquid crystal display and the sound control ROM 1512b also store the suggestion display object image data used for displaying the suggestion display object for prompting that the pressing operation unit 405 (operation unit) of the effect operation unit 400 should be operated.

Peripheral control MPU 1511a of peripheral control unit 1511 extracts screen generation schedule data corresponding to commands from the main control board 1310 from peripheral control ROM 1511b of peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of peripheral control RAM 1511c. The schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c is set to 1511cae, and the screen data at the beginning of the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae is set to the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various types of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. After extracting from the control data copy area 1511ce and outputting it to the sound source built-in VDP1512a, the first screen data according to the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae triggered by the input of the V blank signal described later. The next screen data following is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and output to the sound source built-in VDP1512a. In this way, the peripheral control MPU 1511a displays the screen data arranged in time series in the screen generation schedule data according to the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511 cage, each time a V blank signal is input. The first screen data is output to the built-in sound source VDP1512a one by one.

Further, the peripheral control MPU 1511a transfers the sound command data at the head of the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the command from the main control board 1310 from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. The sound command data at the beginning of the sound generation schedule data extracted and set in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c is set to 1511cae, and the sound command data at the beginning of the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae is set to the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the periphery of the peripheral control unit 1511. After extracting from various control data copy areas 1511ce of the control RAM 1511c and outputting to the sound source built-in VDP1512a, when a V blank signal is input, the head is headed according to the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae. The next sound command data following the sound command data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. In this way, the peripheral control MPU 1511a inputs the sound command data arranged in time series into the sound generation schedule data according to the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, and the V blank signal is input. Each time, the first sound command data is output to the built-in sound source VDP1512a one by one.

[6-4-2a. VDP with built-in sound source]
When screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU1511a in addition to the above-mentioned built-in sound source, the sound source built-in VDP1512a is a game board from the liquid crystal and the sound control ROM 1512b as shown in FIG. 125 based on the input screen data. The side character data and the upper plate side character data are extracted to create sprite data, and drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is generated. It also has a built-in VRAM (hereinafter referred to as "built-in VRAM"). The sound source built-in VDP1512a outputs the drawing data for the game board side effect display device 1600 from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600 among the drawing data generated on the built-in VRAM, and also for the door frame side effect display device 460. Drawing data is transmitted from channel CH2 via a peripheral control output circuit (not shown), a frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, a peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and an effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. By outputting (transmitting) to the door frame side effect display device 460, the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 are synchronized.

The drawing data output from the channel CH1 is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board side effect display device 1600, whereas the drawing data output from the channel CH2 is relayed from the peripheral control board 1510 to the periphery of the frame. The effect display arranged in the terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the lower side of the door frame side effect display device 460 attached to the right side of the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 and stored in the plate unit 320. It is output (transmitted) to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the drive board 4450. As described above, the drawing data output from the channel CH1 is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board side effect display device 1600, so that the peripheral control board 1510 and the game board side effect display device 1600 Although the length of the wiring required for the route from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600 is short because they are attached to the game board 5, the drawing data output from the channel CH2 is peripheral as described above. Since the control board 1510 outputs the output to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, the peripheral control board 1510 is attached to the game board 5. On the other hand, since the effect display drive board 4450 is housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, from the channel CH2 to the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the effect display drive board 4450. Since the length of the wiring required for the path is extremely longer than that of the channel CH1, it becomes extremely susceptible to noise. For this reason, for channel CH2 in which the length of the wiring for sending drawing data is extremely longer than that of channel CH1, "V-by-One (V-by-One) of THine Electronics Inc. is used in the door frame side directing transmitter IC1512d. By adopting a differential communication system called "registered trademark)", the system is less susceptible to noise.

The channel CH1 uses a serial differential interface called LVDS (Low Voltage Differential Signaling), whereas the channel CH2 uses a parallel interface. The drawing data output from channel CH2 is composed of three video signals, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, and three sync signals, a horizontal sync signal, a vertical sync signal, and a clock signal. It is serialized by the door frame side directing transmitter IC4610d, and is housed in a peripheral control output circuit (not shown), a frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, a peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and a dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. It is transmitted to the effect display drive board 4450. Then, the various serialized signals are restored to parallel signals on the effect display drive board 4450 and output to the door frame side effect display device 460.

In this way, when the peripheral control MPU1511a outputs the screen data for one screen (one frame) displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 to the sound source built-in VDP1512a, the sound source built-in VDP1512a becomes Character data is extracted from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b based on the input screen data, sprite data is created, and one screen is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (1). The drawing data for the frame) is generated on the built-in VRAM, and among the generated drawing data, the image data for the game board side effect display device 1600 is output from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600, and the door frame side. Peripheral control output circuit (not shown), frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 from the channel CH2 to the image data for the effect display device 460. Is output (transmitted) to the door frame side effect display device 460 via. That is, the "screen data for one screen (one frame)" is the built-in VRAM containing the drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. It is the data to be generated above.

Further, the VDP1512a with a built-in sound source outputs drawing data for one screen (one frame) from channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600, and displays image data for the door frame side effect display device 460 from channel CH2. Output to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the peripheral control output circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. When (transmitted), a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU1511a can be accepted is output to the peripheral control MPU1511a. In the present embodiment, since the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is set to approximately 30 fps per second, a V blank signal is output. The interval is about 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). Peripheral control MPU1511a executes peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which will be described later, when the V blank signal is input. Here, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies slightly depending on the liquid crystal size of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. Further, even in the manufacturing lot of the peripheral control board 1510 on which the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the sound source built-in VDP1512a are mounted, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may change slightly.

The sound source built-in VDP1512a employs a frame buffer method. This "frame buffer method" means that the drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be drawn on the screens of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is held in the frame buffer (built-in VRAM). This is a method of outputting the drawing data for one screen (one frame) held in the frame buffer (built-in VRAM) to the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460.

Further, in the sound source built-in VDP1512a, when the above-mentioned sound command data is input from the peripheral control MPU1511a based on the command from the main control board 1310, as shown in FIG. 125, the music stored in the liquid crystal and the sound control ROM 1512b. By extracting sound data such as and sound effects and controlling the built-in sound source, sound data such as music and sound effects are incorporated into the track according to the track number specified in the sound command data, and used according to the output channel number. The output channel is set, and the music, sound source, etc. flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 are serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c.

The sound command data also includes a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the track that incorporates the sound data, and multiple tracks in the built-in sound source of the built-in sound source VDP1512a include directing sounds such as music and sound effects. In addition to the sound data and the sub-volume value that adjusts the volume, the sound data of the notification sound and its volume are adjusted to notify the clerk of the hall of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or an illegal act against the pachinko machine 1. Subvolume value to be included. Specifically, for the production sound, the substrate volume adjusted by rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a described above is set as the sub-volume value, and for the notification sound, the volume is adjusted. The maximum volume is set as the sub-volume value without being completely dependent on the volume adjustment based on the rotation operation of the knob portion of the volume 1510a. The sub-volume value of the effect sound can be adjusted by operating the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 to shift to the setting mode described later.

In addition, the sound designation data also includes a master volume value for adjusting the volume of the output channel, and the plurality of output channels in the built-in sound source of the sound source built-in VDP1512a include a plurality of sound source built-in VDP1512a built-in sound sources. Of the tracks, the sound data of the production sound incorporated in the track to be used and the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the production sound incorporated in the track to be used are combined, and the volume of the combined production sound is calculated. Actually, it is amplified to the master volume value which is the volume flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, and the amplified production sound is serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c.

In the present embodiment, the master volume value is set to a constant value, and when the volume of the combined effect sound is the maximum volume, the volume flows from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by being amplified to the master volume value. Is set to the maximum allowable volume. Specifically, for the effect sound, as a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used and the volume of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used among a plurality of tracks. The knob portion of the set volume adjustment volume 1510a is rotated to adjust the substrate volume, and the combined production sound volume is actually combined with the volume actually flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. The amplified production sound is serialized and output to the audio data transmission IC1512c as audio data. For the notification sound, the sound data of the notification sound incorporated in the track to be used and the sound data used are used. The maximum volume, which is completely independent of the volume adjustment based on the rotation operation of the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a set as the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the notification sound incorporated in the track to be used, is combined and this is combined. The volume of the synthesized notification sound is actually amplified to the master volume value which is the volume flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, and the amplified notification sound is serialized and output to the audio data transmission IC 1512c as audio data.

Here, when the production sound is flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, the control of playing the notification sound in order to notify the clerk of the hall of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or the fraudulent act against the pachinko machine 1 is briefly described. To explain, first, the sub-volume value of the track in which the effect sound is incorporated is forcibly set to mute, the sound data of the track in which this effect sound is incorporated, the sub-volume value set for the mute, and the notification sound. The sound data of the track in which is incorporated and the sub-volume value in which the volume of the notification sound is set to the maximum volume are combined, and the volume of the combined production sound and the volume of the notification sound are actually combined with the speaker 921. And the master volume value which is the volume flowing from the upper speaker 573 is amplified, and the amplified production sound and the notification sound are serialized and output to the audio data transmission IC 1512c as audio data.

That is, as for the sound actually flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, only the maximum volume notification sound is played. At this time, since the effect sound is muted, the effect sound does not flow from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, but the effect sound proceeds according to the above-mentioned sound generation schedule data. In the present embodiment, the notification sound flows from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 for a predetermined period (for example, 90 seconds), and after the predetermined period elapses, the sound is forcibly set to mute. The volume of the effect sound progressing according to the schedule data is set again as the sub-volume value of the board volume adjusted by rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a (at this time, the dial operation of the effect operation unit 400 is performed. If the mode is adjusted by operating the unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405, the sub-volume value of the adjusted production sound is set), and the sound flows from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. It has become.

In this way, when the production sound is flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, and the notification sound is played to notify the clerk of the hall of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or an illegal act against the pachinko machine 1, the production is produced. Although the volume of the sound is muted and the notification sound flows from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, the muted production sound is proceeding according to the sound generation schedule data, so that the notification sound has elapsed for a predetermined period of time. When the sound stops flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, the production sound does not start flowing again from the place where the notification sound starts to flow, but progresses according to the sound generation schedule data until the time when the notification sound starts to flow and a predetermined period elapses. It has come to start flowing again from.

[6-4-2b. LCD and sound control ROM]
As shown in FIG. 125, the liquid crystal and the sound control ROM 1512b are for drawing on the game board side character data for drawing in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and in the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460. The upper plate side character data is stored in advance, and various sound data such as music, sound effects, notification sounds, and notification sounds are also stored in advance.

[6-4-2c. Audio data transmission IC]
When the serialized audio data from the VDP1512a with a built-in sound source is input, the audio data transmission IC 1512c uses the right side audio data as a positive signal and a negative signal as differential serial data, which is not shown in the peripheral control output circuit and relays around the frame. Peripheral control output circuit (not shown) that is transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the left side audio data is used as a positive signal and a negative signal as differential serial data. , The frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194. As a result, music, sound effects, and the like that match various effects are reproduced in stereo from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

The audio data transmission IC 1512c outputs audio data as serial data of a difference method between the left and right sides of the board extending from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, so that, for example, a positive signal of the left side audio data can be obtained. Even if the negative signal is affected by noise, when the noise component on the positive signal and the noise component on the negative signal are combined by the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 into one left side audio data, Since the noise components are removed by canceling each other, noise countermeasures can be taken.

[6-4-2d. Door frame side production transmitter IC]
As shown in FIG. 125, drawing data output from channel CH2 of the sound source built-in VDP1512a is input to the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d. As described above, the channel CH2 uses a parallel interface. The drawing data is composed of three video signals, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, and three synchronization signals, a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal, and is a red video signal. , The green video signal, and the blue video signal are each composed of 8 bits, for a total of 24 bits. In the present embodiment, the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal that can be input to the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d are 6 bits each, for a total of 18 bits, so that the upper 6 bits of each video signal are the door frame. It is input to the side effect transmitter IC1512d. Since the lower 2 bits are extremely weak color information that is difficult for the human eye to distinguish, the lower 2 bits including the weak color information are invalidated although they are output from the sound source built-in VDP1512a.

Three video signals, red video signal, green video signal, and blue video signal, which are drawing data output from channel CH2 of VDP1512a with built-in sound source, and three sync signals, horizontal sync signal, vertical sync signal, and clock signal. When is input to the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d, the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d has three image signals, a red image signal, a green image signal, and a blue image signal, and a horizontal synchronization signal and a vertical synchronization signal. Three synchronous signals, a signal and a clock signal, are serialized into a differential serial signal (serial data) called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" of Zain Electronics Co., Ltd. with only a differential 1-pair cable. These various signals are transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3.

As described above, since the drawing data output from the channel CH1 of the sound source built-in VDP1512a is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board side effect display device 1600, the route from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600. Although the wiring length required for (first path) is short, the drawing data output from the channel CH2 of the VDP1512a with a built-in sound source is obtained from the peripheral control board 1510, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the door. Since it is output (transmitted) to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the frame 3, the route from channel CH2 to the door frame side effect display device 460 (No. 1). Since the length of the wiring required for the second path) is extremely longer than the length of the wiring required for the first path, it becomes extremely susceptible to noise.

Specifically, since the door frame 3 is pivotally supported with respect to the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 1, the opposite of the locking unit 700 shown in FIG. 5 along the open side of the main body frame 4. On the closed side, which is the side, for example, from the peripheral control board 1510 provided on the game board 5 mounted on the main body frame 4 to the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 provided on the door frame 3, the main body frame 4 side. It is necessary to pass various wirings that electrically connect the various substrates provided and the various substrates provided on the door frame 3 side. However, on the closed side of the main body frame 4, in addition to the payout device 830, the game ball paid out by the payout device 830 can be guided to the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320, and the upper plate 321 is the game ball. A full tank branching unit 770 that can branch and guide the paid-out game ball to the lower plate 322 side when the tank is full is arranged. Further, on the lower side of the main body frame 4, the payout unit 800 shown in FIG. 5 in which the power supply board 931 and the like shown in FIG. 6 to which power is supplied from the pachinko island facility is unitized is arranged. In this way, the various wirings that electrically connect the various boards provided on the main body frame 4 side and the various boards provided on the door frame 3 side are drawn in the vicinity of the payout device 830, the full tank branch unit 770, the power supply board 931 and the like. In addition to the noise caused by driving the payout motor 834 provided in the payout device 830, the noise caused by electrostatic discharge from the game ball and the power supply line supplied from the pachinko island facility where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The environment is such that it receives noise that has invaded the door.

For this reason, for channel CH2 in which the length of the wiring for sending drawing data is extremely longer than that of channel CH1, the door frame side directing transmitter IC1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 is described by THine Electronics Inc. By adopting a differential type communication called "V-by-One (registered trademark)", the mechanism is less susceptible to noise. In the present embodiment, the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510, and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 described later in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 are used. As described above, a differential 1-pair cable is used as wiring for electrically connecting between the connections of the above, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver. However, this differential 1-pair cable has two wirings. Is not just a parallel wire provided in parallel, but a twisted pair cable. This twisted pair cable is a cable in which two wires are twisted together, and is also called a twisted pair wire.

Here, a case where a parallel wire is adopted as a differential paired cable that electrically connects the transmitter and the receiver will be briefly described. For channel CH2 of VDP1512a with built-in sound source, the length of the wiring for sending drawing data is extremely longer than that of channel CH1 of VDP1512a with built-in sound source. Even if the mechanism is less susceptible to noise by adopting the differential communication method called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" of Co., Ltd., the configuration with such hardware alone is due to the electrostatic discharge of the game ball. When the serial data on the parallel lines is affected by noise, noise that has entered the power supply line supplied from the Pachinko Island facility where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, etc., the effect display is stored in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. Since the noise is not canceled (removed) when the noise is received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the drive board 4450, the serial data is received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 while being affected. , The drawing data output from the channel CH2 of the VDP1512a with built-in sound source is received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 as a disordered one different from the normal one, and in the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460, it looks like a so-called sandstorm. There is a problem that various images are displayed and it becomes impossible to recognize what kind of image it is.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the door frame side provided in the peripheral control board 1510 is provided with respect to the channel CH2 of the sound source built-in VDP1512a in which the length of the wiring for sending the drawing data is extremely longer than the channel CH1 of the sound source built-in VDP1512a. The production transmitter IC1512d adopts a differential communication method called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" of Zain Electronics Co., Ltd. to make it less susceptible to noise, and in addition to such a hardware configuration. Therefore, even if the serial data by the differential method is affected by the noise that has entered the wiring, a twisted pair cable that can cancel (remove) the noise on the receiving side is electrically connected between the transmitter and the receiver. It was adopted as a differential 1-pair cable. As a result, even if the serial data in the twist pair cable is affected by noise due to electrostatic discharge of the game ball, noise invading the power supply line supplied from the pachinko island facility where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, etc., the door frame Since the noise is canceled (removed) when the noise is received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of 3, the channel of the sound source built-in VDP1512a The drawing data output from CH2 is reliably received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 stored in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, and is output to the door frame side effect display device 460. By doing so, the door frame side effect display device 460 can reliably display the image generated by the sound source built-in VDP1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512. By canceling (removing) the noise, it is possible to prevent an image such as a sandstorm that cannot be recognized at all from being displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's motivation to play. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play due to the influence of noise.

In the present embodiment, the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 will be described later. And, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver, the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are interposed. This is because the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 are not integrally configured, but a structure in which the door frame 3 is attached to the main body frame 4 after being assembled separately is adopted. After the work of attaching the door frame 3 to the door frame 3, various wirings such as harnesses and twist cables from various boards provided on the door frame 3 side are electrically connected to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 provided on the main body frame 4 side. As a result, various substrates provided on the main body frame 4 side and various substrates provided on the door frame 3 side can be electrically connected. With such a configuration, the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4 to remove various wirings, and then the door frame 3 is removed from the main body frame 4, so that the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 can be maintained. If the problem that has occurred in the door frame 3 cannot be resolved, another door frame 3'is attached to the main body frame 4 in place of the door frame 3 having the problem, and the door frame 3 is used. By electrically connecting various wirings from various boards provided on the'side to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 provided on the main body frame 4 side, various boards provided on the main body frame 4 side and various types provided on the door frame 3'side. It can be electrically connected to the substrate.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, the door frame side directing transmitter IC1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 employs differential communication called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" of Zain Electronics Co., Ltd. In addition to the hardware configuration, even if the serial data by the differential method is affected by the noise that has entered the wiring, the noise is canceled (removed) on the receiving side. A twisted pair cable that can be used is used as a differential 1-pair cable that electrically connects the transmitter and receiver. Specifically, between the boards of the peripheral control board 1510 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, between the boards of the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and between the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the effect display drive. The boards with the board 4450 are electrically connected by twisted pair cables, whereas the power supply wiring and other wirings that transmit various signals are electrically connected by harnesses. As a result, in addition to the video transmission wiring pattern for transmitting the serial data by the differential method transmitted by the door frame side directing transmitter IC1512d, the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are added to the wiring pattern for video transmission. Wiring patterns for power supplies and other wiring patterns for various signals for transmitting various signals are mixed. Therefore, the above-mentioned video transmission wiring pattern is formed on the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, respectively, separated from the power supply wiring pattern and various signal wiring patterns by a predetermined dimension. Since the path from the transmitter to the receiver straddles a plurality of relay terminal plates such as a frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and a peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, it is used for video transmission formed on these plurality of relay terminal plates. Between the input and output of the wiring pattern, there is a problem that a part of the signal for transmitting the serial data by the differential method transmitted by the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d is reflected and becomes noise, or the output level of the signal is lowered. Occurs. Therefore, in the present embodiment, impedance matching is applied to the video transmission wiring patterns formed on these plurality of relay terminal plates.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, between the boards of the peripheral control board 1510 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, between the boards of the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the peripheral door relay. The terminal board 882 and the effect display drive board 4450 are electrically connected by a twist pair cable, whereas the power supply wiring and other wiring that transmits various signals are electrically connected by a harness. One of the twisted pair cables is red and the other is gray, and the harness that supplies power is red and the other wires are gray. .. The wiring for supplying power may be yellow instead of red.

[6-4-2e. Forced switching circuit, differential circuit]
The signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is in the forced switching circuit 1512f, the peripheral control output circuit (not shown), the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. It is designed to be transmitted to the effect display drive board 4450 to be housed. In this forced switching circuit 1512f, in addition to the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, the LOCKN signal output request data which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510. Is input as a positive signal and a negative signal in the differential circuit 1512e. In this differential circuit 1512e, the LOCKN signal output request data is serialized into a differential type serial signal (serial data). This LOCKN signal output request data can be used for a period during which the start-up screen when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, or for a demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600 in a customer waiting state. During this period, the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 , That is, it is transmitted as an operation confirmation request of the door frame side effect display device 460 in order to confirm whether or not a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. When two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are input in the differential circuit 1512e, the forced switching circuit 1512f is circuit-connected so as to transmit these two signals, while being differential. When two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are not input in the conversion circuit 1512e, the circuit is configured so as to transmit the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. Has been done. As a result, when two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are input in the differential circuit 1512e, the two signals are connected in a circuit so as to transmit the two signals, so that the two signals are connected. , It is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, while in the differential circuit 1512e. When two differential signals, a plus signal and a minus signal, are not input, the door frame side effect transmitter is connected so as to transmit the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d. The signal output from the IC 1512d is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. Peripheral control MPU1511a is demonstrating by the game board side effect display device 1600 during the period when the start screen when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 or in the customer waiting state. During the period, the LOCKN signal output request data is transmitted toward the effect display drive board 4450 (actually, the differential circuit 1512e provided in the peripheral control board 1510) housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3.

When the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 receives the serial signal (serial data) from the peripheral control board 1510 by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 described later, various serialized effects are generated. It is mainly composed of a liquid crystal module circuit 4450V that restores a signal to a parallel signal and outputs it to a door frame side effect display device 460.

The door frame side directing receiver ICSDIC0 receives drawing data from the VDP1512a with a built-in sound source, and if it determines that the received drawing data is abnormal data, it transmits a LOCKN signal to that effect, which will be described later, to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. , And output to the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868. This LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510. Based on the input LOCKN signal, the peripheral control MPU1511a controls the sound source built-in VDP1512a to generate an image for notifying that a predetermined condition is satisfied, and outputs the image to the game board side effect display device 1600. It is displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and notified.

Further, when the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 determines that the two received signals are the LOCKN signal output request data, the LOCKN signal described later is transmitted to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868. It is output to the peripheral control board 1510 via. This LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, the peripheral control MPU1511a considers that there is no problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver when the LOCKN signal is input as a response signal to the transmission of the LOCKN signal output request data, and the dish unit of the door frame 3 It can be determined that there is no problem with the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the 320, but when the LOCKN signal is not input, it is assumed that there is a problem with the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. It is determined that a defect has occurred in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3, and a notification image (for example, "A defect has occurred in the upper plate side liquid crystal display device") is transmitted to that effect. (Please call a clerk. ”) Is output to the game board side production display device 1600 by controlling the VDP1512a with a built-in sound source, and a notification sound to that effect (for example,“ a problem has occurred in the upper plate side liquid crystal display device. ” By controlling the VDP1512a with a built-in sound source and outputting it to the audio data transmission IC1512c, a notification sound flows from the speaker provided in the door frame 3. As a result, the notification image displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the notification sound repeatedly flowing from the speaker or the like provided on the door frame 3 can be used for notification. At this time, all the LEDs for light emitting decoration provided in the door frame 3 and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative substrates provided in the game board 5 may be turned on.

[6-4-3. RTC control unit]
As shown in FIG. 123, the RTC control unit 4165 that holds the calendar information that specifies the date and the time information that specifies the hour, minute, and second is configured around the RTC4165a. The RTC4165a has a built-in RAM4165aa that holds calendar information and time information (hereinafter, referred to as "RTC built-in RAM4165aa"). The RTC4165a is supplied with power from a battery 4165b (a button battery is adopted in this embodiment) as a drive power source and a backup power source for the RTC built-in RAM4165aa. That is, the RTC4165a is not supplied with power from the peripheral control board 1510 (pachinko machine 1) at all, but is supplied with power from the battery 4165b independently of the peripheral control board 1510 (pachinko machine 1). As a result, even if the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, the RTC4165a can update and hold the calendar information and the time information by the power supply from the battery 4165b.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 acquires calendar information and time information from the RTC built-in RAM4165aa of the RTC4165a, sets them in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c described above, and uses the acquired calendar information and time information as the peripheral control MPU1511a. Based on the effect, the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 can be used to develop the effect. As such an effect, for example, on December 25, the screen of the Christmas tree or reindeer is unfolded by the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, or on New Year's Day, the New Year countdown is performed. It can be mentioned that the screen to be executed is unfolded by the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. Calendar information and time information are set at the time of shipment from the factory.

In addition to the calendar information and the time information, the RTC built-in RAM4165aa stores and holds the LED brightness setting information when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is an LED type. There is. When the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is an LED type, the peripheral control MPU1511a acquires the brightness setting information from the RTC built-in RAM4165aa and adjusts the brightness of the backlight by PWM control. .. The brightness setting information includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, in 5% increments, and the game currently set. The brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the board-side effect display device 1600 and the door frame-side effect display device 460, is included.

Further, in addition to the calendar information, the time information and the brightness setting information, the RTC built-in RAM4165aa also stores the calendar information, the time information and the brightness setting information as the date and hour, minute and second information first stored in the RTC built-in RAM4165aa. The input date and time information is also stored.

When the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is a cold cathode tube type, the peripheral control MPU1511a can be turned on / off or only turned on. It is designed to do.

Various information such as calendar information, time information, brightness setting information, and input date / time information stored in the RTC built-in RAM4165aa are set in the manufacturing line of the game machine manufacturer. In the production line, for example, in order to perform various tests such as a display test of the game board side effect display device 1600, the year when the input date and time information was input on the production line as the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on. It is set to the manufacturing date and time, which is the month, day, hour, minute, and second.

In this way, in addition to the calendar information and time information, the RTC built-in RAM4165aa has brightness setting information, input date and time information, etc. when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is an LED type. , Information that needs to be maintained can be stored and retained independently of the model information of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the probability that a big hit game state occurs at a low probability or a high probability).

Further, the brightness setting information and the like stored and stored in the RTC built-in RAM4165aa may be too bright with the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 set at the manufacturing date and time depending on the environment of the hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. , It may be too dark. Therefore, by operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400, it is possible to shift to the setting mode and adjust the brightness of the backlight to a predetermined brightness. When the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. In addition, if the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated during the period in which the customer is waiting and the demonstration by the effect display device 1600 on the game board side is being performed, the setting mode is performed. Screen is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 according to the screen of this setting mode, the calendar information and the time information can be reset, and the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is desired. It can be adjusted to the brightness of. The desired brightness of the backlight of the adjusted game board side effect display device 1600 is overwritten (updated and stored) as the brightness of the LED stored in the brightness setting information.

In the setting mode, the peripheral control MPU1511a executes the above-mentioned luminance correction program to produce the game board side effect when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is an LED type. The decrease in brightness due to the aging of the display device 1600 is corrected. The peripheral control MPU1511a acquires input date and time information from the RTC built-in RAM4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, specifies the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first turned on, and specifies the date and time as calendar information and time. The current date and time is specified by acquiring the time information that specifies the minutes and seconds, and the brightness of the LED that is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted in 5% increments from 100% to 70%. The brightness setting information having the brightness adjustment information for the purpose and the brightness of the LED which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 which is currently set is acquired. The acquired luminance setting information is corrected based on the correction information stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 1511b.

For example, if six months have already passed from the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on and the current date and time, and from the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on. When the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1511b and the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75% and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on, this 75%. The brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness is 80%, which is an additional 5% of the correction information acquired for the above. When 12 months have already passed since the date and time when the power of the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on, the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1511b. When the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75% and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on, the correction information acquired for this 75% is added by 10% to 85%. The brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted and turned on based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so as to be the brightness.

The current date and time may be specified by directly acquiring the calendar information for specifying the date and the time information for specifying the hour, minute, and second from the RTC built-in RAM4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165. Current calendar information set in the calendar information storage unit and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 1510 in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c in the current time information acquisition process of step S1002 in the control unit power-on processing. The current time information set in the time information storage unit and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 1510 may be acquired to specify the current date and time.

[6-4-4. Volume adjustment volume]
As described above, the volume adjusting volume 1510a can adjust the volume of music, sound effects, etc. flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by rotating the knob portion. As described above, the volume adjustment volume 1510a has a variable resistance value when the knob portion is rotated, and an electrically connected peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak is used as the knob portion. The voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position is converted from an analog value to a digital value and converted into a value in 1024 steps from a value to a value of 1023. In the present embodiment, as described above, the value of 1024 steps is divided into seven and managed as the substrate volumes 0 to 6. The board volume 0 is set to mute, the board volume 6 is set to the maximum volume, and the volume is set so as to increase from the board volume 0 to the board volume 6. The liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (VDP1512a with a built-in sound source) is controlled so that the volume is set to the board volumes 0 to 6, and music and sound effects are played from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

In this way, music and sound effects are played from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by adjusting the volume based on the rotation operation of the knob portion. Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, in addition to the music and sound effects, a notification sound for notifying the clerk of the hall of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or an illegal act against the pachinko machine 1 and a game production (For example, the screen unfolded on the game board side effect display device 1600 is produced as more powerful, or there is a high possibility that the game state will be favorable to the player. Etc.), but the notification sound and the notification sound also flow from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, but the notification sound and the notification sound flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the rotation operation of the knob part, and from the mute. The volume up to the maximum volume can be adjusted by controlling the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (VDP1512a with built-in sound source) by a program.

The volume adjusted by this program is different from the above-mentioned seven-stage board volume, and can smoothly change from mute to maximum volume. As a result, for example, even when a hall clerk or the like rotates the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a to set the volume low, the production sound such as music or sound effect flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 is produced. However, when a problem occurs in the pachinko machine 1 or when the player is cheating, a notification sound set to a loud volume (maximum volume in the present embodiment) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the hall clerk and the like from becoming less likely to notice the occurrence of a problem or the cheating of the player due to the notification sound.

In addition, based on the current board volume set by adjusting the volume based on the rotation operation of the knob, the volume at which the advertisement sound is played is reduced so as not to interfere with the music and sound effects, while the advertisement sound is played. In addition to music and sound effects, the screen unfolded by the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 can be produced as more powerful, which is advantageous for the player. It is also possible to announce that there is a high possibility of shifting to the gaming state.

In the present embodiment, in addition to adjusting the volume of music and sound effects by rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a, the dial operation portion 401 of the production operation unit 400 and the dial operation unit 401 By operating the pressing operation unit 405, it is possible to shift to the setting mode and adjust the volume of music and sound effects. When the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. In addition, if the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated during the period in which the customer is waiting and the demonstration by the effect display device 1600 on the game board side is being performed, the setting mode is performed. Screen is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. The volume of music and sound effects can be adjusted to a desired volume by operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 according to the screen of this setting mode. Specifically, the peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak converts the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a from an analog value to a digital value, and the converted value is obtained. Therefore, the value of the board volume can be increased or decreased by adding or subtracting a predetermined value according to the operation of the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400. There is. This adjusted volume is set and updated as a sub-volume value for the track in which the sound data of the production sound such as music or sound effect is incorporated among the plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source of the built-in sound source VDP1512a. Although it is reflected in the adjustment of the volume of the above-mentioned notification sound and the notification sound, it is not reflected in the adjustment.

As described above, in the present embodiment, there are cases where the volume of music and sound effects is adjusted by directly rotating the knob portion of the volume adjusting volume 1510a, and cases where the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 are operated. There are two methods, one is to adjust the volume of music and sound effects by increasing or decreasing the value of the substrate volume by adding or subtracting a predetermined value according to the operation of. Since the volume adjusting volume 1510a is mounted on the peripheral control board 1510, it is necessary to make sure that the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2. Then, it is the clerk in the hall who can rotate the knob portion of the volume adjusting volume 1510a. However, at the volume adjusted by the clerk in the hall, the player may feel small and it may be difficult to hear the music or sound effect, or the player may feel loud and the music or sound effect may be noisy. Therefore, after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, within a predetermined time, the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 are operated, or the pachinko machine 1 is in a waiting state and a demonstration is performed by the game board side effect display device 1600. When the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated within the period during which the effect is being performed, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 according to the screen of this setting mode, the volume of music and sound effects can be adjusted to a desired volume. As a result, the player can adjust the volume of music and sound effects to a desired volume. Therefore, if the volume adjusted by the hall clerk feels low and it is difficult to hear the music and sound effects, the production operation unit 400 You can operate the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 to increase the volume to the desired level, and if you feel the volume adjusted by the hall clerk is loud and the music or sound effects are noisy, the production operation unit The dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the 400 can be operated to reduce the volume to a desired level.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the state in which the pachinko machine 1 is not playing is continued for a predetermined time, the pachinko machine 1 is in the waiting state for customers, and the demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600 is repeatedly performed (for example, 10 times). , The volume adjusted by the player who was sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 and playing the game last time is canceled and the volume is initialized. In this volume initialization, the volume is adjusted by the hall clerk, that is, the volume adjusted by the hall clerk by directly rotating the knob portion of the volume adjusting volume 1510a. As a result, if the player who was sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 last time and played the game feels that the volume adjusted is low and it is difficult to hear the music or sound effects, he / she will be seated in the front of the pachinko machine 1 this time. The player who plays the game can operate the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 to increase the volume to a desired level, and last time, the player sits on the front of the pachinko machine 1 and plays the game. If the player who was playing the game feels the volume adjusted loudly and the music or sound effects are noisy, this time, the player who sits in front of the pachinko machine 1 and plays the game can use the dial operation unit 401 of the production operation unit 400 or The pressing operation unit 405 can be operated to reduce the volume to a desired level.

[7. Various commands related to transmission and reception of the main control board]
Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 951 and various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 will be described with reference to FIGS. 126 to 129. FIG. 126 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board, and FIG. 127 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board. Is a table showing the continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board of FIG. 127, and FIG. 129 is a table showing an example of various commands received from the payout control board received by the main control board. First, the prize ball command, which is a command related to payout transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board, is described, then various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board are described, and the main control board receives the command. Various commands from the payout control board will be described.

[7-1. Various commands sent from the main control board to the payout control board]
The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is detected from various winning switches such as the general winning port sensor 4020, the first starting port sensors 4002a and 4002b, the second starting port sensor 4004, and the count sensor 4005 shown in FIG. 120. When the signal is input, a prize ball command for paying out a predetermined number of game balls as a prize ball is transmitted to the payout control board based on these detection signals. This prize ball command is a command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits). In the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 and the CR unit 6 (communicate with the pachinko machine 1 and drive the payout motor 834 of the pachinko machine 1 (payout device 830) to the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 which are storage plates. When a device that pays out game balls as a rental ball) is electrically connected (such a pachinko machine is referred to as a "CR machine"), as shown in FIG. 126 (a), a main control board. The prize ball commands transmitted from 1310 to the payout control board 951 include commands 10H to 1EH (“H” represents a hexadecimal number). Command 10H specifies one prize ball, and command 11H. In, two prize balls are specified, ..., In command 1EH, 15 prize balls are specified. The payout control board 951 drives the payout motor 834 to control the payout of the game balls by the designated number of prize balls.

In addition, a pachinko machine 1 and a ball lending machine (a device that directly pays out game balls to the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 as storage plates) are installed adjacent to the game hall (hall), and the pachinko machine is installed. When 1 and the ball lending machine are electrically connected (such a pachinko machine is referred to as a "general machine"), as shown in FIG. 126 (b), the payout control board 951 is used from the main control board 1310. Command 20H to Command 2EH are prepared for the prize ball command to be sent to, command 20H specifies one prize ball, command 21H specifies two prize balls, ..., Command 2EH gives a prize. Fifteen spheres are designated. The payout control board 951 drives the payout motor 834 to control the payout of the game balls by the designated number of prize balls.

As shown in FIG. 126 (c), a command 30H is prepared as a common command for the CR machine and the general machine, and a self-check is specified in this command 30H.
After the command is transmitted, the transmitting side transmits the command 30H and checks whether or not the ACK signal is input when the ACK signal to be output as confirmation of receipt of the command is not input from the receiving side for a predetermined period. Check the connection status. In the case of the CR machine in the present embodiment, the payout control board 951 confirms the connection state with the CR unit 6.

[7-2. Various commands sent from the main control board to the peripheral control board]
Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 will be described. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 transmits various commands to the peripheral control board 1510 based on the progress of the game. These various commands are commands having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits), and as shown in FIGS. 127 and 128, a status indicating the type of the command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits) and a status indicating the type of the command have a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits). It is composed of a mode showing a variation of an effect having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits).

As shown in FIGS. 127 and 128, the various commands are related to the special figure 1 synchronization effect, the special figure 2 synchronization effect, the jackpot, the power-on, the normal electric role effect, the notification display, and the state. It is divided into display and others.

[7-2-1. Special figure 1 Synchronized production related]
The special drawing 1 tuning effect-related is based on the detection signal from the first start port sensor 4002 shown in FIG. 127, and the classification is divided into the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. 120 as shown in FIG. 127. It is composed of commands named special figure 1 synchronization effect start, special symbol 1 designation, special figure 1 synchronization effect end, and change state designation regarding the first special symbol display 1403. These various commands are assigned "A * H" as the status and "** H" as the mode ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number. This is indicated in advance according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The special figure 1 synchronization effect start command (variation pattern command) instructs the start of the special figure synchronization effect with the effect pattern (variation pattern) specified in the mode, and the special symbol 1 designation command is off, specific jackpot, The non-specific jackpot is designated, the special figure 1 synchronized effect end command is instructed to end the special figure 1 synchronized effect, and the variable state specification command is to indicate the game state. The gaming state is composed of a time saving state instructing that the time saving state is in effect and a non-time saving state (normal gaming state) instructing that the game state is not in the time saving state. Here, in the time saving state, for example, the time for variable display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 1402 is shortened as compared with the non-time saving state (normal game state), and the stop display is performed with a light emission pattern corresponding to the normal lottery result. By doing so, the number of stop display times of the normal lottery result by the normal lottery described later in a predetermined time is increased as compared with the non-time saving state, and the period for projecting the second start opening door 2022 is set to the non-time saving state (normally). Compared to the game state), by increasing the acceptance rate (ball entry rate) of the game ball to the second starting port 2004, it is possible to obtain a lottery opportunity for a special symbol without reducing the number of balls held (in other words). Then, as compared with the non-time saving state, more decisions are made as to whether or not the second start opening door 2022 is to be projected, and when the second starting door 2022 is to be projected, the second starting door 2022 is projected. By lengthening the operation period, the acceptance rate (entry rate) of the game ball to the second starting port 2004 is increased). Even if the time saving state is terminated and the game is controlled to the normal gaming state (non-time saving state) when the second starting port door 2022 is in the protruding state, the second starting port 2004 may be used in advance. When a predetermined number of game balls are not accepted, the protruding state can be maintained even after being controlled to the normal game state (non-time saving state). However, when a predetermined closing condition (a predetermined number of game balls are accepted or a preset opening time elapses) is satisfied in the normal gaming state (non-time saving state), the maintained protrusion The state ends and the evacuation state is set.

However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even when the time is controlled to be shortened, a game ball is inserted into a winning opening such as the first right starting port 2002b or the second starting port 2004 when hitting right. When comparing the expected value of winning balls, which is expected to be paid out based on the fact that It is set to be larger. Therefore, it can be said that it is desirable for the player not to launch a new game ball when the time is controlled to be shortened, for example, when the number of pending jackpot determinations has reached the upper limit. ..

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the special symbol 1 synchronization effect start command is transmitted at the start of the special symbol 1 fluctuation, and the special symbol 1 designation command is transmitted immediately after the start of the special diagram 1 synchronization effect. The effect end command is transmitted when the special symbol 1 variation time elapses (when the special symbol 1 is confirmed), and the variation state specification command is transmitted immediately after the special symbol winning information is specified. It should be noted that these various commands are actually transmitted in the special symbol command control process of step S16 in the main control side timer interrupt process described later.

[7-2-2. Special Figure 2 Synchronized production related]
The special figure 2 tuning effect-related is based on the detection signal from the second start port sensor 4004 shown in FIG. 120, and the classification is divided into the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. 120 as shown in FIG. 147. It is composed of commands named Special Figure 2 Synchronized Effect Start, Special Symbol 2 Designation, and Special Figure 2 Synchronized Effect End related to the second special symbol display 1405. These various commands are assigned a status of "B * H" and a mode of "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). This is indicated in advance according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The special figure 2 synchronization effect start command (variation pattern command) instructs the start of the special figure synchronization effect with the effect pattern (variation pattern) specified in the mode, and the special symbol 2 designation command is off, specific jackpot, A non-specific jackpot is designated, and the end of the special figure 2 synchronized effect indicates the end of the special figure 2 synchronized effect.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the special symbol 2 synchronization effect start command is transmitted at the start of the special symbol 2 fluctuation, and the special symbol 2 designation command is transmitted immediately after the start of the special diagram 2 synchronization effect. The effect end command is transmitted when the special symbol 2 variation time elapses (when the special symbol 2 is confirmed). It should be noted that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[7-2-3. Big hit related]
As shown in Fig. 127, the categories related to jackpots include jackpot opening, jackpot 1 open Nth display, jackpot 1 closed display, jackpot 1 count display, jackpot ending, jackpot symbol display, and jackpot opening. , Small hit open display, small hit count display, and small hit ending commands. These various commands are assigned "C * H" as the status and "** H" as the mode ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number. This is indicated in advance according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The jackpot opening command instructs the start of the jackpot opening, and the Nth display command for opening the jackpot 1 is started during the opening of the jackpot 1 in the 1st to 15th rounds (the Nth time of the first jackpot 2005). The round opening or opening start) is instructed, and the large winning opening 1 closing display command starts during closing of the large winning opening 1 between rounds (closing or closing start of the first large winning opening 2005 between rounds). ), And the large winning opening 1 count display command counts the number of game balls with counts 0 to 10 (detected by the first count sensor 4005a shown in FIG. 120, first The number of game balls that have entered the jackpot 2005) is transmitted, the jackpot ending command instructs the start of the jackpot ending, and the jackpot symbol display command instructs the jackpot symbol information display. be.

In addition, the small hit opening command indicates the start of the small hit opening, and the small hit open display command starts during the small hit opening (during the opening of the second large winning opening 2005b or the opening start at the time of the small hit). The small hit count display command is a small hit medium / large winning opening winning effect (a game ball that has entered the second large winning opening 2005b during a small hit is detected by the second count sensor 4005b. The small hit ending command is instructed to start the small hit ending.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the jackpot opening command is transmitted at the start of the jackpot opening, and the Nth display command is when the jackpot 1 is opened in the 1st to 15th rounds (first jackpot 1 is opened). It is sent when the Nth round of 2005 is opened), and the big winning opening 1 closing display command is sent when the big winning opening 1 is closed (when the first big winning opening 2005 is closed), and the big winning opening 1 count display is displayed. The command is issued when the large winning opening 1 is opened and when the count changes to the large winning opening 1 (when the first large winning opening 2005 is opened and the game ball that has entered the first large winning opening 2005 is used by the first count sensor 4005a. (When detected), the jackpot ending command is transmitted at the start of the jackpot ending, and the jackpot symbol display command is transmitted when the jackpot symbol is opened (when the first jackpot 2005 is opened).

In addition, the small hit opening command is transmitted at the start of the small hit opening, and the small hit open display command is transmitted when the small hit is opened (when the second big winning opening 2005b is opened at the time of the small hit), and the small hit count is counted. The display command is transmitted at the time of winning the small hit medium / large winning opening (when the game ball entered in the second large winning opening 2005b is detected by the second count sensor 4005b during the small hit), and the small hit ending command is sent. Is transmitted at the start of the small hit ending. It should be noted that these various commands are actually transmitted in the special symbol command control process of step S16 in the timer interrupt process on the main control side.

[7-2-4. Power on]
As shown in FIG. 127, the power-on category is composed of a command named a power-on state and a power-on main control return destination. These various commands are assigned "D * H" as the status and "** H" as the mode ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number. This is indicated in advance according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The power-on state command indicates the start of the RAM clear effect and the game state. The power-on state command is used for the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 121 when the power is turned on (including not only when the power is turned on but also when the power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure). Includes information instructing that when the operation switch 954 is operated to clear the RAM, and when the power is turned on (in addition to when the power is turned on, when the power is restored due to a power failure or momentary power failure. ) Consists of the above-mentioned information indicating which of the time-saving state and the non-time-saving state is to be restored, and information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine. When creating so-called max type, middle type, and Amadeji type, for example, the model code of this pachinko machine is for the copyright of which work, and what kind of game specifications (for example, probability fluctuations occur). In addition to the game specification that the state is continued until the next big hit game state occurs, the game specification that the probability fluctuation occurs when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is limited (for example, 30 times or 70 times). (So-called ST machine), etc.). In other words, the information on the model code of the pachinko machine is to specify the series code to identify which type is the max type, middle type, or Amadeji type indicating the model type, and to specify the copyright of the work. In addition to the copyright code of the game specification and the game specification (for example, when a probability change occurs, the state is continued until the next big hit game state occurs, the probability change in a state where the number of changes of the special symbol is limited. It is mainly composed of a game specification code for specifying a game specification (ST machine, etc.) in which

The main control return destination command at power-on indicates the return destination of the main control board 1310 itself. When the power is turned on, the main control return destination command sets the information indicating the drive state of the second start port solenoid 2108 shown in FIG. 120 and the drive state of the first attacker solenoid 2109 and the second attacker solenoid 2110 shown in FIG. 120. It is mainly composed of the information to be instructed.

The transmission timing of the power-on status command and the power-on main control return destination command is when the main control board is powered on (in addition to when the power is turned on, when power is restored due to a power failure or momentary power failure. Is also sent to.). Specifically, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, when the pachinko machine 1 recovers from a power failure or a momentary power failure, the power-on state command and the power-on main in the initialization process of step S1 in the main control side game control main process described later. The control return destination command is sent.

[7-2-5. Fuzu-tuned production-related]
The normal-figure tuning effect-related is based on the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 shown in FIG. 120, and the classification is divided into the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. 120 as shown in FIG. 127. It is composed of commands related to the vessel 1402, which are named as the start of the normal figure synchronization effect, the designation of the normal symbol, the end of the normal figure synchronization effect, and the specification of the state at the time of fluctuation. These various commands are assigned "E * H" as the status and "** H" as the mode ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number. This is indicated in advance according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The normal-figure synchronization effect start command (general-figure variation pattern command) instructs the start of the general-figure synchronization effect with the effect pattern (general-figure variation pattern) specified in the mode. The jackpot and the non-specific jackpot are designated, the normal map synchronization effect end command indicates the end of the normal figure synchronization effect, and the variable state specification command indicates the game state. As described above, the gaming state is composed of a time-saving state instructing that the time-saving state is in effect and a non-time-saving state (normal gaming state) instructing that the game state is not in the time-saving state.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the normal symbol synchronization effect start command is transmitted at the start of the normal symbol fluctuation, the normal symbol designation command is transmitted immediately after the start of the normal symbol synchronization effect, and the normal symbol synchronization effect end command is transmitted. It is transmitted when the normal symbol fluctuation time elapses (when the normal symbol is confirmed), and the command for specifying the fluctuation state is sent immediately after the normal symbol winning information is specified. It should be noted that these various commands are actually transmitted in the normal symbol command control process of step S17 in the timer interrupt process on the main control side.

[7-2-6. Ordinary electric role production related]
The normal electric service production-related is related to the second start port door 2022 which is moved forward and backward by the drive of the second start port solenoid 2108 shown in FIG. It consists of commands named opening, solenoid open display, and ending per solenoid. These various commands are assigned "F * H" as the status and "** H" as the mode ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number. This is indicated in advance according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The opening command per normal figure indicates the start of the opening per normal figure, and the open normal power display command starts while the normal power is open (the second start door 2022 is driven by the second start solenoid 2108 in the forward direction. The state of protrusion or when it protrudes) is instructed, and the ending command per normal figure indicates the start of the ending per normal figure.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the opening command per normal figure is transmitted at the start of the opening per normal figure, and the open power display command is when the normal power is opened (the second start door 2022 is the second start solenoid 2108). It is transmitted at the time of projecting forward due to the drive of the normal figure), and the ending command per normal figure is transmitted at the start of the ending per normal figure. It should be noted that these various commands are actually transmitted in the normal symbol command control process of step S17 in the timer interrupt process on the main control side.

[7-2-7. Notification display]
As shown in FIG. 128, the notification display category is composed of commands named winning abnormality display, connection abnormality display, disconnection / short circuit abnormality display, magnetic detection switch abnormality display, door opening, and door closing. These various commands are assigned a status of "6 * H" and a mode of "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). It is determined in advance by the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The winning abnormality display command is used when a game ball enters the big winning opening other than during the big hit (when the condition device is operating) (even though it is not a big hit, the game ball enters the first big winning opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2005b). When the count sensor 4005 detects the game ball), the start of the winning abnormality notification is instructed, and the connection abnormality display command is, for example, a route between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. When there is an electrical connection abnormality in, the connection abnormality notification is instructed to start, and the disconnection / short-circuit abnormality display command is, for example, the main control board 1310, the first start port sensors 4002a, 4002b, and the second start. When the electrical connection with the mouth sensor 4004, the first count sensor 4005a, the second count sensor 4005b, etc. is broken or short-circuited, the start of the disconnection / short-circuit abnormality display is instructed, and the magnetic detection switch abnormality display is displayed. The command instructs the start of the magnetic detection switch abnormality notification when an abnormality occurs in the magnetic detection sensor 4024 shown in FIG. 120.

Further, in the door opening command, the door frame 3 is directed to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal (opening signal) from the door frame opening switch 618 input via the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 121. When the door is in the opened state, the door opening notification is instructed, and the door frame closing command closes the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618. This is to instruct the end of the door opening notification when the state is set. On the other hand, in the main body frame opening command, the main body frame 4 refers to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal (opening signal) from the main body frame opening switch 619 input via the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. In the open state, the main body frame opening notification is instructed, and the main body frame closing command is issued to the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 619. When it is in the closed state, it instructs the end of the main body frame opening notification.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the winning abnormality display command is transmitted when a prize is won in the big winning opening other than during the big hit (condition device is operating), and the connection abnormality display command is sent from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 951. When there is no ACK reply (ACK signal) from the payout control board 951 when the command is transmitted to, the disconnection / short circuit abnormality display command is sent to the first start port sensors 4002a and 4002b, the second start port sensor 4004, and the first. It is transmitted when any of the count sensor 4005a, the second count sensor 4005b, etc. is disconnected or short-circuited, and the magnetic detection switch abnormality display command is transmitted when an abnormality of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is detected. Further, the door opening command is transmitted when the door opening is detected (when the door frame 3 is in the open state with respect to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618), and the door is opened. The frame closing command is transmitted when the door closing is detected (when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618). The main body frame open command is transmitted when the main body frame open is detected (when the main body frame 4 is open to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame open switch 619), and the main body is sent. The frame closing command is transmitted when the main body frame closing is detected (when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 619). It should be noted that these various commands are actually transmitted in the switch process of step S12 in the timer interrupt process on the main control side.

[7-2-8. Status display]
As shown in FIG. 128, the status display division consists of commands named frame status 1 command (corresponding to an error occurrence command), error canceling navigation command (corresponding to an error canceling command), and frame status 2 command. There is. These various commands are assigned a status of "7 * H" and a mode of "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). It is determined in advance by the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The frame state 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame state 2 command are commands having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits) transmitted from the payout control board 951, respectively, and detailed description thereof will be described later. .. When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 receives the frame state 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame state 2 command from the payout control board 951, "7 * H" is displayed as shown in FIG. 128. Along with setting it as a status, the received command is set as it is as a mode. That is, when the main control MPU 1310a receives the frame state 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame state 2 command from the payout control board 951, it adds "7 * H" which is additional information to these received commands. Formats the command into a command having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits).

The formatted frame state 1 command is sent when the power is restored, when the frame state changes, and when the error release navigation is performed, the error release navigation command is sent when the error release navigation is performed, and the frame state 2 command is sent when the power is restored. , And when the frame state changes. The formatted frame state 1 command, error release navigation command, and frame state 2 command are actually transmitted by the switch processing in step S12 in the main control side timer interrupt processing.

[7-2-9. Test related]
As shown in FIG. 128, the test-related division is composed of various commands named tests. This test command is assigned a status of "8 * H" and a mode of "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). Is determined in advance according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The test command instructs various inspections of the peripheral control board 1510 (for example, the peripheral control unit 1511, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, the lamp drive board 4170, the motor drive board 4180, and the frame decoration shown in FIG. 123. It inspects various boards such as the drive amplifier board 194).

As the transmission timing of the test command, it is transmitted at a time other than RAM clear and RAM clear when the main control board is turned on. Specifically, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, when the pachinko machine 1 recovers from a power failure or a momentary power failure, and when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 is operated, the main control side game control main described later will be described later. A test command is transmitted in the initialization process of step S1 in the process.

[7-2-10. others]
As shown in FIG. 128, the other categories include start opening prize, variation shortening operation end designation, special symbol 1 memory, special symbol 2 memory, special symbol type look-ahead, variation pattern look-ahead, gate passage, normal symbol memory, and normal. It consists of commands named pre-reading by symbol type and pre-reading by changing pattern. These various commands are assigned a status of "9 * H" and a mode of "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). This is indicated in advance according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The start opening winning command is for instructing the start of the starting opening winning effect, and is used when a game ball enters the first starting opening 2002a, 2002b based on the detection signals from the first starting opening sensors 4002a, 4002b. It instructs the start of the effect and the start of the effect when the game ball enters the second start port 2004 based on the detection signal from the second start port sensor 4004, and specifies the end of the variation shortening operation. The command instructs the state transition from the fluctuation shortening operation state to the fluctuation shortening non-operation state, and the special symbol 1 storage command is a special symbol 1 hold 0 to 4 (game balls at the first starting ports 2002a and 2002b). Is entered and the first special symbol display 1403 of the function display unit 1400 conveys the number of balls (holding number) that have not yet been used for the variable display of the special symbol, and the special symbol 2 storage command is special. Symbol 2 hold 0 to 4 (the number of balls that have not been used for the variable display of the special symbol on the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 when the game ball enters the second start port 2004 (number of hold) )) Is transmitted, and the special symbol type look-ahead command pre-reads the special symbol 1 hold before it is used for the variable display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display 1403 of the function display unit 1400. The display result (missing symbol, jackpot symbol) by the first special symbol display 1403 based on the symbol 1 hold and the special symbol 2 hold are used for the variable display of the special symbol by the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400. Before this, the display result (small hit symbol, big hit symbol) by the second special symbol display 1405 based on the special symbol 2 hold is specified, and the variable pattern look-ahead command is a special symbol. Before 1 hold is used for the variable display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display 1403 of the function display unit 1400, the fluctuation pattern used in the variable display of the special symbol based on the special symbol 1 hold by pre-reading, Before the special symbol 2 hold is used for the variable display of the special symbol on the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400, the fluctuation pattern used in the variable display of the special symbol based on the special symbol 2 hold is read ahead. And are specified respectively. Further, the gate passage command instructs the passage of the game ball to the gate portion 2003, and the normal symbol storage command is a function display unit in which the normal symbol hold 0 to 4 (the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003). The 1400 normal symbol display 1402 conveys the number of balls (holding number) that have not yet been used for the variable display of the normal symbol. Before it is used for the variable display of the normal symbol on the display 1402, it pre-reads and specifies the display result (missing symbol, symbol per normal symbol) by the normal symbol display 1402 based on the normal symbol hold. The figure variation pattern look-ahead command is used in the normal symbol variation display based on the normal symbol hold by pre-reading before the normal symbol hold is used for the normal symbol change display 1402 of the function display unit 1400. It specifies the fluctuation pattern of the general map.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the start opening winning command is when the starting opening winning (when the game ball enters the first starting opening 2002a, 2002b based on the detection signal from the first starting opening sensors 4002a, 4002b). Or, when the game ball enters the second start port 2004 based on the detection signal from the second start port sensor 4004), mainly from the speaker 921 shown in FIG. 5 and the upper speaker 573 shown in FIG. The command for specifying the end of the fluctuation shortening operation is transmitted to notify the fact by voice, and is transmitted at the end of the stop period after the fluctuation is confirmed after the specified number of fluctuation reductions have been completed (after the out-of-order stop period has elapsed), and the special symbol 1 The memory command is special when the number of reserved balls for special symbol 1 operation changes (when a game ball enters the first starting ports 2002a and 2002b and the number of reserved balls increases, or when the number of reserved balls increases, the first special symbol display 1403 is used. It is sent when the number of reserved balls is reduced by using it to display the fluctuation of the symbol, and the special symbol 2 storage command is sent when the number of reserved balls for special symbol 2 operation changes (when the game ball enters the second starting port 2004). When the number of holdings increases, or when the number of holdings is used to display the fluctuation of the special symbol on the second special symbol display 1405 and the number of holdings decreases), the special symbol type look-ahead command is sent to the special symbol. 1,2 is transmitted when the number of reserved balls for operation increases (when a game ball enters the first starting port 2002a, 2002b or the second starting port 2004 and the number of reserved balls increases), and the variation pattern look-ahead command is a special symbol. Type Sent immediately after the look-ahead command is sent. It should be noted that these various commands are actually transmitted in the special symbol command control process of step S16 in the timer interrupt process on the main control side.

Further, the gate passage command is transmitted when the game ball passes through the gate unit 2003, and the normal symbol memory command is transmitted when the number of normal symbol operation reserved balls changes (the game ball passes through the gate unit 2003 and the number of hold balls increases). When the number of reserved balls is reduced by using the normal symbol display 1402 to display the fluctuation of the normal symbol from the number of reserved balls, the normal symbol type look-ahead command is sent when the number of reserved balls for normal symbol operation is increased (when the number of reserved balls is increased. It is transmitted when the game ball passes through the gate unit 2003 and the number of holdings increases), and the normal symbol variation pattern look-ahead command is transmitted immediately after the transmission of the normal symbol type look-ahead command. It should be noted that these various commands are actually transmitted in the normal symbol command control process of step S17 in the timer interrupt process on the main control side.

By the way, as described above, the starting port winning command is used when the starting opening is won (when a game ball enters the first starting ports 2002a, 2002b based on the detection signals from the first starting port sensors 4002a, 4002b, or when the game ball enters the first starting port 2002a, 2002b. When a game ball enters the second start port 2004 based on the detection signal from the second start port sensor 4004), it is transmitted from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 mainly to notify the fact by voice. However, how the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 123 uses the start opening winning command may differ depending on the specifications of the pachinko machine. For example, the pachinko machine 1 in the present embodiment has a specification that it is used not only for notifying by voice from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 but also for monitoring the presence or absence of fraudulent activity. On the other hand, in other pachinko machines, the peripheral control board 1510 simply receives the start opening winning command, and the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 do not notify by voice.

[7-3. Various commands from the payout control board received by the main control board]
Next, various commands from the payout control board 951 received by the main control board 1310 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 129, the classification of various commands from the payout control board 951 is composed of commands named frame state 1, error release navigation, and frame state 2, frame state 1, error release navigation, and The order of priority is set in the order of frame state 2.

The frame state 1 command (corresponding to the error occurrence command) includes out-of-ball, full tank, stock of 50 or more, connection abnormality and CR not connected, and bit 0 (B0, "B") when the ball is out. Represents a bit.) Is set to a value 1, bit 1 (B1) is set to a value 1 when the tank is full, bit 2 (B2) is set to a value 1 when 50 or more stocks are in stock, and a connection error occurs. The value 1 is set in the bit 3 (B3), and the value 1 is set in the bit 4 (B4) when the CR is not connected. Bits 5 (B5) to 7 (B7) of the frame state 1 command are set to have a value of 1 in B5, a value of 0 in B6, and a value of 0 in B7.

The error release navigation command (corresponding to the error release command) includes a ball-shaped, payout detection sensor error, and a retry error. In the ball-shaped ball, bit 2 (B2) is set to a value of 1, and the payout detection sensor. In the case of an error, the value 1 is set in the bit 3 (B3), and in the retry error, the value 1 is set in the bit 4 (B4). Here, the “payout detection sensor error” indicates whether or not the payout detection sensor 842 shown in FIG. 127 is defective. The "retry error" indicates that the inconsistent game ball is repeatedly paid out by the retry operation. Bits (B0), bits (B1), and bits 5 (B5) to 7 (B7) of the error release navigation command have a value of 0 for B0, a value of 0 for B1, a value of 0 for B5, and a value of 1 for B6. And the value 0 is set in B7.

The frame state 2 command is prepared during ball removal, and the value 1 is set to bit 0 (B0) during ball removal. Bits 1 (B1) to 7 (B7) of the frame state 2 command have a value of 0 for B1, a value of 0 for B2, a value of 0 for B3, a value of 0 for B4, a value of 1 for B5, a value of 1 for B6, and so on. The value 0 is set in B7.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the frame state 1 command is transmitted at the time of power restoration, the frame state change, and the error release navigation, and the error release navigation command is transmitted at the time of error release navigation, and the frame state 2 command is transmitted. Is transmitted when the power is restored and when the frame state changes.

[8. Game content]
Next, the content of the game by the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 130 and the like. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game ball stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 is generated by the player rotating the handle 302 of the handle unit 300 arranged in the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3. , The game is driven into the upper part of the game area 5a through between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 on the game board 5, and the game by the game ball is started. The game ball driven into the upper part in the game area 5a flows down either the left side (left-handed) or the right-side (right-handed) of the center accessory 2500 depending on the hitting strength. The driving strength of the game ball can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 302, and the stronger the ball can be driven by rotating it in the clockwise direction, that is, a maximum of 100 game balls per minute in a row, that is, , You can hit the game ball at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

Further, in the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are planted in front of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) in a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions, and the game ball becomes an obstacle nail. By abutting, the flow speed of the game ball is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball so that the movement can be enjoyed. Further, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail, a windmill (not shown) that rotates due to the contact of the game ball is provided at an appropriate position.

When the game ball driven into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 enters the left side of the front view from the highest portion of the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500, it comes into contact with a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown). It will flow down the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500. Then, when the game ball flowing down the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500 enters the warp inlet 2520 opened on the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500, it is supplied from the warp outlet 2522 to the stage 2530.

The game ball supplied to the stage 2530 rolls on the stage 2530, moves back and forth from side to side, and is released forward. When the game ball is released into the game area 5a from the center of the stage 2530, since the first left start port 2002a is located directly below, it is accepted by the first left start port 2002a with high probability. When the game balls are received in the first left start port 2002a, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 321 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. NS.

When the game ball rolling on the stage 2530 is released into the game area 5a from other than the center, it flows down toward the first left starting port 2002a. The game ball released into the game area 5a from the stage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 may be received by the first left start port 2002a.

By the way, if the game ball that has flowed down to the left side of the center accessory 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2520, it may be moved to the center side in the left-right direction by an obstacle nail or the like and accepted by the first left starting port 2002a. ..

On the other hand, when the game ball driven into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a enters the right side of the highest portion of the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500 (so-called right-handed strike), On the downstream side thereof, a region (specific region) provided with the first right starting port 2002b, the second starting port 2004, the gate portion 2003, and the like will flow down. Further, on the upstream side of the specific region, a distribution member 2011 for alternately distributing the game ball to the first passage 2012 and the second passage 2014 is provided, and the game ball distributed to the first passage 2012 by the distribution member 2011. Can be accepted into the first right starting port 2002b and passed through the gate portion 2003, and the game balls distributed to the second passage 2014 by the distribution member 2011 can be accepted into the second starting port 2004. It is supposed to be.

When the right-handed game ball passes through the gate portion 2003, a normal determination is made on the main control board 1310. When the normal symbol is won in this normal judgment and the corresponding selection is shown in the normal symbol variation, the second start door 2022 of the second start 2004 is advanced and protrudes toward the player (protruding). The game ball that has passed through the receiving port 2016 is received by the second starting port door 2022 and can be accepted into the second starting port 2004. When the game balls are received in the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 321 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. ..

In addition, in the main control board 1310 according to this embodiment, when the normal symbol is won, the second start door 2022 of the second start port 2004 is retracted after the normal symbol is stopped in the mode of the normal figure. The second start door 2022 of the second start 2004 is in a state of entering the game board 5 (retracted state). However, even if a predetermined time has not passed since the second start door 2022 was operated to the protruding state, a predetermined upper limit number (1 ball in this example) of game balls Is accepted by the second starting port 2004, at that time, the second starting port door 2022 of the second starting port 2004 is retracted and operated to the retracted state, so that the game ball becomes unacceptable to the second starting port 2004. Become.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the game ball is accepted in the first starting port (first left starting port 2002a, first right starting port 2002b) and the second starting port 2004, it is mainly A hit determination (first special) as to whether or not to generate an advantageous gaming state (for example, "big hit gaming state", "small hit gaming state", "time saving state", etc.) that is advantageous to the player on the control board 1310. The symbol side or the second special symbol side) is performed. If a big hit is won in the hit judgment, the big hit type is judged based on the symbol random number (hereinafter, also referred to as the symbol random number (hereinafter, also referred to as the first special symbol random number or the second special symbol random number)) acquired at the time of entering the ball. A game privilege (a big hit game state or a game state after the big hit game state) corresponding to the determined type of big hit (determined big hit type) is given. Similarly, if a small hit is won by hit judgment, the small hit type is determined based on the symbol random number (hereinafter, also referred to as the symbol random number (hereinafter, also referred to as the first special symbol random number or the second special symbol random number)) acquired at the time of entering the ball. Then, the game privilege corresponding to the determined type of small hit (determined small hit type) (small hit game state, big hit game state executed when V is won in the small hit game state, after the big hit game state (Game state) is given.

When the hit determination is performed, the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is displayed in a variable manner for the fluctuation time selected based on the result of the hit determination, and then the symbol mode according to the result ( By stopping the special symbol with the big hit symbol, the small hit symbol, and the lost symbol), the player can recognize it. As a result, if the stopped special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is not the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol, the starting condition for the next hit determination is satisfied, and the main control board 1310 In, among the special symbols (first special symbol or second special symbol) held in the unexecuted state, the hit determination having the highest digestion order is digested (executed).

On the other hand, if the stopped special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is a jackpot symbol, a jackpot game state in which the player can win a prize is performed on the main control board 1310. .. When executing the jackpot game state, first, an opening period in which an opening effect indicating the start of the jackpot game state is performed is generated. Then, when this opening period ends, a predetermined number of predetermined rounds according to the determined jackpot type (in this embodiment, 10 rounds or 15 rounds when the first special symbol is a jackpot symbol, the second A round game is performed in which the first big winning opening 2005 is opened (the first big winning opening 2005 is in a state where the game ball can be accepted) up to the upper limit (15 rounds when the special symbol is a big hit symbol). One round game is until the first big winning opening 2005 is opened and closed a predetermined number of times (once in this embodiment), and the specified number (1 time) is set in the first big winning opening 2005 during one round game. The maximum number of winning balls: 9 balls in this example is released until the game balls are won, or until the specified time (round game time: 28.5 seconds in this example) elapses. In the round game, a round effect is performed. Then, when the round game of the specified number of rounds is completed, an ending period (5 seconds in the present embodiment) in which the ending effect indicating the end of the jackpot game state is performed is generated, and when the ending period is completed, the jackpot game state is terminated. Will be done.

Further, if the stopped special symbol (second special symbol in this example) is a small hit symbol, the main control board 1310 performs a small hit game state in which the player can obtain a prize. When executing the small hit game state, first, an opening period in which an opening effect indicating the start of the small hit game state is performed is generated. Then, when this opening period ends, the second major winning opening 2005b is opened (the second major winning opening 2005b is made in a state where the game ball can be accepted). In the form, it is performed up to once). Until a specified number of game balls (upper limit number of winnings: 9 balls in this example) win a prize in the second major winning opening 2005b during one open game, or a specified time (open game time: 28 in this example) It will be released until .5 seconds) elapses. In the open game, an open effect is performed. Then, when the open game of the specified number of times is completed, an ending period (5 seconds in the present embodiment) is generated in which an ending effect indicating the end of the small hit game state is performed, and when the ending period ends, the small hit game state is generated. Is terminated.

Further, in the main control board 1310 according to this embodiment, the big hit game state may be continuously generated after the end of the small hit game state. Specifically, it is determined on the condition that the game ball wins the second major winning opening 2005b in the small hit game state and the winning game ball is distributed to the internal V winning opening 2411 (V winning). Predetermined number of rounds according to the small hit type (10 rounds when the first special symbol is a big hit symbol, 15 when the second special symbol is a big hit symbol in this embodiment) A round game is played in which the first prize opening 2005 is opened up to the upper limit of the round). Therefore, in the ending effect at the end of the small hit game state described above, not only the end of the small hit game state is indicated, but also the game ball enters the V winning opening 2411 inside the second big winning opening 2005b. Whether or not, that is, whether or not the big hit game state is continuously performed from the small hit game state is also indicated. In addition, when the big hit game state is continuously generated after the end of the small hit game state, the small hit game state in which the second big winning opening 2005b is opened is one round, and the number including this one round. Until the number of round games reaches the specified number of rounds (from the second round to the fifteenth round), a round game in which the first prize opening 2005 is opened is performed.

Further, in the main control board 1310 according to this embodiment, the time is reduced after the end of the big hit game state, except for a part where the first special symbol is the big hit symbol. That is, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the game ball is V winning opening 2411 during the small hit game state executed based on the case where the second special symbol is the big hit symbol or the second special symbol is the small hit symbol. When it is distributed to, it is always controlled to the time saving state after the end of the big hit game state. In this time-saving state, the result of the normal determination as to whether or not it is easier to win the game ball in the second starting port 2004 is derived as compared with the non-time-saving state (normal game state, etc.) in which the time-saving state does not occur. The fluctuation time of normal symbol fluctuation is shortened. Further, in the time saving state, when the normal judgment is won, the second starting port door 2022 of the second starting port 2004 moves forward and backward (advancing / retreating operation) in a different advance / retreat pattern from the non-time saving state. It has become.

In the present embodiment, when the player wins the game in a non-time saving state, the second start port door 2022 of the second start port 2004 moves forward and backward in a short advance / retreat mode (0.2 seconds in this example). While A is performed, when the player wins the game in a short time, the second start door 2022 of the second start 2004 moves forward and backward in a long advance / retreat mode (6 seconds in this example). Is done. That is, the second start port door 2022 of the second start port 2004 has a longer total protrusion time corresponding to one normal drawing in the non-time reduction state as compared with the non-time reduction state, and operates advantageously for the player. Is set to. Therefore, in the time saving state, the second starting port door 2022 of the second starting port 2004 is in a state of improving the ball entry rate, which is easier to operate in the protruding state, as compared with the case of the non-time saving state, and right-handed striking is continued. At that time, the game ball is accepted by the second starting port 2004, and the normal symbol variation according to the normal determination is likely to occur. In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, if a player wins a hit in a short time state and continues to hit right, at least one game ball is accepted in the second starting port 2004, while in a non-short time state, the pachinko machine 1 is normally used. If you win the game, even if you continue to hit right, the game ball is rarely accepted at the second starting port 2004.

Further, the time saving state according to this embodiment ends when the symbol variation of the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times (once in this example) after the end of the jackpot game state. .. Similarly, when the small hit symbol on the second special symbol side (small hit A, small hit B, small hit C) and the game ball enters the V winning opening 2411 inside the second large winning opening 2005b , It ends when the symbol change of the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times (once in this example) after the end of the big hit game state.

The specifications of the pachinko machine 1 in this embodiment are as follows. Eight kinds of numbers [1] to [8] are adopted as decorative symbols, and [222] [333] [444] [555] [666] [777] [888] as big hit symbols, small hits. [111] is adopted as the symbol. In addition, 1/300 is specified as the winning probability of the jackpot on the first special symbol side and the second special symbol side. The winning probability of the small hit on the first special symbol side is defined as 0/300, and the winning probability of the small hit on the second special symbol side is 299/300. The winning probability per normal figure is defined as 1/20. As for the number of prize balls for the game balls, three are for the first left start port 2002a, the first right start port 2002b, and the second start port 2004, and the first big prize opening 2005 and the second big prize. Fifteen are specified for each of the mouths 2005b. Further, as an advancing / retreating pattern A in which the second starting port door 2022 of the second starting port 2004 advances / retreats in a short advancing / retreating mode, the second starting port door 2022 operates in the protruding state once and operates in the protruding state. A mode of maintaining the protruding state from 20 ms to 20 ms is defined. Further, as an advancing / retreating pattern B in which the second starting port door 2022 of the second starting port 2004 advances / retreats in a long-advancing / retreating mode, the second starting port door 2022 operates in the protruding state once and operates in the protruding state. A mode in which the protruding state is maintained until 6 seconds has passed is defined. In addition, "1 ball" is defined as the maximum number of winning prizes, which is a condition for retreating the second starting door 2022 of the second starting port 2004. Further, in each round game in the big hit game state, "1 time" is set as the number of times the first big winning opening 2005 is opened, and "9 balls" is set as the maximum number of winnings. Further, in the small hit game state, the number of times the second large winning opening 2005b is opened is defined as "1 time", and the maximum number of winnings is defined as "9 balls".

In this way, in the non-time saving state, the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2004 hardly occurs, and the game ball is accepted to the first starting port (first left starting port 2002a, first right starting port 2002b). The variable display of the first special symbol is executed based on. The game executed in this non-time saving state is a normal game, and is referred to as a normal mode in the following.

When the game ball is accepted into the first starting port (first left starting port 2002a, first right starting port 2002b) in the normal mode (non-time saving state), the main control board 1310 makes a hit determination, and the hit determination is a big hit. If you win, after determining the jackpot type related to whether or not to control to the time saving state after the jackpot game state, the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner and the symbol mode according to the result of the hit determination (big hit symbol, loss) Stop the first special symbol at (symbol). At this time, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed as the jackpot symbol, the jackpot game state is performed.

If the jackpot type is not controlled after the jackpot game state, the normal mode (non-time saving state) is continued again after the jackpot game state. On the other hand, when the jackpot type is to control the time saving state after the jackpot gaming state, the time saving state is controlled after the jackpot gaming state.

Here, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, a special symbol (No. 1) is based on the acceptance of the game ball into the first left starting port 2002a (first left starting port 2002a, first right starting port 2002b) and the second starting port 2004. The first left start port 2002a (first left start port 2002a, first right start port 2002b) and the first left start port 2002a (first left start port 2002a, first right start port 2002b) When the game ball is received in the second starting port 2004, the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) cannot be started, so the special symbol (first special symbol, first special symbol, which was started earlier) cannot be started. The start of the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is suspended until the variable display of the second special symbol) is stopped. The reserved storage numbers of the variable display of the reserved special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) are the first left starting port 2002a (first left starting port 2002a, first right starting port 2002b) and the second. Up to four starting ports 2004, respectively, and more than that, game balls at the first left starting port 2002a (first left starting port 2002a, first right starting port 2002b) and the second starting port 2004. Is accepted, but the start of the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is not suspended and is discarded. As a result, the increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating the hold.

The variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed by the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600. In the function display unit 1400, the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) are variablely displayed by being directly controlled by the main control board 1310. In the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) on the function display unit 1400, a plurality of LEDs are repeatedly turned on and off to blink for a predetermined time, and then a combination of the LEDs that are lit. Suggests the result of the variation display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) (symbol mode according to the result of the hit determination).

On the other hand, in the effect display device 1600, based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, it is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510, and the result of the hit determination is suggested as the effect image. In the effect image suggesting the result of the hit determination on the effect display device 1600, each symbol string is changed in a state where three symbol rows consisting of a plurality of symbols are displayed side by side in the left-right direction, and the symbols are displayed in a variable manner. The columns are sequentially stopped and displayed, and each of the three symbol columns is stopped and displayed so that the symbols of the three symbol columns that are stopped and displayed are in a combination corresponding to the result of the hit determination. If the result of the hit judgment is other than "missing", after the three symbol rows are stopped and each symbol is stopped and displayed, a definite image suggesting the result of the hit judgment is displayed on the effect display device 1600 and a lottery is performed. An advantageous gaming state (for example, a big hit gaming state, a small hit gaming state, etc.) is generated according to the result of the hit determination.

Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to displaying the effect image for suggesting the result of the hit determination by the effect display device 1600, the effect operation unit 400 in the door frame 3 according to the result of the lottery hit determination. Operation button 410, door frame side effect display device 460, various decorations of center accessory 2500, various decorations of back unit, back bottom rear movable production unit, back top left movable production unit, back left movable production unit, back top It is possible to perform light emission effect, movable effect, display effect, etc. by appropriately using the medium movable effect unit, the back lower front movable effect unit, etc., and the player can be entertained by various effects. , It is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, even if there is a first reserved storage number which is a storage number of the hit determination on the first special symbol side which is held in the unexecuted state, it is in the unexecuted state. If there is a second reserved storage number, which is the number of stored hit judgments on the second special symbol side that is on hold, the variable display of the second special symbol should be executed with priority over the variable display of the first special symbol. It has become. Then, since it is not controlled to the time saving state (controlled to the non-time saving state) during the big hit game state, the result of the determination (normal judgment) of whether or not it is a normal figure hit based on the passage of the game ball to the gate portion 2003. Even if the symbol per figure is stopped and the second start door 2022 of the second start port 2004 moves forward and backward, the advance / retreat mode is a short advance / retreat mode in which the game ball is hardly accepted into the second start port 2004. , The winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2004 hardly occurs. As a result, when the first special symbol is variablely displayed in the normal mode (non-time saving state) and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed as the jackpot symbol, in most cases, the first special symbol is first displayed after the jackpot game state. Will be displayed in a variable manner.

Further, in this example, as the fluctuation time of the first special symbol in the time saving state, the fluctuation is displayed with a long fluctuation time (120 seconds in this example) longer than the normal fluctuation time regardless of the result of the hit judgment. .. In addition, since the state in which the first special symbol is fluctuated and displayed with a long fluctuation time in the time saving state is the state in which the right to become a big hit (winning right) of the second special symbol can be acquired, this state is set as the chance mode in the following. That is. Then, during the chance mode in which the first special symbol is fluctuated and displayed over a long fluctuation time, a game aiming at the passage of the game ball to the gate portion 2003 is performed.

As described above, when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003, it is determined whether or not the game ball hits the normal figure (normal determination), and the normal symbol is displayed in a variable manner based on the determination result. Then, when the stop mode of the normal symbol is the normal symbol, the second start port door 2022 is controlled to be in a protruding state, and the game ball can be accepted into the second start port 2004, and the second start port becomes possible. When the game ball is accepted in 2004, the number of second reserved memory, which is the number of stored hit determinations on the second special symbol side, increases.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, one of a big hit and a small hit is always obtained as a result of the hit determination on the second special symbol side. Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when a small hit is obtained as a result of the hit determination on the second special symbol side, even one game ball is accepted in the second large winning opening 2005b during the small hit game state. One of them is always distributed to the V winning opening 2411. Further, in this example, if the right-handed hit is continued during the small hit game state, at least one ball is controlled to be accepted by the second big winning opening 2005b. That is, when a small hit is obtained as a result of the hit judgment on the second special symbol side, it is a big hit in most cases. Therefore, it is practically a small hit as a result of the hit judgment on the second special symbol side. It can be said that the right to become a big hit (winning right) has been acquired. That is, the state in which the game ball is accepted by the second starting port 2004 and the second reserved memory number is present is a state in which the right to be a big hit (winning right) is acquired.

Then, when the long fluctuation time elapses after the variation display of the first special symbol is started, the first special symbol is stopped in the symbol mode (big hit symbol, lost symbol) according to the result of the hit determination. At this time, if the first special symbol is stopped at the jackpot symbol, the jackpot game state is performed, and if there is a second reserved memory number after the jackpot game state, the game shifts to the winning right exercise time described later, and after the jackpot game state, the first is (Ii) If the result of the hit determination on the first special symbol side when starting the jackpot game state when there is no reserved memory is to control the time reduction state after the jackpot game state, the chance mode is continued and the first special symbol is continued. Is displayed in a variable manner over a long fluctuation time, and the result of the hit determination on the first special symbol side when starting the jackpot game state when there is no second reserved memory is not controlled to the time saving state after the jackpot game state. Exit the chance mode and shift to the normal mode. On the other hand, if the first special symbol is stopped due to a lost symbol after the long fluctuation time has elapsed since the variable display of the first special symbol was started, if there is a second reserved memory number, it is shifted to the winning right exercise time. If there is no second reserved memory, the chance mode is terminated and the normal mode is entered.

In this way, the winning right exercise time is shifted when there is a second reserved memory number, and a game in which the second special symbol is variablely displayed is performed. As described above, in addition to being able to always obtain one of a large hit and a small hit as a result of the hit judgment on the second special symbol side, a small hit is obtained as a result of the hit judgment on the second special symbol side. If it wins, it means that the right to become a big hit (winning right) has been acquired. Therefore, in the winning right exercise time, the jackpot game state is executed by the number of the second reserved memory.

Specifically, when the time for exercising the winning right is reached, the second special symbol is first changed and displayed. Then, if the symbol mode at the time of stopping the second special symbol is the jackpot symbol, the jackpot game state in which the first jackpot 2005 is opened according to the determined jackpot type is executed, and the second special symbol is stopped. If the symbol mode at the time is a small hit symbol, the small hit game state is executed to make the second big winning opening 2005b in a state where the game ball can be accepted, and the game ball winning the second big winning opening 2005b wins a V prize. The jackpot game state in which the first big winning opening 2005 is opened is executed on the condition that it is distributed to the mouth 2411.

In this example, by continuing to hit right during the small hit game state, at least one ball is controlled to be accepted by the second big winning opening 2005b, so the possibility is low, but the game is played during the small hit game state. When the ball ends the small hit game state without being distributed to the V winning opening 2411, or the big hit game state executed based on the symbol mode when the second special symbol is stopped becomes the big hit symbol ends. In the case, if the big hit game state executed based on the fact that the game ball is distributed to the V winning opening 2411 during the small hit game state ends, the winning right is provided on the condition that there is a second reserved memory number. Continue exercising time.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the game ball wins a V prize when the second special symbol is a big hit symbol or during the small hit game state executed based on the second special symbol being a small hit symbol. When the game is distributed to the mouth 2411, it is always controlled to the time saving state after the end of the big hit game state. Therefore, based on the case where the game ball ends the small hit game state without being distributed to the V winning opening 2411 during the small hit game state, or the symbol mode when the second special symbol is stopped becomes the big hit symbol. When the executed big hit game state ends, and when the big hit game state executed based on the fact that the game ball is distributed to the V winning opening 2411 during the small hit game state ends, the second reserved memory number If there is no such thing, the time saving state will occur again and the mode will be shifted to the chance mode.

In this way, the pachinko machine 1 of this example starts the game in the normal mode, wins a big hit during the normal mode, and a time saving state occurs after the big hit game state, which is a more advantageous state than the normal mode. If you win the normal judgment during the chance mode, it will be in an advantageous state for the player who loops between the winning right time and the chance mode, and if you do not win the normal judgment during the chance mode, the chance mode will change to the normal mode. It falls to a disadvantage for the player.

[9. Main control board control process]
Next, an example of the control process executed on the main control board 1310 (particularly the main control MPU 1310a) will be described. FIG. 131 (a) is a flowchart showing a procedure of control processing performed by the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1.

As shown in FIG. 131 (a), the main control board 1310 according to this embodiment first incorporates various registers and main control as the process of step S1 on the condition that the operation switch 954 is operated. Initialize the data stored in the RAM. The operation switch 954 is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 so that it cannot be operated unless the main body frame 4 is opened. Further, the operation switch 954 outputs a clear signal to the main control board 1310 in response to an operation before a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) elapses from the power-on, and the main control MPU 1310a inputs the clear signal when the power is turned on. When it is determined, the initialization process (step S1) is executed to initialize the data stored in various registers and the main control built-in RAM.

Although not shown, in this example, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, a backup process is executed in which information indicating the progress of the game (for example, various flags) is saved in the main control built-in RAM. If the operation switch 954 is not operated when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the information stored in the main control built-in RAM is referred to in the backup process without executing the initialization process (step S1). A restoration process for restoring the state according to the information is executed. Further, when the operation switch 954 is operated when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the initialization process is executed without executing the recovery process to set the pachinko machine 1 to the initial state. Further, when the initialization process is executed, the game state is controlled to the non-time saving state.

Next, as the process of step S2, the random numbers, which are the numbers to be updated within the predetermined numerical range, are updated. That is, in the main control board 1310 according to this embodiment, the special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) used for the lottery process for the display mode when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped, and the special symbol. A reach effect is executed as a game effect executed by the effect display device 1600 in response to the variable random number used for the lottery process for the predetermined time (variable time) required for the variable display control of the above special symbol and the variable display of the special symbol. Reach random numbers used in the lottery process to determine whether or not, and symbol random numbers used in the lottery process to determine the type of big hit when it is determined to be a big hit based on the above special random numbers (first symbol random number, first It is equipped with a random number counter that holds random numbers such as (two symbol random numbers), random numbers (ordinary random numbers) used for lottery processing related to winning a hit that triggers the operation of the second start door 2022, and the like.

In this example, when a common reach random number is used for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, that is, when the first starting port (first left starting port 2002a, first right starting port 2002b) is started and won a prize. Even if the second start port 2004 is started and won, the reach random number is acquired from the same counter that updates the reach random number, but the range of the random number that updates the reach random number. The execution ratio of the reach effect may be different by acquiring from different counters, or the first reach determination table corresponding to the first special symbol and the second reach determination table to be compared with the acquired reach random numbers. By providing a second reach determination table in which a determination value different from the first reach determination table is set corresponding to the special symbol, the execution ratio of the reach effect may be different.

In the process of step S2, the counter operation of the random number counter is performed so that only the random numbers (variable random numbers) that are not related to the winning of these random numbers are updated. After the processes of steps S1 and S2 are performed in this way, only the process of step S2 is basically repeated. However, in this embodiment, for example, the following timer interrupt control is performed every 4 mS.

FIG. 131 (b) is a flowchart showing a processing procedure for timer interrupt control periodically performed by the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310.

As shown in FIG. 131 (b), in this interrupt control, first, a register save process is performed as the process of step S11. Next, as the process of step S12, the gate sensor 4003, the first left start port sensor 4002a, the first right start port sensor 4002b, the second start port sensor 4004, the first count sensor 4005a, and the second count Detection signals from various sensors such as the sensor 4005b and the general winning opening sensor 4020 are input. Next, as the process of step S13, a random number update process for updating the value of the random number counter that generates the random number is performed. In the process of step S13, among the random numbers, the random numbers (special random numbers, ordinary random numbers) related to the display mode when the variable display of the special symbol and the ordinary symbol is stopped are updated and the counter of the random number counter. The operation is performed.

Then, after the random numbers are updated in this way, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 performs a special symbol process process including a lottery process related to the display mode when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped as the process of step S14. To execute. The special symbol process processing will be described later, but here, basically, the special symbol process flag (first special symbol process flag, second) indicating the progress of the game stored in the main control built-in RAM is described. The corresponding process will be selectively executed based on the special symbol process flag).

Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 executes a normal symbol process process including a lottery process for winning a hit that triggers the operation of the second start door 2022 as the process of step S15. Even in this normal symbol process process, basically, the corresponding process is selectively executed according to the normal symbol process flag indicating the progress of the game.

When the special symbol process process (step S14) and the normal symbol process process (step S15) are performed, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is then subjected to the special symbol process process as the process of step S16. The process of transmitting a command set in a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM to the peripheral control board 1510 or the like is performed. Next, as the process of step S17, a process of transmitting a command set in a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM in the normal symbol process process to, for example, the peripheral control board 1510 is performed.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 then performs an information output process for outputting data such as hit information supplied to the hall management computer as the process of step S18.

Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has the first left start port sensor 4002a, the first right start port sensor 4002b, the second start port sensor 4004, and the first first as the process of step S19. When the detection signals of the count sensor 4005a, the second count sensor 4005b, the general winning opening sensor 4020, etc. are in the ON state, the payout control board 951 is used to control the payout balls corresponding to the signals to the player. Executes the prize ball processing that outputs a command. As a result, the payout control MPU952a mounted on the payout control board 951 outputs a drive signal from the payout motor drive circuit 952d to the payout motor 834, and pays out the prize ball to the player. In this example, the game ball wins the first left start port 2002a and the first left start sensor 4002a is turned on, and the first right start port 2002b wins the game ball and the first one. "3 balls" when the right start port sensor 4002b is turned on, "1 ball" when the game ball wins the second start port 2004 and the second start port sensor 4004 is turned on. When the game ball wins the first prize opening 2005 and the first count sensor 4005a is turned on, "14 balls", and when the game ball wins the second prize opening 2005b and the second count sensor 4005b is turned on. Then, when the game ball wins in the general winning opening 2001 and the general winning opening sensor 4020 is turned on, the winning ball of "10 balls" is paid out to the player.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 then executes a storage process for checking the increase / decrease in the number of reserved storages as the process of step S20. Next, as the process of step S21, a test terminal process, which is a process of outputting a test signal so that the control state of the pachinko machine 1 can be confirmed outside the gaming machine, is executed. After that, the drive control of the actuator that always operates is performed (step S22), the contents of the register are restored (step S23), and when the interrupt permission state is set (step S24), this control ends. It becomes.

With the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is started every 4 mS. In this embodiment, the game control process is executed by the interrupt process by the timer, but in the interrupt process, for example, only the flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred may be set. However, in this case, the game control process is executed in the main process.

FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the special symbol process process (step S14).

Assuming that the random numbers used for various lottery processes have been updated (step S13), as shown in FIG. 132, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first has the first start port sensor (third). (1) The detection signal from the left start port sensor 4002a and the first right start port sensor 4002b) is in the ON state (the ball has entered the first start port (first left start port 2002a, first right start port 2002b)). (Step S31), the first special random number of the first special symbol is acquired from the random number counter and stored in the first special symbol hold storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Is executed (step S32). Further, on condition that the detection signal by the second start port sensor 4004 is in the ON state (the ball has entered the second start port 2004) (step S33), the second special random number of the second special symbol is set to the above random number. A second start port passage process such as acquiring from a counter and storing this in the second special symbol hold storage area of the main control built-in RAM is executed (step S34).

Next, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not the jackpot executing flag indicating that the jackpot gaming state is controlled is set (step S35), and if the jackpot executing flag is set, the jackpot gaming state. The jackpot control process (step S40) for controlling the above is executed. In the jackpot control process, when the result of the lottery process (result of the hit determination and the content of the jackpot type) regarding the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped is a mode suggesting "10R jackpot". , Closed after opening the first prize opening 2005 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when it is detected by the first count sensor 4005a that nine game balls have won in the first prize opening 2005. The process of controlling the opening / closing pattern to be repeated 10 times to the 10R jackpot game state is executed, and the result of the lottery process (the result of the hit determination and the content of the jackpot type) regarding the display mode when the variation display of the second special symbol is stopped is ". When the mode suggesting "15R big hit", after opening the first big winning opening 2005 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or the first big winning opening 2005, nine game balls won a prize. A process of controlling the 15R jackpot game state in which the opening / closing pattern of closing when detected by the first count sensor 4005a is repeated 15 times is executed.

Further, in the big hit control process, after performing such open control of the first big winning opening 2005, the time saving flag setting process is executed. The time saving flag is a flag indicating that the time saving control (control executed in the time saving state) is being executed, and is set when the big hit game state based on the big hit controlled in the time saving state is ended after the big hit game state is finished, and will be described later. It is reset by the first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 143 or the second special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 146 described later. In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the number of time reductions is set to once, and after the jackpot game state ends, the time reduction control is started and the variation display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is executed once. When this is done, the time saving control is terminated.

Further, if the big hit executing flag is not set, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not the small hit executing flag indicating that the small hit game state is controlled is set (step S36), and the small hit is executed. If the hit execution flag is set, the small hit control process (step S41) for controlling the small hit game state is executed. In the small hit control process, when the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped is a mode suggesting "small hit", the second big winning opening 2005b is set for a predetermined period ( (For example, 28.5 seconds) After opening, or when it is detected by the second count sensor 4005b that one game ball has won a prize in the second large winning opening 2005b, a process of closing is executed. Further, when the game ball winning in the second prize opening 2005b enters the V winning opening 2411, the first big winning opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) by controlling the jackpot game state. After that, when it is detected by the first count sensor 4005a that nine game balls have won in the first big winning opening 2005, the opening / closing pattern is repeated 14 times to control the transition to the 15R big hit game state.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a is a second special hold number counter indicating the number of second special random numbers stored in the second special symbol hold storage area if neither the big hit execution flag nor the small hit execution flag is set. On condition that the value of is "0" (step S37), the first special symbol process process including the lottery process related to the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped is executed (step S38), and the first (Ii) On condition that the value of the second special hold number counter indicating the number of the second special random numbers stored in the special symbol hold storage area is not "0" (step S37), when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is stopped. A second special symbol process process including a lottery process related to the display mode is executed (step S39). As described above, in this example, when the value of the second special hold number counter is not "0", the variation display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed.

FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first starting port passing process (step S32).

Now, in the process of step S31, the first left start port sensor 4002a is in the ON state, the game ball has entered the first left start port 2002a, or the first right start port sensor 4002b. Is in the ON state, and it is determined that the game ball has entered the first right start port 2002b, as shown in FIG. 133, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is in step S41. First, the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variable random number are acquired from the random number counter.

Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 acquires a counter value by the first special hold number counter indicating the number of first special random numbers stored in the first special symbol hold storage area from the main control built-in RAM. Based on the counter value, it is determined whether or not the first reserved storage number is the maximum value (upper limit value) of "4" (step S42). In the process of step S42, when it is determined that the first reserved storage number is not the maximum value, the following steps S43 to S43 to newly put the variable display control of the first special symbol into the pending state. The processing of S45 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S43, the first special hold number counter is counted up (1 addition). Next, as the process of step S44, each random number acquired in step S41 is stored in the first special symbol hold storage area corresponding to the counter value by the first special hold number counter in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Store in and end the process.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is a display result of the variation display of the first special symbol based on the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variation random number acquired in step S41. Whether or not to make a big hit, if it is a big hit, the type of big hit, if it is not a big hit, the reach effect is executed as a game effect executed by the effect display device 1600, or the mode type of the game effect to be executed ( After executing the effect pre-determination process of determining the pre-determination information (type of variation pattern) before starting the variation display according to the start winning prize (step S45), the process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of step S42, when it is determined that the first reserved storage number is the maximum value, the variation display control of the first special symbol is not newly suspended. That is, by terminating the processing without executing the processing of steps S43 to S45, the variation display control of the first special symbol is not newly put on hold.

Further, when the first reserved storage number changes based on the game ball entering the first starting port (first left starting port 2002a, first right starting port 2002b), the first storage process (step S20) is performed. (1) A command (first hold number designation command 0 to 4) for instructing the number of hold storages is set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the first reserved storage number on the effect display device 1600 based on the reception of the first reserved number designation commands 0 to 4.

FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the effect pre-determination process (step S45). When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts the effect pre-determination process, the pre-determination table (not shown) and the random numbers acquired in step S41, specifically, the first special random number, the first symbol random number, the reach random number, and the fluctuation Whether or not a big hit is achieved by comparing with a random number, if it is a big hit, the type of big hit, and if it is not a big hit, the reach effect is executed or executed as a game effect executed by the main liquid crystal display device 1600. The mode type of the game effect to be played is specified (step S61).

Then, the specified pre-judgment information (whether or not it is a big hit, the type of the big hit if it is a big hit, and if it is not a big hit, the reach effect is executed as the game effect executed by the main liquid crystal display device 1600. Depending on the mode type of the game effect to be executed, the type of the acquired special random number (first special random number), and the number of reserved storages (value of the pending number counter) stored corresponding to the acquired special random number. Set the pre-judgment command. For example, in the effect pre-determination process relating to the first special symbol executed in step S45 of the first start port passage process, the specified pre-determination information, the acquisition of the first special random number, and the first reserved storage number (the first reserved memory number). (I) The value of the special hold number counter) and the first special symbol pre-determination command according to the above are set (step S62).

Then, in the special symbol command control process (step S16), the pre-determination command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, so that the start opening (first left start port 2002a, first) in which the start winning is generated occurs. (One of the right start ports 2002b), in addition to the number of reserved storages stored corresponding to the start port, whether or not the display result of the variation display of the special symbol based on the generated start prize is a big hit, and the big hit. If it is, the type of big hit, and if it is not a big hit, the reach effect is executed as the game effect executed by the effect display device 1600, or the pre-judgment information such as the mode type of the game effect to be executed is used for the start winning prize. The peripheral control MPU 1511a mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 can be grasped before the corresponding fluctuation display is started.

When the peripheral control MPU 1511a mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 receives the pre-determination command from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control MPU 1511a stores the pre-determination information indicated by the received pre-determination command. Specifically, the peripheral control RAM 1511c of the peripheral control MPU 1511a is provided with a first reserved storage area for storing prior determination information regarding the variation display of the first special symbol.

Further, the first reserved storage area has 1 to 4 storage areas corresponding to the number of reserved storages, and the peripheral control MPU1511a stores the first (earliest) pre-determination information indicated by the received pre-determination command. Store in order from the area. Then, when the pre-judgment command is received when the pre-judgment information is stored in the n-th (n = 1-3) storage area, the pre-judgment information notified to the n + 1-th (n = 1-3) storage area is received. Is stored, and when the first variation pattern command for notifying the start of variation display of the first special symbol is received, it is stored in the first storage area of the first reserved storage area according to the received first variation pattern command. The judgment information is discarded and the pre-judgment information stored in the Nth (N = 2-4) storage area is moved to the N-1st (N = 2-4) storage area (to the reserved storage area). Shift the stored pre-judgment information). As a result, the pre-determination information of the first special symbol is stored so that the order in which the suspension of the start of the variable display occurs can be specified, and is discarded in order from the earliest pre-determination information.

When the variable display control is put on hold in this way, the jackpot expectation (pseudo-winning probability) of the variable display control is maintained even though the variable display control is maintained in the unexecuted state (holding state). ) Will be notified in advance at a predetermined timing, for example, when the hold display is newly output or when the hold display is shifted according to the hold digestion. ..

FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the second starting port passing process (step S34).

Now, if it is determined in the process of step S33 that the second start port sensor 4004 is in the ON state and the game ball has entered the second start port 2004, as shown in FIG. 135. In addition, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first acquires the second special random number, the reach random number, the second symbol random number, and the variable random number from the random number counter as the process of step S51.

Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 acquires the counter value by the second special hold number counter from the main control built-in RAM, and based on this counter value, the second hold storage number is the maximum value. 4 ”is determined (step S52). In the process of step S52, when it is determined that the second reserved storage number is not the maximum value, the following steps S53 to S53 to newly put the variable display control of the second special symbol into the pending state. The processing of S54 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S53, the second special hold number counter is counted up (added by 1). Next, as the process of step S54, each random number acquired in step S51 is stored in the second special symbol hold storage area corresponding to the counter value by the second special hold number counter in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Store in and end the process.

On the other hand, in the process of step S52, when it is determined that the second reserved storage number is the maximum value, the variation display control of the second special symbol is not newly suspended. That is, by terminating the processing without executing the processing of steps S53 to S54, the variation display control of the second special symbol is not newly put on hold.

Further, when the second reserved storage number changes based on the game ball entering the second starting port 2004, a command (designating the second reserved number) instructing the second reserved storage number in the above storage process (step S20). Commands 0 to 4) are set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140. The peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the second reserved storage number on the effect display device 1600 based on the reception of the second reserved number designation commands 0 to 4.

FIG. 136 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol process process (step S38). The first special symbol process process executed in step S38 of the special symbol process process and the second special symbol process process executed in step S39 of the special symbol process process are the same program modules, and are random numbers used for determination. Since the above and the table are different, only the first special symbol process process executed in step S38 of the special symbol process process will be described here. In the first special symbol process process, one of the following five process processes is selectively executed according to the first special symbol process flag. As a result of comparison with the first special random number in the hit determination process (step S105) described later, it may not be determined that the hit is a small hit. Therefore, the hit determination process executed in the first special symbol process process and the first (Ii) The hit determination process executed in the special symbol process process may be separated from the hit determination process, and each process process in the first special symbol process process may be controlled so as not to execute the process related to the small hit.

1. 1. The first special random number stored in the main control built-in RAM is read, and based on the read first special random number, the first special symbol is subjected to lottery processing for the display mode when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol is stopped. Normal processing (step S80)
2. First special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81) in which the process of determining the mode when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol is stopped is performed based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol is stopped. )
3. 3. About the variation mode of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 1403 based on the variable random number, and the variation mode of the effect display executed on the effect display device 1600 corresponding to the first special symbol. First variation pattern setting process in which a lottery process or the like is performed (step S82)
4. First special symbol variation processing (step S83) that waits until the variation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 1403 is stopped.
5. The mode when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol is stopped, which is determined based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol is stopped, is displayed on the first special symbol display 1403. First special symbol stop process for stopping the variable display of the first special symbol (step S84)

The first special symbol process flag is operated to indicate that the first special symbol normal process (step S80) should be performed in the process of step S1 (see FIG. 131).

FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol normal processing (step S80).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol normal processing should be performed, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first, as shown in FIG. 137, first steps S101. As the process of, it is determined whether or not there is variable display control of the first special symbol in the hold state based on the counter value by the first special hold number counter. As a result, when it is determined that there is variable display control of the first special symbol in the hold state, it is then stored in the first special symbol hold storage area of the main control built-in RAM as the process of step S102. The random number stored in the earliest storage area of the random numbers related to the display mode of the first special symbol (for example, the first special random number, the first symbol random number, the reach random number, the variable random number) is stored in the same main control built-in RAM. Read from. Next, as the processing of steps S103 and S104, the first special hold number counter is counted down, and the first special is stored in each storage area of the first special symbol hold storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Random numbers (first special random number, first symbol random number, reach random number, variable random number) related to the display mode when the variable display of the symbol is stopped are shifted in the first-in first-out (First-In First-Out) mode.

Specifically, the first special symbol reservation storage area has four storage areas (first special symbol reservation storage area a to first special symbol reservation storage area d), and the first start port (first left start port). The random numbers extracted according to the occurrence of the start winning prize in 2002a, the first right start port 2002b) are stored in order from the first (first) area. Then, when a start prize occurs when a random number is stored in the nth (n = 1-3) storage area, the extracted random number is stored in the n + 1th (n = 1-3) storage area, and the first prize is stored. When the start condition of the variable display based on the random number stored in the storage area of is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read and stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area. Various random numbers are moved to the N-1st (N = 2-4) th storage area. As a result, the order in which the variable display control hold of the first special symbol occurs is identifiable and memorized, and the hold of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest hold (hold that occurred first). become. Similarly, the second special symbol reservation storage area has four storage areas (second special symbol reservation storage area a to second special symbol reservation storage area d), and responds to the occurrence of a start winning prize in the second start port 2004. The random numbers extracted by the above are stored in order from the first (earliest) area. Then, when a start prize occurs when a random number is stored in the nth (n = 1-3) storage area, the extracted random number is stored in the n + 1th (n = 1-3) storage area, and the first prize is stored. When the start condition of the variable display based on the random number stored in the storage area of is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read and stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area. Various random numbers are moved to the N-1st (N = 2-4) th storage area. As a result, the order in which the variable display control hold of the second special symbol occurs is identifiable and memorized, and the hold of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest hold (hold that occurred first). become.

Then, as the process of step S105, a hit determination process, which is a lottery process for winning the big hit or the small hit, is performed based on the first special random number of the read first special symbol. After that, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81) (step S106), this process ends.

FIG. 138 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the hit determination process (step S105).

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is the hit determination table shown in FIG. 139 (A) and a special random number (the first special random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal processing, or the second special symbol normal processing). Compare with the read second special random number) (step S114).

As shown in FIG. 139 (A), the hit determination table is stored in the main control built-in ROM and is provided for each type of special random number (first special random number, second special random number). Then, in the hit determination table referred to for comparison with the first special random number, it matches the jackpot determination value indicating that one type of first special random number has won the jackpot, and 299 types of first special random numbers are described above. The first special random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the loss determination value indicating the loss (big hit probability; 1/300). Further, in this example, in the second special symbol process process executed in step S39 of the special symbol process process, in the hit determination table referred to for comparison with the second special random number, one kind of second special random number is used. The above-mentioned second special random number so as to match the jackpot judgment value indicating that the jackpot has been won and 299 kinds of second special random numbers different from the jackpot judgment value match the small hit judgment value indicating that the jackpot has been won. Are associated with each other (big hit probability; 1/300, small hit probability; 299/300). That is, in the hit judgment table referred to for comparison with the first special random number, it is not judged as a small hit, but it is judged as one of a big hit and a loss, and the second special random number and the second special random number. In the hit determination table referred to for comparison, it is always determined to be either a big hit or a small hit.

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has the hit determination table and a special random number (the first special random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal processing, or the second special read in the second special symbol normal processing). As a result of comparison with the random number), if it is determined to be a big hit (step S115), a big hit flag indicating that the fluctuation has won the big hit is set (step S116), and the hit determination process is completed.

Further, as a result of comparison between the selected hit determination table and the special random number (the first special random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal processing or the second special random number read in the second special symbol normal processing), When it is determined to be a small hit (step S117), a small hit flag indicating that the fluctuation has won a small hit is set (step S118), and the hit determination process is terminated.

On the other hand, when neither the big hit nor the small hit is won, that is, when it is determined that the hit is lost, the reach determination table is compared with the reach random number read in step S102 (step S119).

The reach determination table (not shown) is stored in the main control built-in ROM, and is used when the game state is the time reduction state and the reach determination table in the time reduction state, and the non-time reduction table used when the game state is the non-time reduction state. It is equipped with a reach judgment table for the state. Then, in the reach determination table in the time saving state, the reach determination value indicating that one type of reach random number reaches is matched with the reach determination value indicating that 71 types of reach random numbers do not reach. Random numbers are associated with each other.

Further, in the reach determination table in the non-time saving state, it matches the reach determination value indicating that five types of reach random numbers including the same reach random number as the reach random number set in the reach determination table in the time saving state reach. The reach random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the reach determination value indicating that the 67 types of reach random numbers do not reach. As described above, in this embodiment, the reach determination value indicating reach is higher in the non-time saving state than in the time saving state.

When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is determined to be a reach loss as a result of comparison between the selected reach determination table and the reach random number read in step S102 (step S119), the fluctuation is caused. The reach flag indicating that the reach is reached is set, and the process ends (step S121).

FIG. 140 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop symbol setting process should be performed, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first, as shown in FIG. 140, first. The result of the lottery process of the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped, that is, the result of the hit determination process (step S105) is determined. The lottery processing result is determined by determining whether or not the jackpot flag is set (step S131).

If the jackpot flag is set in step S131, the main control MPU 1310a selects the jackpot symbol determination table shown in FIG. 139 (B) and sets the first symbol random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal processing. By comparing with the selected jackpot symbol determination table, the jackpot symbol as the mode (stop symbol of the first special symbol) when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol is stopped is determined (step S132).

As shown in FIG. 139 (B), symbol random numbers (first symbol random number, second symbol random number) are associated with each of the jackpot symbol determination tables according to the determination result (10R jackpot A, 10R jackpot B, 15R jackpot). It is remembered in the form of random numbers. In the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the type of jackpot is determined by specifying the determination result associated with the acquired symbol random number. In the jackpot symbol determination table of this example, the probability of determining the type of jackpot determined based on the first symbol random number and the probability of determining the type of jackpot determined based on the second symbol random number are set to be different. doing.

In particular,
1. 1. After opening the first prize opening 2005 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when it is detected by the first count sensor 4005a that nine game balls have won in the first prize opening 2005, the first prize opening 2005 is closed. By repeating the opening / closing pattern 10 times, the game ball is controlled to the 10R big hit game state in which the ball can enter the first big winning opening 2005 (easy), and after the big hit game state is finished, the time is controlled to the 10R big hit A.
2. After opening the first prize opening 2005 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when it is detected by the first count sensor 4005a that nine game balls have won in the first prize opening 2005, the first prize opening 2005 is closed. By repeating the opening / closing pattern 10 times, the game ball is controlled to the 10R big hit game state in which the ball can enter the first big winning opening 2005 (easy), and is controlled to the non-time saving state after the big hit game state ends.
3. 3. After opening the first prize opening 2005 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when it is detected by the first count sensor 4005a that nine game balls have won in the first prize opening 2005, the first prize opening 2005 is closed. By repeating the opening / closing pattern 15 times, the game ball is controlled to the 15R big hit game state in which the ball can enter the first big winning opening 2005 (easy), and after the big hit game state is finished, the time is controlled to the 15R big hit.

In the jackpot symbol determination table to be compared with the first symbol random number, 80 determination values are distributed when the 10R jackpot A is obtained, and 20 determination values are distributed when the 10R jackpot B is obtained. That is, when a lottery result of a big hit is obtained by a lottery based on the first special random number, there is an 80% probability of becoming a 10R big hit A and a 20% probability of becoming a 10R big hit B. On the other hand, in the jackpot symbol determination table to be compared with the second symbol random number, when the 15R jackpot is obtained, all 100 judgment values are distributed, and when the lottery result of the jackpot is obtained by the lottery based on the second special random number. Will always be a 15R jackpot.

Further, when a lottery result for a big hit is obtained, the game state after the big hit game state is completed is determined according to the type of the big hit. Then, in the big hit control process (step S40), after controlling the big hit game state, the time saving flag setting process is executed based on the determination result.

Specifically, when it is determined that the jackpot of "10R jackpot A" has been obtained, the time is shortened until the symbol variation of the special symbol is executed once after the jackpot game state for 10 rounds is executed. When it is determined that the jackpot of "10R jackpot B" has been obtained, it is controlled to the non-time saving state after the jackpot game state for 10 rounds is executed, and the jackpot of "15R jackpot" is obtained. When it is determined that the game has been performed, after the jackpot game state for 15 rounds is executed, the time is controlled until the symbol variation of the special symbol is executed once.

If the 10R jackpot A is determined in the first special symbol stop symbol setting process, the 10R jackpot A symbol is determined as the jackpot symbol, and if the 10R jackpot B is determined, the 10R jackpot B symbol is determined as the jackpot symbol. .. Further, when the 15R jackpot is determined in the second special symbol stop symbol setting process shown in FIG. 144 described later, the 15R jackpot symbol is determined as the jackpot symbol.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is determined to be a lost symbol when the jackpot flag is not set (step S136).

Then, after the determination process for the stop symbol is performed in this way, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines the lottery result (type of big hit, small hit, reach loss, or loss) as the process of step S137. A judgment result notification command corresponding to each lottery result is set so that the instruction (which may indicate the mode of the stop symbol of the first special symbol) is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. After that, as the process of step S138, this process ends when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first variation pattern setting process (step S82).

Peripheral control MPU1511a displays and controls the effect display device 1600 based on the received determination result notification command and variation pattern command (left, middle, and right decorative symbols are variablely displayed, and left decorative symbol → right decorative symbol → middle decoration. Stop and display in the order of the symbols (Note that the left, middle, and right decorative symbols may be displayed in a variable manner in synchronization with the same symbol and stopped and displayed at the same time). Specifically, when the peripheral control MPU1511a specifies 10R jackpot A out of jackpots from the received determination result notification command as an mode (stop symbol) when the variation of the decorative symbol displayed on the effect display device 1600 is stopped. Is determined to be the 10R jackpot A symbol (a combination in which the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are the same symbol among the symbols [1] to [8] except for [1]), and when the 10R jackpot B is specified. Is determined to be the 10R jackpot B symbol (a combination in which the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are the same symbol among the symbols [0] to [8] except for [1]), and when the 15R jackpot is specified, It is determined to be a 15R jackpot symbol (a combination in which the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are the same symbol among the symbols [0] to [8] except [1]). In addition, when the small hit is specified, the small hit symbol (combination in which the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are all [1]; [111]) is determined, and when the reach loss is specified, the reach is accompanied. If a lost symbol (a combination of the same symbols with the left and right decorative symbols [0] to [8] but different intermediate decorative symbols; a reach lost symbol) is determined and the loss is specified, It is decided to be a lost symbol without reach (a combination in which at least the left and right decorative symbols are different among the left, middle, and right decorative symbols), and when the variation time specified from the variation pattern command elapses (game effect) The determined stop symbol is displayed and controlled on the effect display device 1600 (at the end of).

FIG. 141 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first fluctuation pattern setting process (step S82).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first fluctuation pattern setting process should be performed, the jackpot flag is set in the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 as shown in FIG. 141. If this is done (step S141), the variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of jackpot according to the type of jackpot determined in step S132 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process is selected (step S142), and the reach flag is set. If it is set (step S145), the variation pattern table at the time of reach (not shown) is selected (step S146), and if neither the jackpot flag nor the reach flag is set, that is, a normal loss (reach effect). In the case of loss), a variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of loss is selected (step S147).

Then, the variation pattern to be executed is determined by comparing the selected variation pattern table with the variation random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal processing (step S148), and the determined variation pattern is started. A variation pattern command to be notified to the control board 1510 is set, and variation display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 1403 is started (step S149). Further, the main control MPU 1310a sets the fluctuation time set corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determined to determine the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation timer (step S150). As a result, the variation display control of the first special symbol is performed by the first special symbol display 1403 for the variation time determined in this way, and the effect control is performed by the effect display device 1600 in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol. Will be done.

In addition, a plurality of types of fluctuation pattern tables of this example are provided for each determination result based on a special random number (first special random number, second special random number) and a symbol random number (first symbol random number, second symbol random number). Further, in the fluctuation pattern set in each fluctuation pattern table, a plurality of fluctuation time information indicating a predetermined time (variation time) required for the fluctuation display control of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is described above. It is stored in a form associated with each variable random number. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a includes the selected variation pattern table and the variation random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal processing among the plurality of types of variation pattern tables according to the determination result based on the special random number and the symbol random number. By comparing the above and acquiring the fluctuation time information associated with the read fluctuation random number from this table, the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is determined. As a result, the lottery process for the variation pattern of the above special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed. The fluctuation pattern table is stored in the main control built-in ROM.

Further, in the variation pattern table at the time of reach of this example, it is set to determine the mode type of the reach effect to be executed by comparing the determination value indicating which reach effect is to be executed with the variable random number. .. For example, 164 types of variable random numbers out of 241 types of variable random numbers are set as judgment values (0 to 163) indicating that any of the normal reach effects is executed, and 59 types of variable random numbers are super reach with low jackpot expectation. It is set as a judgment value (164 to 222) indicating that any of the effects is executed, and a judgment value (223 to 240) indicating that 18 kinds of variable random numbers execute any of the super reach effects with high expectation of big hits. ) Is set. The super reach effect has a higher expectation of a big hit than the normal reach effect, and for a player who wants to generate a big hit game state, the player's expectation of the big hit game state when the super reach effect is executed is high. It is getting higher.

Further, as shown in FIG. 139 (D), in the fluctuation pattern table of this example, 10 seconds to 90 seconds are set as the fluctuation time corresponding to the first special random number in the non-time saving state, and 120 seconds is set in the time saving state. , 2 seconds is set in common for the non-time saving state and the time saving state as the fluctuation time corresponding to the second special random number.

Then, when the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is transferred to the first special symbol variation process (step S83) (step S155), this process is terminated.

FIG. 142 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol variation processing (step S83).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol variation processing should be performed, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first, as shown in FIG. 142, first steps S171. As the process of, the fluctuation timer in which the fluctuation time is set according to the fluctuation pattern determined in the lottery process (step S82) for the fluctuation pattern is subtracted by 1. Then, when it is determined that the fluctuation time timer is 0, that is, the lottery fluctuation time has elapsed (step S172), the process proceeds to step S173. That is, in the process of step S173, this process ends when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop process (step S84).

FIG. 143 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol stop process (step S84).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop process should be performed, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first, as shown in FIG. 143, first steps S181. As the process of, the display control for displaying the stop symbol determined in the first special symbol stop symbol setting process on the first special symbol display 1403 is performed, and the first special symbol is displayed on the effect display device 1600. A stop display command for instructing the derivation display of the display result of the decorative symbol corresponding to the stop symbol of is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S182).

Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 resets the time saving flag when the time saving flag is set (step S183) (step S185). As a result, when the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is executed once, the time saving control is terminated and the control in the non-time saving state is started.

Further, when the jackpot flag is set (step S186), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sets a jackpot start command indicating to start the jackpot game state (step S187), and the jackpot game The waiting time until the start of the state (the time for displaying the start of the big hit game state, etc.) is set in the interval timer (step S188). Although not shown, in step S188, a process of setting the number of rounds according to the type of jackpot in the jackpot count counter indicating the remaining number of rounds is also executed. The jackpot count counter is decremented by 1 each time a round is executed in the jackpot control process described later, and when the jackpot count counter becomes "0", it is determined that the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has executed the specified number of rounds. It is controlled to end the jackpot game state. Specifically, in the big hit control process described later, the big winning opening pre-opening process (step S91) and the big winning opening opening process (step S92) are repeatedly executed until the big hit count counter becomes "0", and the big winning opening is opened. When the round is completed in the opening processing (step S92), the jackpot counter is subtracted by 1 to become "0", and the game shifts to the large winning opening post-processing (step S93) to change the jackpot game state. Execute control to terminate.

Then, the jackpot executing flag indicating that the jackpot gaming state is being executed is set (step S189). The jackpot start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and is individually prepared according to the type of jackpot. In step S187, a jackpot start command (10R jackpot A start command, 10R jackpot B start command, 15R jackpot start command) is set according to the type of jackpot (10R jackpot A, 10R jackpot B, 15R jackpot). As a result, the effect of the jackpot game state according to the type of jackpot instructed by the jackpot start command is executed by the effect display device 1600, the lamp / LED, the speaker, and the like.

Further, the jackpot executing flag indicating that the jackpot game state is being executed is specifically set in the jackpot control process (step S40) after the jackpot opening post-processing (step S93) when the jackpot game state is terminated. Opening / closing control of the first big prize opening 2005 according to the type of big hit (for example, in the case of "15R big hit", after opening the first big winning opening 2005 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or the first big winning opening 2005 When the opening / closing pattern (opening / closing control that repeats the opening / closing pattern that closes when the first count sensor 4005a detects that 9 game balls have been won) is completed (all rounds that can be executed in the jackpot game state) It will be reset. By resetting the jackpot executing flag, the jackpot control process (step S40) is not executed in step S35 of the special symbol process process (step S14), while the first special symbol in the first special symbol display 1403 is prevented from being executed. The variable display of the second special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 1405 become feasible.

Further, when the jackpot flag is not set, that is, when a loss occurs, the process proceeds to step S194 without executing the processes of steps S187 to S189.

When the processes of steps S186 to S189 are executed, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 updates the first special symbol process flag so that the process shifts to the initial value of the first special symbol normal process. (Step S194), this process ends.

FIG. 144 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the second special symbol stop symbol setting process executed in the second special symbol process process (step S39).

As described above, the second special symbol process process is a program module that is substantially the same as the first special symbol process process, and the random numbers and tables used for judgment are different except for some processes. Only the processing different from the processing executed in the first special symbol process processing will be described.

As described above, the pachinko machine 1 of this example does not include a small hit as a result of the lottery process of the display mode when the variation display of the first special symbol is stopped, whereas the variation display of the second special symbol is stopped. Since a small hit is included as a result of the lottery process of the display mode at the time, in the second special symbol stop symbol setting process, a small hit is obtained as a result of the lottery process of the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped. It is also determined whether or not it has become. The determination of the lottery processing result is performed by determining whether or not the small hit flag is set.

Specifically, when the big hit flag is not set (step S131a), it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S133a), and when the small hit flag is set, FIG. 139 (step S131a). Fluctuation control of the second special symbol by selecting the small hit symbol determination table shown in C) and comparing the second special symbol random number read by the second special symbol normal processing (not shown) with the selected small hit symbol determination table. A small hit symbol as a stop mode (stop symbol of the second special symbol) is determined (step S134a).

As shown in FIG. 139 (D), the small hit symbol determination table is associated with a symbol random number (second symbol random number) according to the determination result (small hit A, small hit B, small hit C). It is remembered. In the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the type of small hit is determined by specifying the determination result associated with the acquired second symbol random number.

In particular,
1. 1. After opening the second prize opening 2005b for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when it is detected by the second count sensor 4005b that nine game balls have won in the second prize opening 2005b, the second prize opening 2005b is closed. When the game ball controlled to the small hit game state and accepted by the second big prize opening 2005b during the small hit game state is distributed to the V winning opening 2411, the first big winning opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example). After 28.5 seconds) or when it is detected by the first count sensor 4005a that nine game balls have won in the first big winning opening 2005, the opening and closing pattern is repeated 14 times to make the game ball the first. Small hit A that controls the big hit game state where it is possible (easy) to enter the big winning opening 2005 and controls the time saving state after the end of the big hit game state.
2. After opening the second prize opening 2005b for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when it is detected by the second count sensor 4005b that nine game balls have won in the second prize opening 2005b, the second prize opening 2005b is closed. When the game ball controlled to the small hit game state and accepted by the second big prize opening 2005b during the small hit game state is distributed to the V winning opening 2411, the first big winning opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example). After 28.5 seconds) or when it is detected by the first count sensor 4005a that nine game balls have won in the first prize opening 2005, the opening and closing pattern of closing the game balls is repeated nine times to make the game balls the first. Small hit B that controls the big hit game state where it is possible (easy) to enter the big winning opening 2005 and controls the time saving state after the end of the big hit game state.
3. 3. After opening the second prize opening 2005b for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when it is detected by the second count sensor 4005b that nine game balls have won in the second prize opening 2005b, the second prize opening 2005b is closed. When the game ball controlled to the small hit game state and accepted by the second big prize opening 2005b during the small hit game state is distributed to the V winning opening 2411, the first big winning opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example). After 28.5 seconds) or when it is detected by the first count sensor 4005a that nine game balls have won in the first big winning opening 2005, the opening and closing pattern of closing the game is repeated four times to make the game ball the first. Small hit C that controls the big hit game state where it is possible (easy) to enter the big winning opening 2005 and controls the time saving state after the end of the big hit game state.

In the small hit symbol determination table to be compared with the second symbol random number, 10 judgment values are distributed when the small hit is A, and 20 judgment values are distributed when the small hit is B. When the hit is C, 70 determination values are distributed. That is, when a lottery result of a small hit is obtained by a lottery based on the second special random number, there is a 10% probability of a small hit A, a 20% probability of a small hit B, and a 70% probability of a small hit. It becomes B.

In addition, when a lottery result for a small hit is obtained, the game ball accepted in the second large winning opening 2005b during the small hit game state is distributed to the V winning opening 2411 according to the type of small hit. The game state after the end of the big hit game state that occurs is determined. Then, in the big hit control process (step S40), the big hit game state is controlled based on the fact that the game balls accepted by the second big winning opening 2005b are distributed to the V winning opening 2411 during the small hit game state. After that, the time saving flag setting process is executed based on the determination result.

Specifically, when it is determined that a small hit of "small hit A" has been obtained, the time is shortened until the symbol change of the special symbol is executed once after the big hit game state for 15 rounds is executed. When it is controlled to the state and it is judged that the small hit of "small hit B" is obtained, the time is shortened until the symbol change of the special symbol is executed once after the big hit game state for 10 rounds is executed. When it is controlled to the state and it is judged that the small hit of "small hit C" is obtained, the time is shortened until the symbol change of the special symbol is executed once after the big hit game state for 5 rounds is executed. Controlled by the state.

If the small hit A is determined in the second special symbol stop symbol setting process, the small hit A symbol is determined as the small hit symbol, and if the small hit B is determined, the small hit B symbol is selected as the small hit symbol. If it is determined and the small hit C is determined, the small hit C symbol is determined as the small hit symbol.

FIG. 145 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the second variation pattern setting process executed in the second special symbol process process (step S39).

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has a small hit flag when the big hit flag is not set in the second fluctuation pattern setting process (step S141a) and a small hit flag is set (step S143a). A variation pattern table (not shown) is selected (step S144a).

Then, the variation pattern to be executed is determined by comparing the selected variation pattern table with the variation random number read in the second special symbol normal processing (step S148a), and the determined variation pattern is started by the peripheral control board 1510. The variation pattern command to be notified to is set to start the variation display of the second special symbol displayed on the second special symbol display 1405 (step S149a). Further, the main control MPU 1310a sets the fluctuation time set corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determined to determine the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation timer (step S150a). As a result, the variation display control of the second special symbol is performed by the second special symbol display 1405 for the variation time determined in this way, and the effect control is performed by the effect display device 1600 in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol. Will be done.

FIG. 146 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the second special symbol stop process executed in the second special symbol process process (step S39).

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 indicates that the small hit gaming state is started when the big hit flag is not set (step S186a) and when the small hit flag is set (step S190a). The small hit start command is set (step S191a), and the waiting time until the start of the small hit game state (time for displaying the start of the small hit game state, etc.) is set in the interval timer (step S192a). Then, the small hit execution flag indicating that the small hit game state is being executed is set (step S193a). The small hit start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and is individually prepared according to the type of small hit. In step S191a, a small hit start command (small hit A start command, small hit B start command, small hit C start command) is set according to the type of small hit (small hit A, small hit B, small hit C). .. As a result, the effect of the small hit game state according to the type of the small hit instructed by the small hit start command is executed by the effect display device 1600, the lamp / LED, the speaker, and the like.

Further, the small hit execution flag indicating that the small hit game state is being executed is set when the small hit game state is terminated, specifically, the small hit middle process (step S41) of the small hit control process (step S41) described later. After opening / closing control of the second big winning opening 2005b according to the type of small hit in step S401) (for example, in the case of "small hit C", the second big winning opening 2005b is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or It is reset when the opening / closing control (opening / closing control) of closing when the second count sensor 4005b detects that nine game balls have won in the second large winning opening 2005b) is completed. By resetting the small hit execution flag, the small hit control process (step S41) is not executed in step S36 of the special symbol process process (step S14), while the first in the first special symbol display 1403. The variable display of the special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 1405 become feasible.

Further, when the small hit flag is not set, that is, when a loss occurs, the process proceeds to step S194a without executing the processes of steps S190a to S193a.

FIG. 147 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the jackpot control process (step S40). In the jackpot control process, one of the following three process processes is selectively executed according to the jackpot process flag.

1. 1. The peripheral control board notifies the player that the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) shifts to the jackpot game state based on the mode when the variable display is stopped is the jackpot symbol. Pre-processing for opening the large winning opening (step S91), which waits until the 1510 is performed or until the next round is started.
2. The first big winning opening 2005 is controlled based on the fact that the mode when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped is a big hit symbol, or the first big winning opening 2005 is started based on the start of the next round. The first count sensor 4005a indicates that nine game balls have won a prize in the first prize opening 2005 or after the first prize opening 2005 has been opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds). Processing during opening of the large winning opening to close when detected (step S92)
3. 3. Post-processing after opening the big winning opening, which waits until the peripheral control board 1510 notifies the player that the big hit game state ends when all the rounds are finished (step S93).
The jackpot process flag is operated so as to indicate that the jackpot opening pre-opening process (step S91) should be performed in the process of step S1 (see FIG. 131).

FIG. 148 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the small hit control process (step S41). In the small hit process, one of the following two process processes is selectively executed according to the small hit process flag.

1. 1. Small hit start process (step S400) to execute the setting process for starting the small hit game state
2. Small hit medium processing (step S401) for monitoring the entry and opening time of the game ball during the small hit game state.

The small hit process flag is operated to indicate that the small hit start process (step S400) should be performed in the process of step S1 (see FIG. 131).

FIG. 149 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the small hit start process (step S400).

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first subtracts 1 from the interval timer indicating the waiting time until the start of the small hit game state as the process of step S411, and if this interval timer has not timed out (NO in step S412). ) Ends the process without executing the subsequent process. The interval timer is set based on the fact that the small hit flag is set when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is stopped as described above (second special symbol stop processing).

On the other hand, if the interval timer has timed out (YES in step S412), the opening time of the second big winning opening 2005b is set in the opening timer (step S413), and after setting the small hit opening effect command (step). S415), the second grand prize opening 2005b is controlled to be in an open state (step S416).

After that, when the small hit process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the small hit middle process (step S401) (step S417), this process ends.

FIG. 150 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the small hit medium processing (step S401).

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first determines whether or not the number of game balls accepted into the second grand prize opening 2005b by the second count sensor 4005b as the process of step S421 has reached "9". When the number of game balls accepted into the second prize opening 2005b reaches "9", the process proceeds to step S427.

If the number of game balls accepted into the second major winning opening 2005b in step S421 has not reached "9", the second major winning opening 2005b is controlled to the open state and then to the closed state. The release timer indicating the release time up to is subtracted by 1 (step S425), it is determined whether or not the release timer has timed out (step S426), and if it has not timed out (NO in step S426), the subsequent processing. The process is completed without executing the above, and if the time-out has occurred (YES in step S426), the process proceeds to step S427.

Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 resets the small hit execution flag (step S427) and controls the open second special winning opening 2005b to the closed state (step S428).

At this time, if the game ball has entered the V winning opening 2411 (step S429), a 1R end command indicating that one round of the big hit game state is ended (step S430) is set, and until the big hit game state starts. After setting the waiting time in the interval timer (step S431), the above-mentioned jackpot executing flag and the accessory winning flag indicating that the jackpot game state has been reached based on the V winning during the small hit game state are set. (Step S432). The accessory winning flag is used to determine whether the jackpot game state is reached or the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed and the jackpot game state is reached based on the V winning during the small hit game state in the jackpot control process (step S40). , When the character winning flag is set, when the 15R jackpot game state is executed, it is notified as if the second round of the 15R jackpot game state, which is executed over 15 rounds, is being executed. The player comes to recognize that the 15R big hit game state is executed including the small hit game state.

Although not shown, in step S431, the number of unexecuted rounds out of the number of big hit rounds according to the type of small hit (the number of remaining rounds when the small hit game state is one round (for example, V winning opening 2411) If the small hit A controls the 15R big hit game state based on the entry of the game ball, the number of remaining rounds is 14))) is set in the big hit counter indicating the remaining number of rounds. As described above, the jackpot count counter is decremented by 1 each time a round is executed in the jackpot control process, and when the jackpot count counter becomes "0", the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has a specified number of rounds. Is determined to have executed and the jackpot game state is terminated.

When the process of step S432 is completed or when it is determined in step S429 that there is no V prize, the small hit process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the small hit start process (step S400) (step). S417), this process is terminated.

FIG. 151 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the normal symbol process process (step S15).

Now, if it is determined in the process of step S801 that the detection signal by the gate sensor 4003 is in the ON state and the game ball has passed through the gate portion 2003, as shown in FIG. 151, the main As the process of step S802, the main control MPU 1310a of the control board 1310 first executes a gate passage process such as acquiring a normal random number of a normal symbol from the random number counter and storing it in the normal symbol hold storage area of the RAM. do.

Next, in the normal symbol process process, one of the following five process processes is selectively executed according to the normal symbol process flag.

1. 1. A normal symbol normal process (step S803) in which a normal random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is read, and a lottery process for displaying the display mode when the fluctuation control of the normal symbol is stopped is performed based on the read normal random number.
2. Normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination process (step S804) in which a lottery process or the like is performed for the fluctuation mode (variation time) of the normal symbol displayed on the normal symbol display based on the normal symbol fluctuation random number.
3. 3. Normal symbol fluctuation processing (step S805) that waits until the fluctuation display of the above normal symbol on the normal symbol display is stopped.
4. The variation display of the normal symbol is displayed so that the mode when the variation control of the normal symbol is stopped, which is determined based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the variation control of the normal symbol is stopped, is displayed on the normal symbol display. Normal symbol stop processing to stop (step S806)
5. When the result of the lottery process for the mode when the fluctuation control of the normal symbol is stopped is a mode suggesting "hit the normal figure", the process of controlling the acceptance of the game ball to the second starting port 2004 is executed. Ordinary electric accessory opening process (step S807)

The normal symbol process flag is operated to indicate that the normal symbol normal process (step S803) should be performed in the process of step S1 (see FIG. 131).

FIG. 152 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the gate portion passing process (step S802).

Now, assuming that the detection signal by the gate sensor 4003 is in the ON state in the process of step S801 and it is determined that the game ball has passed through the gate portion 2003, as shown in FIG. 152, the above As the process of step S811, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first acquires a counter value by a normal hold number counter indicating the number of normal random numbers stored in the normal symbol hold storage area from the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a. Then, based on this counter value, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved storages of the normal symbol is "4", which is the maximum value.

In the process of step S811, when it is determined that the reserved storage number of the normal symbol is not the maximum value, the following steps S812 to S814 are set in order to newly put the fluctuation display control of the normal symbol into the hold state. Will be processed. That is, first, as the process of step S812, the normal hold number counter is counted up (added by 1). Next, as the process of step S813, the ordinary random number and the normal figure variation random number are acquired from the random number counter. Next, as the process of step S814, each random number thus acquired is stored in the normal symbol hold storage area corresponding to the counter value by the normal hold number counter in the RAM storage area of the main control MPU 1310a.

However, in the process of step S811, when it is determined that the reserved storage number of the ordinary symbol is the maximum value, the variation display control of the ordinary symbol is not newly suspended. That is, by not executing the processes of steps S812 to S814 (the above-mentioned ordinary random number and the above-mentioned ordinary figure variation random number are not acquired from the above-mentioned random number counter), the variation display control of the above-mentioned ordinary symbol is not newly put on hold.

The gate portion passing process (step S802) may be performed by another example described below. For example, assuming that the detection signal by the gate sensor 4003 is in the ON state and it is determined that the game ball has passed through the gate unit 2003, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first has the above-mentioned normal. Random numbers and the above-mentioned normal-figure fluctuation random numbers are acquired from the above-mentioned random number counter and stored in the provisional storage area. After that, the counter value by the normal hold number counter is acquired from the RAM of the main control MPU1310a, and based on this counter value, it is determined whether or not the hold storage number of the normal symbol is the maximum value "4". conduct. Then, when it is determined that the hold storage number of the normal symbol is not the maximum value, the normal hold number counter is counted up (1 addition) in order to newly put the fluctuation display control of the normal symbol into the hold state. ), Then, the above-mentioned ordinary random number and the above-mentioned ordinary figure variable random number (the above-mentioned ordinary random number stored in the provisional storage area and the above-mentioned ordinary figure variable random number) are selected from the storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a. It is stored in the normal symbol hold storage area corresponding to the counter value by the above-mentioned normal hold number counter. On the other hand, as a result of acquiring the counter value by the normal hold number counter from the RAM of the main control MPU1310a, when it is determined that this counter value is the maximum value "4" (the hold storage number of the normal symbol is the hold storage number). In the case of the maximum value), the previously acquired ordinary random number and the ordinary symbol variation random number are discarded without being stored in the ordinary symbol hold storage area, and the variation display control of the acquired ordinary symbol is newly performed. You may decide not to put it on hold.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 executes whether or not the display result of the variation display of the ordinary symbol is a normal figure based on the ordinary random number and the ordinary fluctuation random number acquired in step S813. Executes the normal symbol pre-judgment process to determine the pre-judgment information such as the mode type of the symbol variation (type of the normal symbol variation pattern) before starting the normal symbol variation according to the passage of the game ball to the gate portion 2003. After that (step S815), the process ends.

FIG. 153 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the general figure pre-determination process (step S815). When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts the normal figure pre-determination process, it compares the normal figure pre-determination table (not shown) with the random numbers acquired in step S813, specifically, ordinary random numbers and ordinary variable random numbers. By (step S881), it is specified whether or not the normal symbol hits, and if it hits the normal figure, the type of the normal symbol hit and the mode type of the normal symbol variation to be executed (step S881).

Then, the specified pre-judgment information of the normal symbol (whether or not it is a normal symbol, the type of the normal symbol if it is a hit, the mode type of the normal symbol change to be executed, etc.) and the hold memory of the normal symbol are stored. Set the number (normally held number counter value) and the general map pre-judgment command according to it.

Then, in the above-mentioned normal symbol command control process (step S17), the normal symbol pre-determination command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, so that in addition to the reserved storage number of the normal symbol, the generated gate unit 2003 is reached. Whether or not the display result of the variation display of the normal symbol based on the passage of the game ball is the normal symbol, if it is the normal symbol, the type of the normal symbol, the mode type of the normal symbol variation to be executed, etc. The peripheral control MPU 1511a mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 can grasp the figure pre-determination information before starting the normal symbol variation according to the passage of the game ball to the gate portion 2003.

When the peripheral control MPU 1511a mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 receives the normal map pre-determination command from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control MPU 1511a stores the normal map pre-determination information indicated by the received normal map pre-determination command. There is. Specifically, the peripheral control RAM 1511c of the peripheral control MPU 1511a is provided with a normal map reservation storage area for storing the normal map pre-determination information.

Further, the normal figure reservation storage area has 1 to 4 storage areas corresponding to the number of reserved storages, and the peripheral control MPU1511a is the first (most) the normal figure pre-determination information indicated by the received normal figure pre-determination command. Store in order from the previous) storage area. Then, when the normal figure pre-determination command is received when the normal figure pre-determination information is stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area, the n + 1th (n = 1 to 3) storage area is notified. The pre-judgment information of the normal symbol is stored, and when the normal symbol variation display start notification is received, it is stored in the first storage area of the normal symbol hold storage area according to the received normal diagram fluctuation pattern command. The F-figure pre-judgment information that has been stored is discarded and the P-figure pre-judgment information stored in the Nth (N = 2-4) storage area is stored in the N-1st (N = 2-4) th storage area. (Shifts the Fuzu pre-judgment information stored in the Fuzu hold storage area). As a result, the normal symbol pre-determination information of the normal symbol is stored so as to be able to specify the order in which the hold of the normal symbol change occurs, and is discarded in order from the earliest normal symbol pre-determination information.

In this way, when the normal symbol fluctuation is put on hold, the probability of the normal symbol fluctuation per normal symbol (pseudo) is maintained even though the normal symbol fluctuation is maintained in the unexecuted state (pending state). The winning probability) can be notified in advance at a predetermined timing, for example, when a new output of the hold display or a shift display of the hold display according to the hold digestion is displayed. become. Specifically, the peripheral control MPU1511a suggests that it is a normal hit when it receives a normal figure pre-judgment command indicating that the result of the lottery process (normal judgment) for the normal symbol is a normal hit during the chance mode. If it is decided to execute a lottery as to whether or not to execute, and as a result of the lottery, it is decided to execute an effect suggesting that it is a normal hit, the normal figure reservation display area 1609 corresponding to the normal figure pre-judgment command (FIG. 165). The display mode of (see) is changed to a special mode different from the usual one for display. In this example, a circle filled in blue is displayed as a normal display mode of the general drawing reservation display area 1609, and a circle filled in red is displayed as a special mode different from the usual one. In addition, even if the peripheral control MPU1511a receives a normal figure pre-judgment command indicating that the result of the lottery process (normal judgment) for the normal symbol is a normal loss during the chance mode, it is not actually a normal hit, but it is normal. A lottery is performed to determine whether or not to execute an effect that suggests that it is a hit, and if it is decided to execute an effect that suggests that it is a normal hit as a result of the lottery, the normal figure corresponding to the pre-judgment command is used. Figure The display mode of the hold display area 1609 is changed to a special mode for display. However, when the normal symbol pre-judgment command indicating that the result of the lottery process (normal judgment) for the normal symbol is received is received, the result of the lottery process (normal judgment) for the normal symbol is a normal hit. The percentage determined to perform an effect suggesting that it is a normal hit is lower than when the normal figure pre-judgment command indicating that is received, so that a special aspect is displayed in the normal figure hold display area 1609. If it is done, it is possible to improve the expectation for the occurrence of a normal hit and, by extension, a big hit of the second special symbol.

In addition, the effect suggesting that it is a normal hit is not limited to the above-mentioned one, but a special sound (for example, picopicone, etc.) is output based on the reception of the normal figure pre-judgment command, or (normal hit). If the effect suggesting that is not executed, the sound may not be output, or the sound different from the special sound (picot, etc.) may be output), the door frame 3 and the game board 5. The lamps, LEDs, etc. provided in the above have a special light emission pattern (when the effect suggesting that the hit is normal, the lamps, LEDs, etc. are not turned on, while suggesting that the hit is normal. If you want to perform the effect, make the lamp or LED blink multiple times in a short time) or a special emission color (if you do not perform the effect that suggests that it is a normal hit, make the lamp or LED blue. On the other hand, if you want to perform an effect that suggests that it is a normal hit, you may also execute something that makes the lamp, LED, etc. light up in red). , It is also possible to execute an effect suggesting that it is a normal hit by executing a combination of a plurality of these.

FIG. 154 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the normal symbol normal processing (step S803).

When the normal symbol process flag indicates that the normal symbol normal process should be performed, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first, as the process of step S821, as shown in FIG. 154. Based on the counter value of the normal hold number counter, it is determined whether or not there is variable display control of the normal symbol in the hold state. As a result, when it is determined that there is a variable display control of the normal symbol in the hold state, then, as the process of step S822, the normal symbol is stored in the normal symbol hold storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a. The random number stored in the earliest storage area among the random numbers (for example, ordinary random numbers and ordinary random numbers) related to the display mode of the symbol is read from the RAM. Next, as the processing of steps S823 and S824, when the normal hold number counter is counted down and the variation display of the normal symbol stored in each storage area of the RAM of the main control FIFO 1310a is stopped. Random numbers (ordinary random numbers, random numbers that fluctuate in the normal map) related to the display mode in the above are shifted in the first-in first-out (First-In First-Out) mode.

Specifically, the normal symbol reservation storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4, and random numbers extracted according to the passage of the game ball to the gate portion 2003 are sequentially extracted from the first (first) area. Remember. Then, when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003 when the random number is stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area, the random number extracted in the n + 1th (n = 1 to 3) storage area is stored. When the start condition of the variable display based on the random number stored in the first storage area is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read and the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area is stored. The various random numbers stored in are moved to the N-1st (N = 2-4) th storage area. As a result, the order in which the fluctuation display control hold of the normal symbol occurs can be identifiable and stored, and the hold of the fluctuation display control is released in order from the earliest hold (hold that occurred first). ..

Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 compares the normal figure hit determination table shown in FIG. 155 (A) with the ordinary random number read in step S822 (step S828).

The normal figure hit determination table shown in FIG. 155 (A) is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU 1310a. Then, in the normal random number hit judgment table referred to for comparison with the normal random number, one kind of normal random number matches the normal figure hit judgment value indicating that the normal random number was won, and 19 kinds of normal random numbers are usually used. The above ordinary random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the normal figure loss determination value indicating that the figure is lost.

When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is determined to be a normal figure hit as a result of comparison between the normal figure hit determination table and the ordinary random number read in step S822 of the normal symbol normal processing (step S829), A flag per normal symbol is set to indicate that the fluctuation is won per normal symbol (step S830), and the symbol per normal symbol is determined as the mode (stop symbol of the normal symbol) when the fluctuation control of the normal symbol is stopped. (Step S831). On the other hand, if it is determined in step S829 that the normal symbol is not hit, the normal symbol is determined to be a normal symbol lost symbol as the mode (stop symbol of the normal symbol) when the fluctuation control of the normal symbol is stopped (step S833).

Then, after the lottery process for the normal symbol is performed in this way, as the process of step S834, a lottery is performed so that these lottery results (instructing either a normal figure hit or a loss) are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Set the general map judgment result notification command according to each result. After that, as the process of step S835, this process ends when the above-mentioned ordinary symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the above-mentioned ordinary symbol variation pattern determination process (step S804).

FIG. 156 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the normal symbol variation pattern determination process (step S804). When the normal symbol process flag indicates that the normal symbol variation pattern determination process should be performed, the time saving flag is set in the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 as shown in FIG. 156. If (step S841), the normal symbol variation pattern determination table for the time saving shown in FIG. 157 is selected (step S842), and if the time saving flag is set (step S841), the normal symbol variation pattern for the non-time saving shown in FIG. The symbol variation pattern determination table is selected (step S843).

Then, the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol (normal symbol fluctuation pattern) to be executed is determined by comparing the selected normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination table with the normal symbol fluctuation random number read in step S822 of the normal symbol normal processing (step S844). ), Set the normal symbol variation pattern command to notify the peripheral control board 1510 of the start of the normal symbol variation due to the determined normal symbol variation pattern, and start the variation display of the normal symbol displayed on the normal symbol display 1402 (). Step S845). The peripheral control MPU 1511a mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 includes the normal symbol determination result notification command set in step S834 of the normal symbol normal processing and the normal symbol fluctuation pattern command set in step S845 of the normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination process. By receiving The display device 1600 starts the variable display of the normal symbol, and when the fluctuation time of the normal symbol specified by the normal symbol fluctuation pattern command elapses, the stop symbol of the normal symbol specified by the normal symbol judgment result notification command is displayed. Displayed on device 1600.

Further, when the main control MPU 1310a determines the normal map fluctuation pattern, the normal map fluctuation time corresponding to the determined normal map fluctuation pattern is set in the normal map fluctuation timer (step S846). As a result, the effect control is performed by the normal symbol display 1402 (variation display of the normal symbol in) and the effect display device 1600 (variation display of the decorative ordinary symbol in) for the normal symbol variation time according to the determined normal symbol variation pattern. Will be done.

As shown in FIG. 157, in this example, a normal symbol variation pattern determination table at the time saving time and a normal symbol variation pattern determination table at the non-time saving time are provided. Then, in the normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination table during non-time reduction, the distribution of judgment values is set to be different from that of the normal symbol fluctuation time determination table during time reduction, so that the normal symbol fluctuation time of ordinary symbols is different. ing. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 157, in the normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination table at the time saving time, the time saving time loss fluctuation pattern set to 2 seconds as the normal symbol fluctuation time at the time of losing the normal symbol is determined. While the value distribution is set, the non-time saving time loss fluctuation pattern determination table shows the non-time saving time loss fluctuation pattern 1 set to 4 seconds as the normal symbol fluctuation time when the normal symbol is lost. The distribution of the determination value is set for the non-time saving time loss fluctuation pattern 2 set to 5 seconds. That is, the normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination table in the time saving time is set so that the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is extremely short as compared with the normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination table in the non-time saving time. The normal symbol variation pattern determination table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU 1310a.

Further, when the variation display control of the normal symbol is started, the process is transferred to the normal symbol variation process (step S805) as the process of step S847, when the above-mentioned ordinary symbol process flag is updated. End the process.

FIG. 158 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the normal symbol variation processing (step S805). When the normal symbol process flag indicates that the normal symbol variation process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 158, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first performs the process of step S851. The normal map fluctuation timer for which the normal map fluctuation time is set in step S846 is subtracted by 1. Then, when it is determined that the normal symbol fluctuation time timer is 0, that is, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol has elapsed (step S852), the following steps S853 to S856 are performed.

That is, first, as the process of step S853, the display control for displaying the stop symbol of the normal symbol determined in the normal symbol normal process on the normal symbol display 1402 is performed, and the effect display device 1600 is normally displayed. Stopping the symbol A normal symbol stop display command for instructing the derivation display of the display result of the decorative normal symbol according to the symbol is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S854). Further, in step S853, a predetermined normal symbol confirmation time (0.5 seconds in this example) is set in the normal symbol stop timer 1 as a time for maintaining the stop symbol of the normal symbol displayed on the normal symbol display 1402. (Step S855). As a result, after stopping the variable display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 1402, the normal symbol display 1402 is controlled to display the stopped symbol of the normal symbol for a predetermined normal symbol confirmation time. Next, in the process of step S856, this process ends when the above-mentioned ordinary symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the above-mentioned ordinary symbol stop process (step S806).

FIG. 159 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the normal symbol stop processing (step S806). When the normal symbol process flag indicates that the normal symbol stop process should be performed, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first, as the process of step S861, as shown in FIG. 159. In step S855 of the normal symbol variation process, the normal symbol stop timer for which the predetermined normal symbol confirmation time is set is subtracted by 1. Then, when the normal symbol stop timer is set to 0, that is, when it is determined that the predetermined normal symbol confirmation time has elapsed (step S862), the display control of the stop symbol of the normal symbol displayed on the normal symbol display 1402 is performed. Is terminated, and a command for confirming the display result of the decorative ordinary symbol according to the stop symbol of the ordinary symbol displayed on the effect display device 1600 is set as a command for the peripheral control board 1510. (Step S863).

Next, when the above-mentioned normal figure hit flag is set (step S864), the second start port according to the current gaming state is used by using the normal figure hit open pattern table shown in FIG. 155 (B). The advance / retreat pattern of the door 2022 is set (step S865).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 155 (B), if the second start door 2022 is controlled to be in a non-time saving state at the start of opening, the advance / retreat pattern A is set as the opening pattern of the second start door 2022. do. That is, if the second start door 2022 is controlled to be in a non-time saving state at the start of the advance / retreat operation, the second start door 2022 is short when a lottery result that is a normal figure is obtained by a lottery based on ordinary random numbers. The advance / retreat pattern A that advances / retreats in the advance / retreat mode (0.2 seconds in this example) is executed.

On the other hand, if the current gaming state is controlled to a time saving state at the start of the advancing / retreating operation of the second starting door 2022, the advancing / retreating pattern B is set as the opening pattern of the second starting door 2022. That is, if the time is controlled at the start of the advance / retreat operation of the second start door 2022, the second start door 2022 advances / retreats long when a lottery result that is a normal figure is obtained by a lottery based on ordinary random numbers. The advance / retreat pattern B that advances / retreats in the mode (6 seconds in this example) is executed.

When the advance / retreat pattern of the second start door 2022 is set, next, as the process of step S886, a normal figure hit start command indicating that the game per normal figure is started is set, and the normal symbol process flag is set to the normal electric function. This process ends when the process is updated so as to shift to the product release process (step S867). The normal figure hit start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the effect of the normal figure hit game according to the type of the normal figure hit instructed by the normal figure hit start command is produced by the effect display device 1600. It is executed by lamps, LEDs, speakers, and the like.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has updated the normal symbol process flag so that the process shifts to the normal symbol normal process, which is the initial value, when the normal symbol hit flag is not set in step S864. At this point (step S868), this process ends.

FIG. 160 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the ordinary electric accessory opening process (step S807).

Now, if it is determined in the process of step S871 that the second start port door 2022 is in the protruding state and the second start port 2004 is in the open state, as shown in FIG. 160, the main control When a predetermined time (opening time of the second starting port 2004 in the advance / retreat pattern set in step S865) elapses after the main control MPU 1310a of the board 1310 starts the open state of the second starting port 2004 (step S872). This process ends when the second start port door 2022 is retracted to control the open second start port 2004 to the closed state (step S873).

Further, if it is determined in the process of step S871 that the second start port door 2022 is in the retracted state and the second start port 2004 is in the closed state, as shown in FIG. 160, the main control When it is time to open the second start door 2022 (step S874), the main control MPU 1310a of the board 1310 advances the second start door 2022 to close the second start door 2022. When the open state is controlled (step S875), this process ends.

Further, if it is determined in the process of step S871 that it is not the timing to open the second starting port 2004, as shown in FIG. 160, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is the second. When the number of times the start port 2004 is opened reaches a predetermined number of times (the number of times the advance / retreat operation of the second start port door 2022 is opened in the advance / retreat pattern set in step S8865) (step S876), the end command per normal figure is set (step S877). ). Then, when the normal symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the normal symbol normal process which is the initial value (step S878), this process ends. It should be noted that the normal figure hit end command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and when the peripheral control board 1510 receives the normal figure hit end command, the effect display device 1600, the lamp / LED, the speaker, etc. are used to produce the normal figure hit game. To finish.

[10. Peripheral control board control processing]
Next, the processing executed by the peripheral control MPU 1511a mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 will be described. FIG. 161 is a flowchart showing a processing procedure for the control performed by the peripheral control MPU 1511a mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1.

As shown in FIG. 161, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the peripheral control MPU1511a performs the initial setting process (step S501). In this initial setting process, a process of clearing the RAM built in the peripheral control MPU 1511a mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 is performed. Note that interrupts are prohibited during this initial setting process, and interrupts are permitted after the initial setting process. When the initial setting process (step S501) is completed, the loop process for monitoring whether or not the 16 mS progress flag T is set is started (step S502).

In this embodiment, the peripheral control MPU1511a generates an interrupt every time 2 mS elapses and executes a 2 mS steady process. In the 2mS steady processing, the processing of counting up the 16mS progress monitoring counter (adding 1 to the 16mS progress monitoring counter) is executed, and when the value of the 16mS progress monitoring counter becomes 8, that is, when 16 mS has elapsed, 16 mS has elapsed. Along with setting the flag T, the process of resetting (setting 0) the 16 mS progress monitoring counter is executed. As described above, the 16 mS progress flag T is set (set) to "1" every 16 mS in the 2 mS steady processing, and is usually set (reset) to "0". When the 16 mS progress flag is set in step S502 (16 mS progress flag T is "1"), after resetting the 16 mS progress flag (step S503), 16 mS steady processing is performed (step S504).

In this 16 mS steady-state process, a process of controlling the effect display device 1600, the lamp / LED, the speaker, and the like is executed based on the command received from the main control board 1310. When the 16 mS steady processing is completed, the process returns to step S502 again, and the above steps S503 to S504 are repeated every time the 16 mS progress flag T is set, that is, every 16 mS. On the other hand, when the 16 mS progress flag T is not set in step S502 (the 16 mS progress flag T is “0”), the loop process is performed until the 16 mS progress flag T is set.

FIG. 162 is a flowchart showing an example of a 16 mS steady-state process executed every 16 mS in the sub-main process. In the 16mS steady processing, the peripheral control MPU1511a executes the processing of steps S601 to S606. In the command analysis process of step S601, the command received from the main control board 1310 is analyzed. In the effect control process of step S602, the effect is produced based on the reception of the variation pattern command transmitted by being set in the variation pattern setting process (step S149 of the first variation pattern setting process, the second variation pattern setting process). The control process related to the display device 1600 is executed.

Further, in the sound control process of step S603, the control process related to the speaker provided in the pachinko machine 1 is executed. In the lamp control process of step S604, the control process related to the lamp / LED provided in the pachinko machine 1 is executed. In the information output process of step S605, a process of transmitting a lamp / LED lighting signal to the lamp drive board 4170 is executed. In the random number update process of step S606, a process of updating the random numbers used for various settings in the effect control process (step S602) is executed.

The processing of steps S601 to S606 in the 16mS steady processing is completed within 16mS. Even if it takes 16 mS or more from the start of the 16 mS steady process to the end of the 16 mS steady process, the 16 mS steady process is immediately started from the beginning (command of step S601) when 16 mS elapses after the start of the 16 mS steady process. Do not execute (from the analysis process). That is, when 16 mS elapses during the execution of the 16 mS steady process, only the 16 mS elapse flag is set, and when it is determined in step S502 that the 16 mS elapse flag is set after the end of the 16 mS steady process, the 16 mS steady process is performed. To start.

Further, in this embodiment, the random number update process (step S606) is executed in the 16 mS steady-state process to update various random numbers, but the timing (timing) for updating various random numbers is limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, various random numbers may be updated in either or both of the loop processing and the 16mS steady processing in the sub-main processing.

FIG. 163 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control process (step S602).

In the effect control process, the peripheral control MPU 1511a selectively executes one of the following five process processes according to the effect process flag indicating the progress of the game stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control board 1510. Will be done.

1. 1. Fluctuation pattern command (first variation pattern command for instructing the variation pattern of the first special symbol, second) for instructing the variation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) analyzed by the above command analysis process. After performing processing to control the effect display device 1600, LED, speaker 921, etc. based on the second variation pattern command) that indicates the variation pattern of the special symbol, the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the process during the variation effect. Variable production start process (step S711)
2. The elapsed time from the start of control of the effect display device 1600, the LED, the speaker 921, etc. is measured, and the effect display device 1600, the LED, the speaker 921, etc. are controlled according to the elapsed time. The variable effect in-process (step S712) of changing the effect process flag to a value corresponding to the variable end process according to the elapse of the variable time according to the variable pattern of the first special symbol and the second special symbol).
3. 3. Processing for deriving and displaying a predetermined display result based on the reception of the stop display command instructing to stop the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol), and if there is a loss, the above effect Change the process flag to a value according to the variable effect start process, change it to a value according to the big hit effect process if it is a big hit, and change it to a value according to the small hit effect process if it is a small hit. (Step S713)
4. Based on the reception of the jackpot start command instructing the start of the jackpot game state, the effect display device 1600 performs a process for executing display control during the jackpot game state, and when the jackpot game state ends, the above effect process Jackpot effect process (step S714) that changes the flag to a value corresponding to the variable effect start process.
5. Based on the reception of the small hit start command instructing the start of the small hit game state, the effect display device 1600 performs a process for executing the display control during the small hit game state, and the second is performed during the small hit game state. If the game ball accepted in the big winning opening 2005b is distributed to the V winning opening 2411, the above-mentioned effect process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the big hit effect start process when the small hit game state is ended, and the game ball is set. If it is not distributed to the V winning opening 2411, the small hit effect process (step S715) is changed to a value corresponding to the variable effect start process.

By the above processing, the effect is synchronized with the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) executed by the special symbol display (first special symbol display 1403, second special symbol display 1405). The display device 1600 will execute variable display of decorative symbols.

[11. About games in chance mode and winning right exercise time]
In the present embodiment, the game is started in the normal mode, the jackpot is won during the normal mode, and a time saving state occurs after the jackpot game state, so that the game shifts to the chance mode, which is more advantageous than the normal mode, and the chance mode is set. When the second hold memory is generated during the process, the time shifts to the winning right exercise time. A game in such a chance mode and the winning right exercise time will be described with reference to FIG. 164.

First, when the first special symbol is variablely displayed in the normal mode (non-time saving state) and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed at the jackpot symbol, the first prize opening 2005 is set as each round game in the jackpot game state. In the open state (evacuated state), the game balls must be driven one after another on the right side of the center accessory 2500 in order to allow a large number of game balls to enter the first major winning opening 2005 in the open state. As described above, when the game ball is driven into the right side of the center accessory 2500, about 2/100 of the game balls distributed to the side of the first passage 2012 by the distribution member 2011 always move forward and backward. The game ball enters the inside of the constantly driven door 2021 and wins a prize at the first right starting port 2002b. Therefore, during the big hit game state, one or more game balls have a high probability of winning the first right start port 2002b and are reserved as the first reserved memory number, which is the memory number of the hit determination on the first special symbol side. It is supposed to be done.

On the other hand, during the big hit game state, it is not controlled to the time saving state (it is controlled to the non-time saving state). As a result, even if the symbol per normal figure is stopped and the second start door 2022 of the second start port 2004 moves forward and backward, the advance / retreat mode is short advance / retreat with almost no acceptance of the game ball into the second start port 2004. As a mode, the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2004 hardly occurs. As a result, when the first special symbol is variablely displayed in the normal mode (non-time saving state) and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed as the jackpot symbol, in most cases, the first special symbol is first displayed after the jackpot game state. Will be displayed in a variable manner.

Next, when the 10R jackpot A symbol is stopped and displayed as the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol, it is controlled to the time saving state after the end of the jackpot game state. At this time, when the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is started, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is a long fluctuation time (120 seconds in this example) longer than the normal fluctuation time regardless of the result of the hit judgment. Will be displayed in a variable manner. Then, during the chance mode in which the first special symbol is fluctuated and displayed over a long fluctuation time, a game aiming at the passage of the game ball to the gate portion 2003 is performed.

When the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003 during the above-mentioned chance mode, it is determined whether or not it hits a normal figure (normal determination), and the normal symbol is displayed in a variable manner based on this determination result. At this time, in the fluctuation display of the normal symbol, the fluctuation display is performed at any of 2 to 21 seconds, which is the fluctuation time of the normal symbol set as the normal symbol fluctuation pattern. That is, in the chance mode in which the first special symbol is variablely displayed over a long fluctuation time (120 seconds in this example), it is possible to perform a normal determination of about 60 times at the maximum.

Further, when the stop mode of the normal symbol in the above-mentioned chance mode is the symbol per normal symbol, the opening time of the second start door 2022 in the time saving state is controlled to the protruding state for 6 seconds. (Ii) It becomes possible to accept the game ball into the starting port 2004. Then, when the game ball is accepted into the second starting port 2004, the second holding storage number, which is the number of stored hit determinations on the second special symbol side, increases, and the second starting port door 2022 is controlled to the retracted state. Will be done.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, one of a big hit and a small hit is always obtained as a result of the hit determination on the second special symbol side. Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when a small hit is obtained as a result of the hit determination on the second special symbol side, even one game ball is accepted in the second large winning opening 2005b during the small hit game state. One of them is always distributed to the V winning opening 2411. Further, in this example, if the right-handed hit is continued during the small hit game state, at least one ball is controlled to be accepted by the second big winning opening 2005b. That is, when a small hit is obtained as a result of the hit judgment on the second special symbol side, it is a big hit in most cases. Therefore, it is practically a small hit as a result of the hit judgment on the second special symbol side. It can be said that the right to become a big hit (winning right) has been acquired.

In the chance mode of this example, the case where the normal symbol is stopped and displayed twice as the normal symbol is shown. In such a case, when the second start port door 2022 is in the protruding state, the game ball is accepted into the second start port 2004, which is the number of stored hit determinations on the second special symbol side. The number of reserved memories has increased by two, and the right to become a big hit (winning right) has been acquired twice. In addition, during the chance mode of this example, in addition to the normal judgment being performed about 20 to 40 times, the probability that the result of the normal judgment will be a symbol per normal figure is set to 1/20. On average, the number of second reserved memories has increased by 1 to 2, and the right to become a big hit (winning right) can be acquired once or twice.

Next, when the first special symbol is hit and the lost symbol is stopped as the symbol mode according to the result of the hit determination when the long fluctuation time elapses after the variation display of the first special symbol is started, the state shifts to the non-time saving state. At the same time, it shifts to the winning right exercise time based on the fact that there are two second reserved memories. In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when there is a second reserved memory number, the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner in preference to the first special symbol. Therefore, when the winning right exercise time is entered, the first reserved memory number is displayed. Regardless of whether or not there is, the variable display of the second special symbol will be performed based on the second reserved memory. At this time, in the variation display of the second special symbol, the variation display is performed in 2 seconds, which is the variation time of the second special symbol in the non-time saving state.

During the winning right exercise time of this example, the case where the second special symbol is stopped and displayed as a small hit symbol is shown. In such a case, the small hit game state is executed to make the second big winning opening 2005b in a state where the game ball can accept, and the game ball winning the second big winning opening 2005b is distributed to the V winning opening 2411. The big hit game state is executed on the condition that the game is played, and the first big winning opening 2005 is opened (evacuated state) as each round game in the big hit game state.

In addition, if the game ball is distributed to the V winning opening 2411 during the small hit game state executed based on the second special symbol being the small hit symbol, the time is always shortened after the end of the big hit game state. Control. In addition, after the end of the first big hit game state at the time of exercising the winning right, the change display of the second special symbol is performed based on the second second hold memory. At this time, in the variation display of the second special symbol, the variation display is performed in 2 seconds, which is the variation time of the second special symbol in the time reduction state, as in the non-time reduction state. Then, when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed as the small hit symbol, the small hit game state is executed to make the second big winning opening 2005b in a state where the game ball can accept it, and the second big winning opening 2005b is executed. The second big hit game state at the time of exercising the winning right is executed on condition that the game balls that have won the prize are distributed to the V winning opening 2411.

After the end of the second big hit game state in the winning right exercise time, the time saving state is continued and the mode shifts to the chance mode again. That is, as long as the normal determination is won during the chance mode, it is possible to continue the advantageous state for the player who loops between the winning right time and the chance mode.

In addition, when a time saving state is generated after the big hit game state without the first reserved memory number, the game ball wins the second starting port 2004 before the game ball wins the first right starting port 2002b. There is. In this case, the big hit game state (the second big prize opening 2005bb was won during the small hit game state) generated by the variable display of the second special symbol and the stop display of the small hit symbol or the big hit symbol. After executing the jackpot game state executed only once on the condition that the game ball is distributed to the V winning opening 2411), the mode is changed to the chance mode again. That is, if a time saving state occurs after the big hit game state and there is no first reserved memory number and the game ball wins the second starting port 2004 before the game ball wins the first right starting port 2002b, in other words. If a time saving state occurs after the jackpot game state and there is no first reserved memory and the variable display of the second special symbol is executed before the variable display of the first special symbol, the right to be a substantial jackpot ( Winning right) can only be obtained once.

On the other hand, when the time saving state is generated in the state where the first reserved memory number is present after the big hit game state, as described above, the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2004 hardly occurs during the big hit game state. After the jackpot game state, the first special symbol shifts to the chance mode in which the first special symbol is fluctuated and displayed with a long fluctuation time. During this chance mode, even if a game ball is won in the second starting port 2004, the game is played in the second starting port 2004 until the fluctuation display of the first special symbol, which is executed in a long fluctuation time, is stopped. The variable display of the second special symbol based on the winning of the ball is in the standby state (pending). That is, when the game ball wins the second starting port 2004 multiple times during the chance mode, the variable display of the second special symbol multiple times becomes a standby state (holding), and the right to be a substantial big hit ( Winning right) can be obtained multiple times.

In this way, the pachinko machine 1 of this example displays the variation of the second special symbol in preference to the first special symbol when there is a second reserved storage number, and further adds the second reserved storage number in the time saving state. Although the control for facilitating the winning of the game ball is executed in the second starting port 2004, the change of the second special symbol is changed before the change display of the first special symbol when the time saving state occurs after the big hit game state. It is highly likely that the right to be a big hit (winning right) can be obtained multiple times if the first special symbol is changed and displayed before the second special symbol is displayed rather than displayed. It has become. In other words, the variation display of the first special symbol is mainly executed in the normal state, and the variation display of the second special symbol is mainly executed in the time saving state, but the variation display of the first special symbol is executed in the time saving state. When is executed, it is more likely that the right to be a big hit (winning right) is acquired multiple times than when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. In this way, it is possible to realize a new game property in which a state with a high degree of advantage occurs when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed in the time-saving state where the variable display of the second special symbol is mainly executed. It is possible to prevent the decline in game interest.

In addition, during the fluctuation display of the first special symbol during the long fluctuation time in the time saving state (during the chance mode), the second special symbol is under the condition that the game ball is awarded to the second starting port 2004 only once. Although the same profit as when the variable display of is executed (substantially the right to win a big hit (winning right) is acquired once) is given to the player, the second start port 2004 is reached. When the winning of the game ball is generated, the degree of profit given to the player becomes larger than that in the case where the variable display of the second special symbol is executed at that time. As a result, the degree of profit that the player can obtain in the process of changing the first special symbol in the long fluctuation time changes while paying attention to the remaining period of the fluctuation display of the first special symbol in the long fluctuation time in the short time state. It is possible to realize a new game-like nature of playing, and in this respect as well, it is possible to prevent a decline in the interest in the game.

In addition, if there is a second reserved memory at the time when the time saving state occurs after the big hit game state, the variation display of the first special symbol is performed by giving priority to the variation display of the second special symbol over the first special symbol. Is suppressed, and the chance mode in which the first special symbol is fluctuated over a long fluctuation time is suppressed from occurring frequently, so that it is possible to prevent the player from becoming excessively advantageous and becoming too gambling. ..

[12. About the display contents of the production display device]
FIG. 165 is an explanatory diagram showing the display contents of the effect display device 1600 in the chance mode. In the normal mode, the decorative symbol 1605 (left decorative symbol 1605a, middle decorative symbol 1605b, right decorative symbol 1605c) consisting of three rows of left, middle, and right is enlarged and displayed in the center of the effect display device 1600, and the first special symbol is displayed. The variable display is synchronized with the variable display of. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 165, in the chance mode, the decorative symbol 1605 composed of three columns of left, middle, and right is enlarged and displayed in the center of the effect display device 1600 as in the normal mode. The decorative symbol 1605 is not variablely displayed in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol, but is variablely displayed in synchronization with the variable display of the normal symbol.

In the lower left of the effect display device 1600, there is a first special symbol-compatible decorative display area 1606 that variablely displays the first special symbol-compatible decorative symbol in response to the variable display of the first special symbol, and a variation of the second special symbol. A second special figure-corresponding decorative display area 1607 is provided to display the second special figure-corresponding decorative symbol in a variable manner corresponding to the display. The first special figure-corresponding decorative display area 1606 and the second special figure-corresponding decorative display area 1607 are displayed even in the above-mentioned normal mode, and are displayed in the central portion of the effect display device 1600 during the normal mode. Even when a character or the like is displayed in place of the existing decorative symbol, or when the decorative symbol displayed in the center of the effect display device 1600 is synchronized with the variable display of the normal symbol during the chance mode, the first It is possible to check the variable display status of the special symbol and the second special symbol.

Further, in the lower right portion of the effect display device 1600, a decoration display area 1608 corresponding to a normal figure is provided to display the decorative symbol corresponding to the normal figure in a variable manner in response to the variable display of the normal symbol. The decorative display area 1608 corresponding to the normal drawing is displayed during the normal mode as well as the decorative display area 1606 corresponding to the first special figure and the decorative display area 1607 corresponding to the second special figure, and is displayed in the liquid crystal display device 1600. When the decorative symbol displayed in the center is synchronized with the variable display of the first special symbol, or during the chance mode, characters etc. are displayed instead of the decorative symbol displayed in the center of the effect display device 1600. Even if it is done, it is possible to check the state of the variable display of the normal symbol.

Further, at the left end of the effect display device 1600, a normal symbol hold display area 1609a to 1609d for displaying the number of hold storages of the normal symbol corresponding to the normal random number stored in the normal symbol hold storage area is provided, and the effect display device is provided. At the right end of the 1600, a second special symbol reservation display area 1610a to 1610d for displaying the second reserved storage number corresponding to the second special random number stored in the second special symbol reservation storage area is provided. As described above, the state in which the second reserved memory number is present is a state in which the right to be a big hit (winning right) is acquired, so that the game ball is accepted to the second starting port 2004 during the chance mode. By displaying the second hold memory number with a star mark, it is possible to recognize that a special hold has occurred.

Further, during the chance mode, a timer display area 1611 for displaying the remaining time of the chance mode is displayed at the lower part of the effect display device 1600. As described above, the chance mode is controlled over a period in which the first special symbol is fluctuated and displayed in a long fluctuation time (120 seconds), and the gate portion 2003 is allowed to pass the game ball within this period. A game is played aiming at the hit of the normal figure. The remaining time is displayed in the timer display area 1611 by a countdown method, and the player can be impatient or anxious by aiming for the occurrence of a normal figure while being aware of the remaining time of the chance mode displayed in the timer display area 1611. It is possible to give a sense of accomplishment and satisfaction when the game ball is accepted to the second starting port 2004 due to a hit in the normal figure and the game is played in a state of being embraced and throbbing. Is improved.

Further, in the chance mode, the mode information display area 1612 is displayed in the upper right portion of the effect display device 1600. The mode information display area 1612 notifies the player that he / she is in the chance mode and that he / she strikes right, thereby preventing the player from giving a disadvantage.

[13. About the production in chance mode]
In the present embodiment, the game is started in the normal mode, and a big hit is won during the normal mode, and a time saving state occurs after the big hit game state, so that the game shifts to the chance mode which is more advantageous than the normal mode. An effect using the effect display device 1600 in such a chance mode will be described with reference to FIG. 166.

First, in the chance mode, when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003, it is determined whether or not it hits the normal figure (normal judgment), and the effect is synchronized with the variable display of the normal symbol based on this judgment result. The display device 1600 displays the decorative pattern in a variable manner. Then, when the stop mode of the normal symbol is the normal symbol, the hit symbol is also displayed in the stop mode of the decorative symbol, and the ball can enter the second starting port 2004. At this time, when the game ball enters the second starting port 2004, the number of second reserved storages, which is the number of stored hit determinations on the second special symbol side, increases.

Next, during the chance mode in which the first special symbol is fluctuated and displayed with a long fluctuation time (120 seconds in this example), the remaining 10 seconds stage (variation of the first special symbol) before the long fluctuation time elapses. At the stage of 110 seconds after the start of display), it is determined whether or not there is a second reserved storage number, which is the number of stored hit determinations on the second special symbol side. Then, when there is a second reserved memory number at the stage of the remaining 10 seconds, the effect of whether or not the stop mode of the decorative symbol becomes the winning symbol is continued as it is, and after the lapse of the long fluctuation time, the second (Ii) Shift to the winning right exercise time based on the number of reserved memories.

On the other hand, if there is no second reserved storage number at the stage of 10 seconds remaining before the long fluctuation time elapses, the stop mode of the decorative symbol is hit as an effect using the effect display device 1600. Instead of the effect of whether or not it becomes a symbol, the effect of whether or not the first special symbol being displayed in a variable manner is stopped at the jackpot symbol is executed. Specifically, as a production of whether or not the first special symbol being displayed in a variable manner is stopped at the jackpot symbol, a production (last battle production) is developed in a battle format.

Next, when the first special symbol in the variable display is stopped at the jackpot symbol, the battle in the last battle production is won when the long fluctuation time elapses, and then the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped at the jackpot symbol. The jackpot game state will be executed based on the fact that the game is played.

On the other hand, if the first special symbol being displayed in fluctuation is stopped by a lost symbol, the battle in the last battle production is defeated when the long fluctuation time elapses, and the last battle production is being executed (long fluctuation time has elapsed). It is determined whether or not the second reserved memory number has increased in the remaining 10 seconds period before the above. That is, there was no second reserved storage number at the stage of 10 seconds remaining before the long fluctuation time elapsed, but the second reserved storage number when the long fluctuation time elapsed after the remaining 10 seconds had elapsed. Determine if there is any.

Then, at the stage of 10 seconds remaining before the long fluctuation time elapses, there is no second hold storage number, but if there is a second hold storage number when the long fluctuation time elapses, After the defeat of the battle in the last battle production, the revival production to win the battle is executed, and then the winning right exercise time is shifted based on the second reserved memory number. In addition, when executing the revival effect, the change display of the second special symbol that starts from the time when the long fluctuation time elapses (the time when the battle in the last battle effect is defeated) is started based on the second hold memory. In, the revival effect is executed during the period until the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, if there is no second reserved storage number at the stage of 10 seconds remaining before the long fluctuation time elapses, and there is no second reserved storage number even when the long fluctuation time elapses, The defeat of the battle in the last battle production is not overturned, and after that, it shifts to the normal mode (non-time saving state) based on the fact that there is no second reserved memory number.

[14. Chance mode and concealment of the second hold memory during the winning right exercise time]
In the present embodiment, the game is started in the normal mode, the jackpot is won during the normal mode, and a time saving state occurs after the jackpot game state, so that the game shifts to the chance mode, which is more advantageous than the normal mode, and the chance mode is set. If a second hold memory occurs during the process, a notification to that effect is given when the second hold memory occurs, but if a predetermined concealment condition is met, the time when the second hold memory occurs. Does not notify that fact, but notifies that fact at a predetermined timing after the second hold storage occurs.

As described above, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has a second special random number stored in the second special symbol hold storage area of the main control built-in RAM when the game ball enters the second starting port 2004. The value of the second special hold number counter indicating the number is added by "1", and the second special hold number displayed on the second special hold number indicator 1406 is increased by "1". Further, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control board 1510 is second based on the special symbol 2 storage command (second hold number designation command) for instructing the second hold storage number when the predetermined concealment condition is not satisfied. It is grasped that the number of reserved storages has increased by "1", and the number of second reserved storages displayed on the effect display device 1600 is increased by "1". The special symbol 2 storage command is a command transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 when the second reserved storage number changes. That is, when the second reserved memory number increases by "1" based on the game ball entering the second starting port 2004, and based on the start of the variation display control of the second special symbol, the second When the number of reserved storages decreases by "1", a special symbol 2 storage command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, and it is possible to grasp whether or not the number of second reserved storages has increased.

On the other hand, when the predetermined concealment condition is satisfied, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control board 1510 is the first based on the special symbol 2 storage command (second hold number designation command) for instructing the second hold storage number. (Ii) Although it is grasped that the number of reserved storages has increased by "1", the number of second reserved storages displayed on the effect display device 1600 is maintained without being increased by "1".

Specifically, when the concealment condition is satisfied when the second hold memory is generated, the game ball enters the second starting port 2004 during the small hit game state or the big hit game state during the winning right exercise time. The case of a sphere (see Specific Example 1 described later) can be mentioned. In addition, the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is started just before the end of the jackpot game state before the start of the chance mode, and the normal symbol is stopped and displayed as the normal symbol after the end of the jackpot game state. A case where the game ball enters the second starting port 2004 in which the ball can be entered in 2004 (see Specific Example 2 described later) can be mentioned. In addition, in the ball-entry state of the second start port 2004 in the chance mode, the second and subsequent balls to the second start port 2004 in the ball-entry possible state (one opening of the second start port 2004). The case where the game ball of the above is entered (see Specific Example 3 described later) can be mentioned.

Then, when the above-mentioned concealment condition is satisfied and the occurrence of the second reserved memory is concealed, when a predetermined timing arrives, the notification that the occurrence of the second reserved memory is concealed is notified. There is. In the present embodiment, as the timing (notification timing) for notifying that the occurrence of the second reserved memory is concealed, "A: Resurrection production after the defeat of the last battle production" and "B: 4 rounds in the jackpot game state". "Eye button production" and "C: Continuous production during the ending period of the big hit game state and the small hit game state" are provided, and the game situation when the occurrence of the second hold memory is concealed (whether it is in the chance mode) Based on the number of second reserved memories that are kept secret and the number of second reserved memories that are not kept secret (the number of second reserved memories that are disclosed), etc. The fact that the occurrence of the second reserved memory is concealed is notified at a predetermined notification timing (for example, the earliest notification timing) among the notification timings A to C. The notification timing is not limited to the one set in advance, and a lottery or the like for determining the notification timing may be performed and may be set randomly.

As an example, when a game ball enters the second starting port 2004 during the small hit game state or the big hit game state during the winning right exercise time, the occurrence of the second hold memory is concealed. For example, when the concealed second hold memory becomes one as a result of the concealment, when the ending period (5 seconds in the present embodiment) at the end of the jackpot game state arrives, the ending effect performed in the normal time is performed. Instead, by executing the continuous effect described later, one secret second hold memory is notified (see Specific Example 1 described later). In addition, as a result of the concealment, when there are a plurality of concealed second reserved memories (for example, two concealed second reserved memories), the ending period at the end of the jackpot game state (book). When (5 seconds in the embodiment) arrives, the second reserved memory that was concealed earlier is notified, and the button effect (described later) in the fourth round in the jackpot game state that is started next is concealed later. (Ii) Notification of reserved memory is to be given.

In addition, when the second hold memory is generated in the chance mode, if all of the generated second hold memory is concealed, the rest before the end of the chance mode (before the elapse of the long fluctuation time). Although you lose the battle in the last battle production (see Fig. 166) that is executed in the period of 10 seconds, after the end of the chance mode (after the lapse of the long fluctuation time), the revival production that turns from the defeat of the battle and wins the battle Is executed to notify that the occurrence of the second reserved memory is concealed (see Specific Example 2 described later). In addition, if all of the second reserved memories generated during the chance mode are concealed, and if there are two or more concealed second reserved memories, the first second in the above-mentioned resurrection effect. In addition to notifying that the occurrence of the hold memory is concealed, the occurrence of the second second hold memory is generated by executing the button effect during the execution of the jackpot game state during the winning right exercise time. It informs that it is kept secret. Specifically, each round is shown as an effect using the effect display device 1600 during the execution of the jackpot game state during the winning right exercise time. For example, in the fourth round, the second hold memory A button effect (additional effect) is executed to notify whether or not the occurrence of is concealed. In such a button effect, when the operation button 410 is operated, the occurrence of the second hold memory is concealed, and when the operation button 410 is not operated, the occurrence of the second hold memory is concealed. Do not notify that you are doing so. In addition, the button effect may be executed even when the occurrence of the second hold memory is not concealed. In such a case, when the operation button 410 is operated in the button effect, the occurrence of the second hold memory is concealed. It is designed to notify that it has not been done. If the occurrence of the second reserved memory is still concealed after notifying that the occurrence of the second second reserved memory is concealed, the jackpot game state during the winning right exercise time is executed. By executing the button effect each time, it is notified that the occurrence of the second hold memory is concealed in sequence.

In addition, when the second reserved memory is generated in the chance mode, a part of the generated second reserved memory is concealed (for example, when one of the two second reserved memories is concealed). Since there is a thing in which the occurrence of the second hold memory is not concealed (the one that notifies the fact when the second hold memory occurs), the last battle effect is not executed. In such a case, by executing the above-mentioned button effect (additional effect) during the execution of the jackpot game state during the winning right exercise time, it is notified that the occurrence of the second hold memory is concealed. (See Specific Example 3 described later). If the occurrence of the second hold memory is still concealed after notifying that the occurrence of the second hold memory is concealed, each time the jackpot game state during the winning right exercise time is executed. By executing the button effect, it is informed that the occurrence of the second hold memory is concealed in sequence.

As described above, it may be notified that the occurrence of the second hold memory is concealed during the execution of the jackpot game state during the winning right exercise time, but during the winning right exercise time, the second While executing the small hit game state based on the special symbol being stopped and displayed as the small hit symbol, the ball cannot be entered into the second big winning opening 2005b in the small hit game state, and the big hit game state. May not occur. In such a case, after the end of the small hit game state, an ending period (for example, "sorry" is displayed on the effect display device 1600) indicating the end of the small hit game state can be executed (the present embodiment). 5 seconds) is provided, but during the ending period, instead of the ending effect indicating the end of the small hit game state, the effect of notifying that the occurrence of the second hold memory is concealed (continuous effect) is provided. Just do it.

Further, when the above-mentioned concealment condition is satisfied a plurality of times and the occurrence of a plurality of second reserved storages is concealed, one occurrence of the second reserved storage is concealed at a predetermined plurality of times. Although the fact that the second hold memory is being notified is sequentially notified, it is also possible to collectively notify that the occurrence of a plurality of second hold storages is concealed at a predetermined timing.

By the way, in the case of notifying the fact when the second reserved storage occurs, the content of the notification depends on whether or not the number of the second reserved storage reaches the limit number (4 in this example). I'm changing. Specifically, as an effect using the effect display device 1600, when the second hold storage number has not reached the limit number, an effect for notifying that one second hold storage has occurred is executed. When the second reserved storage number reaches the limit number, a special effect (such as playing a special movie) that is not normally executed is executed as a subsequent effect. As a result, when the special effect is executed, it is possible to recognize that the second reserved storage number has reached the limit number. Further, when the above-mentioned concealment condition is satisfied, regardless of whether or not the second reserved storage number has reached the limit number, the fact is not notified when the second reserved storage number occurs, but the first (Ii) When the number of reserved memories reaches the limit, the above-mentioned special effect is executed. As a result, even when the above-mentioned concealment condition is satisfied, it is possible to recognize that the second reserved storage number has reached the limit number by at least executing the special effect, and the second starting port 2004 in the chance mode. It is designed to avoid unnecessary typing into. When the above-mentioned concealment condition is satisfied, after the second hold memory is generated, an effect of notifying that the second hold memory has already occurred is executed at a predetermined timing. When the above-mentioned special effect is executed, such an effect is not executed.

Next, a specific example in the case of concealing the fact that the second reserved memory has occurred will be described with reference to FIGS. 167 and 170.

First, a first specific example will be described with reference to FIG. 167. FIG. 167 shows a case where one second reserved memory, which is the number of stored hit determinations on the second special symbol side, is generated in the chance mode. In such a case, as an effect using the effect display device 1600, a notification effect for notifying the fact when one second hold storage is generated is executed. Then, after the end of the chance mode, the winning right exercise time shifts to the winning right exercise time based on the occurrence of one second hold memory, but during the winning right exercise time, the second special symbol stops at the small hit symbol. The small hit game state is executed based on the display, and the big hit game state is executed on condition that the game balls that have won the second big winning opening 2005b in the small hit game state are distributed to the V winning opening 2411. doing. In such a big hit game state, when a game ball enters the second starting port 2004 and a second hold memory occurs, the ball is concentrated on entering the second big winning opening 2005b in the big hit game state. Therefore, when the second hold storage occurs, the fact is not notified.

After that, when the running jackpot game state ends, the ending period (5 seconds in this embodiment) that can execute the ending effect indicating the end of the jackpot game state is set as the effect using the effect display device 1600. Although it is provided, during the ending period, instead of the ending effect indicating the end of the jackpot game state, the effect display device 1600 displays "Still more!" To notify that the second hold memory has occurred. It is made to recognize that the winning right exercise time will continue by executing the continuous production. In the ending period, after executing the ending effect indicating the end of the jackpot game state, for example, when 3 seconds have elapsed, the continuous effect may be switched and executed. In this way, by notifying that fact when the second hold memory occurs and notifying that fact during the execution of the ending effect after the second hold memory occurs, the winning right exercise time ends. It is possible to give the player unexpectedness by turning away from the recognition.

Next, a second specific example will be described with reference to FIG. 168. In FIG. 168, the variation display of the normal symbol is started just before the end of the jackpot game state before the start of the chance mode, and the stop mode of the normal symbol becomes the normal symbol after the start of the chance mode, and the second in the time saving state. It has been shown that the opening time of the starting door 2022 is controlled to be in a protruding state for 6 seconds so that the game ball can enter the second starting door 2004. Since the effect using the effect display device 1600 is not executed for the variable display of the normal symbol straddling before and after the start of the chance mode, the game ball is sent to the second start port 2004 after the start of the chance mode. Even when the ball is entered and the second hold memory occurs, the fact is not notified when the second hold memory occurs.

If the second hold memory is not notified at the time of occurrence, the last battle effect (FIG. 166) is performed in the remaining 10 seconds before the end of the chance mode (before the elapse of the long fluctuation time). See). In such a last battle production, the battle is defeated at the end of the chance mode (when the long fluctuation time elapses), but after the end of the chance mode (after the elapse of the long fluctuation time), the battle is completely defeated. The revival effect to win the battle is executed, and it is recognized that the winning right exercise time will start after the change display of the first special symbol. In this way, when the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is straddled before and after the start of the chance mode, the fact is not notified when the second hold memory occurs immediately after the start of the chance mode, and the second hold memory occurs. By notifying that fact later, it is possible to change from the recognition that the winning right exercise time will not start and give the player a surprise.

In the second specific example, the case where the second hold memory occurs only immediately after the start of the chance mode is shown, but it is based on the fact that the game ball enters the second start port 2004 during the chance mode. When the second second hold memory is generated and the second second hold memory is generated, a notification to that effect is given, and the transition to the jackpot game state at the winning right exercise time is confirmed. There is. In such a case, the time shifts to the winning right exercise time based on the occurrence of two second hold memories, but during the winning right exercise time, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed as a small hit symbol. Based on this, the small hit game state is executed, and the big hit game state is executed on condition that the game balls that have won the second big winning opening 2005b in the small hit game state are distributed to the V winning opening 2411. There is. During the execution of such a jackpot game state, each round is shown as an effect using the effect display device 1600, but in a predetermined round (for example, the fourth round), immediately after the start of the chance mode. An additional effect is executed to notify that the second hold memory has occurred, and it is recognized that the winning right exercise time will continue after the end of the jackpot game state. In this way, the winning right is exercised by notifying the fact when the second hold memory occurs immediately after the start of the chance mode, but by notifying that fact during the execution of the jackpot game state during the winning right exercise time. It is possible to give the player a surprise by turning away from the recognition that the time is over.

Next, a third specific example will be described with reference to FIG. 169. In FIG. 169, when the stop mode of the normal symbol is the normal symbol in the chance mode, the second start opening door 2022 is set for 6 seconds as the opening time of the second start opening 2004 in the time saving state. It is possible to enter the game ball into the second starting port 2004 under the control of the protruding state, but two game balls enter the second starting port 2004 in the protruding state, and the second special symbol side The case where two second reserved storages, which is the number of stored hit determinations, are continuously generated is shown. As a general rule, when the game ball enters the second starting port 2004, the second starting door 2022 is controlled to the retracted state, but before the second starting door 2022 is controlled to the retracted state. , A second game ball may enter the second starting port 2004. In such a case, as an effect using the effect display device 1600, a notification effect for notifying the fact when one second hold storage is generated is executed. However, in order to be aware that when the second second hold memory occurs, one game ball enters the second start opening 2004 and the second start opening door 2022 is controlled to the retracted state. , I have not notified that.

Then, after the end of the chance mode, the winning right exercise time shifts to the winning right exercise time based on the occurrence of two second hold memories, but during the winning right exercise time, the second special symbol stops at the small hit symbol. The small hit game state is executed based on the display, and the big hit game state is executed on condition that the game balls that have won the second big winning opening 2005b in the small hit game state are distributed to the V winning opening 2411. doing. During the execution of such a jackpot game state, each round is shown as an effect using the effect display device 1600, but in a predetermined round (for example, the fourth round), two in the chance mode. An additional effect is executed to notify that the second hold memory of the eye has occurred, and it is recognized that the winning right exercise time will continue after the end of the jackpot game state. In this way, when the second second hold memory occurs during the chance mode, that fact is not notified, and during the execution of the jackpot game state based on the occurrence of the first second hold memory. By notifying that fact, it is possible to change from the recognition that the winning right exercise time is over and give the player unexpectedness.

Next, a fourth specific example will be described with reference to FIG. 170. In the fourth specific example, the case where the last battle effect shown in FIG. 166 is not executed is shown.
FIG. 170 shows a case where one second reserved memory, which is the number of stored hit determinations on the second special symbol side, is generated in the chance mode. In such a case, as an effect using the effect display device 1600, a notification effect for notifying the fact when one second hold storage is generated is executed. Then, the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is started just before the end of the chance mode (less than 3 seconds remaining), and before and after the end of the chance mode, the stop mode of the normal symbol becomes the normal symbol per symbol, and the second start port 2004 in the time saving state. The second start opening door 2022 may be controlled to be in a protruding state for 6 seconds as the opening time, and the game ball may be able to enter the second start opening 2004. If a game ball enters the second start port 2004 before or after the end of such a chance mode and a second hold memory occurs, it is not possible to notify that fact during the chance mode, and the second hold Notifying that fact is not given when the memory occurs.

Then, after the end of the chance mode, the winning right exercise time shifts to the winning right exercise time based on the occurrence of the second hold memory, but during the winning right exercise time, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed as a small hit symbol. Based on this, the small hit game state is executed, and the big hit game state is executed on condition that the game balls that have won the second big winning opening 2005b in the small hit game state are distributed to the V winning opening 2411. There is. During the execution of such a jackpot game state, each round is shown as an effect using the effect display device 1600, but in a predetermined round (for example, the fourth round), before and after the end of the chance mode. An additional effect is executed to notify that the second hold memory has occurred, and it is recognized that the winning right exercise time will continue after the end of the jackpot game state. In this way, when the second hold memory occurs before and after the end of the chance mode, that fact is not notified, and that fact is done during the execution of the jackpot game state based on the occurrence of the first second hold memory. By notifying the player, it is possible to change from the recognition that the winning right exercise time is over and give the player a surprise.

In the fourth specific example, the game ball entered the second starting port 2004 before the end of the chance mode (less than 3 seconds remaining), and the first second hold memory was generated. It is shown that the game shifts to the jackpot game state at the winning right exercise time based on the above, but at that time, the game ball has not entered the second starting port 2004, and the jackpot game at the winning right exercise time. The transition to the state may not be finalized. In such a case, for example, the second hold memory is generated based on the game ball entering the second start port 2004 just before the end of the chance mode (less than 3 seconds remaining), and the second hold memory is generated. If no notification is given at that point, the chance mode is about to end (3 seconds remaining) during the ending period (5 seconds in this embodiment) in which the ending effect indicating the end of the chance mode can be executed after the chance mode ends. (Less than) may be executed with an additional effect notifying that the second hold memory has occurred, and it may be recognized that the winning right exercise time will start after the chance mode ends. Further, for example, when the second hold memory is generated based on the game ball entering the second start port 2004 after the end of the chance mode, and the fact is not notified when the second hold memory is generated. , Notifies that the second hold memory has occurred after the end of the chance mode during the change display (loss change) of the first special symbol performed after the end of the chance mode (after the end of the ending effect of the chance mode). You may execute the additional effect to recognize that the winning right exercise time will start after the variable display of the first special symbol. Even with these, the winning right exercise time will not be started by notifying that when the second hold memory occurs before and after the end of the chance mode, and notifying that fact after the second hold memory occurs. It is possible to change from recognition and give the player unexpectedness.

[14-1. When the power is cut off during the chance mode and the winning right exercise time]
In the present embodiment, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off due to a power failure or a momentary power failure, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has built-in information (for example, various flags) indicating the progress of the game. A backup process (not shown) that saves to RAM is being executed. If the operation switch 954 is not operated when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the information stored in the main control built-in RAM is referred to in the backup process without executing the initialization process (step S1). , The return process for returning to the state according to the information is being executed. Therefore, on the main control board 1310 side, even if the power supply is cut off during the chance mode and the winning right exercise time, the state before the power cutoff is restored by turning on the power supply.

That is, when the power is cut off during the chance mode, the power is turned on, and the first special symbol display 1403 is used for the remaining time of the chance mode (the remaining time of the fluctuation time of the first special symbol). (I) The variable display of the special symbol will be resumed. In addition, if the power is cut off during the fluctuation display of the normal symbol in the chance mode, the fluctuation display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 1402 is performed by the remaining time of the fluctuation time of the normal symbol when the power is turned on. Will be restarted. If the power is cut off while the second start port 2004 is open in the chance mode (the second start port door 2022 is being controlled to protrude), the power is turned on to open the second start port 2004. The opening of the second starting port 2004 (the protruding state of the second starting port door 2022) is restarted by the remaining time of. If the power is cut off during the chance mode, the first hold storage number, the second hold storage number, and the normal figure hold storage number (normal symbol hold storage number) are in the state before the power cutoff when the power is turned on. The display on the first special hold number indicator 1404, the second special hold number indicator 1406, and the normal hold indicator 1408 will be resumed.

On the other hand, if the power is cut off during the variable display of the second special symbol during the winning right exercise time, the power is turned on and the second special symbol display 1405 is used for the remaining time of the second special symbol. The variable display of the second special symbol of is resumed. In addition, if the power is cut off during the opening of the second major winning opening 2005b (during the small hit game state) during the winning right exercise time, the remaining time of the opening time of the second major winning opening 2005b is obtained by turning on the power. The opening of the second prize opening 2005b will be resumed by the amount of the above. In addition, if the power is cut off while the first major winning opening 2005 (during the jackpot game state) is open during the winning right exercise time, the remaining time of the opening time of the first major winning opening 2005 is reached by turning on the power. The opening of the first prize opening 2005 will be resumed by that amount. In addition, if the power is cut off during the winning right exercise time, the first hold storage number, the second hold storage number, and the normal figure hold storage number (the number of hold storage of the normal symbol) are set before the power cutoff by turning on the power. The display on the first special hold number indicator 1404, the second special hold number indicator 1406, and the normal hold indicator 1408 is resumed.

By the way, on the main control board 1310 side, when the power is cut off during the chance mode and the winning right exercise time, there is a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 when the power is cut off, and the progress of the game is shown. In order to execute a backup process that saves information (for example, various flags) in the main control built-in RAM, it returns to the state before the power was turned off when the power was turned on, whereas on the peripheral control board 1510 side, it was peripheral when the power was turned off. Since there is no backup power supply for supplying power to the control board 1510 and the backup process is not executed, even if the power is turned on, the state before the power supply is cut off cannot be restored.

That is, when the power supply is cut off during the chance mode, the display of the effect display device 1600 controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 side is restarted by turning on the power supply. However, before the power is cut off, the decorative symbol corresponding to the first special figure is variablely displayed in the decorative display area 1606 corresponding to the first special figure (see FIG. 165) in the effect display device 1600. On the 1510 side, it was not possible to grasp that the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 1403 was restarted, and the first special was set in the first special symbol corresponding decorative display area 1606 in the effect display device 1600. The variable display of the decorative design corresponding to the figure is not restarted. Further, before the power is cut off, the timer display area 1610 (see FIG. 165) indicating the remaining time of the chance mode is displayed on the effect display device 1600, but when the power is turned on, the first special symbol is displayed on the peripheral control board 1510 side. The remaining time of the fluctuation time of the first special symbol on the display 1403 (remaining time of the chance mode) could not be grasped, and the timer display area 1610 of the effect display device 1600 did not show the remaining time of the chance mode. A specific display for when the power is turned on (for example, a display such as "??: ??" that does not inform the player of the remaining time) is performed. Further, if the power is not shut off during the chance mode, the last battle effect can be executed in the remaining 10 seconds before the end of the chance mode (before the elapse of the long fluctuation time), but the peripheral control board 1510 can be executed by turning on the power. On the side, the remaining time of the fluctuation time of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 1403 (the remaining time of the chance mode) cannot be grasped, and the last battle production is executed as the production using the production display device 1600. Without doing anything, the same effect as the effect (background display, etc.) before the execution of the last battle effect is performed. However, when the power is turned on (when the power is restored), the power-on state command indicating the game state at the time of power-on is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, so that the peripheral control board 1510 is in a time-saving state. By grasping that the mode is medium (during the chance mode), the effect display device 1600 can restore the display mode such as the mode information display area 1612 (see FIG. 165) indicating that the mode information display area 1612 is in the chance mode.

Further, before the power is cut off, the decorative symbols corresponding to the ordinary figures are variablely displayed in the decorative display area 1608 corresponding to the ordinary figures in the effect display device 1600, and the decorative symbols 1605 on the left, middle, and right are variablely displayed (see FIG. 165). However, if the power is cut off during the fluctuation display of the normal symbol on the normal hold indicator 1408 in the chance mode, the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is restarted on the peripheral control board 1510 side by turning on the power. The variable display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the normal figure in the decorative display area 1608 corresponding to the normal figure in the effect display device 1600 and the variable display of the decorative symbol 1605 on the left, middle, and right are not restarted. The combination display of the decorative symbols 1605 for turning on the power (for example, a predetermined combination display such as "123") is performed. However, if a new fluctuation display of the normal symbol is started on the normal hold indicator 1408 after the power is turned on (after the power is restored), a command to start the normal figure synchronization effect from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. Is transmitted, it is possible to grasp that a new variation display of the normal symbol is started on the peripheral control board 1510 side at that timing, and the effect display device 1600 supports the normal map in the decorative display area 1608. The variable display of the decorative symbol and the variable display of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols 1605 can be resumed.

Further, before the power is cut off, the normal figure hold storage number (the number of normal symbol hold storage numbers) is displayed in the normal figure hold display areas 1609a to 1609d in the effect display device 1600 (see FIG. 165), but the chance mode is in progress. When the power is cut off, the peripheral control board 1510 side cannot grasp the number of stored figures on hold due to the power being turned on. The display of the reserved memory number is hidden without restarting the display of the reserved memory number. However, when the number of stored normal symbols changes after the power is turned on (after the power is restored) (when the game ball passes through the gate unit 2003 or when the fluctuation display control of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 1402 is started). Since the normal symbol storage command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control board 1510 can grasp the number of stored figures on hold at that timing, and then displays the number of stored figures on hold. Can be restarted.

Further, before the power is cut off, the second reserved storage number (excluding those in which the occurrence of the second reserved storage is concealed) is displayed in the second special figure reserved display areas 1610a to 1610d in the effect display device 1600 (FIG. (Refer to 165) However, when the power is cut off during the chance mode, the peripheral control board 1510 side cannot grasp the second reserved storage number due to the power being turned on, and the effect display device 1600 has a second position. (Ii) The display of the second hold storage number is hidden without restarting the display of the second hold storage number in the special figure hold display areas 1610a to 1610d. Then, when the second reserved storage number changes after the power is turned on (after the power is restored) (when the game ball enters the second starting port 2004 or the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 1405). At the start of the variable display control), a special symbol 2 storage command (holding number command) is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, so that the peripheral control board 1510 side has the second holding storage number at that timing. Can be grasped. However, the second hold storage number is different from that of the normal figure hold storage number, and when the second hold storage number changes after the power is turned on (after the power is restored), the peripheral control board 1510 side has the second hold storage number. While grasping Has changed all of the second reserved memory to a concealed state. That is, if the occurrence of the second hold memory was not concealed before the power was cut off in the chance mode, the occurrence of the second hold memory was concealed after the power was turned on (after the power was restored) in the chance mode. It is supposed to change. On the other hand, if the occurrence of the second hold memory was concealed before the power was cut off in the chance mode, the occurrence of the second hold memory was concealed after the power was turned on (after the power was restored) in the chance mode. It is supposed to be maintained.

As described above, when the second hold storage number changes after the power is turned on (after the power is restored) during the chance mode or the winning right exercise time, the peripheral control board 1510 side can grasp the second hold storage number. Since it was determined on the peripheral control board 1510 side whether or not the occurrence of the second hold storage before the power was cut off was concealed, it cannot be grasped after the power is turned on (after the power is restored). For example, in the chance mode or during the winning right exercise time, the change in the number of second hold memories after the power is turned on (after the power is restored) regardless of whether or not the occurrence of the second hold memory was concealed before the power was cut off. Occasionally, when all of the second hold storage numbers are changed to the disclosed state, even the ones in which the occurrence of the second hold storage is concealed before the power is cut off are disclosed, and the second is displayed on the effect display device 1600. (Ii) The sudden increase in the number of reserved memories gives the player a sense of discomfort. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, during the chance mode or the winning right exercise time, regardless of whether or not the occurrence of the second hold memory is concealed before the power is cut off, after the power is turned on (after the power is restored). Keeps all the second hold memories secret even when the number of second hold memories changes, and keeps them secret after the power is turned on (after the power is restored) due to the arrival of the above-mentioned notification timings A to C. By notifying the second reserved memory one by one individually, it is possible to suppress giving the player a sense of discomfort due to the sudden increase in the number of second reserved memories. That is, the game status (whether in the chance mode or the winning right exercise time, etc.) when the information on the second reserved memory number is grasped on the peripheral control board 1510 side after the power is turned on (power is restored), and grasped. Based on the number of second hold storages, each time the above-mentioned notification timings A to C arrive in sequence, the second hold storages hidden after the power is turned on (after the power is restored) are individually notified one by one. There is. In addition, when individually notifying the concealed second reserved memory, one second reserved memory is notified at least at a timing before the start of the next big hit game state, so that the player suffers a loss. It can also be prevented from giving.

In addition, when the power is cut off during the chance mode, even if the game ball enters the second starting port 2004 after the power is turned on (after the power is restored) and a new second hold memory is generated, that is the case. When the second hold memory occurs, it is not notified to that effect (the occurrence of the second hold memory is kept secret). That is, if the power supply is not cut off during the chance mode, it is the entry timing at which the concealment condition is not satisfied when the second hold memory occurs, and a notification to that effect is given when the second hold memory occurs. Even if it is (a state in which the occurrence of the second hold memory is disclosed), the second hold memory occurs after the power is turned on (after the power is restored) when the power is cut off during the chance mode. At that point, it is not notified to that effect (the occurrence of the second hold memory is kept secret). As described above, in the present embodiment, there are cases where the power supply is not cut off during the chance mode and cases where the power supply is cut off during the chance mode. Is different. As a result, for example, after the power is turned on (after the power is restored) when the power is cut off during the chance mode, all of the second hold memory generated before and after the power is turned on (returned to the power) is concealed. This makes it difficult for the player to recognize how many second hold memories have occurred during the chance mode, and the player is allowed to play the game with the expectation that a big hit game state will occur during the subsequent winning right exercise time. It can give a new game. When a new second hold memory occurs after the power is turned on (after the power is restored), a series of advantageous states (chance mode and winning) are provided as a period for continuing the process of concealing the occurrence of the second hold memory. It may be until all the right exercise time) is completed and controlled to the normal state, or after the power is turned on (after the power is restored), the jackpot game state is ended and the next chance mode (timer remaining time is activated). It may be until the normal chance mode) is started.

In addition, after the power is turned on (after the power is restored) when the power is cut off during the chance mode, the result of the lottery process (normal judgment) for the new normal symbol after the power is turned on (after the power is restored). If is a normal hit, the hit symbol of the decorative symbol corresponding to the normal figure is stopped and displayed in the decorative display area 1608 corresponding to the normal figure, and the hit symbol of the decorative symbol 1605 on the left, middle, and right is stopped and displayed. As an example, it may be configured as follows. That is, when the result of the lottery process (normal judgment) for the newly performed normal symbol after the power is turned on (after the power is restored) is a normal hit, the left, middle, and right decorative symbols 1605 are used as the winning symbols. A symbol that does not exist (for example, a loose eye) may be stopped and displayed. In such a case, after the power is turned on (after the power is restored), not only the remaining time of the fluctuation time of the first special symbol (the remaining time of the chance mode) but also the possibility that the second hold memory occurs is a game. It is possible to create a game situation in which a person is hard to recognize and pays more attention to changes in the game area 5a regarding the sudden opening of the second start port 2004 (protruding state of the second start port door 2022). ..

Then, when the power is cut off during the chance mode, all of the second hold memory generated before and after the power is turned on (power recovery) is concealed, but during the subsequent winning right exercise time, the power is sequentially changed. Notifies that the occurrence of the second reserved memory is concealed. As described above, if the power supply is not cut off during the chance mode, the game status when the occurrence of the second hold memory is concealed (whether the chance mode is in or the winning right exercise time is in progress, etc.). , And, while the notification timing is different based on the number of secret second hold memories and the number of non-secret second hold memories (the number of disclosed second hold memories). , When the power is cut off during the chance mode, the occurrence of the second hold memory is concealed because all of the second hold memory generated before and after the power is turned on (power return) is concealed. There is another way of deciding the timing to notify.

Specifically, when the power is cut off during the chance mode, the winning right is used as an effect using the effect display device 1600 at the start of the subsequent winning right exercise time (during the variable display of the second special symbol). By executing the start-time effect indicating that the exercise time is started, it is notified that the occurrence of the second hold memory is concealed. In addition, all of the second hold memories generated before and after the power is turned on (power return) are concealed, but if there are two or more concealed second hold memories, 1 in the above-mentioned start production. In addition to notifying that the occurrence of the second second hold memory is concealed, by executing the above-mentioned button effect during the execution of the jackpot game state during the winning right exercise time, the second Notifies that the occurrence of the second hold memory of is concealed. If the occurrence of the second reserved memory is still concealed after notifying that the occurrence of the second second reserved memory is concealed, the jackpot game state during the winning right exercise time is executed. By executing the button effect each time, it is notified that the occurrence of the second hold memory is concealed in sequence. In this way, after the power is turned on (after the power is restored), all the second hold memories are concealed, and the concealed second hold memories are individually notified at a predetermined timing, so that the second hold is as described above. It is possible to suppress giving the player a sense of discomfort due to the sudden increase in the number of memories. In addition, when individually notifying the concealed second reserved memory, at least one second reserved memory is notified before the next big hit game state is started, so that a loss is given to the player. Can also be prevented.

As described above, as an effect using the effect display device 1600, when the second reserved storage number reaches the limit number, a special effect (special) that is not normally executed as a subsequent effect. (Playing a movie, etc.) is being executed, but before and after the power is turned on (power recovery) in the chance mode, even if the second hold storage number reaches the limit number, the above special effect is executed. .. As a result, even if all the occurrence of the second hold storage is concealed before and after the power is turned on (power return), at least the execution of the special effect indicates that the second hold memory number has reached the limit number. It can be recognized and unnecessary driving into the second starting port 2004 in the chance mode can be avoided.

Next, a specific example (fifth specific example) when the power supply is cut off during the chance mode will be described with reference to FIG. 171. In FIG. 171, two game balls enter the second starting port 2004, which is in the protruding state, as in the third specific example, before the power cutoff occurs in the chance mode, and the second special The case where two second hold storages, which is the number of memory of the hit determination on the symbol side, is continuously generated is shown. In such a case, as an effect using the effect display device 1600, a notification effect for notifying the fact when one second hold memory is generated is executed, but the second second hold memory is executed. When the above occurs, the number of second reserved storages displayed on the effect display device 1600 is not increased and is kept secret without notifying the fact.

Then, after the power is turned on (after the power is restored) when the power is cut off during the chance mode, the second hold storage number is not displayed on the effect display device 1600, so that the two seconds that occurred before the power is cut off. All of the reserved memories are kept secret. In addition, if the third second hold memory occurs after the power is turned on (after the power is restored) when the power is cut off during the chance mode, the third second hold memory occurs. At the time, the fact is not notified, and the number of second reserved storages displayed on the effect display device 1600 is not increased.

Then, after the end of the chance mode, the winning right exercise time shifts to the winning right exercise time based on the occurrence of three second reserved memories, but at the start of the winning right exercise time (during the variable display of the second special symbol). By executing the start-time effect indicating that the winning right exercise time is started as the effect using the effect display device 1600, it is notified that the occurrence of the second hold memory is concealed. Further, during the execution of the first jackpot game state during the winning right exercise time, each round is shown as an effect using the effect display device 1600, but a predetermined round (for example, the fourth round) Then, an additional effect is executed to notify that the second second hold memory has occurred during the chance mode, and it is recognized that the winning right exercise time will continue after the end of the jackpot game state. In this way, the second second hold memory generated during the chance mode is kept secret, and a notification to that effect is given during the execution of the jackpot game state based on the occurrence of the first second hold memory. By doing so, it is possible to change from the recognition that the winning right exercise time is over and give the player a surprise.

Similarly, during the execution of the second jackpot game state during the winning right exercise time, each round is shown as an effect using the effect display device 1600, but a predetermined round (for example, the fourth round) In), an additional effect is executed to notify that the third second hold memory has occurred during the chance mode, and it is recognized that the winning right exercise time will continue after the end of the jackpot game state. In this way, the third second hold memory generated during the chance mode is kept secret, and a notification to that effect is given during the execution of the jackpot game state based on the occurrence of the second second hold memory. By doing so, it is possible to change from the recognition that the winning right exercise time is over and give the player a surprise.

Next, a specific example (sixth specific example) when the power supply is cut off during the winning right exercise time will be described with reference to FIG. 172. In FIG. 172, as in the third specific example, two game balls enter the second starting port 2004 in the protruding state in the chance mode, and the number of stored hit determinations on the second special symbol side is shown. The case where a certain second hold memory occurs two times in a row is shown. In such a case, as an effect using the effect display device 1600, a notification effect for notifying the fact when one second hold memory is generated is executed, but the second second hold memory is executed. At the time of occurrence, the fact is not notified, and the number of second reserved storages displayed on the effect display device 1600 is not increased.

Then, after the end of the chance mode, the winning right exercise time shifts to the winning right exercise time based on the occurrence of two second hold memories, but during the execution of the jackpot game state during the winning right exercise time, the effect display device Each round is shown as an effect using 1600. Then, when the power supply is cut off during the execution of the jackpot game state during the winning right exercise time, whether or not the occurrence of the second hold memory before the power cutoff is concealed is determined after the power is turned on (power recovery). Later), it cannot be grasped on the peripheral control board 1510 side. Therefore, in the third specific example, in the predetermined round (for example, the fourth round) during the execution of the jackpot game state, the second hold memory is generated during the chance mode as the effect using the effect display device 1600. Whereas the additional effect of notifying that it is concealed was executed, in the sixth specific example, such an additional effect is performed in a predetermined round (for example, the fourth round) during the execution of the jackpot game state. Is not executed, and other effects (for example, the same effects as in the third round) are performed.

Then, after the end of the jackpot game state, the variable display of the second special symbol based on the occurrence of the second second reserved memory is started, but during the variable display of the second special symbol, , By displaying "Still more!" On the effect display device 1600, a continuous effect is executed to notify that the occurrence of the second hold memory is concealed during the chance mode, and the winning right exercise time continues. I am making you aware of that. In this way, when the power is cut off during the execution of the jackpot game state during the winning right exercise time, a predetermined round (for example, the fourth round) during the execution of the jackpot game state as a predetermined timing. So, instead of executing the additional effect as in the third specific example, instead, a notification to that effect is made during the variable display of the second special symbol based on the occurrence of the second second hold memory. By doing so, it is possible to change from the recognition that the winning right exercise time is over and give the player a surprise.

The effect display device 1600 displays the number of second reserved storages (excluding those in which the occurrence of the second reserved storage is concealed) in the second special figure reservation display areas 1610a to 1610d (see FIG. 165). However, apart from that, a number hold display area smaller than the second special figure hold display area 1610a to 1610d is provided at the screen edge of the effect display device 1600, and the second hold storage number is set in the number hold display area. It may be displayed by hold (for example, "1" if the number of second hold storage is one, "2" if it is two, etc.). At this time, in front of the number hold display area, the character (movable body, etc.) provided in the center character 2500 is covered, and if the player does not look into the number hold display area, the number hold displayed in the number hold display area is displayed. It is configured so that it cannot be seen. Further, in the second special figure hold display area 1610a to 1610d, the one in which the occurrence of the second special figure hold storage is concealed is not displayed, whereas in the number hold display area, the second special figure hold display area is displayed. Whether or not the occurrence of the second hold memory is concealed in 1610a-1610d, the display of the number hold indicates the exact number of the second hold memory. As a result, in the second special figure hold display areas 1610a to 1610d, the number hold displayed in the number hold display area is not visually recognized by the player who wants to enjoy the concealment when the occurrence of the second hold memory is concealed. You can do it like this. On the other hand, for a player who wants to accurately grasp the number of second hold memories, the number hold displayed in the number hold display area can be visually recognized by looking into the back side of the accessory (movable body, etc.). good. Regarding the second hold storage number, unlike the case of the normal figure hold storage number, when the second hold storage number changes after the power is turned on (after the power is restored), the peripheral control board 1510 side has the second hold storage number. While grasping Has changed all of the second reserved memory to a concealed state. On the other hand, in the number hold display area of the effect display device 1600, when the number of the second hold storage changes after the power is turned on (after the power is restored), the number hold display is restored to make the number of the second hold storage accurate. It has become possible to grasp.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the power is cut off during the chance mode, all of the second hold memory generated after the power is turned on (after the power is restored) is switched to be concealed, but during the chance mode. Operation buttons for "concealed mode" to conceal the occurrence of the second reserved memory and "non-confidential mode" to not conceal (disclose all) the occurrence of the second reserved memory during the chance mode. The operation of 410 may allow the player to select. In such a case, in the "confidential mode", the occurrence of the second reserved memory is concealed during the winning right exercise time after the end of the chance mode without notifying the fact when the second reserved memory occurs. In contrast to the fact that the player is notified of the fact, in the "non-confidential mode", the fact is notified when the second reserved memory occurs, so that the timing at which the player recognizes the occurrence of the second reserved memory is different. Therefore, it is possible to enjoy different game characteristics depending on the mode selected by the player.

[15. Production example]
Next, an example of the mode of the effect display executed by the effect display device 1600 will be described. FIG. 173 is an example of an effect display that is controlled to shift from the normal mode to the chance mode and is executed when the game ball is accepted at the second starting port 2004 during the chance mode, and FIG. 174 is the second display during the chance mode. FIG. 175 is an example of an effect display executed when the chance mode is terminated without the game ball being accepted at the start port 2004, and FIG. 175 shows the second reserved storage number when the remaining time of the chance mode is 10 seconds. This is an example of the effect display during the last battle effect that would otherwise be executed, and the game ball was accepted at the second start port 2004 when the first special symbol was lost as a result of the variation display in the long fluctuation time. FIG. 176 is an example of the effect display executed at the time, and FIG. 176 is an example of the effect display executed in the last battle effect when a big hit is obtained as a result of the variation display in the long fluctuation time of the first special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 173 (A), when the result of the hit determination on the first special symbol side is a jackpot (10R jackpot A) controlled to a shorter time state after the jackpot game state, it is synchronized with the fluctuation display of the first special symbol. Then, the decorative symbols corresponding to the first special figure are variablely displayed in the decorative display area 1606 corresponding to the first special figure, and the decorative symbols 1605 on the left, middle, and right are variablely displayed. When the jackpot symbol of the decorative symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on 1606 and the jackpot symbol of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols 1605 is stopped and displayed, the jackpot game state is controlled after notifying that the jackpot has been reached. Start (Fig. 173 (B)). As shown in FIG. 173 (A), during the normal mode, the effect display device 1600 has the first special figure compatible decorative display area 1606, the second special figure compatible decorative display area 1607, and the normal figure compatible decorative display area 1608. In addition, the first special figure reservation display areas 1613a to 1613d for displaying the first reserved storage number corresponding to the first special random number stored in the first special symbol reservation storage area are provided at the lower part.

Then, it notifies that it is controlled to the chance mode (time saving state) after the big hit game state, and displays that it is right-handed in the mode information display area 1612 (FIG. 173 (C)), and the first reserved memory number is 0. When the first special symbol is exhausted, the first special symbol is variablely displayed over a long fluctuation time, and the first special symbol compatible decorative symbol is variablely displayed in the first special symbol compatible decorative display area 1606 in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol. (Fig. 173 (D)). As described above, the timer display area 1610 indicating the remaining time of the chance mode is displayed during the chance mode, and is displayed in the timer display area 1610 according to the elapsed time from the start of the variable display of the first special symbol. The remaining time to be updated is displayed.

In addition, when the number of reserved symbols of the normal symbol is no longer 0, the decorative symbol corresponding to the normal symbol is variablely displayed in the decorative display area 1608 corresponding to the normal symbol in synchronization with the variable display of the normal symbol, and the left, middle, and right decorations are displayed. The symbol 1605 is displayed in a variable manner, and after a lapse of a predetermined period, the decorative symbol corresponding to the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in the decorative display area 1608 corresponding to the normal symbol with a symbol corresponding to the result of the lottery process for the normal symbol, and the left, middle, and right decorations are displayed. The symbol 1605 is stopped and displayed with a symbol corresponding to the result of the lottery process for the normal symbol (FIG. 173 (E)). At this time, if the result of the lottery process (ordinary judgment) for the ordinary symbol is a normal hit, the winning symbol of the decorative symbol corresponding to the ordinary figure is stopped and displayed in the decoration display area 1608 corresponding to the ordinary figure, and the left, middle, and right decorations are displayed. The hit symbol of the symbol 1605 is stopped and displayed (FIG. 173 (F)).

When the hit symbol of the normal symbol is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display 1402, the main control board 1310 advances the second start port door 2022 of the second start port 2004 so as to be in a protruding state for a predetermined period. The state of the starting port 2004 is controlled to an open state in which the game ball can be accepted. Then, when the game ball is accepted by the second starting port 2004 and the second special symbol is held while the second starting port 2004 is open, the effect display device 1600 displays "Big hit get" and the second. The star mark of the area corresponding to the occurrence of the hold (the second special figure hold display area 1610a in the example of FIG. 173 (G)) among the special figure hold display areas 1610a to 1610d is displayed in a special mode (for example, red). This notifies that the player has acquired the right to become a big hit (winning right) (Fig. 173 (G)).

After that, if there is the remaining time in the chance mode and the number of reserved storages of the normal symbol, the decoration symbol corresponding to the normal symbol is displayed in a variable manner in the decorative display area 1608 corresponding to the normal symbol again in synchronization with the variable display of the normal symbol, and left / middle. -The decorative pattern 1605 on the right is displayed in a variable manner (FIG. 173 (H)).

Further, when the remaining time of the chance mode becomes 10 seconds without the game ball being accepted by the second starting port 2004 during the chance mode (FIGS. 174 (A) to 174 (C)), in this example, the last battle effect is produced. It is designed to be executed and suggest the result of the variable display of the first special symbol. That is, as shown in FIG. 174 (C), the character A and the enemy character B on the player side are displayed instead of the decorative symbols on the left, middle, and right, and the duel scene between the character A and the enemy character B is displayed. (Fig. 174 (D)).

Then, if the result of the hit determination on the first special symbol side is lost, after displaying the mode in which the character A is defeated by the enemy character (FIG. 174 (E)), if the second reserved memory number is 0, there is a chance. After notifying the player that the mode is terminated and the chance mode is terminated (FIG. 174 (F)), the control of the normal mode is started (FIG. 174 (G)).

In this way, when the remaining time in the chance mode is short, by executing a production display different from the normal display in the chance mode, not only the player's impatience and anxiety are aroused, but also the expectation for the big hit is expected. By embracing it, it is designed to improve the entertainment of the game.

Even if the result of the hit judgment on the first special symbol side is lost, if the game ball is accepted by the second starting port 2004 during the execution of the last battle effect and the second special symbol is put on hold () 175 (C) to 175 (D)), after displaying the mode in which the character A is defeated by the enemy character (FIG. 175 (D)), the mode in which the character A is revived is displayed (FIG. 175 (D)). 175 (E)).

Then, the chance mode is terminated and the transition to the winning right exercise time is controlled, and the second special symbol-compatible decorative symbol is variablely displayed in the second special symbol-compatible decorative display area 1607 in synchronization with the variable display of the second special symbol. At the same time, the left, middle, and right decorative symbols 1605 are displayed in a variable manner, and if the result of the hit determination on the second special symbol side is a small hit, the second special symbol is supported in the second special symbol corresponding decorative display area 1607 after a predetermined period has elapsed. The small hit symbol of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, and the small hit symbol of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols 1605 is stopped and displayed (FIG. 175 (F)).

When the small hit symbol of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display on the main control board 1310, the second special winning opening 2005b is set to a state in which the game ball can be accepted for a predetermined period. Peripheral control MPU1511a notifies the effect display device 1600 to continue right-handed to aim at the V winning opening 2411 by displaying "Aim for V!" (FIG. 175 (G)). Then, a notification that the game ball has been accepted by the second big winning opening 2005b and one of the game balls has been distributed to the V winning opening 2411 has become a "big hit", and the big hit game state. (Fig. 175 (H)).

In this way, by changing the result of the last battle effect not only according to the result of the hit judgment on the first special symbol side but also according to the occurrence of the number of reserved memories on the second special symbol side, the occurrence of a big hit is strongly expected. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decline in the interest in the game.

In addition, when the result of the hit determination on the first special symbol side is a big hit, after displaying the mode in which the character A wins the enemy character as a result of the last battle effect (FIG. 176 (E)), the big hit game state. (Fig. 176 (F)).

After the end of the jackpot game state, if there is no second reserved memory number, the transition to the chance mode is controlled again (FIG. 176 (C)), and if there is a second reserved memory number, the transition is controlled to the winning right exercise time. Become.

If the result of the hit judgment on the first special symbol side is a big hit, when the chance mode is finished, the big hit is based on the fact that the first special symbol is stopped and displayed as a big hit symbol regardless of the presence or absence of the second reserved memory number. The game state is controlled. Then, if there is a second reserved memory number after the end of the jackpot game state, the time shifts to the winning right exercise time and the variable display of the second special symbol is started. That is, the profit of the jackpot game state on the first special symbol side is given prior to the exercise of the right to become the jackpot accumulated in the chance mode.

In addition, the last battle production basically changes the result according to the result of the winning lottery on the first special symbol side, but at least the chance mode ends without notifying the player to that effect. Until then, it is kept secret from the player that it became a big hit of the first special symbol. As a result, the player who recognizes that he / she will exercise the right to become a jackpot accumulated during the chance mode can be given an unexpected profit of the jackpot of the first special symbol, and the game is added by adding the profit. It can improve the interest. Further, as described above, if the second reserved memory number is not 0, the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner with priority over the first special symbol. Therefore, after the jackpot game state based on the fact that the first special symbol is stopped and displayed as the jackpot symbol is completed, the winning right exercise time shifts to the state of exercising the jackpot right accumulated in the chance mode. As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the interest in the game is lowered due to the fact that the opportunity to exercise the right to become a big hit accumulated in the chance mode does not come easily.

Further, as described above, by hitting right at the winning right exercise time, the game ball can be won in the second major winning opening 2005b, and the game ball winning in the second major winning opening 2005b becomes the V winning opening 2411. Even if a big hit game state occurs after being sorted, the game ball can be won in the first big winning opening 2005 by continuing right-handed hitting. That is, after the transition control to the chance mode is performed, right-handed striking is continuously performed until the transition control to the normal mode is performed again.

Further, in this example, even if the game ball is hit to the right, the game ball can be accepted to the first right start port 2002b. The game ball is accepted to the first right start port 2002b within the period until the exercise time ends, and the first hold memory number is set at the end of the chance mode or the end of the winning right exercise time. It has become. That is, during the period of shifting to the chance mode and aiming to enter the second starting port 2004, or by shifting to the winning right exercise time, the jackpot game state is executed for the number of the second reserved memory to obtain the prize ball. During the period, the conditions relating to the next game (acceptance of the game ball to the first starting port 2002) can be generated.

If the game ball is accepted to the first start port 2002 (first left start port 2002a, first right start port 2002b) during the chance mode or the winning right exercise time, a notification to that effect is given. It may be good (not limited to the display notifying that the game ball has been accepted at the first starting port 2002 (first left starting port 2002a, first right starting port 2002b), but also notifying by voice or a lamp or the like. In addition, the effect display device 1600 is provided with an area for displaying the first reserved storage number even during the chance mode or the winning right exercise time, and the first start port 2002 (first left start port 2002a, first right start) is provided. The display of the number of reserved storages may be updated when the game ball is accepted in the mouth 2002b).) As a result, the game ball is accepted into the first starting port 2002 (first left starting port 2002a, first right starting port 2002b), especially during the right exercise time, and the game shifts to the chance mode again to make a long change of the first special symbol. It is possible to recognize that the variable display with time is started, and it is possible to raise the interest toward the acquisition of the right to become a big hit (winning right).

In addition, as described above, during the chance mode, a game of accumulating the hold (second special random number) of the second special symbol is performed. Since the upper limit of the number of second hold storages is 4, it is possible to store up to 4 hold (second special random numbers) of the second special symbol during the chance mode. In this example, when the second reserved storage number reaches the upper limit of four during the chance mode, the peripheral control MPU 1511a replaces the display of the decorative symbol or the timer display area 1611 in the effect display device 1600 with a special effect (special movie). Etc.) may be executed. That is, when the number of second reserved memories reaches the upper limit of 4, the player stops driving the game ball until the winning right exercise time is reached, so that a special effect (such as playing a special movie) is executed. It is possible to eliminate the lack of possession.

Since the number of reserved memory of the second special symbol increases based on the acceptance of the game ball into the second starting port 2004 provided on the right side of the center accessory 2500, right-handed strike is performed during the normal chance mode. A prompting display (mode information display area 1612) is performed. On the other hand, when the peripheral control MPU1511a executes a special effect (such as playing a special movie) on the effect display device 1600 based on the fact that the second reserved memory number reaches the upper limit of 4 during the chance mode, it is right. The display prompting the player (mode information display area 1612) disappears. As a result, it is possible to avoid unnecessary driving so as not to be disadvantageous to the player, and it is possible to prevent the gaming interest from being deteriorated by being prompted for unnecessary driving. Further, in this case, the display prompting right-handed stroke (mode information display area 1612) is not limited to disappearing, and the display may be suppressed (modest display) compared to the normal display state in the chance mode. For example, reduce the display prompting right-handed (mode information display area 1612), make the characters lighter (semi-transparent), change the display position to an inconspicuous position, etc. You may do it.

Further, in the above example, the long fluctuation time of the first special symbol is set to 120 seconds, and the chance mode is controlled only during this period. However, a plurality of types are provided as the long fluctuation time of the first special symbol in the chance mode. It is also possible to control a plurality of types of chance modes having different degrees of advantage depending on the period. For example, two types of long fluctuation time of the first special symbol are provided, 68 seconds and 128 seconds, and when the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is started in the time saving state, one of them is determined based on the fluctuation random number. May be good.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when the result of the hit determination on the first special symbol side is a big hit (10R big hit A in this example) which is controlled to a time saving state after the big hit game state, after the big hit game state. The first special symbol is fluctuated over a long fluctuation time in a time-saving state, and the hold (second special random number) of the second special symbol is accumulated within this long fluctuation time, and the number of jackpots corresponding to the second hold memory number is accumulated. Is sequentially generated after the lapse of a long fluctuation time, and then the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner over a long fluctuation time, so that the game can be repeatedly executed. As described above, the state in which the second special symbol is held (the state in which the game ball is accepted by the second starting port 2004) is a state in which the right to become a big hit (winning right) is acquired. , Can be rephrased as "special information that leads to a hit (big hit)".

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, it is possible to realize a novel playability having a cycle of repeating a state of accumulating special information connected to a hit and a state of sequentially releasing a hit corresponding to the number of accumulated special information. As a result, not only is the game simply waiting for a new hit after the end of the big hit game state, but also "how much special information related to the hit is stored (stored) within the time limit (long fluctuation time)". In addition to paying attention to "Is it possible to do it?", It is possible to give both the tension of accumulating special information within the time limit and the satisfaction of gaining profits (big hit game state) collectively after the time limit. It is possible to prevent the deterioration of the game interest after the big hit game state.

In addition, at least the following conditions are required for the configuration in which the hold (second special random number) of the second special symbol is stored during the variable display of the first special symbol.
"Fluctuating time of the first special symbol in the time saving state> (Fluctuating time of the normal symbol in the time saving state + Maximum time when the second starting door 2022 is in the protruding state when hitting the normal symbol in the time saving state) x N ( N ≧ 2) ”that is, it is possible to execute the fluctuation display of the normal symbol multiple times within the fluctuation period of the first special symbol, and it is possible to accept the game ball to the second starting port 2004 when it hits the normal symbol. The state needs to be controllable multiple times.

Although the present invention has been described above with reference to preferred embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and as shown below, various improvements are made without departing from the gist of the present invention. And the design can be changed.

That is, in the embodiment, the one applied to the pachinko machine 1 as a gaming machine is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and is applied to a pachislot machine or a gaming machine obtained by fusing a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine. In this case as well, the same effect can be obtained.

1 Pachinko machine 2 Outer frame 3 Door frame 4 Main body frame 5 Game board 5a Game area 6 CR unit 10 Upper frame member 11 Engagement notch 12 Mounting step 20 Lower frame member 21 Engagement notch 22 Front end notch 30 Left frame Member 31 Recessed 32 Protruding part 40 Right frame member 41 Recessed 42 Protruding part 50 Curtain plate member 51 Rear extension part 52 Left discharge hole 53 Right discharge hole 54 Standing wall part 55 Return part 56 Left mounting part 57 Right mounting part 60 Outer frame side Upper hinge member 61 Upper fixing part 62 Front extension part 63 Bearing groove 64 Horizontal fixing part 65 Hanging part 66 Lock member 66a Lock body 66b Operation part 66c Elastic part 66d Mounting hole 67 Mounting screw 70 Outer frame side lower hinge member 71 Horizontal part 72 Rising part 73 Hinge pin under the outer frame 74 Discharge hole
80 Curtain plate reinforcing member 81 Left sliding member 82 Right sliding member 85 Connecting member 85A Upper left connecting member 85B Upper right connecting member 85C Lower left connecting member 85D Lower right connecting member 86 Horizontal fixing part 87 Upper horizontal fixing part 88 Lower horizontal fixing part 89 Bending part 90 Upper hook member 91 Lower hook member 95 Guide blade 96 Guide blade 100 Door frame base unit 110 Door frame base 111 Through port 112 Handle mounting seat surface 113 Cylinder mounting part 114 Cylinder insertion hole 115 Ball feed opening 116 Lower plate passage port 117 Passage port for upper plate 118 Glass unit mounting part 119 Speaker insertion port 130 Reinforcement unit 131 Upper reinforcement sheet metal 132 Middle reinforcement sheet metal 132a Notch 133 Left reinforcement sheet metal 134 Right reinforcement sheet metal 135 Locking part 140 Door frame side upper hinge member 141 Door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141a Projecting piece 142 Door frame upper hinge pin 143 Door member 144 Lock spring 150 Door frame side lower hinge member 151 Door frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151a Extension piece 152 Door frame lower hinge pin 160 Door frame left side decorative board 161 Decorative board 161a LED on the left side of the door frame
162 Door frame left side lower decorative board 162a LED
170 Glass unit mounting member 171 Base 172 Protruding part 180 Handle mounting member 181 Cylinder part 182 Flange part 183 Protrusion 184 Reinforcing rib 190 Glass unit 191 Glass frame 191a Mounting piece 191b Locking piece 192 Glass plate 194 Frame Decorative drive amplifier board 194a + 9V Creation circuit 200 Security cover 201 Main body 202 Rear protrusion 203 Locking piece 210 Opening / closing cylinder unit 211 Cylinder lock 211a Key hole 212 Rotation transmission member 212a Notch 213 Cylinder mounting plate metal 213a Front plate 213b Side plate 213c Mounting plate 250 Ball feed Unit 251 Front cover 251a Advance entrance 251b Ball outlet 251c Slit 252 Rear cover 252a Ball hitting supply port 252b Mounting recess 253 Ball extraction member 253a Partition part 253b Rotating rod part 253c Acting rod 253d Ball part 253d Holding part 254c Rod part 255 Ball feed solenoid 256 Ball feed operating rod 257 Ball feed crank 257a Engagement part 257b Shaft part 257c Transmission part 260 Fraud prevention member 261 Upper piece part 262 Lower piece part 263 Inclined part 270 Fal cover unit 271 272 Lid member 273 Penetration ball passage 274 Full tank ball socket 275 Foul ball socket 276 Ball discharge port 277 Storage passage 278 Movable piece 279 Full tank detection sensor 280 Spring 281 Door open / close contact part 300 Handle unit 301 Handle base 301a Base 301b Front end 301c Groove 302 Handle 302a First protrusion 302b Second protrusion 302c Third protrusion 302d Fourth protrusion 302e Slit 302f Locking protrusion 303 Handle cover 303a Mounting boss 304 Inner base 305 Shaft member 305a Drive gear 306 Transmission gear 307 Handle Rotation detection sensor 307a Detection shaft 308 Handle return spring 309 Auxiliary spring 310 Handle touch sensor 311 Single-shot button 312 Single-shot button operation sensor 315 Handle relay terminal board 320 Dish unit 321 Upper plate 321a Induction passage 321b Earth fitting 322 Lower plate 322a Lower plate Ball removal hole (lower plate outlet)
322b Relief part 322c Ball guidance part (guidance means)
322d buffer (induction means)
322e return part (guidance means)
323 Dish unit base 323a Upper dish ball supply port 323b Speaker slit 323c Lower dish ball supply port (lower dish supply port)
323d Upper plate ball feed port 323e Ball feed taxiway 323f Ball removal taxiway 323g Opening 323h Handle insertion port 323i Cylinder insertion port 324 Upper plate body 325 Lower plate body 325A Main body part 325B First extension part 325C Second extension part 325a Bottom Wall part 325b Main body standing wall part 326 Dish unit cover (covering part)
326a Production operation unit mounting part (covering part)
326b Dish front upper decoration part 326c Dish front lower decoration part 326d Lower plate opening 326e Lower speaker port 326f Handle insertion port 326g Cylinder insertion port 326h Top plate part 326i Bottom plate part 326j Mounting space 327 Upper plate ball removal button (discharge operation part)
327a Operation transmission unit 327b Ball removal slider 327c Upper plate ball removal spring 328 Ball rental button 329 Return button 330 Ball rental display unit 331 Production selection left button 332 Production selection right button 333 Lower plate ball removal button 334 Lid member 335 Lower plate ball Extraction base 335a Discharge port 340 Lower plate cover 340a Cover standing wall part 340b Ceiling part 365 Frequency display board 365a Ball rental switch 365b Return switch 365d CR unit lamp A1 Lower plate 1st area A2 Lower plate 2nd area PL dividing line 400 (Cover)
400A Second production operation unit (covered part)
410 Operation button (operation receiving part)
411 Button lens 411a 1st button decoration 411b 2nd button decoration 412 Button frame 412a Frame opening 413 Button base 413a Main body 413b Flange 413c Guide boss 413d Detection piece 413e Base opening 415 Frame unit 416 Frame body 416a Center Opening 416b Outer peripheral opening 416c Notch 416d Inner cylinder 416e Mounting 417 Frame side lens 418 Frame top lens 420 Board unit 421 Board base 422 Operation button Left outer decoration board 422a First LED
422b 2nd LED
423 Operation button Right outer decorative board 423a 1st LED
423b 2nd LED
424 Vibration motor 424a Weight 425 Motor cover 430 Base unit 431 Unit base 431a Through hole 431b Holding hole 431c Light-shielding wall part 432 Operation button Interior decoration member 432a Peripheral wall part 432b Front plate part 432c Opening part 432d Flange part 432e Inner decoration part 423g Second button Inner decoration part 433 Operation button Left inner decoration board 434 Operation button Right inner decoration board 435 Operation button Upper inner decoration board 436 Operation button Lower inner decoration board 437 Frame top lens decoration board 438 Operation button Spring 439 Sensor holder 440 Push detection sensor 441 Production operation unit Relay board 442 Relay board cover 442a Leg 450 Second base unit 451 Unit base 451a Main body 451b Cover 451c Through hole 451d Holding hole 451e Upper bearing 451f Lower bearing 451g Rotation control 452 Button shaft 454 Pressure detection sensor 460 Door frame side effect display device (second effect display means)
460A Door frame side second effect display device 461 Liquid crystal display device 462 Mounting bracket 470 Screen unit 471 Main screen 472 Sub screen 472a Peripheral decoration part 472b Screen part 473 Upper shaft member 474 Lower shaft member 475 Actuating gear member 475a Gear tooth 475b Stopper 475c Detection piece 476 Subscreen decoration member 477 Subscreen decoration board 477a LED
478 Peripheral decorative member 480 Upper bearing member 481 Bearing member 481a Recess 482 Frame top lens decorative substrate 485 Lower bearing member 490 Rotation drive unit 491 Unit case 492 Switching drive motor 495 Second transmission gear 500 Projector 501 Projector body 502 Lens part 505 Projector Mounting member 505a Slit 506 Top cover 507 Rotation detection sensor 510 Cushioning unit 511 Cushioning member 512 Cushioning base 512a Main body 512b Leg piece 515 Second production operation unit Relay board 516 Relay board cover 530 Door frame Left side unit 531 Left unit base 531a Opening 532 Left unit diffuser lens member 532A Upper diffuser lens member 532B Lower diffuser lens member 532a Circular lens part 532b Square lens part 532c Central diffuser lens part 532d Front diffuser lens part 532e Input lens part 532f Front reflection part 534 Left unit upper decoration base 535 Left unit lower decorative base 536 Left unit decorative cover 537 Decorative member 550 Door frame right side unit 551 Right unit base 552 Door frame right side decorative board 552A Door frame right side upper decorative board 552B Door frame right side lower decorative board 552a Left LED
552b right LED
552c medium LED
553 Right unit left diffuser lens member 553a Main body 553b Rear wall 553c Notch 553d Containment recess 553e Input lens 553f Side reflector 554 Right unit Left decorative member 555 Right unit Left cover 556 Right unit Right diffuser lens member 556a Main body 556b Rear wall part 556c Notch part 556d Storage recess 556e Input lens part 556f Side reflection part 557 Right unit Right decorative member 558 Right unit Right cover 559 Right unit Left shading member 559a Main body part 559b Rear wall part 559c Notch part 559d Reinforcement part 560 Right unit Right shading member 561 Right unit decorative lens member 561a Circular decorative part 561b Multi-faceted decorative part 562 Right unit decorative base 563 Right unit cover 564 Decorative member 570 Door frame top unit 571 Center base 57 2 Side base 573 Upper speaker 574 Unit body 574a Opening 574b Slit 574c Upper opening 574d Lower opening 574e Top left decoration 574f Top right decoration 575 Speaker cover 576 Top middle decoration member 577 Door frame Top middle decoration board 578 Light guide member 578a Straight part 578b Arc part 578c Diffuse reflection part 578d Input part 579 Top left decorative lens member 579a Decorative lens part 580 Top right decorative lens member 580a Decorative lens part 581 Top middle left decorative member 582 Top middle right decorative member 583 Door frame Top left decorative board 583a LED
584 Door frame top right decorative board 584a LED
585 Board base 586 Door frame top Middle left Decorative board 586a LED
587 Door frame top Middle right Decorative board 587a LED
588 Light-shielding member 589 Door frame Top unit Relay board 590 Relay board cover 591 Top cover 592 Bottom cover CL Center axis (of operation button 410)
600 Body frame base 601 Game board insertion port 602 Game board mounting part 603 Game board regulation part 604 Launcher mounting part 605 Cylinder insertion port 606 Connection opening 607 Speaker opening 608 Rear extension part 609 Upper hinge mounting part 610 Lower hinge mounting part 615 Opening cover 616 Game board lock member 618 Door frame opening switch 619 Main body frame opening switch 620 Main body frame side Upper hinge member 621 Upper hinge Main body 622 Main body frame upper hinge pin 623 Door frame upper hinge hole 640 Main body frame side lower Hinge member 641 Lower hinge 1st body 643 Lower hinge 2nd body 644 Door frame hinge hole 645 Restriction piece 660 Reinforcement frame 661 Left positioning member 680 Ball launcher 681 Launch base 682 Launch solenoid 683 Launch mall 684 Launch rail 700 Locking unit 701 Unit base 702 Door frame hinge 703 Outer frame hinge 710 Key cylinder 784 External terminal board 800 Payout unit 801 Payout unit base 802 Ball tank 803 Tank rail 804 Ball leveling member 820 Ball guidance unit 821 Front case 821a Ball guidance inlet 821b Guidance outlet 821c Guidance passage 821d Introductory part 821e Detection part 821f Hinge part 821g Notch part 822 Rear case 822a Ball guidance entrance 822b Ball guidance outlet 822c Guidance passage 822d Introduction part 822e Detection part 822f Hinge part 8 Movable piece member front 825a Movable piece 825b Shaft hole 825c Extension part 825d Connection part 825e Weight attachment part 825f Detection piece 825g Stopper piece 826 Movable piece member rear 826a Movable piece 826b Shaft hole 826c Extension part 826d Detection piece 826g Stopper piece 827 Ball out detection sensor 830 Discharge device 831 Front box 831a Discharge entrance 831b Discharge outlet 831c Ball extraction exit 831d Discharge passage 831e Ball extraction passage 831f Guidance shelf 831g Lever mounting part 832 Ball removal outlet 832d Discharge passage 832e Ball removal passage 832f Guidance shelf 832g Lever mounting part 833 Front Cover 834 Discharge motor 835 Drive gear 836 Intermediate gear 837 Driven gear 837a Gear part 837b Detection piece 837c Connecting part 838 Shaft member 839 Dispensing blade 839a Base cylinder part 839b Front blade 839c Rear blade 839d Sensor 841 Partition plate 842 Payout detection sensor 843 Ball pulling movable piece 843a Main body part 843b Shaft cylinder part 843c Protruding part 843d Weight mounting part 844 Ball pulling lever 850 Upper full tank ball path unit 850a Upper payout ball receiving port 850b Upper ball pulling entrance 850c Upper ball storage passage 850d Normal discharge port 850e Full tank discharge port 850f Section section 850g Upper ball removal passage 850h Upper ball removal outlet 851 Upper full tank base 852 Upper full tank cover 853 Discharge device pressing member 854 Back cover mounting part 860 Lower full tank ball Route unit 860b Error LED display 869 Game ball rental device Connection terminal board 861 Normal guide path 862 Full tank guide path 863 Guide path opening / closing door 863a Base 863b First door plate 863c Second door plate 863d Extension 863e Operation Protrusion 864 Closing spring 865 Lower ball pulling guide path 866 Upper case 867 Lower case 867a Boss part 868 Frame peripheral relay terminal board 869 Game ball rental device connection terminal board 870 Guide path opening / closing door 870a Base 870b First door plate 870c Second door plate 870d Recess 870e Operating protrusion 880 Main door relay terminal board 882 Peripheral door relay terminal board 900 Board unit 910 Board unit base 911 Door frame relay board 920 Speaker unit 921 Speaker 930 Power supply board box 934 Power switch 931 Power supply Board 935 Power control board 935a Synchronous rectifier circuit 935b Power factor improvement circuit 935c Smoothing circuit 935d Power supply creation circuit 940 Interface control board box 950 Payout control board box 951 Payout control board 951a Payout control filter circuit 952 Payout control unit 952a Payout control MPU
952b Payout control input circuit 952c Payout control output circuit 952d Payout motor drive circuit 952da Voltage switching circuit 952e CR unit input / output circuit 953 Launch control unit 953a Launch control circuit 954 Operation switch 980 Back cover 1000 Front component 1001 Outer rail 1002 Inner rail 1003 Out guidance part 1004 Lower right rail 1005 Right rail 1006 Impulsion part 1007 Backflow prevention member 1008 Security recess 1009 Positioning protrusion 1010 Mounting boss 1011 Notch 1100 Game panel 1110 Panel plate 1111 Out recess 1112 Opening 1113 Fitting hole 1114 Engagement step 1116 Inner rail fixing hole 1120 Panel holder 1121 Holding step 1122 Through port 1123 Protruding pin 1124 Engagement claw 1125 Engagement piece 1126 Out port 1127 Notch 1128 Mounting hole 1129 Insertion port 1150 Game panel (second embodiment) )
1151 Out port 1152 Notch 1153 Insertion hole 1154 Inner rail fixing hole 1155 Mounting hole 1200 Board holder 1201 Discharge part 1300 Main control unit 1310 Main control board 1310a Main control MPU
1310aa Main control CPU core 1310ae Main circumference serial transmission port 1310aea Transmission shift register 1310aeb Transmission buffer register 1310aec Serial management unit 1310af WDT
1310an Hard random number circuit 1310b Main control input circuit 1310c Main control output circuit 1310ca Main control output circuit with reset function 1310cc Main control output circuit without reset function 1310d Main control solenoid drive circuit 1310e Power failure monitoring circuit 1300g + 5V creation circuit 1300h Main control filter circuit 1320 Main control board box 1400 Function display unit 1401 Status display 1402 Normal symbol display 1403 First special symbol display 1404 First special hold number display 1405 Second special symbol display 1406 Second special hold number display 1407 Round display Instrument 1500 Peripheral control unit 1510 Peripheral control board 1510b + 3.3V creation circuit 1511 Peripheral control unit 1511a Peripheral control MPU
1511aa Peripheral control CPU core 1511ab Peripheral control built-in RAM
1511ac Peripheral control DMA controller 1511ad Peripheral control bus controller 1511ae Peripheral control Various serial I / O ports 1511af Peripheral control built-in WDT
1511ag Peripheral control Various parallel I / O ports 1511ak Peripheral control A / D converter 1511ai Peripheral bus 1511ah Internal bus 1511b Peripheral control ROM
1511c Peripheral control RAM
1511d Peripheral control SRAM
1511e Peripheral control external WDT
1511h External bus 1512 Liquid crystal display control unit 1512a VDP with built-in sound source
1512b LCD and sound control ROM
1512c Audio data transmission IC
1512d Transmitter IC for door frame side production
1512e Differential circuit 1512f Forced switching circuit 1520 Peripheral control board box 1600 Game board side effect display device 1600a Liquid crystal module 1600b Backlight power supply 1601 Left fixed piece 1602 Right fixed piece 2000 Table unit 2001 General winning port 2002a First left starting port 2002b 1st right start port 2003 Gate part 2004 2nd start port 2005 1st big prize opening 2005b 2nd big prize opening 2011 Distribution member 2012 1st passage 2013 2nd passage entrance 2014 2nd passage 2015 2nd passage exit 2016 entrance 2017 Kroon 2021 Constant drive door 2022 Second start port door 2107 Constant drive solenoid 2108 Second start port solenoid 2109 1st attacker solenoid 2110 2nd attacker solenoid 2200 Below side unit 2300 Above side unit 2400 V winning device 2410 Rotating body 2411 V winning Port 2412 Outlet 2500 Center accessory 2520 Warp inlet 2522 Warp outlet 2530 Stage 3000 Back unit 3010 Back box 3010a Opening 3010b Liquid crystal mounting part 3010c Fixed groove 3010d Notch part 3010e Fixed piece part 3042 3100 Back bottom movable production unit 3200 Back top left movable production unit 3300 Back top left movable production unit 3400 Back top middle movable production unit 3500 Back bottom front movable production unit 4002a First left start port sensor 4002b First right start port sensor 4003 Gate Sensor 4004 Second start port sensor 4005a First count sensor 4005b Second count sensor 4007a First V winning port sensor 4007b Second V winning port sensor 4008 Outlet sensor 4020 General winning port sensor 4024 Magnetic detection sensor 4161 Panel relay board 4162 sensor Signal input unit 4163 Voltage output unit 4164 Detection circuit unit 4165 RTC control unit 4165a RTC
4165b Battery 4165aa Built-in RAM
4166 Voltage raising part 4170 Lamp drive board 4180 Motor drive board 4450 Production display drive board 4450v Liquid crystal module circuit 4450x Door frame side production module Power supply circuit 4450y Door frame side production module Backlight power supply circuit MGS Magnetic sensor STR transistor (built-in type)
ZD0 Zener diode CON1 connector RR contact resistor CNO2 connector

Claims (1)

A gaming machine with a front door
The upper plate provided on the front door and
A bulging portion that has a decoration that decorates the front of the upper plate and is configured to bulge in front of the front door.
A predetermined effect device arranged in the arrangement area formed in the bulging portion, and provided.
The arrangement region includes a region in which at least a part of the front surface side of the bulge portion is opened.
The bottom surface of the upper plate protrudes inward of the arrangement area.
The upper plate constitutes a part of a member forming the arrangement region regardless of the open / closed state of the front door.
A gaming machine characterized in that at least a part of the upper plate is visible from the outside through the arrangement area in a state where the effect device is removed from the arrangement area.

Images